Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 664

FANUC Series 0+-MODEL D FANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)


(Volume 2 of 2)

B-64303EN-1/02

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual are controlled based on Japans Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the government of Japan. Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice. The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to a failure of the product, install a safety device. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible.

B-64303EN-1/02

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume 1 of 2 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE .................................s-1 PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1 1 AXIS CONTROL...................................................................................... 1
1.1 1.2 CONTROLLED AXIS ..................................................................................... 1 SETTING EACH AXIS ................................................................................... 2
1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 1.2.7 1.2.8 1.2.9 Name of Axes ...........................................................................................................2 Increment System .....................................................................................................4 Specifying the Rotation Axis ...................................................................................7 Controlled Axes Detach .........................................................................................10 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis............................................................13 Mirror Image ..........................................................................................................14 Follow-up ...............................................................................................................16 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed ........................................................................17 Position Switch.......................................................................................................19 Stored Pitch Error Compensation...........................................................................22 Backlash Compensation .........................................................................................28 Smooth Backlash ....................................................................................................30 Simple Straightness Compensation (M Series) ......................................................33 Gradient Compensation ..........................................................................................37 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation ...............................................................40 Differences between Pitch Error Compensation, Simple Straightness Compensation, and Gradient Compensation (Reference) ......................................47 Parameters Related to Servo...................................................................................48 Absolute Position Detection ...................................................................................54 FSSB Setting ..........................................................................................................60
1.4.3.1 1.4.3.2 Series 0i-D-dedicated setting ............................................................................. 60 Series 0i-C-compatible setting........................................................................... 76

1.3

ERROR COMPENSATION.......................................................................... 22
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.3.7

1.4

SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED AXES.......................... 48


1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4

Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting................................................................89 Machine Coordinate System...................................................................................92 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair ..94
1.5.2.1 1.5.2.2 1.5.2.3 1.5.2.4 1.5.2.5 1.5.2.6 Workpiece coordinate system............................................................................ 94 Workpiece coordinate system preset ................................................................. 97 Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54) (M series) ................... 98 Automatic coordinate system setting ................................................................. 99 Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series).................................................. 100 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals.................................... 104

1.5

SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS ............................ 92


1.5.1 1.5.2

1.5.3 1.5.4

Local Coordinate System .....................................................................................109 Rotary Axis Roll Over..........................................................................................111 Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control..............................................113 Synchronization Establishment ............................................................................116 Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching ....................................................118 Synchronization Error Check ...............................................................................118
c-1

1.6

AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 113


1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 1.6.4

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.6.5 1.6.6 1.6.7

B-64303EN-1/02

Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronization Error Check ...........................119 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..........................................120 Automatic Slave Axis Parameter Setting .............................................................121

1.7 1.8 1.9

TANDEM CONTROL ................................................................................. 136 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ................................................ 144 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) ................................................... 156
1.9.1 Electronic Gear Box (M Series) ...........................................................................156

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ................................................. 177


2.1 2.2 2.3 EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................. 177 CNC READY SIGNALS ............................................................................. 179 OVERTRAVEL CHECK ............................................................................. 180
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 Overtravel Signals ................................................................................................180 Stored Stroke Check 1..........................................................................................182 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3......................................................................................187 Checking the Stored Stroke Limit during the Time from Poweron to the Reference Position Establishment ..................................................................194 Stroke Limit External Setting (M Series) .............................................................196 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series) ..............................................................197 Stroke Limit Check Before Move ........................................................................206

2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13

ALARM SIGNALS...................................................................................... 209 START LOCK / INTERLOCK..................................................................... 210 MODE SELECTION................................................................................... 216 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL....................................................................... 222 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL ...................................................... 223 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION ...... 225 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION ................................ 235 MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M Series) ....................... 241 MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS ................................................. 243 OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS ......................................... 246 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED............................................................ 256 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 262 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT............................................................... 271 I/O Link MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE............................................... 276 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE .................................................................. 279 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 299 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG ............................... 320 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN AND RETURN FROM THE REFERENCE POSITION .................................................................. 327 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN.................................................................................. 332 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER ..... 334 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ................................... 339 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL) ................................................................................................... 351
c-2

MANUAL OPERATION ....................................................................... 256


3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..................................... 299


4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7

B-64303EN-1/02

TABLE OF CONTENTS EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE .............................................................................................. 361
4.8.1 4.8.2 Reference Position Established by the G00 Command ........................................361 Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed....................................................365 Setting Method by Rotary Axis Type and Movable Range .................................368 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is under One Rotation ........................................................................................................369 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is over One Rotation ........................................................................................................375 In the Case of a Rotary Axis A Type ...................................................................377 Method of Using Heidenhain Rotary Scale RCN223, 723 and 220.....................378

4.8

4.9

CORRESPONDENCE OF ROTARY SCALE WITHOUT ROTARY DATA. 368


4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.4 4.9.5

AUTOMATIC OPERATION ................................................................. 381


5.1 5.2 5.3 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD..................................................................... 381 RESET AND REWIND............................................................................... 384 TESTING A PROGRAM ............................................................................ 388
5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 Machine Lock.......................................................................................................388 Dry Run ................................................................................................................389 Single Block .........................................................................................................391

5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13

MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF ................................................................. 393 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ......... 395 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP ................................. 397 PROGRAM RESTART .............................................................................. 397 RETRACE (M SERIES) ............................................................................. 403 EXACT STOP / EXACT STOP MODE / TAPPING MODE / CUTTING MODE........................................................................................................ 413 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING ....................................................... 414 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 419 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN................................................ 422 DIRECT OPERATION BY C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ............................ 425 POSITIONING ........................................................................................... 426 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) .................................... 427 LINEAR INTERPOLATION ........................................................................ 430 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................... 432 THREADING.............................................................................................. 435
6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 Threading .............................................................................................................435 Threading Cycle Retract (Canned Cycle) (T Series)............................................440 Threading Cycle Retract (Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle) (T Series)............443 Variable Lead Threading (T Series) .....................................................................447 Continuous Threading (T Series) .........................................................................447

INTERPOLATION FUNCTION ............................................................ 426


6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5

6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9

HELICAL INTERPOLATION ...................................................................... 448 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES) ............................ 449 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ............................................................. 452
6.8.1 6.9.1 6.9.2 Cylindrical Interpolation ......................................................................................452 Polygon Turning...................................................................................................455 Polygon Turning with Two Spindles....................................................................462
c-3

POLYGON TURNING (T SERIES) ............................................................ 454

TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13

B-64303EN-1/02

NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES)........................................ 480 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53) ............................................ 483 NANO SMOOTHING (M SERIES)............................................................. 484 GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT ............................................................. 491

FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL ........................................................................................... 496


7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL ............................................................................. 496
7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.1.7 Rapid Traverse Rate .............................................................................................497 Cutting Feedrate Clamp........................................................................................499 Feed Per Minute ...................................................................................................499 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution ..............................................501 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series) .......................................................................502 Inverse Time Feed (M Series) ..............................................................................505 Override................................................................................................................505
7.1.7.1 7.1.7.2 7.1.7.3 Rapid traverse override.................................................................................... 505 Feedrate override ............................................................................................. 509 Override cancel................................................................................................ 511 Inner corner automatic override (G62) ............................................................ 512 Internal circular cutting feedrate change ......................................................... 514

7.1.8 7.1.9 7.1.10 7.1.11 7.1.12

Automatic Corner Override (M Series) ................................................................511


7.1.8.1 7.1.8.2

External Deceleration ...........................................................................................516 Acceleration-Based Speed Control in Circular Interpolation...............................521 High Precision and High Speed Functions (Advanced Preview Control (T Series) / AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control II (M Series)) ...................................................522 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increment C......................................552 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ..................................................................555
7.2.1.1 7.2.1.2 Automatic acceleration/deceleration................................................................ 555 Rapid traverse block overlap ........................................................................... 559

7.2

ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL........................................ 555


7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5

Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration.......................................560 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation .....................562 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation (M Series) .............................................................................................................565 Corner Control......................................................................................................567
7.2.5.1 7.2.5.2 7.2.5.3 In-position check signal................................................................................... 567 In-position check ............................................................................................. 568 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse................................... 570

7.2.6

Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ..........................................................................572 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis..................................572 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation .........................................................................................................576

7.3

JERK CONTROL (M Series) ..................................................................... 572


7.3.1 7.3.2

2-PATH CONTROL ............................................................................. 578


8.1 2-PATH CONTROL ................................................................................... 578
8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output .......................................................583 2-path Functions ...................................................................................................583 Cautions on 2-path Control ..................................................................................585

8.2 8.3 8.4

WAITING M CODES.................................................................................. 591 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK............................................................... 593 BALANCE CUTTING ................................................................................. 602
c-4

B-64303EN-1/02

TABLE OF CONTENTS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL................... 605


8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 Synchronous Control............................................................................................607 Composite Control ...............................................................................................613 Hypothetical Cs Axis Control ..............................................................................646

8.5

8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11

SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ................................................................... 650 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM COMMAND ............................................................................ 663 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL ...................................................................... 665 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS .............................................................. 675 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION ............................................. 678 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES................... 679 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ............................. 682 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK.................................................................. 694 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK.................................... 695 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE ......................................................... 697 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) .................................. 700 DESIGNATION OF SPINDLE AXES ......................................................... 701 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT ...................................................................... 705 SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT.................................................................... 715 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................... 719 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL.................................................................... 722 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC .......................................... 749 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ............................................. 755 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES).................................... 763 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ....................................................... 764 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL......................................................................... 797
10.11.1 Cs Contour Control ..............................................................................................797 10.11.2 Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip................................................................815 10.11.3 Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment............................................818

AUXILIARY FUNCTION ...................................................................... 682


9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.11

10 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION............................................................. 700

10.12 10.13

MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL ..................................................................... 826 RIGID TAPPING ........................................................................................ 843


10.13.1 10.13.2 10.13.3 10.13.4 10.13.5 10.13.6 10.13.7 10.13.8 10.13.9 10.13.10 10.13.11 10.13.12 10.13.13 10.13.14 10.13.15 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder........................844 Rigid Tapping Specification.................................................................................848 Commands for Feed Per Minute and Feed Per Revolution ..................................849 Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ......................................................849 Override................................................................................................................851 Reference Position Return....................................................................................853 FS10/11 Format Command ..................................................................................854 Multi Spindle Control...........................................................................................856 Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path (T Series (2-ptah Control)) ...........856 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping ......................................860 Notes.....................................................................................................................866 Diagnosis Display.................................................................................................867 Command Format.................................................................................................870 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching ...............................................874 Signal....................................................................................................................875
10.13.15.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function ........................................................... 875 c-5

TABLE OF CONTENTS
10.13.15.2 10.13.15.3 10.13.15.4 10.13.15.5 10.13.16.1 10.13.16.2 10.13.16.3 10.13.16.4 10.13.16.5 10.13.16.6 10.13.16.7 10.13.16.8

B-64303EN-1/02

Signals related to S code output.................................................................... 875 Signals related to gear switching .................................................................. 876 Signals related to the addition of multi spindle control ................................ 877 Notes on interface with the PMC.................................................................. 880 When M29 is specified before G84/G74 ...................................................... 883 M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block ...................................... 887 Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters................................... 891 When M29 is specified before G84/G88 ...................................................... 895 M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block ...................................... 897 Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters................................... 899 Timing of the M code for unclamping (T series).......................................... 901 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode ............................................................ 901

10.13.16 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification ...................................................882

10.13.17 Parameter..............................................................................................................902 10.13.18 Notes.....................................................................................................................923

10.14 10.15 10.16 10.17 10.18 10.19

SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.................................................... 927 SPINDLE ORIENTATION .......................................................................... 945 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING .............................................................. 948 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (M SERIES) ................. 949 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) ................... 960 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR ........................................... 970
10.19.1 10.19.2 10.19.3 10.19.4 10.19.5 Spindle Control with Servo Motor .......................................................................972 Spindle Indexing Function ...................................................................................996 Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor .......................................................................1002 Feed per Revolution ...........................................................................................1007 Spindle Output Control with PMC.....................................................................1008

Volume 2 of 2 11 TOOL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................... 1009


11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF T SERIES.......................................................... 1009
11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 11.1.4 Tool Offset .........................................................................................................1010 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset.....................................................1010 Offset ..................................................................................................................1011 Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T Function)..................1017 Tool Compensation Memory..............................................................................1022 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series) ............................................................................................................1027 Tool Length Compensation ................................................................................1035 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types.............................................................1038

11.2 11.3

TOOL FUNCTIONS OF M SERIES ......................................................... 1021


11.2.1 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3

TOOL COMPENSATION......................................................................... 1027

11.4 12.1 12.2 12.3

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT.................................................................... 1042 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING ........................................................ 1059 G CODE SYSTEM................................................................................... 1061
12.2.1 12.2.2 G Code List in the Lathe System........................................................................1061 G Code List in the Machining Center System....................................................1063

12 PROGRAM COMMAND .................................................................... 1059

PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ............................................................... 1067


c-6

B-64303EN-1/02

TABLE OF CONTENTS PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS............................................................................................ 1069 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ................................................................ 1070 CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................... 1075
12.6.1 12.6.2 Custom Macro ....................................................................................................1075 Interruption Type Custom Macro.......................................................................1093

12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 12.12 12.13 12.14 12.15 12.16 12.17 12.18 12.19 13.1

CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING........................................................... 1096 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) ................................................................................. 1111 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M SERIES) ............ 1120 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)................... 1121 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES) .......................... 1126 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)................................................... 1128 SCALING (M SERIES) ............................................................................ 1138 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION...................................................... 1145 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER ............................................. 1146 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 1147 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)........................ 1148 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) ......... 1150 PATTERN DATA INPUT.......................................................................... 1152 DISPLAY/SET.......................................................................................... 1166
13.1.1 13.1.2 13.1.3 13.1.4 13.1.5 13.1.6 13.1.7 13.1.8 13.1.9 13.1.10 13.1.11 13.1.12 13.1.13 Run Hour and Parts Count Display ....................................................................1166 Software Operator's Panel ..................................................................................1170 8-Level Data Protection Function ......................................................................1178 Touch Panel Control...........................................................................................1183 External Touch Panel Interface ..........................................................................1188 Parameter Check Sum Function .........................................................................1191 Touch Panel Check Signal .................................................................................1201 CNC Screen Dual Display..................................................................................1203 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor............................1205 Screen Switching by Mode.................................................................................1208 Screen Switching at Path Switching...................................................................1211 Screen erasure function and automatic screen erasure function .........................1212 Screen Hard Copy Function ...............................................................................1214 Memory Protection Keys....................................................................................1217 Memory Protection Signal For CNC Parameter.................................................1218 MDI Key Setting ................................................................................................1219 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ...........................................................1220 Two Path Display ...............................................................................................1222 Simultaneous Two Path Program Editing ..........................................................1224 Overview ............................................................................................................1228 Explanation.........................................................................................................1228 Parameter............................................................................................................1233 Signal..................................................................................................................1234 Limitation ...........................................................................................................1234
c-7

13 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT .......................................................................... 1166

13.2

EDIT ........................................................................................................ 1217


13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.2.4

13.3 13.4

TWO PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ............................................................ 1222


13.3.1 13.3.2 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 13.4.4 13.4.5

MACHINE OPERATION MENU............................................................... 1228

TABLE OF CONTENTS 13.5


13.5.1 13.5.2

B-64303EN-1/02

MACHINE OPERATION MENU TOOL.................................................... 1235


Overview ............................................................................................................1235 Explanation.........................................................................................................1235

14 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA ............................................................... 1243


14.1 14.2 15.1 15.2 15.3 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE .......................................................... 1243 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL ....................................................... 1254 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) ...................................... 1259 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .............................................. 1260 SKIP FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 1267
15.3.1 15.3.2 15.3.3 15.3.4 Skip Function .....................................................................................................1267 High-speed Skip Signal ......................................................................................1274 Multi-step Skip ...................................................................................................1279 Torque Limit Skip Function ...............................................................................1286 Input of tool offset value measured (T Series) ...................................................1292 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T Series) ............................................1293 Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input...............................1306

15 MEASUREMENT............................................................................... 1259

15.4

COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT ........................................................... 1292


15.4.1 15.4.2 15.4.3

16 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................. 1309


16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 17.1 17.2 PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................. 1309
16.1.1 PMC Axis Control..............................................................................................1309

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT........................................................................ 1377 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT...................... 1390 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH....................................... 1393 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT .......................................................................... 1395 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL ................................................................... 1400 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD....... 1407 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...................... 1408
17.2.1 17.2.2 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function.........................................................1408
17.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen ....................................... 1408 17.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function....................................... 1411

17 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .............................................. 1407

Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..........................................................1411


17.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen .......................................... 1412 17.2.2.2 Related NC parameters .................................................................................. 1414 17.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function.......................................... 1416

17.2.3

Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function .................................................................1416


17.2.3.1 Setting up DNS.............................................................................................. 1416 17.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP ........................................................................................... 1417 17.2.3.3 Related NC parameters .................................................................................. 1420

17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 18.1

SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES ....... 1421 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ........................................ 1421 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . 1422 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .............. 1426 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE............................................................. 1429
c-8

18 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ................................................................... 1429

B-64303EN-1/02

TABLE OF CONTENTS SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE.......................................................... 1431 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS........................................................................... 1433


18.3.1 18.3.2 18.3.3 18.3.4 18.3.5 18.3.6 18.3.7 18.3.8 18.3.9 Outline ................................................................................................................1433 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen.....................................................................1435 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen ......................................................................1437 Trouble diagnosis parameter screen ...................................................................1441 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen .......................................................................1443 Trouble forecast level setting screen (only for servo axis).................................1444 Parameter............................................................................................................1446 Signal..................................................................................................................1447 Restrictions.........................................................................................................1447 Outline ................................................................................................................1448 Kind of additional alarm and operator message .................................................1448 Available diagnosis number ...............................................................................1448 Environment for making trouble diagnosis message..........................................1449 Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis......................................................1450
18.4.5.1 18.4.5.2 18.4.5.3 18.4.5.4 Install ............................................................................................................. 1450 Uninstall......................................................................................................... 1450 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages ........................................ 1451 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages .............................. 1452 Inputting guidance data.................................................................................. 1454 Checking input data ....................................................................................... 1456 Making a memory card format file ................................................................ 1457 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTBs guidance table............................ 1458

18.2 18.3

18.4

MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS .............................................................. 1448


18.4.1 18.4.2 18.4.3 18.4.4 18.4.5

18.4.6

Making trouble diagnosis messages ...................................................................1453


18.4.6.1 18.4.6.2 18.4.6.3 18.4.6.4

18.4.7 18.4.8 18.4.9

Making messages for multi-languages ...............................................................1459


18.4.7.1 Making sheets for multi-languages................................................................ 1459 18.4.7.2 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages.............................................. 1461

Notice .................................................................................................................1461 Translating data used with the former series(Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B) ........................................................................................1461

APPENDIX A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC......................................... 1465


A.1 A.2 LIST OF ADDRESSES ............................................................................ 1465 LIST OF SIGNALS................................................................................... 1502
A.2.1 A.2.2 A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ..............................................................1502 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ................................................................1523 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)..............................................................1541

DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C .................................................. 1560


B.1 SETTING UNIT........................................................................................ 1561
B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1561 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1561 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1561 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1562 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1562 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1562 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1563 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1563
c-9

B.2

STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION .......................................... 1562


B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3

B.3

WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM .................................................. 1563


B.3.1 B.3.2

TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.3.3

B-64303EN-1/02

Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1563 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1564 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1565 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1565 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1565 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1570 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1570 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1571 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1571 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1571 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1572 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1573 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1573 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1574 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1574 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1574 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1574 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1575 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1575 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1576 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1577 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1577 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1577 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1579 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1579 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1580 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1580 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1580 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1581 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1581 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1581 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1581 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1582 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1582 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1583 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1583 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1583

B.4

LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM ............................................................ 1564


B.4.1 B.4.2 B.4.3

B.5

AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL......................................................... 1565


B.5.1 B.5.2 B.5.3

B.6

ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL .............................................. 1571


B.6.1 B.6.2 B.6.3

B.7

STORED STROKE CHECK..................................................................... 1572


B.7.1 B.7.2 B.7.3

B.8

CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES).......................................... 1574


B.8.1 B.8.2 B.8.3

B.9

MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION .............................. 1574


B.9.1 B.9.2 B.9.3

B.10

MANUAL HANDLE FEED........................................................................ 1576


B.10.1 B.10.2 B.10.3

B.11

MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN......................................... 1577


B.11.1 B.11.2 B.11.3

B.12

RESET AND REWIND............................................................................. 1580


B.12.1 B.12.2 B.12.3

B.13

SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) .................................. 1581


B.13.1 B.13.2 B.13.3

B.14

MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF....................................................... 1581


B.14.1 B.14.2 B.14.3

B.15

CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................. 1583


B.15.1 B.15.2 B.15.3

B.16

THREADING CYCLE RETRACT (CANNED CUTTING CYCLE/ MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CUTTING CYCLE) (T SERIES)....... 1583
B.16.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1583
c-10

B-64303EN-1/02

TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.16.2 B.16.3 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1584 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1584 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1584 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1585 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1585 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1585 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1586 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1586

B.17

HELICAL INTERPOLATION .................................................................... 1584


B.17.1 B.17.2 B.17.3

B.18

POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES) .......................... 1585


B.18.1 B.18.2 B.18.3

B.19

ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES)/AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (M SERIES) / AI CONTOUR CONTROL (M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 1587
B.19.1 B.19.2 B.19.3 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1587 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1589 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1589 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1590 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1590 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1590 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1591 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1591 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1591

B.20

WAITING M CODES (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ......................... 1590


B.20.1 B.20.2 B.20.3

B.21

PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))....... 1591


B.21.1 B.21.2 B.21.3

B.22

SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ........................................................... 1592
B.22.1 B.22.2 B.22.3 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1592 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1596 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1596 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1596 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1598 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1598 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1598 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1598 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1598 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1599 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1599 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1599 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1600 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1600 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1600 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1601 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1601 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1602 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1602 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1602
c-11

B.23

SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ........... 1596


B.23.1 B.23.2 B.23.3

B.24

AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................... 1598


B.24.1 B.24.2 B.24.3

B.25

SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................. 1599


B.25.1 B.25.2 B.25.3

B.26

CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ........................................... 1600


B.26.1 B.26.2 B.26.3

B.27

SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ..................................................... 1601


B.27.1 B.27.2 B.27.3

B.28

Cs CONTOUR CONTROL....................................................................... 1602


B.28.1 B.28.2

TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.28.3

B-64303EN-1/02

Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1602 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1603 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1603 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1603 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1604 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1605 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1605 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1606 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1607 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1607 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1607 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1607 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1607 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1608 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1613 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1613 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1614 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1616 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1616 Miscellaneous.....................................................................................................1616 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1616 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1616 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1616 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1617 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1619 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1619

B.29

MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................................... 1603


B.29.1 B.29.2 B.29.3

B.30

TOOL FUNCTIONS ................................................................................. 1604


B.30.1 B.30.2 B.30.3

B.31

TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY........................................................ 1606


B.31.1 B.31.2 B.31.3

B.32

Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES) .................................................................. 1607


B.32.1 B.32.2 B.32.3

B.33

CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION .. 1608


B.33.1 B.33.2 B.33.3

B.34

CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................... 1614


B.34.1 B.34.2 B.34.3 B.34.4

B.35

INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO............................................. 1616


B.35.1 B.35.2 B.35.3

B.36

CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING........................................................... 1617


B.36.1 B.36.2 B.36.3

B.37

CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) ................................................................................. 1619


B.37.1 B.37.2 B.37.3 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1619 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1620 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1620 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1620 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1621 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1621

B.38

CANNED GRINDING CYCLE.................................................................. 1620


B.38.1 B.38.2 B.38.3

B.39

MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR TURNING (T SERIES) .............................................................................................. 1621


B.39.1 B.39.2 B.39.3 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1621 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1625 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1625

B.40

OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 1625


B.40.1 B.40.2 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1625 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1626
c-12

B-64303EN-1/02

TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.40.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1626 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1626 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1626 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1626 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1627 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1627 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1627 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1627 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1628 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1628

B.41

CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)........................ 1626


B.41.1 B.41.2 B.41.3

B.42

DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) ......... 1627


B.42.1 B.42.2 B.42.3

B.43

RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY .......................................... 1627


B.43.1 B.43.2 B.43.3

B.44

SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION ............................................................................ 1628
B.44.1 B.44.2 B.44.3 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1628 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1629 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1629 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1629 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1629 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1629

B.45

MEMORY PROTECTION SIGNAL FOR CNC PARAMETER.................. 1629


B.45.1 B.45.2 B.45.3

B.46

AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/ AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .............................................. 1630
B.46.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series)..............................................1630
B.46.1.1 Differences in Specifications ......................................................................... 1630 B.46.1.2 Differences in Signals.................................................................................... 1631 B.46.1.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .................................................................. 1631

B.46.2

Automatic Tool Offset (T Series).......................................................................1631


B.46.2.1 Differences in Specifications ......................................................................... 1631 B.46.2.2 Differences in Signals.................................................................................... 1632 B.46.2.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .................................................................. 1632

B.47

SKIP FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 1633


B.47.1 B.47.2 B.47.3 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1633 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1634 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1635 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1635 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1635 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1636 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1636 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1641 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1641 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1642 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1644 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1644 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1645 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1645 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1645
c-13

B.48

INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B (T SERIES) ............. 1635


B.48.1 B.48.2 B.48.3

B.49

PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................. 1636


B.49.1 B.49.2 B.49.3

B.50

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT........................................................................ 1642


B.50.1 B.50.2 B.50.3

B.51

SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ............................................................ 1645


B.51.1 B.51.2 B.51.3

B.52

IN-POSITION CHECK ............................................................................. 1645

TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.52.1 B.52.2 B.52.3

B-64303EN-1/02

Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1645 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1646 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1646 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1646 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1646 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1646 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1647 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1647 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1647 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1647 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1647 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1647 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1648 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1648 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1648

B.53

DATA SERVER FUNCTION .................................................................... 1646


B.53.1 B.53.2 B.53.3

B.54

POWER MATE CNC MANAGER ............................................................ 1647


B.54.1 B.54.2 B.54.3

B.55

PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ..................................... 1647


B.55.1 B.55.2 B.55.3

B.56

EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)............................................. 1648


B.56.1 B.56.2 B.56.3

c-14

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

11
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4

TOOL FUNCTIONS

Chapter 11, "TOOL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM..................................................................................1009 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM .......................................................1021 TOOL COMPENSATION..............................................................................................................1027 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT.......................................................................................................1042

11.1
T

TOOL FUNCTIONS OF T SERIES

Overview
When address T followed by a numeric value is specified, the code signal and strobe signal are sent to the machine and are used to select a tool on the machine side. Just one T code can be specified in a block. When a move command and T code are specified within the same block, these commands are executed in one of the following two ways: (1) The move command and tool function command are started at the same time. (2) After the move command ends, the tool function command is started.

Explanation
A numeric value following the T code specifies selection of a tool. Part of the numeric value is also used as a tool offset number for specifying an offset value such as a tool offset value. Tools are selected according to the specification method and parameter setting as follows:
Meaning of T code(*1) LGN(No.5002#1)=0 LGN(No.5002#1)=1 TXXXXXXXX Tool selection Tool geometry/ tool wear offset TXXXXXXXX Tool selection Tool geometry/ tool wear offset TXXXXXXXX Tool selection Tool geometry/ tool wear offset TXXXXXXXX Tool selection Tool wear offset Tool geometry offset TXXXXXXXX Tool selection Tool wear offset Tool geometry offset TXXXXXXXX Tool selection Tool wear offset Tool geometry offset Parameter setting and offset No. specification method(*2) Tool wear offset No. is specified by lowest 1 digit of T code. When parameter No. 5028 is set to 1 Tool wear offset No. is specified by lowest 2 digits of T code. When parameter No. 5028 is set to 2 Tool wear offset No. is specified by lowest 3 digits of T code When parameter No. 5028 is set to 3

*1 The maximum number of digits of the T code can be specified in parameter No. 3032. (1 to 8 digits) *2 If 0 is set in parameter No. 5028, the length of the offset number specified in the T code depends on the number of tool offsets. Example: When the number of tool offsets ranges from 1 to 9: Lowest 1 digit When the number of tool offsets ranges from 10 to 99: Lowest 2 digits When the number of tool offsets ranges from 100 to 200: Lowest 3 digits

- 1009 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

11.1.1
T

Tool Offset

Overview
Tool offset is used to compensate for the difference when the tool actually used differs from the imagined tool used in programming (usually, standard tool).
Standard tool

Actual tool Offset amount on X axis Offset amount on Z axis

Tool offset

11.1.2
T

Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset

Overview
Tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are possible to divide the tool offset to the tool geometry offset for compensating the tool shape or tool mounting position and the tool wear offset for compensating the tool nose wear. Total value of tool geometry offset value and tool wear offset value is set as the tool wear offset value without option.
Point on the program Imaginary tool X axis geometry offset value X axis wear offset value Actual tool Z axis wear offset value Z axis geometry offset value Offset amount on Z axis Offset amount on X axis Point on the program

If tool geometry compensation and tool wear compensation are distinguished from each other (left) and if they are not (right)

- 1010 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

11.1.3
T

Offset

Explanation
Compensation methods
Two methods are available to geometry compensation and wear compensation, compensation with tool movement and compensation with coordinate shift. Which compensation method to select can be specified with parameters LWT (No. 5002#2) and LGT (No. 5002#4). When the tool geometry/wear compensation is not enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 1), however, compensation with tool movement is selected unconditionally.
Parameter LWT="0" LGT="0" LWT="1" LGT="0" LWT="0" LGT="1" LWT="1" LGT="1"

Parameter NGW"(No.8136#6) "1"

Compensation element Wear and geometry not distinguished Wear compensation Geometry compensation

Tool movement Tool movement Coordinate shift Coordinate shift Coordinate shift Tool movement Tool movement Coordinate shift Tool movement

"0"

Compensation with tool movement

The tool path is offset by the X, Y, and Z tool offset values for the programmed path. The tool offset distance corresponding to the number specified by the T code is added to or subtracted from the end position of each programmed block. The vector with tool offset X, Y, and Z is called the offset vector. Compensation is the same as the offset vector.
Tool path after offset

This move command block contains the offset command with T code Programmed path Compensation by tool offset X, Z (offset vector)

Offset operation with tool movement

NOTE 1 When G50 X_Z_T_ ; is specified, the tool is not moved. The coordinate system in which the coordinate value of the tool position is (X,Z) is set. The tool position is obtained by subtracting the offset value corresponding to the tool offset number specified in the T code. 2 The G codes in the 00 group other than G50 must not be specified in the same block as that containing a T code. Otherwise, alarm PS0245 is issued. Compensation with coordinate shift
The work coordinate system is shifted by the X, Y, and Z tool offset amounts. Namely, the offset amount corresponding to the number designated with the T code is added to or subtracted from the absolute coordinates.
- 1011 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
The movement to this point is by an absolute command. Programmed path after workpiece coordinate system shift Tool path after offset Offset amount by offset in X, Z axis (offset vector) Programmed path before work coordinate system shift

B-64303EN-1/02

Offset operation with coordinate shift

Starting and canceling offset by specifying a T code

Specifying an tool offset number with a T code means to select the tool offset value corresponding to it and to start offset. Specifying 0 as a tool offset number means to cancel offset. For offset with tool movement, whether to start or cancel the offset can be specified with parameter LWN (No. 5002#6). For compensation with coordinate shift, the offset is started and canceled when a T code is specified. For the cancellation of geometry compensation, its operation can be selected with LGC (No. 5002#5).
Compensation method Tool movement Coordinate shift LWM (No.5002#6)=0 LWM (No.5002#6)=1

When a T code is specified When an axial movement is specified When a T code is specified (Note that geometry compensation can be canceled only if LGC (No. 5002#5) = 1.)

Canceling offset with reset

Tool offset is canceled under one of the following conditions: <1> The power to the CNC is turned off and turned back on <2> The reset button on the MDI unit is pressed <3> A reset signal is input from the machine to the CNC In cases <2> and <3> above, it is possible to select a cancel operation using parameters LVC (No. 5006#3) and TGC (No. 5003#7).
Parameter LVC=0 TGC=1 x

Compensation method Tool movement Wear compensation Geometry compensation

LVC=0 TGC=0 x

LVC=1 TGC=0

LVC=1 TGC=1 o (When axial movement is specified) o o

Coordinate Wear compensation shift Geometry compensation

x x

Canceled. (When axial movement is specified) Canceled. x

x o

o: Canceled. x: Not canceled.

Notes and restrictions


Helical interpolation (G02, G03) Tool position offset cannot be specified in a block in which helical interpolation is used. Workpiece coordinate system preset (G50.3) Performing workpiece coordinate system preset causes tool position offset with tool movement to be canceled; this does not cause tool position offset with coordinate shift to be canceled.
- 1012 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

Machine coordinate system setting (G53), reference position return (G28), second, third, and fourth reference position return (G30), and manual reference position return These

Basically, before performing these commands or operations, cancel tool position offset. operations do not cause tool position offset to be canceled. The following actions take place:
When the command or operation is specified Tool movement Coordinate shift The tool offset value is temporarily canceled. Coordinates with the tool offset value reflected are assumed.

When the next axial movement command is specified The tool offset value is reflected. Coordinates with the tool offset value reflected are assumed.

Do not specify the G code and T code in the same block. Otherwise, alarm PS0245 is issued.

Parameter
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 8 Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code. When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.
#7 3129 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 DAP #0 DRP

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 DRP For relative coordinate display: 0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. 1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. DAP For absolute coordinate display: 0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. 1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.
#7 5002 WNP #6 LWM #5 LGC #4 LGT #3 #2 LWT #1 LGN #0

#1

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset 0: Is the same as wear offset number 1: Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number

NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
- 1013 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
#2 LWT Tool wear compensation is performed by: 0: Moving the tool. 1: Shifting the coordinate system.

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
#4 LGT Tool geometry compensation 0: Compensated by the shift of the coordinate system 1: Compensated by the tool movement

NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
#5 LGC When tool geometry compensation is based on coordinate shifting, the tool geometry offset is: 0: Not canceled by a command with offset number 0. 1: Canceled by a command with offset number 0.

NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
#6 LWM Tool offset operation based on tool movement is performed: 0: In a block where a T code is specified. 1: Together with a command for movement along an axis. WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation, when the geometry/wear compensation function is equipped, is the number specified by: 0: Geometry offset number 1: Wear offset number
#7 5003 TGC #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#7

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #7 TGC A tool geometry offset based on a coordinate shift is: 0: Not canceled by reset. 1: Canceled by reset.

NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).

- 1014 -

B-64303EN-1/02 #7 5004 #6 #5 #4 #3

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
#2 #1 ORC #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 ORC The setting of a tool offset value is corrected as: 0: Diameter value 1: Radius value

NOTE This parameter is valid only for an axis based on diameter specification. For an axis based on radius specification, specify a radius value, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#7 5006 #6 #5 #4 #3 LVC #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #3 LVC A tool offset (geometry/wear) based on a tool movement and wear offset based on a coordinate shift are: 0: Not canceled by reset. 1: Canceled by reset.
Number of tool compensation values

5024

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values Set the maximum allowable number of tool compensation values used for each path. Ensure that the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths is within the number of compensation values usable in the entire system. If the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths exceeds the number of compensation values usable in the entire system, or 0 is set in parameter No. 5024 for all paths, the number of compensation values usable for each path is a value obtained by dividing the number of compensation values usable in the entire system by the number of paths. Tool compensation values as many as the number of compensation values used for each path are displayed on the screen. If tool compensation numbers more than the number of compensation values usable for each path are specified, an alarm is issued. For example, 200 tool compensation sets are used, 120 sets may be allocated to path 1 and 80 sets to path 2. All of 200 sets need not be used.

- 1015 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
5028 Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command

B-64303EN-1/02

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a tool offset number (wear offset number when the tool geometry/wear compensation function is used). When 0 is set, the number of digits is determined by the number of tool compensation values. When the number of tool compensation values is 1 to 9: Lower 1 digit When the number of tool compensation values is 10 to 99: Lower 2 digits When the number of tool compensation values is 100 to 200: Lower 3 digits Example : When an offset number is specified using the lower 2 digits of a T code, set 2 in parameter No. 5028. Txxxxxx yy xxxxxx : Tool selection yy : Tool offset number

NOTE A value longer than the setting of parameter No. 3032 (allowable number of digits of a T code) cannot be set.
#7 5040 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 OWD

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 OWD In radius programming (bit 1 (ORC) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 1), 0: Tool offset values of both geometry compensation and wear compensation are specified by radius. 1: Tool offset value of geometry compensation is specified by radius and tool offset value of wear compensation is specified by diameter, for an axis of diameter programming.

NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
#7 8136 #6 NGW #5 NDO #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit
- 1016 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

#5

NDO Tool offset pairs 64-pairs (T series 1-path system) / 128-pairs (T series 2-path system) is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

NOTE When the option of tool compensation count 99 (T series 1-path system) / 200 (T series 2-path system) is added, this parameter becomes invalid in T series. (Tool compensation count is fixed to 99 (T series 1-path system) / 200 (T series 2-path system).)
#6 NGW Tool geometry/wear compensation (T series) is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

Alarm and message


Number PS0245 Message T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS BLOCK Description The specified G code (G10, G04, G28, G29, G30, G50, or G53) cannot be used in the same block as a T code . Modify the program.

11.1.4
T

Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T Function)

Overview
After cutting tools are changed manually, entering the tool number of a new tool enables the previous tool position compensation values (tool geometry and wear compensation) to be changed to those for the new tool.

NOTE Automatic alteration of tool position compensation (T function) is optional function.

Details
After changing cutting tools manually, place the CNC in the JOG or HNDL (INC), or REF mode, enter the tool number of a new tool as a manual tool compensation tool number signal (MTLN<Gn068, Gn069> or MT8N<Gn525-Gn528>) from the PMC, and set the compensation command signal MTLC<Gn067.0> to "1". The CNC will read the tool number and change the previous tool position compensation values to those for the specified tool. Upon completion of the compensation value change, the compensation completion signal MTLA<Fn061.5> is output.

- 1017 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
Manual tool change
Manual tool compensation tool number signal MTLN(PMCCNC) <Gn068,Gn069> <Gn525-Gn528> Compensation command signal MTLC(PMCCNC) <Gn067.0> Compensation completion signal MTLA(CNCPMC) <Fn061.5>

B-64303EN-1/02

Tool number (4 or 8 BCD digits)

Changing compensation values (CNC)

Four BCD digits are used to specify the manual tool compensation tool number MTLN<Gn068, Gn069>. If it is necessary to specify the manual tool compensation tool number with a number exceeding 4 digits, use MT8N<Gn525-Gn528> to specify it with 8 BCD digits. Which size to use can be selected using bit 7 (MTL8D) of parameter No. 11400. The same rules as for the T code command in automatic operation are applied in specifying how many digits, 4 or 8, to use as the geometry or wear compensation numbers (parameter No.5028). This function is available only if the CNC is in the JOG, HNDL, or REF mode. In any other operation mode, during automatic operation (running, pause, or stop), or in the tool-nose radius compensation mode, (G41/G42 mode), setting the compensation command signal MTLC to 1 does not enable compensation. If compensation is unavailable, the compensation completion signal MTLA does not become 1. Instead the compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG becomes 1. The reason for MTLANG = 1 can be known from diagnosis display No. 560.
Manual tool change

Manual tool compensation tool number signal MTLN(PMCCNC) <Gn068,Gn069> C<Gn525-Gn528> Compensation command signal MTLC(PMCCNC) <Gn067.0> Compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG(CNCPMC) <Fn061.5> Compensation completion signal MTLA(CNCPMC) <Fn061.4>

Tool number (4 or 8 BCD digits)

Compensation change is impossible (CNC)

Signal
Manual tool compensation tool number signal (4 digits) MTLN00 to MTLN15<Gn068, Gn069>
[Classification] Input signal
- 1018 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

[Function] Specifies a tool number for manual tool compensation, using 4 BCD digits.

Manual tool compensation tool number signal (8 digits) MT8N00 to MT8N31<Gn525-Gn528>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Specifies a tool number for manual tool compensation, using 8 BCD digits.

Manual tool compensation command number MTLC<Gn067.0>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Requests to perform manual tool compensation. Setting this signal from 0 to 1 causes manual tool compensation to be performed. Re-set it to 0 when the compensation completion signal becomes = 1.

Manual tool compensation completion signal MTLA<Fn061.5>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs that manual tool compensation is completed. This signal becomes 1 when a compensation value is changed in manual tool compensation. It becomes 0 when the compensation command signal MTLC becomes 0.

Manual tool compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG<Fn061.4>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs that manual tool compensation is uncompleted. This signal becomes 1 if an attempt to perform manual tool compensation fails in changing a compensation value for any reason. It becomes 0 when the compensation command signal MTLC becomes 0. The reason for the failure of the attempt can be known from diagnosis display No. 560.

Signal address
#7 Gn068 Gn069 Gn525 Gn526 Gn527 Gn528 Gn067 Fn061 MTLA MTLANG MTL07 MTL15 MT8N07 MT8N15 MT8N23 MT8N31 #6 MTL06 MTL14 MT8N06 MT8N14 MT8N22 MT8N30 #5 MTL05 MTL13 MT8N05 MT8N13 MT8N21 MT8N29 #4 MTL04 MTL12 MT8N04 MT8N12 MT8N20 MT8N28 #3 MTL03 MTL11 MT8N03 MT8N11 MT8N19 MT8N27 #2 MTL02 MTL10 MT8N02 MT8N10 MT8N18 MT8N26 #1 MTL01 MTL09 MT8N01 MT8N09 MT8N17 MT8N25 #0 MTL00 MTL08 MT8N00 MT8N08 MT8N16 MT8N24 MTLC

Diagnosis display
0560 Manual tool compensation status number

[Data type] Byte [Unit of data] None [Valid data range] 0 to 255 The following numbers are used to indicate whether compensation is completed or the reason for uncompleted compensation (if occur). 0: Manual tool compensation is completed normally.
- 1019 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7:

B-64303EN-1/02

The T code-specified data has exceeded the permissible range. The offset value is out of range. The offset number is out of range. The CNC is undergoing automatic operation or axis movement. The CNC is in the tool-nose radius compensation mode. The CNC is in a mode other than the JOG, HNDL (INC), or REF mode. A CNC parameter has specified an invalid number.

Parameter
#7 11400 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MTL8D

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MTL8D The number of digits in the T code used for automatic change of tool position compensation is specified as follows: 0: 4 digits (Existing DI signals Gn068 and Gn069 are used.) 1: 8 digits (The DI signals Gn525 - Gn528 are used.)

Notes
If the CNC is in the following conditions, setting the compensation command signal MTLC to 1 cannot change compensation values, and therefore, the compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG becomes 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) The CNC is in a mode other than the JOG, HNDL (INC), or REF mode. The CNC is at an emergency stop. The reset button on the MDI unit is held pressed. A reset signal is input on the machine side. The CNC is in an alarm condition. The CNC is undergoing automatic operation (start, pause, or stop). The CNC is in the tool-noose radius compensation mode (G41/G42 mode).

With this function, shifted coordinate systems are returned to the previous state by the first T code in the next session of automatic operation, and axis movement occurs by the amount of canceled shifting, thus resuming the position and coordinate systems of the inherent movement type. Example: If the amounts of wear compensation are: T1 = 0.1, T2 = 0.2, and T3 = 0.4 1) The state that T1 compensation is applied during automatic operation (compensation of 0.1 axis movement type): 2) The coordinate system is shifted by -0.1 (= T2 - T1) from the state mentioned in step 1 when tool T2 is selected in manual tool compensation. 3) When compensation T3 is applied again during automatic operation, the coordinate system is shifted by 0.2 (= T3 - T2), that is, totally by 0.3. The coordinate system, which has been shifted by -0.1 in step 2, is shifted back to the previous state. Once the T3 compensation command has been executed, the same position and coordinate system as would be when the T3 compensation command is issued in the T1 compensation state are resumed. When manual tool compensation ends properly, the T code modal changes to one where manual tool compensation was carried out (the tool function code signals <Fn026 to Fn029> also change).

- 1020 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

11.2
M

TOOL FUNCTIONS OF M SERIES

Overview
Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address T.

Signal
Refer to AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION

Parameter
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 8 Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code. When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.

Alarm and message


Number PS0155 Message ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND Description In a machining program, the T code specified in the same block as M06 does not correspond to the group in current use. Modify the program. The specified G code (G10, G04, G28, G29, G30, G50, or G53) cannot be used in the same block as a T code . Modify the program.

PS0245

T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS BLOCK

NOTE
NOTE When a move command and a tool function are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: (i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool function commands. (ii) Executing tool function commands upon completion of move command execution. The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the sequence program of PMC.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual) Tool selection command Auxiliary function Item name

- 1021 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

11.2.1
M

Tool Compensation Memory

Overview
Tool compensation values include geometry compensation values and wear compensation values. (Fig. 11.2.1(a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation) Tool compensation values can also be used without discriminating between geometry and wear compensation values.
Reference position Reference position

Geometry compensation value Wear Compensation value

Tool compensation value

(a) Geometry and wear compensation are discriminated

(b) Geometry and were compensation are not discriminated

Fig. 11.2 (a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation

Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the MDI or from a program. A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the corresponding code is specified after address H or D in a program. The value is used for tool length compensation, cutter compensation, or the tool offset.

Unit of range of tool compensation value


Unit of range of tool compensation value (metric input) Unit Range 0.01mm 0.001mm 0.0001mm 9999.99mm 9999.999mm 9999.9999mm Unit of range of tool compensation value (inch input) Unit Range 0.001inch 0.0001inch 0.00001inch 999.999inch 999.9999inch 999.99999inch

A tool offset unit and valid data range can be chosen from the following by setting the parameters:

OFC 0 0 1

OFA 1 0 0

OFC 0 0 1

OFA 1 0 0

Tool compensation memory

One of the tool compensation memory A/C can be selected according to the configuration of offset amount. (parameter NGW(No.8136#6)) (1) Tool compensation memory A (parameter NGW(No.8136#6)="1") There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and wear compensation memory in tool compensation memory A. Therefore, amount of geometry offset and wear offset together is set as the offset memory. There is also no differences between cutter compensation (D code) and tool length compensation (H code).
- 1022 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

(2) Tool compensation memory C (parameter NGW(No.8136#6)="0") Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is separate in tool compensation memory C. Geometry compensation and wear compensation can thus be set separately. Separate memories are prepared for cutter compensation (for D code) and for tool length compensation (for H code). The above description is summarized as follows:
Tool compensation memory A Compensation amount Tool compensation amount (Geometry compensation value + Wear compensation value) Geometry compensation value for H code Geometry compensation value for D code Wear compensation value for H code Wear compensation value for D code

Parameter
#7 3109 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 DWT #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation amount 0: The characters are displayed at the left of each number. 1: The characters are not displayed.
#7 3205 #6 #5 #4 OSC #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #4 OSC On the offset screen, offset value erasure by a soft key is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled.
#7 3290 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 GOF #0 WOF

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 WOF Setting the tool offset value (tool wear offset) by MDI key input is: 0: Not disabled 1: Disabled (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.)

NOTE When tool offset memory A is selected with the M series, the tool offset set in the parameter WOF is followed even if geometric compensation and wear compensation are not specified with the T series.
- 1023 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
#1

B-64303EN-1/02

GOF Setting the tool geometry offset value by MDI key input is: 0: Not disabled 1: Disabled (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is disabled

3294 3295

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of tool compensation values - 1 When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input is to be disabled using bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 and bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290, parameter Nos. 3294 and 3295 are used to set the range where such modification is disabled. In parameter No.3294, set the offset number of the start of tool offset values whose modification is disabled. In parameter No.3295, set the number of such values. In the following cases, however, none of the tool offset values may be modified: When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No. 3294 When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No. 3295 When a value greater than the maximum tool offset number is set in parameter No. 3294 In the following case, a modification to the values ranging from the value set in parameter No. 3294 to the maximum tool offset number is disabled: When the value of parameter No. 3294 added to the value of parameter No. 3295 exceeds the maximum tool offset number When the offset value of a prohibited number is input through the MDI panel, the warning "WRITE PROTECT" is issued. [Example] When the following parameter settings are made, modifications to both of the tool geometry offset values and tool wear offset values corresponding to offset numbers 51 to 60 are disabled: Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool geometry offset value modification) Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool wear offset value modification) Parameter No. 3294 = 51 Parameter No. 3295 = 10 If the setting of bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 0 without modifying the other parameter settings above, tool geometry offset value modification only is disabled, and tool wear offset value modification is enabled.
#7 5001 #6 #5 TPH #4 #3 #2 OFH #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

- 1024 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

#2

OFH In cutter compensation (G40, G41, or G42), the address used to specify a compensation number is: 0: Address D. 1: Address H.

NOTE When this parameter is 1, if tool length compensation and cutter compensation are specified in the same block, cutter compensation is prioritized.
#5 TPH In tool offsets (G45, G46, G47, or G48), the address used to specify a compensation number is: 0: Address D. 1: Address H.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 is 0.
5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (offset unit) The increment system of a tool offset value is followed. The settings of bits 1 and 0 (OFC and OFA) of parameter No. 5042 are followed.
For metric input OFC 0 0 1 OFC 0 0 1 OFA 1 0 0 OFA 1 0 0 0 to 999.999inch 0 to 999.9999inch 0 to 999.99999inch 0 to 9999.99mm 0 to 9999.999mm 0 to 9999.9999mm For inch input Valid data range Valid data range

This parameter sets the maximum allowable tool wear compensation value. If an attempt is made to set a tool wear compensation value, the absolute value of which exceeds the value set in this parameter, the following alarm or warning is output:
Input from MDI Input by G10 Warning: Too many digits Alarm PS0032: ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10.

When 0 or a negative value is set, no maximum allowable value is applied. [Example] When 30.000 is set As a tool offset value, a value from -30.000 to +30.000 can be input.
5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path


- 1025 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

[Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit) [Min. unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed. [Valid data range] The settings of bits 1 and 0 (OFC and OFA) of parameter No. 5042 are followed.
For metric input OFC 0 0 1 OFC 0 0 1 OFA 1 0 0 OFA 1 0 0 0 to 999.999inch 0 to 999.9999inch 0 to 999.99999inch 0 to 9999.99mm 0 to 9999.999mm 0 to 9999.9999mm For inch input Valid data range Valid data range

Set the maximum allowable value for the tool wear compensation value, input as an incremental value. If the incremental input value (absolute value) exceeds the set value, the following alarm or warning message is output:
Input from MDI Input by G10 Warning: Too many digits Alarm PS0032: ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10.

When 0 or a negative value is set, no maximum allowable value is applied.


#7 5042 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 OFC #0 OFA

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0 #1 OFA OFC These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset value.
For metric input Unit 0.01mm 0.001mm 0.0001mm For inch input Unit 0.001inch 0.0001inch 0.00001inch

OFC 0 0 1

OFA 1 0 0

Valid data range 9999.99mm 9999.999mm 9999.9999mm

OFC 0 0 1

OFA 1 0 0

Valid data range 999.999inch 999.9999inch 999.99999inch

- 1026 -

B-64303EN-1/02 #7 8136 #6 NGW #5 NDO #4 #3

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
#2 #1 #0

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 NDO Tool offset pairs 400-pairs (M series) is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used. NGW Tool offset memory C (M series) is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

#6

Alarm and message


Number PS0032 Message ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 Description In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by system variables, the offset amount was excessive. Description The value searched exceeds the permitted range. The input value exceeds the permitted number of digits.

Warning message DATA IS OUT OF RANGE TOO MANY DIGITS

11.3
11.3.1
Overview
M

TOOL COMPENSATION
Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series)

Cutter compensation (M series)

Use of cutter compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool radius set in the CNC when machining is performed. When the radius of the tool to be used for machining is measured and set as the offset value in the CNC, the tool moves along the offset path to cut a programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool diameter changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify the program.
Programmed path Tool center path

- 1027 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

To obtain the actual offset tool path, the CNC internally calculates intersections of a straight line and a straight line, an arc and an arc, and a straight line and an arc automatically. The programmer only has to program a machining profile, therefore, programming can be done very easily.
T

Tool nose radius compensation

Use of tool-nose radius compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool nose radius set in the CNC when machining is performed. When a machining profile is programmed using this function, and the radius of the tool nose to be used for actual machining is measured and set as the offset value in the CNC, the tool moves along the offset path to cut the programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool nose radius changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify the program.
Workpiece Tool center path

Tool nose

Machining profile

To obtain the actual offset tool path, the CNC internally calculates intersections of a straight line and a straight line, an arc and an arc, and a straight line and an arc automatically. The programmer only has to program a machining profile, therefore the programming can be done very easily.

NOTE To enable cutter compensation (M series)/ tool-nose radius compensation (T series), set bit 7 (NTL, NCR) of parameter No. 8136 to 0.

Signal
Tool offset direction signals G2RVX,G2RVZ,G2RVY<Gn090.0,.1,.2>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals change the compensation direction when using the tool offset. The direction of the tool offset compensated by tool movement is: 0 : Identical to the sign. 1 : Opposite to the sign.

NOTE 1 G2RVY needs to enable the Y-axis offset function (bit 1 (YOF) of parameter No. 8132 is 1). 2 This signal is invalid for compensation that shifts coordinates.

- 1028 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

Parameter
#7 5000 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SBK

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #0 SBK With a block created internally for cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation: 0: A single block stop is not performed. 1: A single block stop is performed. This parameter is used to check a program including cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation.
#7 5001 #6 #5 TPH #4 EVR #3 #2 OFH #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 OFH In cutter compensation (G40, G41, or G42), the address used to specify a compensation number is: 0: Address D. 1: Address H.

NOTE When this parameter is 1, if tool length compensation and cutter compensation are specified in the same block, cutter compensation is prioritized.
#4 EVR When a tool compensation value is changed in cutter compensation mode: 0: Enables the change, starting from that block where the next D or H code is specified. 1: Enables the change, starting from that block where buffering is next performed. TPH In tool offsets (G45, G46, G47, or G48), the address used to specify a compensation number is: 0: Address D. 1: Address H.

#5

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 is 0.
#7 5002 WNP #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 LGN #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset 0: Is the same as wear offset number 1: Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
- 1029 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
#7 WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation, when the geometry/wear compensation function is equipped (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0), is the number specified by: 0: Geometry offset number 1: Wear offset number
#7 5003 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 SUV #0 SUP

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 SUP #1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation.
CSC CSU Type 0 0 Operation Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the startup block or A the block preceding the cancellation block is output. Tool center path G41 N2 N1
Programmed path

Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or cancellation block B and an intersection vector are output.
Intersection point Tool center path

G41 N2 N1

Programmed path

- 1030 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
CSC CSU Type 1 0 1 Operation Type When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no movement operation, C the tool is shifted by the cutter compensation amount in a direction perpendicular to the block next to the startup or the block before cancellation block. Intersection point Tool center path Shift G41 N3 N2 Programmed path

When the block specifies movement operation, the type is set according to the SUP setting; if SUP is 0, type A is set, and if SUP is 1, type B is set.

NOTE When SUV,SUP = 0,1 (type B), an operation equivalent to that of FS0i-TC is performed.
#7 5004 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 ODI #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 ODI The setting of a cutter compensation value is corrected as: 0: Radius value 1: Diameter value
#7 5008 #6 #5 #4 MCR #3 CNV #2 #1 CNC #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 #3 CNC CNV These bits are used to select an interference check method in the cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation mode.
CNV 0 0 1 CNC 0 1 Operation Interference check is enabled. The direction and the angle of an arc are checked. Interference check is enabled. Only the angle of an arc is checked. Interference check is disabled.

For the operation taken when the interference check shows the occurrence of an reference (overcutting), see the description of bit 5 (CAV) of parameter No. 19607.

NOTE Checking of only the direction cannot be set.


#4 MCR If G41/G42 (cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation) is specified in the MDI mode, an alarm is: 0: Not raised. 1: Raised. (alarm PS5257)
- 1031 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE Cutter compensation/tool-nose radius compensation is not performed in the MDI mode, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
5010 Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from cutter or tool nose radius compensation

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Setting input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) When the tool moves around a corner in cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation mode, the limit for ignoring the small travel amount resulting from compensation is set. This limit eliminates the interruption of buffering caused by the small travel amount generated at the corner and any change in feedrate due to the interruption.
If Vx Vlimit and VY Vlimit, this vector is ignored.

Vx V Y
Even if Vx Vlimit and VY Vlimit, vector to single-block stop point remains.

Tool center path N1 Programmed path

N2

Vlimit is determined depending on the setting in parameter No. 5010.

5024

Number of tool compensation values

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values Set the maximum allowable number of tool compensation values used for each path. Ensure that the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths is within the number of compensation values usable in the entire system.

- 1032 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
If the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths exceeds the number of compensation values usable in the entire system, or 0 is set in parameter No. 5024 for all paths, the number of compensation values usable for each path is a value obtained by dividing the number of compensation values usable in the entire system by the number of paths. Tool compensation values as many as the number of compensation values used for each path are displayed on the screen. If tool compensation numbers more than the number of compensation values usable for each path are specified, an alarm is issued. For example, 200 tool compensation sets are used, 120 sets may be allocated to path 1 and 80 sets to path 2. All of 200 sets need not be used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 OFC #0 OFA

5042

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0 #1 OFA OFC These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset value.
For metric input Unit 0.01mm 0.001mm 0.0001mm For inch input Unit 0.001inch 0.0001inch 0.00001inch
#5 CAV #4 #3

OFC 0 0 1

OFA 1 0 0

Valid data range 9999.99mm 9999.999mm 9999.9999mm

OFC 0 0 1
#7 19607 NAG #6 NAA

OFA 1 0 0

Valid data range 999.999inch 999.9999inch 999.99999inch


#2 CCC #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 CCC In the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the outer corner connection method is based on: 0: Linear connection type. 1: Circular connection type. CAV When an interference check finds that interference (overcutting) occurred: 0: Machining stops with the alarm (PS0041). (Interference check alarm function) 1: Machining is continued by changing the tool path to prevent interference (overcutting) from occurring. (Interference check avoidance function)
- 1033 -

#5

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

For the interference check method, see the descriptions of bit 1 (CNC) of parameter No. 5008 and bit 3 (CNV) of parameter No. 5008. #6 NAA When the interference check avoidance function considers that an avoidance operation is dangerous or that a further interference to the interference avoidance vector occurs: 0: An alarm is issued. When an avoidance operation is considered to be dangerous, the alarm (PS5447) is issued. When a further interference to the interference avoidance vector is considered to occur, the alarm (PS5448) is issued. 1: No alarm is issued, and the avoidance operation is continued.

CAUTION When this parameter is set to 1, the path may be shifted largely. Therefore, set this parameter to 0 unless special reasons are present.
#7 NAG If the gap vector length is 0 when the interference check avoidance function for cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation is used: 0: Avoidance operation is performed. 1: Avoidance operation is not performed.
Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

19625

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 3 to 8 This parameter sets the number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode. When a value less than 3 is set, the specification of 3 is assumed. When a value greater than 8 is set, the specification of 8 is assumed. As a greater number of blocks are read, an overcutting (interference) forecast can be made with a command farther ahead. However, the number of blocks read and analyzed increases, so that a longer block processing time becomes necessary. Even if the setting of this parameter is modified in the MDI mode by stopping in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the setting does not become valid immediately. Before the new setting of this parameter can become valid, the cutter compensation/tool noise radius compensation mode must be canceled, then the mode must be entered again.

Alarm and message


Number PS0033 Message NO INTERSECTION AT CUTTER COMPENSATION NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP/EXT BLK Description The intersection cannot be obtained by the intersection calculation in cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify the program. In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, a startup or cancellation is performed in the G02 or G03 mode. Modify the program.

PS0034

- 1034 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
Message CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Description G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled. A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit override by address Q. The compensation plane G17/G18/G19 was changed during cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify the program. In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, excessive cutting may occur. Modify the program. Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in tool compensation. Modify the program. Corner circular interpolation (G39) of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation is not specified alone but is specified with a move command. Because there is no interference evade vector, the interference check evade function of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation cannot evade interference. The interference check evade function of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation determines that an evade operation will lead to danger. In the interference check evade function of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation, a further interference occurs for an already created interference evade vector.

Number PS0035

PS0037 PS0041 PS0042 PS5445

CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN G41/G42 INTERFERENCE IN CUTTER COMPENSATION G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC CAN NOT COMMAND MOTION IN G39 NO AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42

PS5446

PS5447

DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42 INTERFERENCE TO AVD. AT G41/G42

PS5448

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (For lathe system) (B-64304EN-1) OPERATORS MANUAL (For machining center system) (B-64304EN-2) Item name Overview of Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40-G42) Details of Tool Nose Radius Compensation Overview of Cutter Compensation (G40-G42) Details of Cutter Compensation

11.3.2
M

Tool Length Compensation

Overview
When the difference between the tool length assumed at the time of programming and the tool length of the tool actually used for machining is set in offset memory, the difference in tool length can be corrected without modifying the program. G43 and G44 specify the offset direction, and a number following the tool length compensation specification address (H code) specifies the tool length compensation amount set in the offset memory.

- 1035 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
Tool assumed at programming Actual tool

B-64303EN-1/02

Set this difference as tool length compensation amount

One of the following three methods is available, depending on the type of axis that can be subject to tool length compensation: Tool length compensation A Compensates the value of the tool length on the Z axis. Tool length compensation B Compensates the value of the tool length on one of the X, Y, and Z axis. Tool length compensation C Compensates the value of the tool length on a specified axis.

Parameter
#7 3104 #6 DAL #5 #4 DRL #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 DRL Relative position 0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset. 1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset. DAL Absolute position 0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset. 1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.
#7 5001 #6 EVO #5 #4 #3 TAL #2 #1 TLB #0 TLC

#6

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 TLC #1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.
Type Tool length compensation A Tool length compensation B Tool length compensation C TLB 0 1 TLC 0 0 1

The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to type as described below. Tool length compensation A : Z-axis at all times
- 1036 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
Tool length compensation B : Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19) Tool length compensation C : Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44

#3

TAL Tool length compensation C 0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset 1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset EVO If a tool compensation value modification is made for tool length compensation A or tool length compensation B in the offset mode (G43 or G44): 0: The new value becomes valid in a block where G43, G44, or an H code is specified next. 1: The new value becomes valid in a block where buffering is performed next.
#7 #6 LVK #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#6

5003

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 LVK Tool length compensation vector 0: Cleared by reset 1: Not cleared, but held by reset The tool length compensation vector in the tool axis direction is handled in the same way by this bit.

Alarm and message


Number PS0027 Message NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44 Description No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset type C. Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length offset type C. Multiple axes were specified for the same block when the tool length compensation type is C. For a tool length compensation C, an attempt was made to command the offset to other axes without canceling the offset. Or, for a tool length compensation C, multiple axes are specified in G43 or G44 block.

PS0336

TOOL COMPENSATION COMMANDED MORE TWO AXES

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (For machining center system) (B-64304EN-2) Tool length compensation Item name

- 1037 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

11.3.3
M

Tool Length Compensation Shift Types

Overview
A tool length offset operation can be performed by shifting the program coordinate system: The coordinate system containing the axis subject to tool length compensation is shifted by the tool length compensation value. A tool length compensation shift type can be selected with parameter TOS (parameter No. 5006#6). If no move command is specified together with the G43, G44, or G49 command, the tool will not move along the axis. If a move command is specified together with the G43, G44, or G49 command, the coordinate system will be shifted first, then the tool will move along the axis. One of the following three methods is available, depending on the type of axis that can be subject to tool length compensation: Tool length compensation A Compensates the value of the tool length on the Z axis. Tool length compensation B Compensates the value of the tool length on one of the X, Y, and Z axis. Tool length compensation C Compensates the value of the tool length on a specified axis.

Explanation
Offset direction
If the tool length compensation value specified with an H code (and stored in offset memory) is G43, the coordinate system is shifted to the + side; if G44, to the - side. If the sign of the tool length compensation value is -, the coordinate system is shifted to the - side if G43 and to the + side if G44. G43 and G44 are modal G codes; they remain valid until another G code in the same group is used.

Specifying a tool length compensation value

The tool length compensation value corresponding to the number (offset number) specified with an H code (and stored in offset memory) is used. The tool length compensation corresponding to the offset number 0 always means 0. It is not possible to set a tool length compensation value corresponding to H0.

Compensation axis

Specify one of tool length compensation types A, B, and C, using parameters TLC and TLB (No. 5001#0, #1).

Specifying offset on two or more axes

Tool length compensation B enables offset on two or more axes by specifying offset axes in multiple blocks. To perform offset on X and Y axes G19 G43 H_; Performs offset on the X axis.

G18 G43 H_;

Performs offset on the Y axis.

Tool length compensation C suppresses the generation of an alarm even if offset is performed on two or more axes at the same time, by setting TAL (No. 5001#3) to 1.

Tool length compensation cancel

To cancel offset, specify either G49 or H0. Canceling offset causes the shifting of the coordinate system to be undone. If no move command is specified at this time, the tool will not move along the axis.
- 1038 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

Staring and canceling tool length compensation

Once a command for starting or canceling tool length compensation (*2) is issued in a mode such as cutter compensation (*1), no look-ahead block interpretation is carried out until the tool length compensation start or cancel request block is finished. So, the following operations occur. The spindle decelerates to a stop in the start or cancel block. The compensation vector for tool compensation becomes perpendicular to the block just before the start or cancel block, resulting in an overcut or insufficient cut, because no look-ahead interpretation is carried out. No command specified after the start or cancel block is executed until the block is finished. *1 No look-ahead block interpretation is carried out for the following commands: G codes, except G40, in group 07 (for such modes as cutter compensation (G41/G42)) Smooth interpolation (G05.1Q2) mode The following commands are included. Tool length compensation (G43/G44)

*2

Operation when a tool compensation value is changed in the tool length compensation mode

Bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 can be used to specify what operation to perform when a tool length compensation value is changed (*3) in the cutter compensation mode (*1) and tool length compensation mode (*2). If bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 0: The axis is shifted by the amount of change in the tool length compensation value. If bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 1: Until an absolute command is issued to the compensated axis since the change of the tool length compensation value, the axis is shifted by the amount of change in the tool length compensation value. *1 The following commands are included. G codes, except G40, in group 07 Cutter compensation (G41/G42) The following commands are included. Tool length compensation (G43/G44) Changing a tool length compensation value pertains to: Issuing the H code in a program Changing a compensation value on the offset screen, by the G10 command, system variables, or the window function if bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 = 1.

*2 *3

Caution
CAUTION 1 Specifying tool length compensation (a shift type) first and then executing an incremental command causes the tool length compensation value to be reflected in the coordinates only, not in the travel distance of the machine; executing an absolute command causes the tool length compensation value to be reflected in both the movement of the machine and the coordinates. 2 If a programmable mirror image is effective, the tool length offset is applied in the specified direction. 3 No scaling magnification is applied to the tool length offset value. 4 No coordinate system rotation is applied to the tool length offset value. Tool length offset is effective in the direction in which the offset is applied.
- 1039 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

CAUTION 5 The tool length offset operation is independent of the cutter compensation offset operation. 6 With the WINDOW command, changing parameter TOS during automatic operation does not cause the tool length offset type to be changed. 7 If offset has been performed on two or more axes with tool length compensation B, a G49 command causes the offset to be canceled on all axes; H0 causes the offset to be canceled only on the axis vertical to the specified plane. 8 If the tool length compensation value is changed by changing the offset number, this simply means that the value is replaced by a new tool length compensation value; it does not mean that a new tool length compensation value is added to the old tool length compensation. 9 If using cutter compensation, set OFH (parameter No. 5001#2) to 0, specify tool length compensation with an H code, and specify cutter compensation with a D code. 10 If reference position return (G28 or G30) has been specified, tool length offset is canceled for the axis specified at the time of positioning on the reference point; however, tool length offset is not canceled for an un-specified axis. If reference position return has been specified in the same block as that containing tool length offset cancel (G49), tool length offset is canceled for both the specified and un-specified axes at the time of positioning on the mid-point. 11 With a machine coordinate system command (G53), tool length offset is canceled for the axis specified at the time of positioning on the specified point. 12 The tool length compensation vector canceled by specifying G53, G28, or G30 during tool length compensation is restored as described below: For tool length compensation types A and B, if parameter EVO (No. 5001#6) is 1, the vector is restored in the block buffered next; for all of tool length compensation types A, B, and C, it is restored in a block containing an H, G43, or G44 command if parameter is 0. 13 When a tool compensation shift type is used, no look-ahead interpretation is made if a command for starting or canceling compensation such as tool length compensation is issued in the cutter compensation mode. As a result, it is likely that an overcut or insufficient cut may occur. To avoid this problem, issue the command before the cutter compensation mode is entered or in a place where machining is not affected.

Parameter
#7 5000 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 MOF #0

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #1 MOF When the tool length compensation shift type (bit 6 (TOS) of parameter No. 5006 is set to 1) is used, if the tool length compensation amount is changed(NOTE 3) in the tool length compensation mode (NOTE 1) when look-ahead blocks are present(NOTE 2): 0: Compensation is performed for the change in compensation amount as the movement type. 1: Compensation is not performed for the change until a tool length compensation command (offset number) and an absolute command for the compensation axis are specified.
- 1040 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS NOTE 1 The tool length compensation mode refers to the following state: Tool length offset (G43/G44) 2 "When look-ahead blocks are present" means as follows: The modal G code of the G codes (such as tool radius/tool nose radius compensation) of group 07 is other than G40. One look-ahead block during automatic operation and multiple look-ahead blocks in the AI/ advanced preview control/AI contour control mode are not included in the state "when look-ahead blocks are present". 3 Changes in tool length compensation amount are as follows: When the tool length compensation number is changed by H code When G43 or G44 is specified to change the direction of tool length compensation When the tool length compensation amount is changed using the offset screen, G10 command, system variable, PMC window, and so forth during automatic operation if bit 1 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 is set to 1. When the tool length compensation vector that was canceled temporarily by G53, G28, or G30 during tool length compensation is recovered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 TAL #2 #1 TLB #0 TLC

5001

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 TLC #1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.
Type Tool length compensation A Tool length compensation B Tool length compensation C TLB 0 1 TLC 0 0 1

The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to type as described below. Tool length compensation A : Z-axis at all times Tool length compensation B : Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19) Tool length compensation C : Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44 #3 TAL Tool length compensation C 0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset 1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset

- 1041 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
#7 5006 #6 TOS #5 #4 #3 #2 #1

B-64303EN-1/02 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #6 TOS Set a tool length compensation operation. 0: Tool length compensation is performed by an axis movement. 1: Tool length compensation is performed by shifting the coordinate system.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (For machining center system) (B-64304EN-2) Item name Tool length compensation shift types

11.4

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

Tools are classified into several groups, and a tool life (use count or use duration) is specified for each group in advance. Each time a tool is used, its life is counted, and when the tool life expires, a new tool that is sequenced next within the same group is selected automatically. With this function, the tool life can be managed while machining is being performed continuously. Data for tool life management consists of tool group numbers, tool life values, tool numbers, and codes for specifying a tool offset value. These data items are registered in the CNC.

NOTE To use tool life management, set bit 0 (TLF) of parameter No. 8132 to 1.
Tool group number m Tool life value l Tool number (T) Code for specifying tool offset value (H/D) : : : : : : : : Machining program : : Command for selecting tool group m : : Tool change command (M06) : :

1 2 : : n

1st-tool management data 2nd-tool management data : : nth-tool management data Machine and CNC operations

Tool life management data Tool group number 1 : Select : tool. Tool group number m : : Tool group number p Fig. 11.4 (a)

Machine Places a selected tool in the wait state.

CNC Automatically selects, from tool group m, a tool whose life has not expired. Attaches the Starts counting the tool in the life of the tool wait state to attached to the the spindle spindle. (tool change).

Tool selection from machining program

A group is selected by a T code, and tool life counting is started by the M06 command.
- 1042 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

For the T series, depending on the tool replacement system (turret type or ATC type), a group is selected only by a T code, a tool compensation amount is specified, and tool life counting is started (turret type).

CAUTION This function cannot be used if bit 1 (LGN) of parameter No. 5002 is set to 1 to use the same number as the tool selection number to specify a geometric offset number. Maximum number of tool life management groups
A maximum of 128 tool life management groups can be used for each path. For each path, set a maximum number of groups to be used in parameter No. 6813. The maximum number of groups must be a multiple of the minimum number of groups (eight groups). If the setting is 0, 128 is assumed.
When tool life management is performed in a 2-path system (T series (2-path control)) Suppose that, of the total groups in the system (256 groups), 128 groups are allocated to path 1 and 128 groups to path 3. Then, set parameter No. 6813 Tool life management data file as follows: (256 groups in total in system) Parameter No. 6813 Path 1 Path 1 Up to 128 groups Set 128 in parameter Path 2 Path 2 Up to 128 groups Set 128 in parameter Fig. 11.4 (b) Group allocation in entire system

Remaining tool count check function

This function outputs the remaining tool count notification signal (TLAL<Fn154.0>) when the number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No. 6846.

Signal
Tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs that the life of the last tool in a group has expired. [Output cond.] The signal becomes "1" when: The life of the last tool in a group has expired, after tool change was performed each time the life of each tool in the group expired. The signal becomes "0" when: There is no group whose life has expired. When the signal is "1", it is reset to 0 by informing the CNC that tool change has been finished for all groups in which the life of all tools had expired, by inputting the tool change reset signal TLRST from the PMC or operating on the MDI.

- 1043 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

CAUTION If the tool life is specified by use count, the tool change signal TLCH becomes "1" when the CNC is reset by a command such as M02 or M30 after the tool life has expired or when the tool life count restart M code is issued. If the tool life is specified by duration, the TLCH becomes "1" when the tool life expires, even if machining is in progress. Machining, however, continues until the end of the program. Tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Clears all execution data, such as tool life count values and marks "*" and "@", for a group. After replacing all tools in the groups in which the life of all the tools has expired (as shown on the screen) with new ones, input this signal by specifying a group number, using the tool group number select signals (TL1 to TL512). Setting bit 4 (GRS) of parameter No. 6800 to 1 can clear execution data for all registered groups without inputting the tool group number select signal. Execution data can be cleared also by operating on the MDI. [Operation] When the signal changes from "0" to "1", the control unit behaves as explained below. If the lives of all tools in the group specified by the tool group number selection signals (TL1 to TL512) have expired, the related information is cleared. Therefore, when a subsequent program command specifies the group number, tools are selected from the beginning. If the group specified by the tool group number selection signals (TL1 to TL512) contains at least one tool whose life has not expired, no special operation takes place.

NOTE Set the tool change reset signal TLRST from "0" to "1" only when the control unit is not in the reset state (the RST signal is "1") and the following conditions are satisfied: 1) If bit 5 (TRS) of parameter No. 6805 = 0 Reset state (the OP signal is "0") 2) If bit 5 (TRS) of parameter No. 6805 = 1 <1> Reset state (the OP signal is "0") <2> Automatic operation stop state (the STL signal and the SPL signal are "0" and the OP signal is "1") <3> Automatic operation stop state (the STL signal and the SPL signal are "0") (In the automatic operation stop state, automatic operation pause state, and automatic operation start state (the STL signal is "1") during execution of a data setting command (G10 L3), however, the tool change reset signal TLRST is invalid.) Individual tool change signal TLCHI <Fn064.2>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] When the tool life count is specified by duration, this signal informs that the life of the currently used tool has expired. The signal can be used to cause an interrupt to program execution, to run a tool change program, and, after tool exchange, to resume the interrupted program execution.
- 1044 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

[Operation] The signal becomes "1" when: The life of the currently used tool has expired. The signal becomes "0" when: An individual tool change reset is executed.

Individual tool change reset signal TLRSTI <Gn048.6>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Resets the individual tool change signal TLCHI to "0". [Operation] When this signal becomes "1", the control unit behaves as explained below. The individual tool change signal is reset to0.

NOTE 1 These signals are valid only for tool life management in which the tool life count type is specification by duration. 2 The individual tool change signal TLCHI is not cleared by a reset. Tool skip signal TLSKP <Gn048.5>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Skips a tool whose life has not expired and selects the next tool forcibly. One of the following two methods can be selected according to the setting of bit 3 (SIG) of parameter No. 6800: (i) Specifying a group number by using the tool group number select signals (SIG = 1) Specify the group number of the tool to be skipped by using the tool group number selection signals (TL1 to TL512), then set the tool skip signal to "1". The next T code command will then select the next tool in the group which is specified to be skipped. (ii) Not specifying a group number by using the tool group number select signals (SIG = 0) Set the tool skip signal TLSKP to "1" without specifying any group number. The group to which the currently selected tool belongs is then assumed to be specified. The next T code command will select the next tool in the group for which the skip is specified. When the tool skip signal TLSKP is set to "1" for the last tool, the tool change signal TLCH is set to "1". [Operation] When this signal is set from "0" to "1", the control unit behaves as explained below: Among the tools whose lives have not expired in the group for which a skip operation is specified, the smallest tool number in the tool life management table is marked with "#". When the group is specified again by a T code command, the marked tool is skipped, and the next new tool is selected. When the tool skip signal TLSKP is set to "1" for the last tool, the tool change signal TLCH is set to "1".

CAUTION The tool skip signal TLSKP can be used even in the automatic operation start state (the STL signal is "1"), but a tool selection from a group by a T command is made when the command is buffered. This means that after the command is buffered, inputting the tool skip signal TLSKP does not select the next tool. Therefore, when supplying the tool skip signal TLSKP in the automatic operation start state (the STL signal is "1"), disable tool selection, for example, by suppressing buffering before setting the signal from "0" to "1".
- 1045 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS New tool select signal TLNW <Fn064.1>

B-64303EN-1/02

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that a new tool has been selected from a group. This signal can be used, for example, if the tool length offset value of a newly selected tool is to be measured automatically when the tool is selected. [Output cond.] The signal becomes "1" if: A new tool in a tool group specified with a tool group number by a T code command is selected because the life of the tool used so far in the group has expired. After the code signal for the new tool is sent out, the TLNW becomes "1" at the same time when the tool function strobe signal TF is sent out. The signal becomes "0" if: The completion signal FIN for the strobe signal TF becomes to "1" when the TLNW is "1".
T command Code signals T0 to T31 Strobe signal TF New tool select signal TLNW Completion signal FIN

Tool group number selection signals TL01 to TL128 <Gn047.0 to Gn047.7>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals specify a tool group number. Before the tool change reset signal TLRST or the tool skip signal TLSKP is input, the target group for the tool change reset operation or tool skip operation is specified with these signals. [Operation] The table given below shows the correspondence between tool group numbers and the tool group signals by providing several examples. A binary number plus 1 indicates a tool group number. A group with a specified number is then selected.
TL128 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 TL64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 TL32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 TL16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 TL8 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 TL4 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 TL2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 TL1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 Tool group number 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 100 127 128 200 256

- 1046 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

Tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <Gn049.0 to Gn050.1>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] If the life count is specified by duration, the life count can be overridden by setting bit 2 (LFV) of parameter No. 6800 = 1. Ten binary code signals are available, and they correspond to override values as follows: Override value =

{2i Vi}
i=0

times

Keep the override values within the range stated above. Where, if *TLVi is "1", Vi = 0 if *TLVi is "0", Vi = 1 Therefore, each signal has the following weight:
Signal *TLV0 *TLV1 *TLV2 *TLV3 *TLV4 *TLV5 *TLV6 *TLV7 *TLV8 *TLV9 Magnification 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.8 1.6 3.2 6.4 12.8 25.6 51.2

[Example] If *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are "0", the override value is calculated as follows: 12.8 + 6.4 + 0.8 = 20.0 So, the life count is multiplied by 20. If all signals are "1", the override value is 0. So, set an override value within the range from 0 to 99.9 in steps of 0.1. If 99.9 times is exceeded, the actual override value is clamped by 99.9 times. [Operation] The actual cutting time obtained by life counting specified by duration is multiplied by the override value specified by these signals, and the multiplication result is assumed to be the count time for tool life management. For example, let the override value be 0.1, and the actual cutting time be 1000 seconds. Then, the tool life count time is assumed to be 100 seconds.

Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Specifying a remaining life value to be used till selection of a new tool enables the tool life arrival notice signal to be issued when life counting shows that the remaining life value of a group (life value minus life counter value) becomes lower than or equal to the remaining life setting, in order to inform in advance that the tool life will expire soon. Bit 4 (ARL) of parameter No. 6802 can be used to specify when (that is, when the life of a specific tool has expired or when the life of the last tool in a specific tool group has expired) to output the tool life arrival notice signal. Parameters Nos. 6844 and 6845 are used for the remaining life setting. [Output cond.] The signal is set to "1" if: Remaining life (life value - life counter value) remaining life setting provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 0 Remaining life (life value - life counter value) = remaining life setting provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 1 The signal is reset to "0" if: Remaining life (life value - life counter value) > remaining life setting provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 0
- 1047 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
Remaining life (life value - life counter value) remaining life setting provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 1

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE 1 The signal changes when life counting is performed. 2 When using a life count override, reset bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 to 0. 3 When the life count is specified by duration, the unit of the remaining life and remaining life setting to be compared varies depending on the life count interval (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805). If the tool life is counted every second, the unit of the values to be compared is one minute; if the tool life is counted every 0.1 seconds, the unit of the values to be compared is 0.1 minutes. Tool life counting disable signal LFCIV<Gn048.2>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Disables tool life counting for selected tools. [Operation] If the signal "1", the control unit behaves as explained below. No life counting is performed for selected tools.

NOTE The tool life counting disable signal LFCIV<Gn048.2> is valid if bit 6 (LFI) of parameter No. 6804 is "1". Tool life counting disabled signal LFCIF<Fn093.2>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs that tool life counting is disabled for selected tools. [Output cond.] The signal becomes "1" when: Tool life counting is disabled because the tool life counting disable signal LFCIV is "1". The signal becomes "0" when: Tool life counting is enabled because the tool life counting disable signal LFCIV is "0".

Remaining tool count notification signal TLAL<Fn154.0>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies that the number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No. 6846. [Output cond.] This signal becomes 1 when: The number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No. 6846. This signal becomes 0: When parameter No. 6846 is set to a value When registration of life management data and removal of all groups by the G10 command is performed When a group containing more groups than the setting of parameter No. 6846 is selected by the T code command When one of the following operations is performed for the group that generates the tool remaining count notification signal <1> Execution data is cleared on the list screen of tool life management.
- 1048 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

<2> Tool groups are deleted in a batch, tool data is added, or tool data is cleared on the group editing screen of tool life management. <3> Execution data is cleared by tool replacement reset signal (TLRST<Gn048.7>). <4> Life management data is changed or deleted by the G10 command. <5> One of the following FOCAS2 functions is executed. (cnc_clrcntinfo, cnc_deltlifegrp, cnc_deltlifedt, cnc_instlifedt, cnc_wr1tlifedata, cnc_wr1tlifedat2, cnc_wr2tlifedata) [Example] When three tools are registered in a group, if the number of remaining tools is set to 1 (parameter No. 6846 is 1), then a timing chart of tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is shown below. Tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is output at the same time with the T code of the third tool.
First tool Second tool Third tool

T-code

TF

TLAL

Timing chart of the tool remaining count notification signal

NOTE When parameter No. 6846 is 0, tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is not output. Signal address
#7 G0046 Gn047 Gn048 Gn049 Gn050 #7 Fn064 Fn093 Fn154 #6 #5 #4 #3 TLCHB #2 TLCHI LFCIF TLAL TL128 TLRST *TLV7 #6 KEY4 TL64 TLRSTI *TLV6 #5 KEY3 TL32 TLSKP *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 #4 KEY2 TL16 #3 KEY1 TL08 TL04 LFCIV *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV9 #1 TLNW *TLV0 *TLV8 #0 TLCH TL02 TL01 #2 #1 #0

- 1049 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

Parameter
#7 6800 M6T #6 IGI #5 SNG #4 GRS #3 SIG #2 LTM #1 GS2 #0 GS1

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 GS1 #1 GS2 For the maximum number of groups set in parameter No. 6813, up to four tools can be registered per group. The combination of the number of registrable groups and the number of tools per group can be changed by setting GS1 and GS2.
GS2 0 0 1 1 GS1 0 1 0 1 Number of groups 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/8 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/4 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/2 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813) Number of tools 1 to 16 1 to 8 1 to 4 1 to 2

NOTE After changing these parameters, set data again by using G10 L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).
#2 LTM The tool life count is specified by: 0: Count. 1: Duration.

NOTE After changing this parameter, set data again by using G10 L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).
#3 SIG When a tool is skipped by a signal, the group number is: 0: Not input by the tool group number selection signals. 1: Input by the tool group number selection signals.

NOTE When this parameter is set to 0, a tool of the currently used group is skipped.
#4 GRS When the tool change reset signal (TLRST) is input: 0: If the life of the group specified by the tool group number selection signals has expired, the execution data of the group is cleared. 1: The execution data of all registered groups is cleared. If this parameter is set to 1, the execution data of all registered groups is cleared also when the clear operation to clear execution data is performed on the tool life management list screen. SNG When the tool skip signal (TLSKP) is input while a tool not controlled by the tool life management function is being used: 0: A tool of the most recently used group or a specified group (bit 3 (SIG) of parameter No. 6800) is skipped. 1: The tool skip signal is ignored.
- 1050 -

#5

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
IGI Tool back numbers are: 0: Not ignored. 1: Ignored.

#6

#7

M6T A T code specified in the same block as M06 is: 0: Assumed to be a back number. 1: Assumed to be a command specifying the next tool group.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 EMD EMD #2 LVF LVF #1 TSM #0

6801

M6E M6E

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 TSM In the tool life management function, life counting is performed as follows when more than one offset is specified: 0: Counting is performed for each tool number. 1: Counting is performed for each tool. LVF When the life value is counted by duration in the tool life management function, tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <G049.0 to G050.1> are: 0: Not used. 1: Used. EMD In the tool life management function, the mark "*" indicating that the life has expired is displayed when: 0: The next tool is used. 1: The life has just expired.

#2

#3

NOTE If this parameter is set to 0, the "@" mark (indicating that the tool is in use) is kept displayed unless the next tool whose life has not expired is used. If this parameter is set to 1, marks are displayed in different ways depending on the life count type. If the life count type is the duration specification type, the "*" mark (indicating that the life has expired) appears when the life has expired. If the life count type is the count specification type, one count is not assumed until the end of the program (M02, M30, and so on). Therefore, even when the life value and the tool life counter value match, the "*" mark (life has expired) does not appear. The "*" mark (life has expired) appears when the tool is used again by a tool group command (T code) or tool change command (M06) issued after the CNC is reset.
#7 M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06: 0: The T code is treated as a back number or the group number to be selected next. Which number is assumed depends on the setting of bit 7 (M6T) of parameter No. 6800. 1: Life counting for the tool group starts immediately.

- 1051 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
#7 6802 RMT #6 TSK #5 #4 #3 #2 E17 #1 TCO

B-64303EN-1/02 #0 T99

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 T99 When M99 of the main program is executed, and there is a the life was expired tool group: 0: The tool change signal is not output. 1: The tool change signal is output, and the automatic operation becomes a stopped state. If the life count is specified by use count and this parameter 1, the tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0> is output and the automatic operation becomes a stopped state if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the M99 command is specified. If the life count type is the duration specification type, the automatic operation becomes a stopped state if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the M99 command is specified.
M

If the life count is specified by use count, after the M99 command is specified, a tool group command (T code) selects, from a specified group, a tool whose life has not expired, and the next tool change command (M06) increments the tool life counter by one.
T

If the life count is specified by use count, when a tool group command (T code) is specified after the M99 command is specified, a tool whose life has not expired is selected from a specified group, and the tool life counter is incremented by one. #1 TCO #2 E17 Specifies whether to allow the FOCAS2 or PMC window function to write tool information of a group being used or a group to be used next during automatic operation (the OP signal is set to "1").
6802#1(TCO) 1 6802#2(E17) 1 0

Condition

During automatic operation

Group being used or to be used next

Tool being used Tool not being used Group neither being used nor to be used next Not during automatic operation

: : :

Tool information can be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window. Tool information cannot be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window. When an attempt is made to write tool information from PMC window, completion code 13 (REJECT ALARM) is returned. Tool information cannot be cleared.

- 1052 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS NOTE When tool information of a tool being used (marked with "@") in the group being used or to be used next or tool information of the most recently used tool (marked with "@") in a group that is neither the group being used nor the group to be used next is cleared, the life counter is reset to 0. It is possible to modify tool information of a tool in the group to be used next. However, because tool selection is already completed, the selected tool does not change even when the tool information is modified. This parameter has no influence on modifications to tool information by edit operations from the tool life management screen.

#6

TSK If the count type in tool life management is the duration type, then when the last tool of a group is skipped by a signal: 0: The count value for the last tool equals the life value. 1: The count value for the last tool remains unchanged. RMT The tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB is switched under the following conditions: 0: The signal is turned 1 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is smaller than or equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is turned 0 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is greater than the remaining life setting. 1: The signal is turned 1 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is turned 0 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is not equal to the remaining life setting.

#7

NOTE When using the life count override feature, set bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 to 0. When the life count is specified by duration, the unit used for determining the result of comparison between the remaining life and the remaining life setting varies depending on the life count interval (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805). If the life is counted every second, the comparison is made in units of 1 minute; if the life is counted every 0.1 second, the comparison is made in units of 0.1 minute.
#7 6804 #6 LFI #5 #4 #3 #2 ETE #1 TCI #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 TCI During automatic operation (the OP signal is "1"), editing of tool life data is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

- 1053 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, tool life data can be edited even during automatic operation (the OP signal is "1"). If the target group for editing is the group being used or the group to be used next, however, only presetting of the life counter is permitted, and other data cannot be modified.
#2 ETE In the tool life management screen, the mark of the tool at the life was expired of the final tool in the group : 0: depends on setting parameter EMD (No.6801#3). 1: is "*" mark. If bit 2 (ETE) of parameter No. 6804 is set to 1, when the life counter of the final tool in the group becomes equal to the life value, display mark "*" in the final tool of the tool life management screen. When tool change signal TLCH<Fn064.0> is "1", the state of the life was expired of the tool can be read by reading tool information on the final tool in FOCAS2 or the PMC window. LFI In tool life management, counting of the life of a selected tool is: 0: Enabled. 1: Enabled or disabled according to the status of tool life counting disable signal LFCIV<G048.2>.
#7 6805 TAD #6 TRU #5 TRS #4 #3 #2 #1 FGL #0 FCO

#6

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 FCO If the life count type is the duration specification type, the life is counted as follows: 0: Every second. 1: Every 0.1 second. According to the setting of this parameter, the increment system of life values and tool life counter values displayed on the tool life management screen is set as follows:
Parameter FCO Increment system for display and setting of life values and life counter values 0 1-minute increments 1 0.1-minute increments

NOTE After changing the setting of this parameter, set data again by using G10L3;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).
#1 FGL If the life count type is the duration specification type, life data registered by G10 is: 0: In one-minute increments. 1: In 0.1-second increments.

- 1054 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

#5

TRS Tool change reset signal TLRST is valid when reset signal RST is not "1" and: 0: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0") is observed. 1: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0"), automatic operation stop state (The STL and SPL signals are "0" and the OP signal is "1"), or the automatic operation pause state (the STL signal is "0" and the SPL signal is "1") is observed. The TLRST signal, however, is invalid when the automatic operation stop state, automatic operation pause state, and automatic operation start state (the STL signal is "1") is observed during execution of a data setting command (G10L3). TRU When the life count type is the duration specification type, and the life is counted every second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 is set to 0): 0: Cutting time less than one second is discarded and is not counted. 1: Cutting time less than one second is rounded up and is counted as one second.

#6

NOTE If the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 is set to 1), cutting time less than 0.1 second is always rounded up and is counted as 0.1 second.
#7 TAD With tool change type D (bit 7 (M6E) of parameter No. 6801 is set to 1), when a block specifying M06 contains no T command: 0: An alarm PS0153 is issued. 1: No alarm is issued.
Tool life management ignore number

6810

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the tool life management ignore number. When the value specified in a T code exceeds the value set in this parameter, the value obtained by subtracting the parameter-set value from the T code value is assumed to be the tool group number for tool life management.
6811 Tool life count restart M code

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 127 (except 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99) When 0 is specified, it is ignored. When the life is specified by count, the tool change signal (TLCH) is output if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the tool life count restart M code is issued. The T code (tool life management group command) specified after the tool life count restart M code selects a tool whose life has not expired from a specified group, and the next M06 command increments the tool life counter by one. When the life is specified by duration, specifying the tool life count restart M code causes nothing. When 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life count restart M code is invalid. When the data of M code exceeds 127 values, set 0 in parameter No.6811, and set the value of M code in parameter No.13221. The data range of parameter No.13221 is from 0 to 255.

- 1055 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
6813 Maximum number of groups in tool life management

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective.
[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Parameter input Word path Group 0, 8, 16 to 128 This parameter sets the maximum number of groups to be used for each path. As the maximum number of groups, set a multiple of eight. When this parameter is 0, 128 groups are set. Up to 128 groups can be set for each path.

NOTE If the power is turned on after this parameter is changed, all data in the tool life management file is initialized. Therefore, the life management data of all paths that use the tool life management function must be set.
6844 Remaining tool life (use count)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] This range is the same as the tool life range. This parameter sets a remaining tool life (use count) used to output the tool life arrival notice signal when the tool life is specified by use count. If a value greater than the tool life value or 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life arrival notice signal is not output.
6845 Remaining tool life (use duration)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word path min Not greater than the tool life value This parameter sets the remaining tool life (use duration) used to output the tool life arrival notice signal when the tool life is specified by use duration. If a value greater than the tool life value or 0 is specified in this parameter, the tool life arrival notice signal is not output.

NOTE When the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 = 1), the parameter value is in 0.1-minute increments.
6846

Number of remaining group tools

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 127 This parameter sets the number of remaining group tools.

- 1056 -

B-64303EN-1/02

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
If the number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to or less than the setting of this parameter, tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is output. When this parameter is set to 0, tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is not output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TLF

8132

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 TLF Tool life management is: 0: Not Used. 1: Used.
M code for tool life count restart

13221

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 255 (except 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99) This parameter is ignored if it is 0. See descriptions of parameter No. 6811 for explanations about the operation of the tool life count restart M code. This parameter is used if the restart M code exceeds 127. Reset parameter No. 6811 to 0, and set this parameter with an M code value.
13265 H code for enabling tool length compensation in tool life management

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 Usually, issuing H99 makes the H code for a tool in current use usable for tool length compensation. Specifying an arbitrary H code with this parameter causes the specified H code to be used in place of H99. If 0 is specified with this parameter, H99 is assumed. The valid data range is 0 to 9999.
13266 D code for enabling cutter compensation in tool life management

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 Usually, issuing D99 makes the D code for a tool in current use usable for cutter compensation. Specifying an arbitrary D code with this parameter causes the specified D code to be used in place of D99. If 0 is specified with this parameter, D99 is assumed. The valid data range is 0 to 9999.

- 1057 -

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

B-64303EN-1/02

Alarm and message


Number PS0149 PS0150 Message FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 ILLEGAL LIFE GROUP NUMBER Description In registration (G10L3 to G11) of tool life management data, an address other than Q1, Q2, P1, and P2 or an unusable address was specified. The tool group number exceeded the maximum allowable value. The tool group number (P after specification of G10 L3;) or the group number given by the tool life management T code in a machining program. The tool group specified in a machining program is not set in tool life management data. The number of tools registered in one group exceeded the maximum allowable registration tool number. In registration of tool life data, a block in which the T code needs to be specified does not include the T code. Alternatively, in tool exchange method D, M06 is specified solely. Modify the program. The H99 command, D99 command, or the H/D code set by parameters No. 13265 and No. 13266 was specified when no tool belonging to a group is used. The T code specified in the same block as M06 in the machining program does not correspond to the block currently being used. Modify the program. The P and L commands are not specified in the beginning of a program for setting a tool group. Modify the program. In registration of tool life management data, the group setting command block counts of P (group number) and L (tool life) exceeded the maximum group count. The life value that is being set is too large. Change the setting. Tool life management data is corrupted for some reason. Register the tool data in the tool group or the tool data in the group again by G10L3; or MDI input. The arbitrary group number (T) or remaining amount setting (R) is invalid. The maximum number of tool life management pairs is exceeded. Modify the setting of the maximum number of tool life management pairs in parameter No. 6813.

PS0151 PS0152 PS0153

GROUP NOT FOUND AT LIFE DATA OVER MAXIMUM TOOL NUMBER T-CODE NOT FOUND

PS0154 PS0155 PS0156 PS0157 PS0158 PS0159 PS0431 IO1104

NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS TOOL LIFE VALUE OUT OF RANGE ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA ILLEGAL T/R DATA OF TOOL LIFE OVER MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE PAIRS

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Tool life management Item name

- 1058 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

12
12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 12.12 12.13 12.14 12.15 12.16 12.17 12.18 12.19

PROGRAM COMMAND
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING .........................................................................................................1059 G CODE SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................1061 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................1067 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS.........1069 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ...............................................................................................1070 CUSTOM MACRO....................................................................................................................1075 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING.........................................................................................1096 CANNED CYCLE (T Series) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T Series)......1111 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M Series) ...........................................1120 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) .............................................1121 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T Series) ...........................................................1126 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M Series) ...................................................................................1128 SCALING (M Series).................................................................................................................1138 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (M Series) ..................................................................1145 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER...........................................................................1146 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M Series) ...................1147 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T Series) ........................................................1148 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T Series)........................................1150 PATTERN DATA INPUT .........................................................................................................1152

Chapter 12, "PROGRAM COMMAND", consists of the following sections:

12.1
Overview

DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING

Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses: X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C,I,J,K,Q,R,F .......M series (for a type common to all axes) X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C,I,J,K,R,F ...........Lathe system There are two types of decimal point notation: calculator-type notation and standard notation. When calculator-type decimal point notation is used, a value without decimal point is considered to be specified in millimeters, inches or degree. When standard decimal point notation is used, such a value is considered to be specified in least input increments. Select either calculator-type or standard decimal point notation by using the parameter DPI (No. 3401#0). Setting the parameter AXDx (No. 3455#0) to 1 enables the calculator-type decimal input to be set up for individual axes separately. Values can be specified both with and without decimal point in a single program.
Program command X1000 Command value without decimal point X1000.0 Command value with decimal point Pocket calculator type decimal point programming 1000mm Unit : mm 1000mm Unit : mm Standard type decimal point programming 1mm Unit : Least input increment (0.001mm) 1000mm Unit : mm

- 1059 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

Parameter
#7 3401 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DPI

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point 0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point input) 1: The unit of mm, inches, degree, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type decimal point input)
#7 3455 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 AXDx

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #0 AXDx If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address with which a decimal point can be used, the value is determined: 0: In accordance with the least input increment. (Normal decimal point input) 1: In millimeters, inches, or seconds. (calculator-type decimal point input)

NOTE This parameter specifies the calculator-type decimal point input function for each axis.

Alarm and message


Number PS0007 Message ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT Description A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were specified.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Decimal point programming Item name

- 1060 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

12.2
12.2.1
T

G CODE SYSTEM
G Code List in the Lathe System

Overview
There are three G code systems : A,B, and C. Select a G code system using parameter GSC (No. 3401#7) and parameter GSB (No. 3401#6).
Table 12.2.1 (a) G code list A G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05.4 G07.1 (G107) G08 G09 G10 G11 G12.1 (G112) G13.1 (G113) G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G25 G26 G27 G28 G30 G31 G32 G34 G36 G37 G39 G40 G41 G42 G50 G50.3 G code system B G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05.4 G07.1 (G107) G08 G09 G10 G11 G12.1 (G112) G13.1 (G113) G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G25 G26 G27 G28 G30 G31 G33 G34 G36 G37 G39 G40 G41 G42 G92 G92.1 C G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05.4 G07.1 (G107) G08 G09 G10 G11 G12.1 (G112) G13.1 (G113) G17 G18 G19 G70 G71 G22 G23 G25 G26 G27 G28 G30 G31 G33 G34 G36 G37 G39 G40 G41 G42 G92 G92.1 Group Function Positioning (Rapid traverse) Linear interpolation (Cutting feed) Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW Dwell HRV3 on/off Cylindrical interpolation 00 Advanced preview control Exact stop Programmable data input Programmable data input mode cancel Polar coordinate interpolation mode 21 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode 16 06 09 08 XpYp plane selection ZpXp plane selection YpZp plane selection Input in inch Input in mm Stored stroke check function on Stored stroke check function off Spindle speed fluctuation detection off Spindle speed fluctuation detection on Reference position return check Return to reference position 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return Skip function Threading Variable lead threading Automatic tool offset (X axis) Automatic tool offset (Z axis) Tool nose radius compensation: corner rounding interpolation Tool nose radius compensation : cancel Tool nose radius compensation : left Tool nose radius compensation : right Coordinate system setting or max spindle speed clamp Workpiece coordinate system preset

01

00

01

07 00

- 1061 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Table 12.2.1 (a) G code list A G50.2 (G250) G51.2 (G251) G50.4 G50.5 G50.6 G51.4 G51.5 G51.6 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G61 G63 G64 G65 G66 G67 G68 G69 G70 G71 G72 G73 G74 G75 G76 G71 G72 G73 G74 G80 G81 G82 G83 G83.1 G84 G84.2 G85 G87 G88 G89 G code system B G50.2 (G250) G51.2 (G251) G50.4 G50.5 G50.6 G51.4 G51.5 G51.6 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G61 G63 G64 G65 G66 G67 G68 G69 G70 G71 G72 G73 G74 G75 G76 G71 G72 G73 G74 G80 G81 G82 G83 G83.1 G84 G84.2 G85 G87 G88 G89 C G50.2 (G250) G51.2 (G251) G50.4 G50.5 G50.6 G51.4 G51.5 G51.6 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G61 G63 G64 G65 G66 G67 G68 G69 G72 G73 G74 G75 G76 G77 G78 G72 G73 G74 G75 G80 G81 G82 G83 G83.1 G84 G84.2 G85 G87 G88 G89 10 Group Polygon turning cancel 20 Polygon turning Function

B-64303EN-1/02

00

14

15 00 12 04

00

01

10

Cancel synchronous control Cancel composite control Cancel superimposed control Start synchronous control Start composite control Start superimposed control Local coordinate system setting Machine coordinate system setting Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection Exact stop mode Tapping mode Cutting mode Macro call Macro modal call Macro modal call cancel Mirror image on for double turret or balance cutting mode Mirror image off for double turret or balance cutting mode cancel Finishing cycle Stock removal in turning Stock removal in facing Pattern repeating cycle End face peck drilling cycle Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling cycle Multiple-thread cutting cycle Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machine) Traverse direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine) Oscillation grinding cycle (for grinding machine) Oscillation direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine) Canned cycle cancel for drilling Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation Spot drilling (FS10/11-T format) Electronic gear box : synchronization start Counter boring (FS10/11-T format) Cycle for face drilling High-speed peck drilling cycle (FS10/11-T format) Cycle for face tapping Rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11-T format) Cycle for face boring Cycle for side drilling Cycle for side tapping Cycle for side boring

- 1062 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Table 12.2.1 (a) G code list G code system B G77 G78 G79 G91.1 G96 G97 G96.1 G96.2 G96.3 G96.4 G94 G95 G90 G91 G98 G99

A G90 G92 G94 G91.1 G96 G97 G96.1 G96.2 G96.3 G96.4 G98 G99 -

C G20 G21 G24 G91.1 G96 G97 G96.1 G96.2 G96.3 G96.4 G94 G95 G90 G91 G98 G99

Group

Function Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle Threading cycle End face turning cycle Maximum specified incremental amount check Constant surface speed control Constant surface speed control cancel Spindle indexing execution (waiting for completion) Spindle indexing execution (not waiting for completion) Spindle indexing completion check SV speed control mode ON Feed per minute Feed per revolution Absolute programming Incremental programming Canned cycle : return to initial level Canned cycle : return to R point level

01 00 02

00

05 03 11

12.2.2
M
G code

G Code List in the Machining Center System


Table 12.2.2 (a) G code list Function Positioning (rapid traverse) Linear interpolation (cutting feed) Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW Dwell, Exact stop AI advanced preview control / AI contour control HRV3 on/off Cylindrical interpolation Exact stop Programmable data input Programmable data input mode cancel Polar coordinates command cancel Polar coordinates command Xp: X axis or its parallel axis XpYp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis ZpXp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis YpZp plane selection Input in inch Input in mm Stored stroke check function on Stored stroke check function off Reference position return check Automatic return to reference position Movement from reference position 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return Skip function Threading Automatic tool length measurement Cutter compensation : corner circular interpolation

Group 01

G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05.1 G05.4 G07.1 (G107) G09 G10 G11 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G33 G37 G39

00

17 02 06 04

00

01 00

- 1063 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
G code G40 G41 G42 G40.1 G41.1 G42.1 G43 G44 G45 G46 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 G50.1 G51.1 G52 G53 G54 G54.1 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G60 G61 G62 G63 G64 G65 G66 G67 G68 G69 G73 G74 G75 G76 G77 G78 G79 Group 07 Table 12.2.2 (a) G code list Function Cutter compensation : cancel Cutter compensation : left Cutter compensation : right Normal direction control cancel mode Normal direction control on : left Normal direction control on : right Tool length compensation + Tool length compensation Tool offset : increase Tool offset : decrease Tool offset : double increase Tool offset : double decrease Tool length compensation cancel Scaling cancel Scaling Programmable mirror image cancel Programmable mirror image Local coordinate system setting Machine coordinate system setting Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection Additional workpiece coordinate system selection Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection Single direction positioning Exact stop mode Automatic corner override Tapping mode Cutting mode Macro call Macro modal call Macro modal call cancel Coordinate system rotation mode on Coordinate system rotation mode off Peck drilling cycle Left-handed tapping cycle Plunge grinding cycle (for grinding machine) Fine boring cycle Plunge direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine) Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle (for grinding machine) Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle (for grinding machine)

B-64303EN-1/02

19 08

00 08 11 22 00

14

00 15 00 12 16 09 01 09 01

- 1064 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Group Table 12.2.2 (a) G code list Function Canned cycle cancel Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation Drilling cycle or spot boring cycle Electronic gear box : synchronization start Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle Rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format) Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format) Boring cycle Boring cycle Back boring cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle Absolute programming Incremental programming Checking the maximum incremental amount specified Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed Workpiece coordinate system preset Inverse time feed Feed per minute Feed per revolution Constant surface speed control Constant surface speed control cancel Canned cycle : return to initial level Canned cycle : return to R point level In-feed control cancel (for grinding machine) In-feed control (for grinding machine)

G code G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G84.2 G84.3 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 G90 G91 G91.1 G92 G92.1 G93 G94 G95 G96 G97 G98 G99 G160 G161

09

03 00

05 13 10 20

Parameter
#7 3401 GSC #6 GSB #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 GSB The G code system is set. #7 GSC
GSC 0 0 1
#7 3402 G23 G23 #6 CLR CLR G70

GSB 0 1 0
#5 #4 FPM #3 G91 G91

G code G code system A G code system B G code system C


#2 G19 #1 G18 #0 G01 G01

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

- 1065 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#0

B-64303EN-1/02

G01 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: G00 mode (positioning) 1: G01 mode (linear interpolation) G18 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: G17 mode (plane XY) 1: G18 mode (plane ZX) G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: The setting of bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 is followed. 1: G19 mode (plane YZ) When this bit is set to 1, set bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 to 0.
G19 0 0 1 G18 0 1 0 G17, G18, or G19 mode G17 mode (X-Y plane) G18 mode (Z-X plane) G19 mode (Y-Z plane)

#1

#2

#3

G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: G90 mode (absolute command) 1: G91 mode (incremental command) FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state: 0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution) is set. 1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute) is set. G70 The commands for inch input and metric input are: 0: G20 (inch input) and G21 (metric input). 1: G70 (inch input) and G71 (metric input). CLR Reset button on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and emergency stop signal 0: Cause reset state. 1: Cause clear state. For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the Operators Manual. G23 When the power is turned on 0: G22 mode (stored stroke check on) 1: G23 mode (stored stroke check off)

#4

#5

#6

#7

Alarm and message


Number PS0010 Message IMPROPER G-CODE Description An unusable G code is specified.

- 1066 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Note
NOTE 1 When the power is turned on or the cleared state is set by a reset (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1), modal G codes are placed in the following states: (1) G codes marked with in Table 12.2 are enabled. (2) When the system is cleared due to power-on or reset, whichever specified, either G20 or G21, remains effective. (3) Parameter G23 (No. 3402#7) is used to specify whether G22 or G23 is to be selected upon power-on. The selection of G22 or G23 is not, however, changed when the CNC is cleared upon a reset. When the system is cleared due to reset, whichever specified, either G22 or G23, remains effective. 2 G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are single-shot G codes. 3 Alarm PS0010 is displayed when a G code not listed in the G code list is specified or a G code without a corresponding option is specified. 4 G codes of different groups can be specified in the same block. If G codes of the same group are specified in the same block, the G code specified last is valid. 5 If a G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the canned cycle is canceled in the same way as when a G80 command is specified. G codes of group 01 are not affected by G codes for specifying a canned cycle. 6 When G code system A is used for a canned cycle, only the initial level is provided at the return point. 7 G codes are displayed for each group number.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Item name Preparatory function (G function) Status when turning power on, when clear and when reset

12.3
Overview

PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

A program consists of the following components:


Table 12.3 (a) Components Program code start Leader section Program start Program section Comment section Program code end Program components Descriptions Symbol indicating the start of a program file Used for the title of a program file, etc. Symbol indicating the start of a program Commands for machining Comments or directions for the operator Symbol indicating the end of a program file

- 1067 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Leader section Program code start % TITLE

B-64303EN-1/02

Program start

O0001 ;

Program section

(COMMENT)

Comment section

M30 %

; Program code end

Fig. 12.3 (a)

Program configuration

Parameter
#7 0100 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 CTV #0

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program. 0: Performed 1: Not performed
#7 3201 #6 NPE #5 N99 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #5 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, program registration is assumed to be: 0: Completed 1: Not completed NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be: 0: Completed 1: Not completed
#7 3404 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 SBP #1 #0

#6

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 SBP In an external device subprogram call (M198), the address P format is based on: 0: File number specification 1: Program number specification

NOTE In memory card operation, the program number specification format is used, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
- 1068 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
M code to execute external device subprogram calls

6030

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used. M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used to execute external device subprogram calls.

Alarm and message


Number SR0001 TH ERROR Message Description A TH error was detected during reading from an input device. The read code that caused the TH error and how many statements it is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics screen. An error was detected during the singleblock TV error. The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter No. 0000#0 to 0. The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a block. This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the end of the NC program is read.

SR0002

TV ERROR

PS5010

END OF RECORD

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Program configuration Item name

12.4

PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS

The following table lists the combinations of program storage sizes and the total number of registrable programs.

Series 0i-TD
Model Item Part program storage size 320Kbyte 512Kbyte 1Mbyte (2-path control) 400 800 (2-path control) Series 0i-TD Package 1 Package 2

Number of registerable programs

Series 0i-MD
Model Item Part program storage size Number of registerable programs 320Kbyte 512Kbyte 2Mbyte 400 Package 1 Series 0i-MD Package 2 Option

- 1069 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND Series 0i Mate


Model Item Part program storage size Number of registerable programs 512Kbyte 400 Series 0i Mate

B-64303EN-1/02

Program O0001
O0001 ; N1 G01 ;

First page

(Area in use)
N100 ;

Second page

(Area in use)
M30 ;

(Area in use) (Unused area)

Last page

Unusable for any other program Example of creating program O0001

NOTE 1 The program storage size means the maximum size of a program if the program is the one and only program registered. 2 If more than one program is registered, the total size of registerable programs reduces for the following reason. The Series 0i-D manage programs in page units. The unit of program storage is managed also in page units. When a program is created, as many pages as necessary to store the program are secured, and the program is stored on these pages. Generally, the last program storage page has an unused area (Fig. 1). This unused area cannot be used to store any other program. For the sake of program management, it is regarded as an area in use. The Series FS0i-C uses a similar way of management, but the unit of pages in it differs from that in the FS0i-D. So, if more than one program is registered in the Series 0i-D, the total program size of registerable programs in the Series 0i-D differs from that in the FS0i-C.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Program management Item name

12.5
Overview

INCH/METRIC CONVERSION

Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code. Conventionally, inch/metric switching must be performed at the reference position (machine coordinate system origin). However, setting bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 to 1 enables inch/metric switching to be performed in the reference position (parameter No. 1240). However, it is necessary to enable (set bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 to 0) the workpiece coordinate system.

- 1070 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Setting bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 enables inch/metric switching to be performed even in positions other than the reference position. However, it is necessary to enable (set bit 0 (NWZ) and bit 1 (NWC) of parameter No. 8136 to 0 and 1, respectively) the workpiece coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system presetting.

Signal
Inch input signal INCH<Fn002.0>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is active. [Output cond.] "1"indicates that the inch input mode (G20) is in progress, and "0" indicates that metric input mode (G21) is in progress. This signal changes to the corresponding state when modes are switched using the setting data display on the MDI panel.

Signal address
#7 Fn002 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 INCH

Parameter
#7 0000 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 INI #1 #0

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #2 INI Unit of input 0: In metrics 1: In inches
#7 1001 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 INM

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis 0: In mm (metric system machine) 1: In inches (inch system machine)
#7 1006 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ROSx #0 ROTx

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
- 1071 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotation axis. #1 ROSx
ROSx 0 ROTx 0 Meaning

B-64303EN-1/02

Linear axis (1) Inch/metric conversion is done. (2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360) (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.3624) Rotation axis (A type) (1) Inch/metric conversion is not done. (2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360. Absolute coordinate values are rounded or not rounded by parameter No.1008#0(ROAx) and #2(RRLx). (3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter No.3624) (4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one rotation. Rotation axis (B type) (1) Inch/metric conversion, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are not done. (2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360). (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.3624) (4) Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index table indexing function (M series) Setting is invalid (unused)

Except for the above. #7 3104

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0 MCN

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MCN Machine position 0: Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inch machines. 1: When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm, and when input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.
#7 3405 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 AUX

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format or with a decimal point, the multiplication factor for a value output (onto the code signal) relative to a specified value is such that: 0: The same multiplication factor is used for both of metric input and inch input. 1: A multiplication factor used for inch input is 10 times greater than that used for metric input. When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format or with a decimal point, the value output onto the code signal is a specified value multiplied by a value indicated below.
Increment system IS-A for reference axis Metric input IS-B for reference axis system IS-C for reference axis IS-A for reference axis Inch input IS-B for reference axis system IS-C for reference axis Parameter AUX=0 100 times 1000 times 10000 times 100 times 1000 times 10000 times Parameter AUX=1 100 times 1000 times 10000 times 1000 times 10000 times 100000 times

- 1072 -

B-64303EN-1/02 #7 8136 #6 #5 #4 #3

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#2 #1 NWC #0 NWZ

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 NWZ Workpiece coordinate system is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used. NWC Workpiece coordinate system preset is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.
#7 11222 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 CIM #0 NIM

#1

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 NIM Automatic conversion of a coordinate system by an inch/metric conversion command (G20 or G21) is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. #1 CIM When an inch/metric conversion command (G20 or G21) is specified, if the workpiece coordinate system is shifted by the shift amount as described below: 0: An alarm (PS1298) is issued. 1: Clearing is performed. If bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 is set to 1, or if bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 is set to 1, this parameter clears the following: Manual intervention made when the manual absolute signal is off Issuance of a move command with the machine locked Movement by handle interrupt Operation with a mirror image Shifting of a workpiece coordinate system when a local coordinate system or workpiece coordinate system is set up
#7 14000 IMAx #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 IRFx #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.

- 1073 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#2 IRFx An inch-metric switch command (G20, G21) at the reference position is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

B-64303EN-1/02

When this function is enabled for an axis, if an attempt to switch between the inch and metric unit is made although the tool is not at the reference position on that axis, an alarm (PS5362) is issued, and switching between the inch and metric unit is canceled. Be sure to move the tool to the reference position by, for example, specifying G28 before switching between the inch and metric unit.

NOTE 1 This function enables the inch/metric switching commands (G20 and G21) at the reference position. It does not enable the switching of the setting input unit (bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000). 2 Swithching between inch and metric by setting the setting input unit (bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000) is enabled only when the machine coordinate of the first reference position is 0 (parameter No. 1240 is 0) and presence on the first reference position is assumed. For a system in which the machine coordinate of the first reference position is not 0, set this parameter to 1 and specify G20/G21 in the first reference position to switch between inch and metric.
#7 IMAx When switching between inch and millimeter was performed in a position other than the reference position: 0: An alarm occurs. 1: No alarm occurs.

NOTE Set this parameter to 1 for the rotation axis or other axes not related to inch/millimeter switching.

Warning
WARNING When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and vice versa, tool compensation values are automatically converted and need not be re-set.

Note
NOTE 1 When the least input increment and the least command increment systems are different, the maximum error is half of the least command increment. This error is not accumulated. 2 The inch and metric input can also be switched using bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000. 3 If a function selected using bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 or bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 is not used, be sure to perform inch/metric switching at the reference position (machine coordinate system origin).

- 1074 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Alarm and message


Number PS1298 PS5362 Message ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC CONVERSION CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS Description An error occurred during inch/metric switching. An inch/metric conversion was performed at a position other than the reference position. Perform an inch/metric conversion after returning to the reference position.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Item name Inch metric conversion (G20, G21)

12.6
12.6.1
Overview

CUSTOM MACRO
Custom Macro

A subprogram is useful for repeatedly executing the same operation. With the custom macro function, however, variables, operation commands, conditional branches, and so forth can be used to create general-purpose programs more simply for pocketing, user-specific canned cycles, and so forth. From a machining program, a custom macro can be called with a simple instruction as in the case of a subprogram.
Machining program O0001 ; : : : G65P9010 R50.0 L2 ; : : M30 ; Custom macro O9010 ; #1=#18/2 ; G01 G42 X#1 Y#1 F300 ; G02 X#1 Y-#1 R#1 ; : : : M99 ;

Thus, when a function is programmed as a custom macro body, the function can be made more universal. This means that a program can be created using variables for values that can change or are not defined yet. This feature also leads to application of group technology. For example, classify similar workpieces into a group and create a general-purpose custom macro by using variables for such a group. Thus, the need for programming for an individual workpiece in the group can be eliminated by assigning desired values to the variables.

As an example, the bolt hole circle shown above can be created simply. By creating and once registering a custom macro for the bolt hole circle, the CNC can operate as if it had a bolt hole circle function.
- 1075 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

The programmer can use the bolt hole circle function by remembering the following command: G65 Pp Rr A B Kk ; P : Macro number of bolt hole circle r : Radius : Start angle : Angle between circles k : Number of circles

Signal
Custom Macro Input Signals UI000 to UI015<Gn054,Gn055>, UI016 to UI031<Gn056,Gn057>, UI100 to UI131<Gn276 to Gn279>, UI200 to UI231<Gn280 to Gn283> UI300 to UI331<Gn284 to Gn287>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom macros and the PMC. These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below. When the parameter MIF (No.6001#0) is set to 0 :
Signals UI000 UI001 UI002 UI003 : UI014 UI015 UI000 to UI015
*1

Q'ty 1 1 1 1 : 1 1 16
15

Variables #1000 #1001 #1002 #1003 : #1014 #1015 #1032


i

Correspondence of values

"0" at 0 and "1" at 1

Unsigned 16-bit binary code *1

Variable value #1032 =

{#[1000 + i] 2 }
i =0

These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment statement. When the parameter MIF (No.6001#0) is set to 1 :
Signals UI000 UI001 UI002 UI003 : UI030 UI031 UI000 to UI031 UI100 to UI131 UI200 to UI231 UI300 to UI331
*1

Q'ty 1 1 1 1 : 1 1 32 32 32 32
30

Variables #1000 #1001 #1002 #1003 : #1030 #1031 #1032 #1033 #1034 #1035

Correspondence of values

"0" at 0 and "1" at 1

Signed 32-bit binary code Signed 32-bit binary code Signed 32-bit binary code Signed 32-bit binary code
31

*1 *1 *1 *1

Variable value #(1032+n) =

{2 V } 2
i i i =0

V31

Where Vi=0 when UIni is 0 and Vi=1 when UIni is 1 n : 0 to 3 These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment statement.

- 1076 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Custom Macro Output Signals UO000 to UO015<Fn054,Fn055>, UO100 to UO131<Fn056 to Fn059> UO016 to UO031<Fn276,Fn277>, UO200 to UO231<Fn280 to Fn283> UO300 to UO331<Fn284 to Fn287>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or written by a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom macros and the PMC. These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below. When the parameter MIF (No.6001#0) is set to 0 :
Signals UO000 UO001 UO002 UO003 : UO014 UO015 UO000 to UO015 UO100 to UO131 Q'ty 1 1 1 1 : 1 1 16 32
15

Variables #1100 #1101 #1102 #1103 : #1114 #1115 #1132 #1133

Correspondence of values

"0" at 0 and "1" at 1

Unsigned 16-bit binary code Signed 32-bit binary code

*1 *2

*1 *2

Variable value #1132 = Variable value #1133 =

{#[1100 + i] 2 }
i i =0 30

{2 V } 2
i i i =0

31

V31

Where Vi=0 when UO1i is 0and Vi=1 when UO1i is 1 These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as well as on the right side. The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used for the value of the system variable to be assigned on the right side. When the parameter MIF (No.6001#0) is set to 1 :
Signals UO000 UO001 UO002 UO003 : UO030 UO031 UO000 to UO031 UO100 to UO131 UO200 to UO231 UO300 to UO331 Q'ty 1 1 1 1 : 1 1 32 32 32 32
30 i

Variables #1100 #1101 #1102 #1103 : #1130 #1131 #1132 #1133 #1134 #1135

Correspondence of values

"0" at 0 and "1" at 1

Signed 32-bit binary code Signed 32-bit binary code Signed 32-bit binary code Signed 32-bit binary code
31

*1 *1 *1 *1

*1

Variable value #(1132+n) =

{2 V } 2
i i =0

V31

Where Vi=0 when UOni is 0and Vi=1 when UOni is 1 n : 0 to 3 These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as well as on the right side. The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used for the value of the system variable to be assigned on the right side.
- 1077 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND Signal address


#7 Gn054 Gn055 Gn056 Gn057 Gn276 Gn277 Gn278 Gn279 Gn280 Gn281 Gn282 Gn283 Gn284 Gn285 Gn286 Gn287 UI007 UI015 UI023 UI031 UI107 UI115 UI123 UI131 UI207 UI215 UI223 UI231 UI307 UI315 UI323 UI331 #6 UI006 UI014 UI022 UI030 UI106 UI114 UI122 UI130 UI206 UI214 UI222 UI230 UI306 UI314 UI322 UI330 #5 UI005 UI013 UI021 UI029 UI105 UI113 UI121 UI129 UI205 UI213 UI221 UI229 UI305 UI313 UI321 UI329 #4 UI004 UI012 UI020 UI028 UI104 UI112 UI120 UI128 UI204 UI212 UI220 UI228 UI304 UI312 UI320 UI328 #3 UI003 UI011 UI019 UI027 UI103 UI111 UI119 UI127 UI203 UI211 UI219 UI227 UI303 UI311 UI319 UI327 #2 UI002 UI010 UI018 UI026 UI102 UI110 UI118 UI126 UI202 UI210 UI218 UI226 UI302 UI310 UI318 UI326 #1 UI001 UI009 UI017 UI025 UI101 UI109 UI117 UI125 UI201 UI209 UI217 UI225 UI301 UI309 UI317 UI325

B-64303EN-1/02

#0 UI000 UI008 UI016 UI024 UI100 UI108 UI116 UI124 UI200 UI208 UI216 UI224 UI300 UI308 UI316 UI324

- 1078 -

B-64303EN-1/02 #7 Fn054 Fn055 Fn056 Fn057 Fn058 Fn059 Fn276 Fn277 Fn280 Fn281 Fn282 Fn283 Fn284 Fn285 Fn286 Fn287 UO007 UO015 UO107 UO115 UO123 UO131 UO023 UO031 UO207 UO215 UO223 UO231 UO307 UO315 UO323 UO331 #6 UO006 UO014 UO106 UO114 UO122 UO130 UO022 UO030 UO206 UO214 UO222 UO230 UO306 UO314 UO322 UO330 #5 UO005 UO013 UO105 UO113 UO121 UO129 UO021 UO029 UO205 UO213 UO221 UO229 UO305 UO313 UO321 UO329 #4 UO004 UO012 UO104 UO112 UO120 UO128 UO020 UO028 UO204 UO212 UO220 UO228 UO304 UO312 UO320 UO328 #3 UO003 UO011 UO103 UO111 UO119 UO127 UO019 UO027 UO203 UO211 UO219 UO227 UO303 UO311 UO319 UO327

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#2 UO002 UO010 UO102 UO110 UO118 UO126 UO018 UO026 UO202 UO210 UO218 UO226 UO302 UO310 UO318 UO326 #1 UO001 UO009 UO101 UO109 UO117 UO125 UO017 UO025 UO201 UO209 UO217 UO225 UO301 UO309 UO317 UO325 #0 UO000 UO008 UO100 UO108 UO116 UO124 UO016 UO024 UO200 UO208 UO216 UO224 UO300 UO308 UO316 UO324

Parameter
#7 6000 SBV SBV #6 #5 SBM SBM #4 HGO HGO V10 #3 #2 #1 MGO MGO #0 G67 G67

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 G67 If the macro continuous-state call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro continuous-state call mode (G66) is not set: 0: Alarm PS0122 is issued. 1: The specification of G67 is ignored. MGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a high-speed branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from the start of the program is: 0: A high-speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the executed program. 1: A high-speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the program. V10 As system variable numbers for tool offset: 0 : The standard system variable numbers for the Series 0 are used. 1 : The same system variable numbers as those used for the Series 10/11 are used.
- 1079 -

#1

#3

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

The tables below indicate the system variables for tool offset numbers 1 to 400. The values for tool offset numbers 1 to 200 can be read from or assigned to the system variables in parentheses. (1) Tool offset memory A
System variable number V10 = 0 V10 = 1 #10001 to #10400 #10001 to #10400 (#2001 to #2200) (#2001 to #2200) System variable number V10 = 0 V10 = 1 #11001 to #11400 #10001 to #10400 (#2201 to #2400) (#2001 to #2200) #10001 to #10400 #11001 to #11400 (#2001 to #2200) (#2201 to #2400) #13001 to #13400 #12001 to #12400 #12001 to #12400 #13001 to #13400

Wear offset value

(2) Tool offset memory C

Tool length offset Tool radius offset

Wear offset value Geometry offset value Wear offset value Geometry offset value

#4

HGO When a GOTO statement in a custom macro control command is executed, a high-speed branch to the 30 sequence numbers immediately before the executed statement is: 0: Not made. 1: Made. SBM Custom macro statement 0: Not stop the single block 1: Stops the single block If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To control single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, use bit 7 (SBV) of parameter No. 6000. SBV Custom macro statement 0: Not stop the single block 1: Enable/disable single block stop with system variable #3003
Parameter SBM (No.6000#5) 0 1 Disables single block stop. Enables single block stop. (With variable #3003, single block stop Enables single block stop. (With cannot be enabled/disabled. Single variable #3003, single block stop block stop is enabled at all times.) can be enabled/disabled.)
#5 TCS #4 CRO #3 PV5 #2 #1 PRT #0 MIF

#5

#7

0 Parameter SBV (No.6000#7) 1

#7 6001

#6 CCV

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MIF The custom macro interface signals are based on: 0: Standard specification. (The signals UI000 to UI015, UO000 to UO015, and UO100 to UO131 are used.) 1: Extended specification. (The signals UI000 to UI031, UI100 to UI131, UI200 to UI231, UI300 to UI331, UO000 to UO031, UO100 to UO131, UO200 to UO231, and UO300 to UO331 are used.)
- 1080 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

#1

PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command 0: Outputs a space 1: Outputs no data PV5 Custom macro common variables: 0: #500 to #599 are output. (Note) 1: #100 to #199 and #500 to 599 are output. (Note)

#3

NOTE The settings of parameter No. 8135 are described below.


When the parameter PV5=0
Bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No.8135 Addition of custom macro common variables 1 (Disabled) 0 (Enabled) #500 to #549 #500 to #999

When the parameter PV5=1


Bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No.8135 Addition of custom macro common variables 1 (Disabled) 0 (Enabled) #100 to #149 and #500 to #549 #100 to #199 and #500 to #999

#4

CRO ISO code in BPRWT or DPRNT command 0: Outputs only LF after data is output 1: Outputs LF and CR after data is output TCS Custom macro (subprogram) 0: Not called using a T code 1: Called using a T code CCV Common variables #100 to #149(NOTE) cleared by power-off are: 0: Cleared to <null> by reset 1: Not cleared by reset

#5

#6

NOTE The range of common variables cleared during power-off varies as shown below depending on the bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No. 8135.
Bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No.8135 Addition of custom macro common variables 1 (Disabled) 0 (Enabled) #100 to #149
#7 6004 #6 #5 D10 #4 #3

#100 to #199
#2 VHD #1 #0 NAT NAT

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

- 1081 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#0

B-64303EN-1/02

NAT The results of the custom macro functions ATAN (with 2 arguments) and ASIN are specified as follows: 0: The result of ATAN is 0 to 360.0. The result of ASIN is 270.0 to 0 to 90.0. 1: The result of ATAN is -180.0 to 0 to 180.0. The result of ASIN is -90.0 to 0 to 90.0. VHD With system variables #5121 to #5125: 0: The tool offset value (geometry offset value) in the block currently being executed is read. (This parameter is valid only when tool geometry/tool wear compensation memories are available (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0)). 1: An interrupt travel distance based on manual handle interrupt is read. D10 When tool compensation memory C is used, for reading or writing tool offset values (for up to offset number 200) for D code (tool radius), the same system variables, #2401 through #2800, as Series 10/11 are: 0: Not used. 1: Used. When bit 3 (V10) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1
D code Compensation number 1 2 3 : 199 200
#7 #6

#2

#5

Geometry Variable number #2401 #2402 #2403 : #2599 #2600


#5

Wear Variable number #2601 #2602 #2603 : #2799 #2800


#2

Variable name [#_OFSDG[1]] [#_OFSDG[2]] [#_OFSDG[3]] : [#_OFSDG[199]] [#_OFSDG[200]]


#4 CVA #3

Variable name [#_OFSDW[1]] [#_OFSDW[2]] [#_OFSDW[3]] : [#_OFSDW[199]] [#_OFSDW[200]]


#1 #0

6007

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows: 0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications. 1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed. Example) When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local variable #24 in the calling program is set as follows:
Command #24 ADP[#24] CVA=0 0.01 10.0 CVA=1 0.01 0.01

NOTE External operations are the same unless the ADP function is used.
#7 6008 IJK #6 GMP #5 ADD #4 ISO #3 KOP #2 DSM #1 MCA #0 F0C

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path


- 1082 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

#0

F0C The precision of operation is based on: 0: New specification. 1: FS0i-C compatible specification.

NOTE For details, refer to the custom macro chapter in the Operators Manual (B-64304EN).
#1 MCA A macro alarm specification based on system variable #3000 is selected as follows: 0: An alarm number obtained by adding 3000 to a value assigned to variable #3000 and the corresponding message are displayed. (A value from 0 to 200 can be assigned to variable #3000.) 1: A value assigned to variable #3000 and the corresponding message are displayed. (A value from 0 to 4095 can be assigned to variable #3000.) (Example) Execution of #3000=1 (ALARM MESSAGE); When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0: The alarm screen displays "MC3001 ALARM MESSAGE". When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1: The alarm screen displays "MC0001 ALARM MESSAGE". DSM On the custom macro screen, the rewriting of a system variable that can be specified (written) on the left side from the MDI panel is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. KOP When the NC is reset in the state where the line is made open by POPEN: 0: Communication continues, and the line is left open. 1: Communication stops, and the line is closed. ISO 0: 1: When the EIA code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *, =, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018. When the ISO/ASCII code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *, =, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.

#2

#3

#4

#5

ADD When the number of digits in the integer part, a, in the format specification [a,b] of the DPRNT statement is less than the number of digits in the integer part of an output variable value: 0: The specified number of digits only are output, with the unspecified digits discarded. 1: An alarm for excessive digits is issued. GMP The calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or a particular code during the calling of a G code, and the calling of a G code during the calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or particular code are: 0: Not allowed. (They are executed as an ordinary G, M, S, T, second auxiliary function code, and NC address.) 1: Allowed. IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments: 0: Argument specification I or II is automatically determined. 1: Argument specification I is always used.
- 1083 -

#6

#7

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

Example When K_J_I_ is specified: - When this parameter is set to 0: Argument specification II is used and K=#6, J=#8, and I=#10 are specified. - When this parameter is set to1: Argument specification I is used and I=#4, J=#5, and K=#6 are specified regardless of the specification order. (Argument specification II cannot be used.)
#7 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 6018 *7 #7 =7 #7 #7 #7 [7 #7 ]7 #7 ?7 #7 @7 #7 &7 #7 _7 #6 *6 #6 =6 #6 #6 #6 [6 #6 ]6 #6 ?6 #6 @6 #6 &6 #6 _6 #5 *5 #5 =5 #5 #5 #5 [5 #5 ]5 #5 ?5 #5 @5 #5 &5 #5 _5 #4 *4 #4 =4 #4 #4 #4 [4 #4 ]4 #4 ?4 #4 @4 #4 &4 #4 _4 #3 *3 #3 =3 #3 #3 #3 [3 #3 ]3 #3 ?3 #3 @3 #3 &3 #3 _3 #2 *2 #2 =2 #2 #2 #2 [2 #2 ]2 #2 ?2 #2 @2 #2 &2 #2 _2 #1 *1 #1 =1 #1 #1 #1 [1 #1 ]1 #1 ?1 #1 @1 #1 &1 #1 _1 #0 *0 #0 =0 #0 #0 #0 [0 #0 ]0 #0 ?0 #0 @0 #0 &0 #0 _0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path *0 to *7 : =0 to =7 : #0 to #7 : [0 to [7 : ]0 to ]7 : ?0 to ?7 : @0 to @7 : &0 to &7 : _0 to _7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set. The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set. The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is set. The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is set. The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is set. The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is set. The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is set. The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is set. The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is set. 0: A corresponding bit is 0. 1: A corresponding bit is 1.
M code to execute external device subprogram calls

6030

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used. M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used to execute external device subprogram calls.
- 1084 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Start number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999) End number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)

6031 6032

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 500 to 999 Among the common variables (#500 to #999), the range of common variables specified by this parameter can be protected (by setting their attributes to read-only). If a write attempt (on the left side) is made, an alarm is issued.

NOTE Set 0 in both parameter No. 6031 and No. 6032 not to protect common variables.
6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199 )

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 100 When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths). Common variables #100 to #199 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of usable macro common variables is not exceeded.

Example When 20 is set in parameter No. 6036 #100 to #119: Shared by all paths #120 to #199: Used by each path independently NOTE When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is not used.
6037 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #500 to #999)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 500 When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths). Common variables #500 to #999 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of usable macro common variables is not exceeded.

Example When 50 is set in parameter No. 6037 #500 to #549: Shared by all paths #550 to #999: Used by each path independently

- 1085 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is not used.
6038 Start G code used to call a custom macro

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] -9999 to 9999
6039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 1 to 9999
6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 255 Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the G code set in parameter No. 6038, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6039 can be called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6040 to disable this mode of calling. If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6038, the modal call mode is entered. Example) When parameter No. 6038 = 900, parameter No. 6039 = 1000, and parameter No. 6040 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows: G900 O1000 G901 O1001 G902 O1002 : G999 O1099 When the setting of parameter No. 6038 is changed to -900, the same set of custom macro calls (modal calls) is defined.

NOTE 1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these parameters are disabled: 1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each parameter 2) ((Value of parameter No.6039) + (value of parameter No.6040) 1) > 9999 2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and modal calls is not allowed. 3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters duplicate G codes specified in parameter No.6050 to No.6059, the calls specified by parameter No.6050 to 6059 are made preferentially.
- 1086 -

B-64303EN-1/02 6041

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom macro

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] -999 to 999
6044 Start M code used to call a subprogram

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999
6045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 1 to 9999
6046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms called by M codes)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 6044, the subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the program number set in 6045 can be called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6046 to disable this mode of calling. Example) When parameter No. 6044 = 80000000, parameter No. 6045 = 3000, and parameter No. 6046 = 100 are set, a set of 100 subprogram calls is defined as follows: M80000000 O3000 M80000001 O3001 M80000002 O3002 : M80000099 O3099

NOTE 1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these parameters are disabled: 1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each parameter 2) ((Value of parameter No. 6045) + (value of parameter No. 6046) - 1) > 9999 2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes specified in parameter No. 6071 to No. 6079, the calls specified by parameter No. 6071 to 6079 are made preferentially.
6047 Start M code used to call a custom macro

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path


- 1087 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999
6048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code

B-64303EN-1/02

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 1 to 9999
6049 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macros called by M codes)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using M codes at a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6049 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 6047, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No. 6049 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6048 can be called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6049 to disable this mode of calling. Example) When parameter No. 6047 = 90000000, parameter No. 6048 = 4000, and parameter No. 6049 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows: M90000000 O4000 M90000001 O4001 M90000002 O4002 : M90000099 O4099

NOTE 1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these parameters are disabled: 1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each parameter 2) ((Value of parameter No. 6048) + (value of parameter No. 6049) - 1) > 9999 2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes specified in parameter No. 6080 through No. 6089, the calls specified by parameter No. 6080 through 6089 are made preferentially.
6050 to 6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] (-9999 to 9999 : excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67) Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9010 to 9019. However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call. For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.

- 1088 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE A setting of 0 is invalid. A custom macro cannot be called by G00.

6060 to 6069

G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9040 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9049

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] -999 to 999 Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9040 to 9049. However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call. For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G1.1. Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No. 6007. Set G codes in the format Gm.n. The value expressed by (m10+n) is set in the parameter. The values m and n must satisfy the following relationships: 0 m 99, 0 n 9.

NOTE Parameter Nos. 6060 to 6069 are valid when bit 0 (DPG) of parameter No. 6007 is set to 1.
6071 to 6079 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9009 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99) These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program numbers 9001 to 9009.

NOTE 1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number is called preferentially. For example, if 100 is set in parameter No. 6071 and 6072, and programs O9001 and O9002 both exist, O9001 is called when M100 is specified. 2 A setting of 0 is invalid. A custom macro cannot be called by M00.
6080 to 6089 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9029 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99) Set the M codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9020 to 9029. The simple call mode is set.

- 1089 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE 1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number is called preferentially. For example, if 200 is set in parameter No. 6081 and No. 6082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist, O9021 is called when M200 is specified. 2 If the same M code is set in a parameter (No. 6071 to No. 6079) used to call subprograms and in a parameter (No. 6080 to No. 6089) used to call custom macros, a custom macro is called preferentially. For example, if 300 is set in parameter No. 6071 and No. 6081, and programs O9001 and O9021 both exist, O9021 is called when M300 is specified. 3 A setting of 0 is invalid. A custom macro cannot be called by M00.
6090 6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 65(A:41H) to 90(Z:5AH) These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal. The settable addresses are indicated below.
Address A B D F H I J K L M P Q R S T V X Y Z Parameter setting value 65 66 68 70 72 73 74 75 76 77 80 81 82 83 84 86 88 89 90 T series O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O X X X X M series O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

NOTE 1 When address L is set, the number of repeats cannot be specified. 2 Set 0 when no subprogram is called.
#7 8135 #6 NCV #5 NMC #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
- 1090 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 NMC Custom macro is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used. NCV Addition of custom macro common variables is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.
#7 8136 #6 NGW #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#6

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #6 NGW Tool offset memory C (M series) or tool geometry/wear compensation (T series) is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

Alarm and message


Number PS0077 Message TOO MANY SUB,MACRO NESTING Description The total number of subprogram and macro calls exceeds the permissible range. Another subprogram call was executed during an external memory subprogram call. An integer went out of range during arithmetic calculations. A decimal point (floating point number format data) went out of range during arithmetic calculations. An attempt was made to divide by zero in a custom macro. The format used in an expression in a custom macro statement is in error. The parameter tape format is in error. An illegal No. was specified in a local variable, common variable or a system variable in a custom macro. An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the left side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the right side of an expression. Too many brackets [ ] were nested in a custom macro. The nesting level including function brackets is 5. The value of an argument in a custom macro function is out of range. Too many macro calls were nested in a custom macro. The END instruction corresponding to the DO instruction was missing in a custom macro. The format used in a macro statement in a custom macro is in error. DO and END Nos. in a custom macro are in error, or exceed the permissible range (valid range: 1 to 3). An NC statement and macro statement were specified in the same block.

PS0110 PS0111 PS0112 PS0114 PS0115 PS0116

OVERFLOW :INTEGER OVERFLOW :FLOATING ZERO DIVIDE ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE

PS0118 PS0119 PS0122 PS0124 PS0125 PS0126 PS0127

TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGE TOO MANY MACRO NESTING MISSING END STATEMENT MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER DUPLICATE NC,MACRO STATEMENT

- 1091 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Number PS0129 PS1091 PS1092 PS1093 PS1095 Message USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORD DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT Description

B-64303EN-1/02

PS1096

ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME

PS1097 PS1098 PS1099

TOO LONG VARIABLE NAME NO VARIABLE NAME ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ]

PS1100 PS1101 PS1115

CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT. READ PROTECTED VARIABLE

PS1124 PS1128

MISSING DO STATEMENT SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF RANGE MISSING OPEN BRACKET MISSING CLOSE BRACKET MISSING '=' MISSING ',' IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR SETVN STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN VAR. NAME TOO LONG V-NAME (SETVN) BPRNT/DPRNT STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR

PS1131 PS1132 PS1133 PS1134 PS1137 PS1138 PS1139 PS1141 PS1142 PS1143

G is used as an argument in a custom macro call. More than one subprogram call instruction was specified in the same block. More than one macro call instruction was specified in the same block. An address other than O, N, P or L was specified in the same block as M99 during the macro modal call state. More than ten sets of I, J and K arguments were specified in the typeII arguments (A, B, C, I, J, K, I, J, K, ...) for custom macros. An illegal variable name was specified. A code that cannot be specified as a variable name was specified. The [#_OFSxx] command does not match the type (A/C) of tool compensation memory currently being used. The specified variable name is too long. The specified variable name cannot be used as it is not registered. A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a suffix enclosed by [ ]. A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a suffix enclosed by [ ]. The value enclosed by the specified [ ] was out of range. Call mode cancel (G67) was specified even though macro continuousstate call mode (G66) was not in effect. An interrupt was made in a state where a custom macro interrupt containing a move instruction could not be executed. An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the right side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the left side of an expression. The DO instruction corresponding to the END instruction was missing in a custom macro. The jump destination sequence No. in a custom macro statement GOTO instruction was out of range (valid range: 1 to 99999). The number of left brackets ([) is less than the number of right brackets ()) in a custom macro statement. The number of right brackets (]) is less than the number of left brackets ([] in a custom macro statement. An equal sign (=) is missing in the arithmetic calculation instruction in a custom macro statement. A delimiter (,) is missing in a custom macro statement. The format used in the IF statement in a custom macro is in error. The format used in the WHILE statement in a custom macro is in error. The format used in the SETVN statement in a custom macro is in error. The SETVN statement in a custom macro contacts a character that cannot be used in a variable name. The variable name used in a SETVN statement in a custom macro exceeds 8 characters. The format used in the BPRINT statement or DPRINT statement is in error.

- 1092 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

12.6.2
Overview

Interruption Type Custom Macro

When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function.

Explanation
Program an interrupt command in the following format:

M96 Pxxxx; M97 ;

Enables custom macro interrupt Disables custom macro interrupt

Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to call a program during execution of an arbitrary block of another program. This allows programs to be operated to match situations which vary from time to time. (1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the abnormality is started by an external signal. (2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another machining operation without the cancellation of the current operation. (3) At regular intervals, information on current machining is read. : Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of the interruption type custom macro function.
M96 Pxxxx; Interrupt signal (UINT) O xxxx; Interrupt signal (UINT)*

M99 (Pyyyy); Nyyyy;

M97 ;

Interrupt signal (UINT)*

Fig. 12.6.2 (a)

Interruption type custom macro function

When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx. Any interrupt signal (UNIT, asterisked in Fig. 12.5.3) issued after M97 is ignored. Do not enter an interrupt signal during execution of an interrupt macro.

Signal
Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT<Gn053.3>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal calls and executes a program in memory. During execution, a program in automatic operation is suspended.

- 1093 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

To enable this signal to be accepted, a particular miscellaneous function must be specified in a command program for automatic operation. In addition, automatic operation must already be started to accept this signal. The particular miscellaneous function code is set by parameter Nos. 6003, 6033 and 6034.

Signal address
#7 Gn053 #6 #5 #4 #3 UINT #2 #1 #0

Parameter
Various Setting for Custom Macro
#7 6003 MUS #6 #5 MSB #4 MPR #3 TSE #2 MIN #1 MSK #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#1 MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro interrupt 0: Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later) 1: Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later) MIN Custom macro interrupt 0: Performed by interrupting an in-execution block (Custom macro interrupt type I) 1: Performed after an in-execution block is completed (Custom macro interrupt type II) TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT 0: Edge trigger method (Rising edge) 1: Status trigger method MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code 0: M96/M97 1: M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034) MSB Interrupt program 0: Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro-type interrupt) 1: Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram- type interrupt) MUS Interrupt-type custom macro 0: Not used 1: Used

#2

#3

#4

#5

#7

Setting M code that makes interruption effective and ineffective


6033 6034 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
- 1094 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
This parameter sets an M code that enables or disables a custom macro interrupt.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 4 (MPR) of parameter No. 6003 is 1. When MPR is 0, a custom macro interrupt is enabled by M96 and disabled by M97, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

Note
NOTE 1 No interrupt-type custom macro can be used during multiple repetitive canned cycle execution. 2 No interrupt-type custom macro can be used during return operation in dry run after search operation when the program is restarted. 3 The alarm (PS1101) is issued in the following cases: <1> Case where an interrupt is made in the programmable mirror image (G51.1) mode and G51.1 is further specified in the interrupted program <2> Case where an interrupt is made in the coordinate system rotation (G68) mode and G68 is further specified in the interrupted program <3> Case where an interrupt is made in the scaling (G51) mode and G51 is further specified in the interrupted program 4 During program execution in cycle operation, interrupt type II is used, regardless of the setting of bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No. 6003. Cycle operation has the following functions: <1> Automatic reference position return <2> Cutter or tool nose radius compensation (when multiple blocks are generated from one specified block as in a case where an acute turn is made on the outside) <3> Canned cycle <4> Automatic tool length measurement (M series) <5> Optional chamfering corner R (M series) <6> Normal direction control (M series)

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Interrupt-type custom macro Item name

- 1095 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

12.7
Overview

CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING

Canned cycles for drilling make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle for drilling, a frequently-used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G code; without canned cycles for drilling, normally more than one block is required. In addition, the use of canned cycles for drilling can shorten the program to save memory.

Explanation
A canned cycle for drilling consists of a sequence of six operations. Operation 1 Positioning a hole position Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level Operation 3 Hole machining Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole Operation 5 Retraction to point R level Operation 6 Rapid traverse up to the initial point

Operation 1

Initial level

Operation 2 Point R level

Operation 6

Operation 5 Operation 3

Rapid traverse Operation 4 Cutting feed

Fig. 12.7 (a)

Canned cycle for drilling operation sequence

Spindle control

In some canned cycles for drilling, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse direction may be output. The following canned cycles for drilling require spindle control:
<M series> Counter tapping cycle Fine boring cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle Back boring cycle Boring cycle G74 G76 G84 G86 G87 G88 Face tapping cycle Side tapping cycle <T series> G84 G88

For spindle control, the following normal miscellaneous functions are used: See the description of the miscellaneous functions. M03 CW spindle rotation M04 CCW spindle rotation M05 Spindle stop M19 Spindle orientation (M series)
- 1096 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

When the rotation direction of the spindle is to be switched from one direction to the other (for example, when M04 is output during M03 operation), a parameter can specify whether to send M05 at the time switching. Timing charts are described in the following page:
G74 (Counter tapping cycle)

X,Y

Z Dwell Z Dwell (Note) M05 MF

(Note) It is possible to not output M05 code by using parameter M5T (No. 5105#3).

(Note) M05 MF

M03 MF

M04 MF

Next block (G98 mode)

FIN

FIN

FIN

FIN

Next block (G99 mode)

G76 (Fine boring cycle)

X,Y

X or Y

Z Dwell Z

Note) It is possible to not output M05 code by using parameter M5B (No. 5101#7).

(Note) M05 MF

M19 MF

Return to initial level in G98 mode

M03 MF

M03 MF Next block (G98 mode) Next block (G99 mode)

FIN

FIN

FIN

FIN

G84 (Tapping cycle)

X,Y

Z Dwell Z Dwell (Note) M05 MF

Note) It is possible to not output M05 code by using parameter M5T (No. 5105#3).

(Note) M05 MF

M04 MF

M03 MF

Next block (G98 mode)

FIN

FIN

FIN

FIN

Next block (G99 mode)

Fig. 12.7 (b) Canned cycle for M series (1/2)

- 1097 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

G86 (Boring cycle)

X,Y Return to initial level in G98 mode Z Z

M05 MF

M03 MF

M03 MF Next block (G98 mode) Next block (G99 mode)

FIN G87 (Back boring cycle) X or Y X,Y X or Y

FIN

FIN

X or Y X or Y

Z Dwell Z

(Note) M05 M19 MF MF M03 MF

(Note) M05 M19 MF MF M03 MF

FIN FIN

FIN

G88 (Boring cycle)

FIN FIN FIN (Note) It is possible to not output M05 code using parameter M5B (No. 5101#7). Back boring cycle is not used in G99 mode but in G98 mode.

X,Y Manual feed Z Z Z Dwell Z Cycle start

M05 MF Return to initial level in G98 mode or R point level in G99 mode.

M03 MF

FIN

FIN

Fig. 12.7 (c) Canned cycle for M series (2/2)

- 1098 -

B-64303EN-1/02 G84 (Face tapping cycle) G88 (Side tapping cycle) X,C (Z,C) Z (X) Z(X) Dwell

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Z(X) Z (X)

Dwell (Note 1) (Note 2) M05 M03 MF MF

(Note 1) When parameter M5T (No. 5105#3)=0, M05 is not output. (Note 2) Another M code can be used by parameter No. 5112 and 5113.

(Note 1) (Note 2) M05 M04 MF MF

Next block (G98 mode)

FIN

FIN

FIN

FIN

Next block (G99 mode)

Fig. 12.7 (d) Canned cycle for T series

M code used for C-axis clamp/unclamp (T series)

When an M code specified in parameter No.5110 for C-axis clamp/unclamp is programmed, the CNC issues the M code for C-axis clamp after the tool is positioned and before the tool is fed in rapid traverse to the point-R level. The CNC also issues the M code (M code C-axis clamp +1) for C-axis unclamp after the tool retracts to the point-R level. The tool dwells for the time specified in parameter No. 5111.

Tapping signal

During a tapping cycle, the tapping signal is output. The tapping signal is also output while the G code of the tapping cycle is valid.

Override Feed hold

During tapping, cutting feedrate override is always set to 100%. When the feed hold key is pressed during tapping, the movement is not stopped immediately but the movement is stopped when the tool is returned to level R.

Dry run Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal (M series)

The parameter TDR (No. 1401#5) specifies whether dry run is valid during tapping.

In the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode, the small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal is output when positioning at point R on the drilling direction axis is started after positioning at a specified hole position is performed with G83 specified. This signal is not output if another canned cycle is specified or this mode is canceled by G80, a reset, or an emergency stop.

- 1099 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND M

B-64303EN-1/02

Overload torque detection signal (M series)

For the overload torque detection signal in the small-hole peck drilling cycle, a skip signal is used. The skip signal is valid (a retract operation is performed) only when the tool on the drilling direction axis is located between point R and point Z and the tool is moving forward or performing a cutting operation.

Signal
Tapping signal TAP<Fn001.5>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode. [Output cond.] The signal is set to 1 when: The system is in tapping cycle mode. (G74,G84 : for machining center system) (G84,G88 : for lathe system The system is in tapping mode. (G63 : for machining center system) The signal is set to 0 when: The system is in neither tapping cycle mode nor tapping mode. A reset or emergency stop is specified.

Overload torque detection signal SKIP#1<X004.7>, SKIP#2<X013.7>


M

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Refracts the tool on which an overload torque is imposed. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit performs the following operation: When an overload torque is imposed, the tool is retracted to point R then machining is repeated after changing the spindle speed and cutting feedrate. This signal is valid (a retract operation is performed) only when the tool on the drilling axis is located between point R and point Z and the tool is moving forward or performing a cutting operation.

NOTE This signal is used also as a skip signal. Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal PECK2<Fn066.5>
M

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts whether the small-hole peck drilling cycle is being executed. [Output cond.] This signal is set to 1 for the following period: Period from the start time of positioning at point R on the drilling direction axis after positioning at a hole position is performed with G83 specified in this cycle mode until another canned cycle, which may be G80, or a G code of group 01 is specified or until this mode is canceled by a reset or emergency stop. This signal is not set to 1 in a state other than the above.

Signal address
#7 X004 X013 SKIP SKIP
#1

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

#2

- 1100 -

B-64303EN-1/02 Fn001 Fn066 TAP PECK2

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Parameter
#7 0001 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 FCV #0

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #1 FCV Program format 0: Series 0 standard format (This format is compliant with the Series 0i-C.) 1: Series 10/11 format

NOTE 1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program format can be used for operation on the following functions: 1 Subprogram call M98,M198 2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series) 3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series) 4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 to G76 (T series) 5 Drilling canned cycle G83.1, G80 to G89 (T series) G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89(M series) 2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11 is used for this CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Operators Manual.
#7 1401 #6 #5 TDR #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #5 TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid tapping) 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
#7 3708 #6 TSO #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle override is: 0: Disabled (tied to 100%). 1: Enabled.

NOTE During rigid tapping, the override is tied to 100%, irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
- 1101 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#7 5101 M5B #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 RTR #1 EXC EXC

B-64303EN-1/02 #0 FXY FXY

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is: 0: Always the Z-axis 1: The axis selected by the program

NOTE 1 In the case of the T series, this parameter is valid only for the drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 format. 2 When this parameter is 1, the drilling axis determined by plane selection (G17/G18/G19) in the drilling canned cycle in the T series 10/11 format. Therefore, the Y-axis is required to specify G17/G19.
#1 EXC G81 0: Specifies a drilling canned cycle 1: Specifies an external operation command RTR G83 and G87 0: Specify a high-speed peck drilling cycle 1: Specify a peck drilling cycle M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87: 0: Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops 1: Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops
#7 5102 RDI #6 RAB #5 #4 #3 F0C #2 #1 #0

#2

#7

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #3 F0C When the Series 10/11 format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001 set to 1), a canned drilling cycle is specified using : 0: Series 10/11 format 1: Series 0 format. However, the number of repetitions is specified using address L. RAB When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R specifies: 0: Increment command. 1: Absolute command with G code system A. With G code system B or C, G90 and G91 are followed.

#6

- 1102 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

#7

RDI When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R is based on: 0: Radius specification. 1: Diameter/radius specification of the drilling axis.
#7 #6 TCZ TCZ #5 #4 #3 PNA #2 DCY DCY SIJ #1 #0

5103

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 SIJ When the Series 10/11 program format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001 set to 1), a tool shift value for the drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is specified by: 0: Address Q. Set a tool retraction direction in parameter No. 5148. 1: Address I, J, or K. DCY When an axis (to be used as a drilling axis) perpendicular to the positioning plane is specified in a drilling canned cycle: 0: The specified axis is used as a drilling axis. 1: The axis specified in the block where the G code for the drilling canned cycle is specified is used as a drilling axis. The specified axis is used as a positioning axis.

#2

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 is set to 1.
#3 PNA In a drilling canned cycle using the Series 10/11 format (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), when a plane where no axis is present is specified in the drilling canned cycle mode: 0: An alarm is issued. 1: No alarm is issued. TCZ In a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping), an accumulated zero check in the tapping step (forward, backward) is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. Execute a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping) with the servo feed forward (bit 1 (FEED) of parameter No. 2005). If an impact is detected, set this parameter to 1.
#7 5105 #6 #5 #4 K0D #3 M5T M5T #2 #1 #0 SBC SBC

#6

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner rounding cycle: 0: A single block stop is not performed. 1: A single block stop is performed.

- 1103 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#3

B-64303EN-1/02

M5T When the rotation direction of the spindle is changed from forward rotation to reverse rotation or from reserve rotation to forward rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G88 with the T series, or G84/G74 with the M series): 0: M05 is output before output of M04 or M03. 1: M05 is not output before output of M04 or M03. K0D When K0 is specified in a drilling canned cycle (G80 to G89): 0: Drilling operation is not performed, but drilling data only is stored. 1: One drilling operation is performed.
M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle

#4

5110

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999998 This parameter sets an M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle.
5111 Dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 [Unit of data]
Increment system IS-A 10 IS-B 1 IS-C 0.1 Unit msec

(The increment system does not depend on whether inch input or metric input is used.) This parameter sets the dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in a drilling canned cycle.
5112 Spindle forward-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the spindle forward-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.

NOTE M03 is output when "0" is set.


5113 Spindle reverse-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the spindle reverse-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.

NOTE M04 is output when "0" is set.


- 1104 -

B-64303EN-1/02 5114

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Return value of high-speed peck drilling cycle

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the return value in high-speed peck drilling cycle ( M series : G73, T series : G83).
G73 (M series) G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 0)
q : Depth of cut d : Return value R point q q q Z point d d

5115

Clearance value in a peck drilling cycle

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a clearance value in a peck drilling cycle.
G83 (M series) G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 1)
q : Depth of cut d : Clearance value R point q q q Z point d d

5148

Tool retraction direction after orientation in a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] -10 to 10
- 1105 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

This parameter sets an axis and direction for tool retraction after spindle orientation in a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle. For each boring axis, an axis and direction for tool retraction after orientation can be set. Set a signed axis number. Example) Suppose that: When the boring axis is the X-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -Y. When the boring axis is the Y-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is +Z. When the boring axis is the Z-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -X. Then, set the following (assuming that the first, second, and third axes are the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis, respectively): Set -2 in the parameter for the first axis. (The tool retraction direction is -Y.) Set 3 in the parameter for the second axis. (The tool retraction direction is -Y.) Set -1 in the parameter for the third axis. (The tool retraction direction is -X.) Set 0 for other axes.
5149 Override for retraction in a boring cycle (G85/G89)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word path % 0 to 2000 This parameter sets an override value for the feedrate of retraction in a boring cycle. The cutting feedrate override signal and the second feedrate override signal are valid, regardless of the setting of this parameter. The setting of this parameter is valid even when the override cancel signal is set to 1. When 0 is set in this parameter, the following operation is performed: For the T series Operation performed when 200 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is two times greater than the cutting feedrate.) For the M series Operation performed when 100 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is the cutting feedrate.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 TSG #3 CYM CYM NOL OLS #2 #1 #0

5160

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 OLS When an overload torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are: 0: Not changed. 1: Changed. NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are: 0: Not changed. 1: Changed.

#2

- 1106 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

#3

CYM When a subprogram call is specified in a block specifying other commands in the canned cycle mode: 0: No alarm is issued. (When a command of address P is specified, the command is handled as both a command specifying a dwell time and a command specifying a subprogram number in a canned cycle.) 1: An alarm is issued. TSG A dependence of the overload torque detection signal in a peck drilling cycle (M series) on the parameter setting of the skip function: 0: Exists. 1: Does not exist.

#4

NOTE When this parameter is 1, even if the setting of the skip signal is disabled, the X address can be used as the overload torque detection signal. At this time, parameter No. 3012 and bit 1 (SK0) of parameter No. 6200 is valid.
5163

M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets an M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter.
5164

Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after an overload torque detection signal is received

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word path % 1 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after the tool is retracted because the overload torque detection signal is received. S2 = S1 d1 100 S1: Spindle speed to be changed S2: Spindle speed changed Set d1 as a percentage.

NOTE When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.


5165

Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing when no overload torque detection signal is received

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word path % 1 to 255


- 1107 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after the tool is retracted without the overload torque detection signal received. S2 = S1 d2 100 S1: Spindle speed to be changed S2: Spindle speed changed Set d2 as a percentage.

NOTE When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.


5166

Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting after an overload torque detection signal is received

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word path % 1 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of cutting after the tool is retracted and advances because the overload torque detection signal is received. F2 = F1 b1 100 F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed F2: Cutting feedrate changed Set b1 as a percentage.

NOTE When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.


5167

Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting when no ovarload torque detection signal is received

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word path % 1 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of cutting after the tool is retracted and advances without the overload torque detection signal received. F2 = F1 b2 100 F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed F2: Cutting feedrate changed Set b2 as a percentage.

NOTE When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.


5168

Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path


- 1108 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

[Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This parameter sets the lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate changed repeatedly to the specified cutting feedrate. FL = F b3 100 F: Specified cutting feedrate FL: Changed cutting feedrate Set b3 as a percentage.
5170

Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions during cutting

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 100 to 149 This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output the total number of times the tool is retracted during cutting. The total number cannot be output to common variables #500 to #599.
5171

Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions because of the reception of an overload torque detection signal

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 100 to 149 This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output the total number of times the tool is retracted after the overload torque detection signal is received during cutting. The total number cannot be output to common variables #500 to #599.
5172

Feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets the feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified.

5173

Feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when no address I is specified

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets the feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a previously machined hole when no address I is specified.

- 1109 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
5174 Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter

B-64303EN-1/02

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.

Alarm and message


Number PS0044 PS0045 Message G27-G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED CYC ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND (G73/G83) THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A MONOTONOUS CHANGE(SECOND AXES) Description One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode for drilling. Modify the program. In a high-speed peck drilling cycle or peck drilling cycle, the amount of each-time cutting is not specified. Modify the program. In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command of the second plane axis was not a monotonous increase or decrease. Modify the program.

PS0329

Diagnosis display
520 Total number of retract operations during cutting after G83 is specified Total number of retract operations based on reception of the overload torque detection signal during cutting after G83 is specified

521

NOTE The total number of retract operations output to No. 520 and No. 521 is cleared to zero by the G83 command after the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode is set.
522 Coordinate on the drilling axis where a retract operation was started (least input increment)

523

Difference between the coordinate on the drilling axis where the previous retract operation was started and the coordinate on the drilling axis where the current retract operation was started (least input increment: previous value - current value)

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Canned cycle for drilling Item name

- 1110 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

12.8
T

CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)

Overview
The option canned cycles makes CNC programming easy. For instance, the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cutting is available. The following example shows stock removals in turning type I. If a finished shape of A to A' to B is given by a program as in the figure below, the specified area is removed by d (depth of cut), with finishing allowance u/2 and w left.
C B (F) 45 (R) (R) e (F) A d
: Depth of cut (radius designation) Designate without sign. The cutting direction depends on the direction AA'. This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 5132), and the parameter is changed by the program command. e : Escaping amount This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 5133), and the parameter is changed by the program command. ns : Sequence number of the first block for the program of finishing shape. nf : Sequence number of the last block for the program of finishing shape. u : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter / radius designation). w : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction. f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks ns to nf in the cycle is ignored, and the F, S, or T function in this G71 block is effective. d

Finishing shape

(F) : Cutting feed (R) : Rapid traverse A' w

u/2

G71 U(d) R(e); G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(u) W(w) F(f) S(s) T(t); N(ns). . . . ........ F_ The move command of a finished shape S_ of A to A' to B is specified in the blocks T_ from sequence number ns to nf. N(nf) . . . . ;

Signal
Chamfering signal *CDZ<Gn053.7>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering distance in parameter No. 5130. [Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading cycle. When the signal is set to 0, chamfering is executed in the threading cycle.

Approx. 45 r

Approx. 45 r

Fig. 12.8 (e)

Straight threading and taper threading

- 1111 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

Set the chamfering distance r to the parameter No. 5130. G76 can also be used to specify chamfering distance r. The chamfering angle is made smaller than 45 by the remaining pulses in the automatic acceleration/ deceleration circuit and servo system. In addition, the angle can be changed to other than 45 by setting an angle for parameter No. 5131.

Signal address
#7 Gn053 *CDZ #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Parameter
#7 0001 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 FCV #0

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #1 FCV Program format 0: Series 0 standard format (This format is compliant with the Series 0i-C.) 1: Series 10/11 format

NOTE 1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program format can be used for operation on the following functions: 1 Subprogram call M98,M198 2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series) 3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series) 4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 to G76 (T series) 5 Drilling canned cycle G83.1, G80 to G89 (T series) G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89(M series) 2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11 is used for this CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Operators Manual.
5130 Cutting value (chamfering value) in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Byte path 0.1 0 to 127 This parameter sets a cutting value (chamfering value) in the thread cutting cycle (G76) of a multiple repetitive canned cycle and in the thread cutting cycle (G92) of a canned cycle. Let L be a lead. Then, a cutting value range from 0.1L to 12.7L is allowed. To specify a cutting value of 10.0L, for example, specify 100 in this parameter.
Cutting angle in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76

5131

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path


- 1112 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

[Unit of data] Degree [Valid data range] 1 to 89 This parameter sets a thread cutting angle in a thread cutting cycle (G92/G76). When 0 is set, an angle of 45 degrees is specified.
#7 1403 RTV #6 #5 #4 ROC #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 ROC In the threading cycles G92 and G76, rapid traverse override for retraction after threading is finished is: 0: Effective 1: Not effective (Override of 100%) RTV Rapid traverse override while the tool is retracting in threading 0: Rapid traverse override is effective. 1: Rapid traverse override is not effective.
Feedrate for retraction in threading cycle G92 or G76

#7

1466

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) When threading cycle G92 or G76 is specified, retraction is performed after threading. Set a feedrate for this retraction.

NOTE When this parameter is set to 0 or bit 1 (CFR) of parameter No. 1611 is set to 1, the rapid traverse rate set in parameter No. 1420 is used.
1626 Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading cycles for each axis

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis msec 0 to 4000 Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles G92 and G76 for each axis.
FL rate for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis

1627

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data]

Parameter input Real axis mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
- 1113 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Set an FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles G92 and G76 for each axis. Set 0 at all times except in a special case.
#7 1611 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CFR

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 CFR For retraction after threading in the threading cycles G92 and G76: 0: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for threading is used together with the threading time constant (parameter No. 1626) and FL feedrate (parameter No. 1627). 1: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for rapid traverse is used together with the rapid traverse time constant.

NOTE If this parameter is set to 1, a check is made before a retraction to see that the specified feedrate has become 0 (the delay in acceleration/deceleration has become 0). For retraction, the rapid traverse rate (parameter No. 1420) is used, regardless of the setting of parameter No. 1466. When this parameter is set to 0, parameter No. 1466 is used as the feedrate for retraction. As acceleration/deceleration used for retraction, only acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used. Rapid traverse before look-ahead interpolation is disabled.
#7 5102 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 QSR #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check to see if the program contains a block that has the sequence number specified in address Q is: 0: Not made. 1: Made. When 1 is set in this parameter and the sequence number specified in address Q is not found, the alarm (PS0063) is issued and the canned cycle is not executed.
#7 5104 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 FCK #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 FCK In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72), the machining profile is: 0: Not checked. 1: Checked.
- 1114 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
The target figure specified by G71 or G72 is checked for the following before machining operation: If the start point of the canned cycle is less than the maximum value of the machining profile even when the plus sign is specified for a finishing allowance, the alarm (PS0322) is issued. If the start point of the canned cycle is greater than the minimum value of the machining profile even when the minus sign is specified for a finishing allowance, the alarm (PS0322) is issued. If an unmonotonous command of type I is specified for the axis in the cutting direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. If an unmonotonous command is specified for the axis in the roughing direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. If the program does not include a block that has a sequence number specified by address Q, the alarm (PS0063) is issued. This check is made, regardless of bit 2 (QSR) of parameter No. 5102. If a command (G41/G42) on the blank side in tool nose radius compensation is inadequate, the alarm (PS0328) is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 RF2 #1 RF1 #0

5105

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 RF1 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) of type I, roughing is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

NOTE When a roughing allowance (i/k) is specified using the Series 10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#2 RF2 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) of type II, roughing is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

NOTE When a roughing allowance (i/k) is specified using the Series 10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
5132 Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

- 1115 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.

NOTE Specify a radius value at all times.


5133 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72.

NOTE Specify a radius value at all times.


5134 Clearance value in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a clearance value up to the cutting feed start point in multiple repetitive canned cycles (G71/G72).

NOTE Specify a radius value at all times.


5135 Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (second axis on the plane)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a retraction distance along the second axis on the plane in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.
- 1116 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE Specify a radius value at all times.

5136

Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (first axis on the plane)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a retraction distance along the first axis on the plane in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 or G73.7. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.

NOTE Specify a radius value at all times.


5137 Number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word path Cycle 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets the number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.
Return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75

5139

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75.

NOTE Specify a radius value at all times.


5140 Minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
- 1117 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 so that the depth of cut does not become too small when the depth of cut is constant.

NOTE Specify a radius value at all times.


5141 Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76.

NOTE Specify a radius value at all times.


5142 Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word path Cycle 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets the number of final finishing cycle repeats in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76. When 0 is set, only one final finishing cycle is executed.
Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5143

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Byte path Degree 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80 This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.
Allowable value 1 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5145

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

- 1118 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) If a monotonous command of type I or II is not specified for the axis in the roughing direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. When a program is created automatically, a very small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned allowable value for such an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 cycles can be executed even in a program including an unmonotonous figure. Example) Suppose that a G71 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is minus and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a case, when an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the plus direction along the Z-axis is specified in a target figure program, roughing can be performed according to the programmed figure without an alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this parameter.

NOTE A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71 and G72 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is checked. When tool nose radius compensation is performed, a path after compensation is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a check is made before G71or G72 cycle operation. In this case, not a path after tool nose radius compensation but a programmed path is checked. Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set. Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.
5146 Allowable value 2 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 0 to cut of depth If a monotonous command of type I is not specified for the axis in the cutting direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. When a program is created automatically, a very small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned allowable value for such an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 cycles can be executed even in a program including an unmonotonous figure. The allowable value is clamped to the depth of cut specified by a multiple repetitive canned cycle. Example) Suppose that a G71 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is minus and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a case, when an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the minus direction along the X-axis is specified in a target figure program for moving from the bottom of cutting to the end point, roughing can be performed according to the programmed figure without an alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this parameter.

- 1119 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71 and G72 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is checked. When tool nose radius compensation is performed, a path after compensation is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a check is made before G71 or G72 cycle operation. In this case, not a path after tool nose radius compensation but a programmed path is checked. Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set. Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.

Alarm and message


Number PS0330 Message ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IS IN THE TURNING CANNED CYCLE Description An axis other than the plane is specified n a canned cycle(G90, G92, or G94).

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) OPERATORS MANUAL (For Lathe System) (B-64304EN-1) Cutting feed Constant lead threading Multiple threading Item name

12.9
M

IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M SERIES)

Overview
Each time an external signal is input at the table swing end point, a workpiece is cut by a constant depth of cut along a programmed figure on the specified Y-Z plane. This makes it possible to perform grinding and cutting in a timely manner and facilitating the grinding of a workpiece with a profile.
X=a
External signal input

(2)

(3) A (1)B (4) D

Y X Z

X=0 Sensor placement

For example, it is possible to machine a workpiece with a profile programmed with linear interpolation, circular interpolation, and linear interpolation on the YZ plane, such as that shown in the figure above.
- 1120 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

A sensor is placed at a X = 0 position so that the external signal is input when the sensor detects the grinding wheel. When the program is started at point A, the machine is first placed in the state in which it waits for the input of the external signal. Then, when the sensor detects the grinding wheel, the external signal is input, and the machine makes a cut by the constant amount along the programmed profile on the specified YZ plane and moves to point B (operation (1)). The machine is then placed in the state in which it waits for the input of the external signal again, and performs a grinding operation along the X-axis. It grinds from point B to point C (operation (2)) and grinds back from point C to point B (operation (3)). When the machine returns to point B, the sensor detects the grinding wheel again, and the external signal is input, so that the machine makes a cut by the amount of and moves to point D (operation (4)). At point D, the machine performs a grinding operation along the X-axis. Afterwards, each time the external signal is input, the machine makes a cut by the amount of along the profile program, so that the workpiece is machined to a profile such as that shown in the figure above.

NOTE In-feed control (for grinding machine) function is optional function.

Signal
In-feed control cut start signal INFD<Gn063.6>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Exercises in-feed control. [Operation] When this signal is set from 0 to 1, the control unit operates as follows: A movement is made by a specified depth of cut along a program figure.

Signal address
#7 Gn063 #6 INFD #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Alarm and message


Number PS0230 Message R CODE NOT FOUND Description Cut depth R is not specified in the block including G161. Alternatively, the value specified for R is negative. Modify the program.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center System) (B-64304EN-2) Item name In-feed control (for grinding machine)

12.10
Overview

CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)

With the canned grinding cycle, repetitive machining operations that are specific to grinding and are usually specified using several blocks can be specified using one block including a G function. So, a program can be created simply. At the same time, the size of a program can be reduced, and the memory can be used more efficiently. Four types of canned grinding cycles are available:

Mote Canned grinding cycle function (for grinding machine) is optional function.

- 1121 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
T

B-64303EN-1/02

Traverse grinding cycle Traverse direct constant-size grinding cycle Oscillation grinding cycle Oscillation direct constant-size grinding cycle

Plunge grinding cycle Direct constant-dimension plunge grinding cycle Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle

Parameter
#7 5101 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 FXY

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the grinding canned cycle is: 0: In case of the Drilling canned cycle: X-axis at all times. In case of the Grinding canned cycle: For the Lathe system Z-axis at all times. For the Machining Center system G75,G77 command :Y-axis G78,G79 command :Z-axis 1: Axis selected by the program

NOTE 1 In the case of the T series, this parameter is valid only for the drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 format. 2 When this parameter is 1, the drilling axis determined by plane selection (G17/G18/G19) in the drilling canned cycle in the T series 10/11 format. Therefore, the Y-axis is required to specify G17/G19.
#7 5106 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 GFX

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.

- 1122 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

#0

GFX When the options of grinding canned cycle are both specified, G71/G72/G73/G74 commands are: 0: Multiple respective canned cycle. 1: Grinding canned cycle.
Grinding axis number in Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71) Grinding axis number in Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75)

5176

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes For the Lathe system: Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71). For the Machining Center system: Set the Grinding axis number of Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 alarm is also issued.
5177 Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72) Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle(G77)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes For the Lathe system: Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72). For the Machining Center system: Set the Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle (G77).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 alarm is also issued.
5178 Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73) Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes For the Lathe system: Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73). For the Machining Center system: Set the Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).
- 1123 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 alarm is also issued.
5179 Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding Cycle(G74) Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes For the Lathe system: Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding Cycle(G74). For the Machining Center system: Set the Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 alarm is also issued.
5180

Axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or grinding axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the PS0456 alarm is also issued.
5181

Axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding cycle(G75)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding cycle(G75).

- 1124 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or grinding axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the PS0456 alarm is also issued.

5182

Axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or grinding axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the PS0456 alarm is also issued.
5183

Axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or grinding axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the PS0456 alarm is also issued.

Alarm and message


Number PS0370 Message G31P/G04Q ERROR Description 1) The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function. 2) The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function. 3) P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a multistage skip function option. 4) <T series > The specified value of address P of G72 or G74 falls outside the range. Address P ranges from 1 to 4 in the multistage skip function. P1-4 was specified in G72 or G74 even though the multistage skip function option is not present.

- 1125 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Number PS0455 Message ILLEGAL COMMAND IN GRINDING Description

B-64303EN-1/02

PS0456

ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN GRINDING

In grinding canned cycles: 1) <M series> The signs of the I, J, and K commands do not match. 2) <M series/T series > The amount of travel of the grinding axis is not specified. Parameters related to grinding canned cycles are incorrectly set. Probable causes are given below. 1) <M series/T series> The axis number of the grinding axis is incorrectly set (parameters No. 5176 to No. 5179). 2) <M series> The axis number of the dressing axis is incorrectly set (parameters No. 5180 to No. 5183). 3) <M series/T series> The axis numbers of the cut axis, grinding axis, and dressing axis (only for the M series) overlap.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (For Lathe System) (B-64304EN-1) OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center System) (B-64304EN-2) Item name Canned grinding cycle (for grinding machine) Canned grinding cycle (for grinding machine)

12.11
T

MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES)

Overview
In a machine having double turrets comprising two facing turrets placed on the same control axis, a machining program for facing turrets can be created using G codes as if it existed on the same coordinate system for symmetric cutting by creating a mirror image relative to the X-axis. G68 : Start double turret mirror image G69 : Mirror image cancel

NOTE This function and the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) cannot be used at the same time. When the option of the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) is specified, if bit 0 (NVC) of parameter No. 8137 is set to 1, this function can be used.

Explanation
A mirror image can be created using G codes relative to the X-axis of basic three axes set by parameter No. 1022. When G68 is active, the coordinate system is shifted to the other turret, and the X-axis sign is reversed from the programmed command. To use this function, set the distance between the two turrets in a parameter (No. 1290).

- 1126 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Example) Program for double turrets


X Offset value of turret A

<3> 60 120 180 120 <2> 80 40

Turret A

<1>

120

Offset value of turret B

Turret B

X40.0 Z180.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at <1> G68 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance A to B (120mm), and turn mirror image on. X80.0 Z120.0 T0202 ; Position turret B at,<2> G69 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance B to A, and cancel mirror image. X120.0 Z60.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at <3> * X axis is programmed diameter command.

Parameter
1290 Distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) Set the distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 NVC

8137

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
- 1127 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 NVC Balance cutting is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE When balance cutting is used (this parameter is 0), the mirror image of facing tool posts cannot be used. To use the mirror image of facing tool posts, set this parameter to 1.

Note
NOTE 1 When the G68 command based on this function is enabled, the X-coordinate value that can be read with the custom macro system variables #5041 and up or #100101 and up (current specified position (in the workpiece coordinate system)) is a position with mirror image applied. 2 This function and the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) cannot be used at the same time. When the option of the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) is specified, if bit 0 (NVC) of parameter No. 8137 is set to 1, this function can be used.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (For Lathe System) (B-64304EN-1) Item name Mirror image for double turret

12.12
M

INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)

Overview
By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the M series can be indexed. Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped or clamped.

NOTE To enable the index table indexing function, set bit 3 (IXC) of parameter No. 8132 to 1 and bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 0. The index table indexing function is enabled only when both IXC and ITI are enabled.

Explanation
Basic Procedure
The control axis used for index table indexing is usually referred to as axis A, B, or C. In the explanation below, the control axis used for index table indexing is axis B. If the axis name in the actual machine is not B, the user should read axis B as referring to that axis name. The positioning angle for the index table is commanded by the numeric following "B" in the program command, which is an independent block. Both absolute and incremental commands are possible, but the value after "B" is the integer times the numeric set by the parameter:
- 1128 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

(Example) G00G90B100000; Absolute command (Positioning angle 10 degrees) G00G91B20.0; Incremental command (Move distance 20 degrees) There are two variations of the procedure (type A and type B) to set the index table position; the difference is in the ON/OFF timing of the position control servo. The sequence of events and the difference between the variations are described below, followed by time charts showing them graphically. (1) Assume Bbbbb is ordered by the command program. (2) The CNC turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to "1". (Type B -- When BUCLP is turned to " 1 ", the position control servo for the B axis is turned ON.) (3) On the PMC side, the clamp of the B axis is released; when completed, the B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL turns to "0". (4) The CNC then turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to "0", to indicate it received the *BEUCL signal. (5) When the PMC is notified that BUCLP has been turned to "0", the PMC should turn *BEUCL to "1". In type A, B-axis unclamp signal BUCLP is turned to "0", B-axis position control is made in servo-on state, B-axis is rotated, and the B axis is stopped at the specified position. B axis always moves at rapid traverse. (6) When the B axis stops at the specified position, CNC turns B-axis clamp signal BCLP to 1. In type A, signal BCLP is set to "1" and B-axis position control is made in servo-off state. (7) When BCLP is turned to "1" on the PMC side, the B axis is clamped mechanically (with a clutch or shot pin, for example). When the clamp is completed, the B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP is turned to "0". (8) When *BECLP is turned to "0", the CNC then turns BCLP to "0", informing it received the *BECLP signal. (Type B -- When BCLP turns to "0", the B axis position control servo is turned off.) (9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to "0", *BECLP is turned to "1". This completes the sequence. The time charts for these operations are shown in the figures below.
(1) (2) B command (independent) B axis servo on for position control B axis unclamp signal BUCLP B axis unclamp *BEUCL B axis rotation completion signal (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

B axis clamp signal BCLP B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP


Fig. 12.12 (a) Time chart for positioning index table (type A)

- 1129 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
(1) (2) B command (independent) B axis servo on for position control B axis unclamp signal BUCLP B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL B axis rotation B axis clamp signal BCLP B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP
Fig. 12.12 (b) Time chart for positioning index table (type B)

B-64303EN-1/02

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

The figure below shows the timing chart for type-A manual reference position return of the B axis.
B axis manual feed selection signal +J B axis position control servo ON B axis unclamp signal BUCLP B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL B axis rotation B axis deceleration signal *DEC B axis return completion signal ZP B axis clamp signal BCLP B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP
Fig. 12.12 (c) Manual reference position return of B axis time chart (type A)

Type A and Type B

As described in the basic procedure, type A differs from type B in that the servo used for B-axis position control is turned on or off at the different timing. Type A is suitable for a system in which the B-axis is clamped with shot pins. Type B is suitable for a system in which the B-axis is clamped with a clutch.

Minimum indexing angle

The minimum index table indexing angle set in parameter No.5512 is used. An integral multiple of a set value can be specified as an indexing angle. If a value other than an integral multiple is specified, an alarm (PS1561) is issued.

Indexing axis setting

Be sure to set a rotation axis as an index table indexing axis. (Set bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 to 1.)
- 1130 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Absolute/incremental programming

Setting bit 4 (G90) of parameter No .5500, specifies absolute programming, and override the G90/G91 G-codes.

Indexing direction

If a value other than 0 is set in the M code for specifying negative direction rotation (parameter No.5511), movement in the negative direction is made only when a move command is specified together with the M code. In this case, movement is performed in the negative direction, regardless of whether absolute/incremental programming is used. If 0 is set in the M code for specifying negative direction rotation (parameter No.5511), the rotation direction in G90 mode is determined by bit 3 (INC) of parameter No.5500, as described below. The rotation direction in G90 mode is 0: Not shortcut direction 1: Shortcut direction (The amount of movement is always less than 180 degrees.)

Feedrate

The table is always rotated around the indexing axis in rapid traverse mode. Dry run cannot be executed for the indexing axis.

Reset

If a reset is performed in the clamp or unclamp completion wait state, the clamp or unclamp signal is cleared, and the CNC exits from the completion wait state.

Disabling the index table indexing function

The index table indexing function can be disabled temporarily. Setting bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 disables the function without turning off and on the power. This enables the manual operation of the index table indexing axis, such as a jog feed, incremental feed, and manual handle feed, even when the index table indexing function is enabled.

Index table indexing function and other functions


Item Explanation

Relative position display Absolute position display Machine coordinate system selection (G53) Single direction positioning (G60) Second auxiliary function Operation during index table indexing axis movement

This value can be rounded by setting bit 1 (REL) of parameter No.5500. This value can be rounded by setting bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No.5500. No movement is allowed. Not specifiable Ensure that a second auxiliary function axis name does not duplicate an indexing axis name. Unless otherwise processed by the machine, feed hold, interlock, and emergency stop can be executed during index table indexing axis movement. Machine lock can be executed after indexing has been completed. Disable the servo-off signal for the index table indexing axis. That is, set bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819 to 1. Usually, the index table indexing axis is in the servo-off state. When incremental programming is used for index table indexing (when bit 4 (G90) of parameter No.5500 is set to 0), the workpiece origin offset of the index table axis must always be 0. That is, there must always be a match between the workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system of an index table indexing axis. Operation in JOG/INC/HANDLE mode for an index table indexing axis is disabled. However, manual reference position return is possible. If the axis selection signal is set to 0 during manual reference position return, the movement stops immediately, and the clamp command is not executed.

Servo-off signal

Incremental command for the index table indexing axis

Operation for an index table indexing axis

- 1131 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

Limitation
Simultaneous specification together with other controlled axes
If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block: When the command is to be executed with all axes: Set bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No. 5500 to 1. When axes for which the command is executed are to be selected: Set bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No. 5500 to 0. Next, set bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No. 5502 to 1 for other controlled axes to be selected in the same block. If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block in a case other than the above, alarm PS1564 is issued.
Simultaneous specification together with other controlled axes (when G00, G28, or G30 (or G00 mode) is set) SIM = 0 SIM = 1 Axis with IXS = 0 Alarm PS1564 The command is executed for all axes. Axis with IXS = 1 The command is executed.

If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block when a command other than G00, G28, and G30 (or G00 mode) is specified, alarm PS1564 is issued.

NOTE If an index table indexing axis is specified together with a slave axis, alarm PS1564 is not issued. Command specifying zero move amount
When the amount of movement is 0, a clamp/unclamp operation is not performed. In automatic reference position return based on G28, clamp/unclamp is performed even if the amount of movement is 0.

Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Functions that cannot be used at the same time

In a block specifying an index table axis, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled. An axis used with any of the following functions is uncontrollable as an index table indexing axis: Axis control by PMC Pole position detection function

Caution
CAUTION 1 While the index table is being positioned, input signals that reset the CNC, such as *ESP (emergency stop), ERS (external reset), and RRW (reset & rewind), are functional. When reset is applied to the CNC, indexing stops. Further, if *SP (automatic operation stop signal) turns to 0, axis movement is stopped and the equipment enters the automatic operation stop state. If a stop at an any position is not suitable for the machine, appropriate processing is required on the machine.

- 1132 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

CAUTION 2 If the axis selection signal is set to 0 during manual reference position return, movement is stopped immediately, and the clamp command is not executed. If this proves inconvenient, measures must be taken on the machine side so that, after the axis selection signal is set to 1, it is not set to 0 until reference position return is completed. 3 When an incremental command is used for indexing the index table, the workpiece origin offset for the index table axis must always be 0. This means that the workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system of the index table axis must always match. 4 If a reset is made during indexing of the index table, a reference position return must be made before the index table is indexed subsequently. 5 The secondary auxiliary function can be used, but its address must be different from that of the indexing axis. 6 For a path on which the index table indexing function is not to be used, disable the index table indexing function (set bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 0).

Note
NOTE For positioning on an index table indexing axis, the dry run signal DRN has no effect.

Signal
B axis clamp signal BCLP<Fn061.1>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch or shot pin. [Output cond.] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic procedure for positioning the index table.

B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP<Gn038.7>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the B axis clamp operation. [Operation] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic procedure for positioning the index table.

B axis unclamp signal BUCLP<Fn061.0>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Instructs the PMC side to release the B axis from the mechanical clamp. [Output cond.] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic procedure for positioning the index table.

B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL<Gn038.6>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the release of the B axis from the mechanical clamp. [Operation] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic procedure for positioning the index table.

- 1133 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND Signal address


#7 Gn038 Fn061 *BECLP #7 #6 *BEUCL #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 BCLP #5 #4 #3 #2 #1

B-64303EN-1/02

#0 #0 BUCLP

Parameter
Setting linear or rotation axis
#7 1006 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ROSx #0 ROTx

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotation axis. #1 ROSx
ROSx ROTx Meaning

Except for the above.

Linear axis (1) Inch/metric conversion is done. (2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360) (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.3624) Rotation axis (A type) (1) Inch/metric conversion is not done. (2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360. Absolute coordinate values are rounded or not rounded by parameter No.1008#0(ROAx) and #2(RRLx). (3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter No.3624) (4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one rotation. Rotation axis (B type) (1) Inch/metric conversion, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are not done. (2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360). (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.3624) (4) Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index table indexing function (M series) Setting is invalid (unused)

Setting for positioning the index table


#7 5500 IDX #6 SIM #5 #4 G90 #3 INC #2 ABS #1 REL #0 DDP

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path


- 1134 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

#0

DDP As the method for inputting a decimal point in a command for the index table indexing axis: 0: The conventional method is used. 1: The pocket calculator method is used. REL The position display of the index table indexing axis in the relative coordinate system is: 0: Not rounded by one rotation. 1: Rounded by one rotation. ABS The position display of the index table indexing axis in the absolute coordinate system is: 0: Not rounded by one rotation. 1: Rounded by one rotation. INC When the M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction (parameter No.5511) is not set, rotation in the G90 mode is: 0: Not set to the shorter way around the circumference. 1: Set to the shorter way around the circumference. (In this case, be sure to set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No. 5500 to 1.) G90 A command for the index table indexing axis is: 0 : Assumed to be an absolute or incremental command depending on the G90/G91 mode. 1 : Always assumed to be an absolute command. SIM When the same block includes a command for the index table indexing axis and a command for another controlled axis: 0: The setting of bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No.5502 is followed. 1: The commands are executed.

#1

#2

#3

#4

#6

NOTE Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm (PS1564) is issued if the block is neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode).
#7 IDX Operation sequence of the index table indexing axis: 0: Type A 1: Type B
#7 5501 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ISP #0 ITI

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 ITI The index table indexing function is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. ISP Servo-off for an index axis at the completion of clamping is: 0: Processed by the CNC. 1: Not processed by the CNC. (The CNC follows the status of the servo-off signal <Gn0126> input from the PMC.)
- 1135 -

#1

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#7 5502 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1

B-64303EN-1/02 #0 IXS

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #0 IXSx When a command is specified in a block that contains a command for the index table indexing axis: 0 : An alarm (PS1564) is issued. 1 : The command is executed. If bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No.5500 is set to 1, a simultaneous operation with all axes except the index table indexing axis can be performed regardless of the setting of this parameter. To set an axis that allows simultaneous operation for each axis, set SIM to 0, and set this parameter.

NOTE Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm (PS1564) is issued if the block is neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode). Setting of an index table indexing axis
5510 Controlled axis number of the index table indexing axis

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes This parameter sets the number of a controlled axis to be used as the index table indexing axis. When the setting value is 0, it is assumed that the fourth axis is the index table indexing axis if the number of control axes is four or more, and is assumed that the final axis is the index table indexing axis if the number of control axes is three or less.

Negative direction rotation command M code


5511 M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction for index table indexing

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 0: The rotation direction for the index table indexing axis is determined according to the setting of bit 3 (INC) of parameter No.5500 and a command. 1 to 99999999: The rotation for the index table indexing axis is always performed in the positive direction. It is performed in the negative direction only when a move command is specified together with the M code set in this parameter.
- 1136 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE Be sure to set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No.5500 to 1.

Setting of a minimum positioning angle for index table indexing


5512 Minimum positioning angle for the index table indexing axis

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path deg Depend on the increment system of the reference axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the minimum positioning angle (travel distance) for the index table indexing axis. The travel distance specified in the positioning command must always be an integer multiple of this setting. When 0 is set, the travel distance is not checked. The minimum positioning angle is checked not only for the command, but also for the coordinate system setting and workpiece origin offset.

Alarm and message


Number Message

PS1508 PS1561 PS1564 PS1567

DUPLICATE M-CODE (INDEX TABLE REVERSING) ILLEGAL INDEXING ANGLE INDEX TABLE AXIS OTHER AXIS SAME TIME INDEX TABLE AXIS DUPLICATE AXIS COMMAND

Contents The same code as this M code is set in a function. (Index table indexing)

The specified angle of rotation is not an integer multiple of the minimum indexing angle. The index table indexing axis and another axis have been specified in the same block. Index table indexing was specified during axis movement or on an axis for which the index table indexing sequence was not completed.

Note
NOTE If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the block, G00 performs nonlinear positioning. So, if rapid traverse based on acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is set, the setting is switched automatically to acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.

Reference item
Manual name Item name

OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining center system) (B-64304EN-2)

Index table indexing

- 1137 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

12.13
M

SCALING (M SERIES)

Overview
A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). One scaling method multiples the same magnification rate and the other scaling method (axis-by-axis scaling) multiples the different magnification rate for each axis. The magnification rate can be specified in the program or by a parameter.
Y P4

P3

P4

P0

P3

P1

P2

P1 P0 P1 to P4 P1 to P4 : Scaling center : Programmed figure : Scaled figure

P2 X

Fig. 12.13 (a) Scaling

NOTE To enable the scaling function, set bit 5 (SCL) of parameter No. 8132 to 1.

Format
Scaling up or down along all axes at the same rate of magnification (When the parameter XSC (No.5400#6 is set to 0) Format
G51 IP_P_ ; Scaling start : : G50 ; Scaling is effective. (Scaling mode) Scaling cancel IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate value of scaling P_ : Scaling magnification

Meaning of command

Scaling along each axes at a different rate of magnification (mirror image) (When the parameter XSC (No.5400#6 is set to 1) Format
G51 IP_ I_J_K_ ; Scaling start : : G50 ; Scaling is effective. (Scaling mode) Scaling cancel IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate value of scaling I_J_K_ : Scaling magnification for basic 3 axes (X, Y, and Z axes) respectively

Meaning of command

Explanation
Axis for which scaling is to be enabled
For the axis for which scaling is to be enabled, set parameter SCL (No. 5401#0) to 1.

- 1138 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Minimum unit of scaling magnification

Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001. It is 0.00001 (one hundred thousandth) if parameter SCR (No. 5400#7) is 0 and 0.001 if it is 1.

Scaling center

Even in incremental command (G91) mode, the scaling center coordinates IP_ specified in the G51 block are assumed those of an absolute position. If the scaling center coordinates are omitted, the position assumed when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center.

CAUTION With the move command subsequent to the G51 block, execute an absolute (G90 mode) position command. If no absolute position command is executed after the G51 block, the position when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center; once an absolute position command is executed, the scaling center assumes the coordinates specified in the G51 block, after that block. Scaling along each axis at the same rate of magnification
Set parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) to 0. If the scaling magnification P is not specified, the magnification set in parameter (No. 5411) is used. Decimal point input is not accepted as the magnification P. If decimal point input is made, alarm (PS0007) will occur. A negative value cannot be specified as the magnification P. If a negative value is specified, alarm (PS0006) will occur. The allowable magnification range is from 0.00001 to 9999.99999.

Scaling of each axis, programmable mirror image (negative magnification)

Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative magnification is specified, a mirror image is applied. The axis subject to the mirror image is the one that contains the scaling center. Set a parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) to 1 to validate each axis scaling (mirror image). Using I, J, and K, specify the scaling magnifications for the basic 3 axes (X to Z axes). Use parameter No. 1022 to specify which axes to use as the basic 3 axes. For those of the X to Z axes for which I, J, and K are not specified and for axes other than the basic 3 axes, the magnification set with parameter (No. 5421) is used. A value other than 0 must be set to parameter (No. 5421). Decimal point programming can not be used to specify the rate of magnification (I, J, K). Magnification can be set within the range 0.00001 9999.99999.

CAUTION Specifying the following commands at the same time causes them to be executed in the order indicated below: <1> Programmable mirror image (G51.1) <2> Scaling (G51) (including a mirror image with a negative magnification) <3> Mirror image due to the external switch of the CNC or the settings of the CNC In this case, the programmable mirror image is effective to the scaling center and magnification as well. To specify G51.1 and G51 at the same time, specify them in this order; to cancel them, specify them in the reverse order.

- 1139 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
a/b c/d 0 Y axis Programmed figure : Scaling magnification of X axis : Scaling magnification of Y axis : Scaling center

B-64303EN-1/02

Scaled figure c 0 X axis

a b

Fig. 12.13 (b) Scaling of each axis

Scaling of circular interpolation

Even if different magnifications are applied to each axis in circular interpolation, the tool will not trace an ellipse.

G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0; G51 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 I2000 J1000;
(A magnification of 2 is applied to the X-component and a magnification of 1 is applied to the Y-component.)

G02 X100.0 Y0.0 I0 J100.0 F500;


Above commands are equivalent to the following command:

G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0; G02 X200.0 Y0.0 I0 J100.0 F500;
(Because the end point is not on an arc, spiral interpolation is assumed.)
Y

Scaled shape

X (0,0) (100,0) (200,0)

Fig. 12.13 (c)

Scaling for circular interpolation1

Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K after the radius value (R) is converted into a vector in the center direction of each axis. If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified arc, the operation will be same as that in which I and J are specified.

G02 X100.0 Y0.0 R100.0 F500 ;


- 1140 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Scaling and coordinate system rotation

If both scaling and coordinate system rotation are specified at the same time, scaling is performed first, followed by coordinate system rotation. In this case, scaling is effective to the rotation center as well. To specify both of them, specify scaling first and then coordinate system rotation. To cancel them, specify them in the reverse order. Example Main program

O1 G90 G00 X20.0 Y10.0 ; M98 P1000 ; G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I3000 J2000 ; (x 3 in the X direction and x 2 in the Y direction) M98 P1000 ; G17 G68 X35.0 Y20.0 R30.0 ; M98 P1000 ; G69 ; G50 ; M30 ;
Subprogram

O1000 ; G01 X20.0 Y10.0 F500 ; G01 X50.0 ; G01 Y30.0 ; G01 X20.0 ; G01 Y10.0 ; M99 ;
Y Rotation center before scaling

Rotation center after scaling

Original program Shape after coordinate system rotation X Scaled shape

Scaling center

Fig. 12.13 (d)

Scaling and coordinate system rotation

- 1141 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND Scaling and optional-angle chamfering/corner rounding


Chamfering

B-64303EN-1/02

Scaling x 2 in the X direction x 1 in the Y direction

Corner rounding

Scaling x 2 in the X direction x 1 in the Y direction If different magnifications are applied to the individual axes, corner rounding results in a spiral, not an arc, because scaling is applied to the end point and radius of the arc.

Fig. 12.13 (e)

Scaling and optional-angle chamfering/corner rounding

Limitation
Tool compensation
This scaling is not applicable to cutter compensation values, tool length offset values, and tool offset values (Fig. 12.13 (f) ).

Programmed figure

Scaled figure

Cutter compensation values are not scaled.

Fig. 12.13 (f)

Scaling during cutter compensation

Invalid scaling

Scaling is not applicable to the Z-axis movement in case of the following canned cycle. Cut-in value Q and retraction value d of peck drilling cycle (G83, G73). Fine boring cycle (G76) Shift value Q of X and Y axes in back boring cycle (G87).
- 1142 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

CAUTION 1 If a parameter setting value is employed as a scaling magnification without specifying P, the setting value at G51 command time is employed as the scaling magnification, and a change of this value, if any, is not effective. 2 Before specifying the G code for reference position return (G27, G28, G29, G30) or coordinate system setting (G52 to G59, G92), cancel the scaling mode. Otherwise, alarm PS0412 is issued. 3 If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In this case, the block is regarded as a no movement block, and therefore, it may affect the tool movement by cutter compensation. See the description of cutter compensation. 4 Refrain from scaling on a rotation axis for which the rollover function is enabled. Otherwise, the tool may rotate in a short-cut manner, possibly resulting in unexpected movement. NOTE 1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling. 2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the following results: (1) Circular command .................... Direction of rotation is reversed. (2) Cutter compensation ................ Offset direction is reversed. (3) Coordinate system rotation ...... Rotation angle is reversed.

Parameter
#7 5400 SCR #6 XSC #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 XSC The setting of a scaling magnification (axis-by-axis scaling) is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. SCR Scaling (G51) magnification unit 0: 0.00001 times (1/100,000) 1: 0.001 times
#7 5401 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SCLx

#7

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #0 SCLx Scaling on this axis 0: Invalidated 1: Validated

- 1143 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
5411 Scaling (G51) magnification

B-64303EN-1/02

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Setting input 2-word path 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400) 1 to 999999999 This parameter sets a scaling magnification when axis-by-axis scaling is disabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 0). If no scaling magnification (P) is specified in the program, the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification.

NOTE When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data range is 1 to 9999999.
5421

Scaling magnification for each axis

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Setting input 2-word axis 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400) -999999999 to 1, 1 to 999999999 This parameter sets a scaling magnification for each axis when axis-by-axis scaling is enabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 1). For the first axis to the third axis (X-axis to Z-axis), the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification if scaling magnifications (I, J, K) are not specified in the program.

NOTE When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data ranges are -9999999 to -1 and 1 to 9999999.
#7 8132 #6 #5 SCL #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 SCL Scaling is: 0: Not Used. 1: Used.

Alarm and message


Number Message Description

PS0006 PS0007

ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT

A minus sign () was specified at an NC instruction word or system variable where no minus signal may be specified. A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were specified.

- 1144 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Message Description

Number

PS0142

ILLEGAL SCALE RATE

PS0412

ILLEGAL G CODE

PS5007

TOO LARGE DISTANCE

The scaling rate is 0 times or 10000 times or more. Modify the setting of the scaling rate. (G51P_ . . . or G51I_J_K_ . . . or parameter (No. 5411 or 5421)) A G code (such as G27, G28, G29, or G30) for a reference position return or a G code (such as G52 to G59 or G92) for changing a coordinate system was specified during scaling. Before specifying such a G code, cancel scaling. Due to compensation, point of intersection calculation, interpolation or similar reasons, a movement distance that exceeds the maximum permissible distance was specified. Check the programmed coordinates or compensation amounts.

Reference item
Manual name Item name

OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center) (B-64304EN-2)

Scaling

12.14
M

COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION

Overview
A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function, it becomes possible, for example, to correct the position of a mounted workpiece using a rotation command when the workpiece is placed with some angle rotated from the machine coordinates. Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical shapes in the positions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the program can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling it after rotation.
Y

Angle of rotation

Center of rotation 0 X

Caution
CAUTION Before specifying a G code (such as G27, G28, G29, or G30) for a reference position return or a G code (such as G52 to G59 or G92) for changing a coordinate system, be sure to cancel the coordinate rotation mode. Otherwise, alarm PS0412 occurs.

- 1145 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

Parameter
Angle specification method of coordinate system rotation
#7 5400 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RIN

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 RIN The angle (R) of coordinate rotation (G68) is: 0: Always specified by an absolute command. 1: Specified by an absolute command or incremental command depending on the G90/G91 mode.

Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coordinate system rotation
5410 Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coordinate system rotation

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Setting input 2-word path 0.001 -360000 to 360000 This parameter sets the angular displacement for coordinate system rotation. When the angular displacement is not specified with address R in the G68 block, this parameter value is used as the angular displacement.

Alarm and message


Number Message Description

PS0144 PS0412

ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED ILLEGAL G CODE

The coordinate rotation plane and arc or tool radiustool nose radius compensation plane must be the same. Modify the program. A G code (such as G27, G28, G29, or G30) for a reference position return or a G code (such as G52 to G59 or G92) for changing a coordinate system was specified during scaling. Before specifying such a G code, cancel scaling.

Reference item
Manual name Item name

OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center) (B-64304EN-2)

Coordinate system rotation

12.15
Overview

MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER

The macro executor function converts custom macros created by machine tool builders to executable programs, registers them in the FLASH ROM module, and executes them to solve problems as described below. NC programs are divided into two types: Programs that are hardly modified after created (programs created using custom macros) and programs that differ depending on the workpiece (machining programs). Since different types of programs are processed in the same way, a custom macro may be destroyed due to a battery failure or operator error.
- 1146 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Features Since the program is stored in executable form program, the execution speed is high. Machine time is then reduced, and precision is improved. Since the program is stored in FLASH ROM, there is no lost of data of battery failure or corruption. Reliability is improved. Stored programs are not displayed on the program screen, so know-how of the machine tool builders is kept protected. Since custom macros are stored in FLASH ROM, the program editing memory can be used effectively. The user can call the macro without knowing the stored program. A custom macro can be created and executed in the program edit memory. An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or by selecting screens by the soft key. The machine tool builder can extend the control function by using such functions as machine program creation and edit control, reader/punch interface control, and PMC data read/write functions.

Note
NOTE 1 When the macro executor is active, the order-made macro cannot be specified. 2 To perform graphic display using the macro executor, enable graphic display (set bit 3 (NGR) of parameter No. 8134 to 0).

Reference item
Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64303EN-2)

12.16
M

OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES)

Overview
Chamfering and corner rounding blocks can be inserted automatically between the following: Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks Between linear interpolation and circular interpolation blocks Between circular interpolation and linear interpolation blocks Between circular interpolation and circular interpolation blocks

Parameter
#7 5105 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SBC

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner rounding cycle: 0: A single block stop is not performed. 1: A single block stop is performed.

- 1147 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

Alarm and message


Number Message Description

PS0050 PS0051

CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD BLK MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF

PS0055

MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR

Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting block. Modify the program. Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the program. In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.

12.17
T

CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)

Overview
A chamfering or corner rounding block can automatically be inserted between linear interpolation (G01) along a single axis and that along a single axis normal to that single axis. Chamfering or corner rounding is inserted for a command to move the tool along two axes on the plane determined by the plane selection (G17, G18, or G19) command.

NOTE To enable the chamfering/corner rounding function, set bit 2 (CCR) of parameter No. 8134 to 1.

Parameter
#7 3405 #6 #5 #4 CCR #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering 0: Address is I, J, or K. In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A". 1: Address is C. Addresses used for direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A" without comma.

NOTE If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the tool nose radius compensation mode cannot be used. If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis name, the chamfer function cannot be used.

- 1148 -

B-64303EN-1/02
#7 3453 #6 #5 #4 #3

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
#2 #1 #0 CRD

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #0 CRD When chamfering/corner rounding is enabled (bit 2 (CCR) of parameter No. 8134 is 1): 0: Chamfering/corner rounding is enabled. 1: Direct drawing dimension programming is enabled.
#7 5105 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SBC

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner rounding cycle: 0: A single block stop is not performed. 1: A single block stop is performed.
#7 8134 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 CCR #1 #0

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 CCR Chamfering / corner R is: 0: Not Used. 1: Used.

Alarm and message


Number Message Description

PS0050 PS0051

CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD BLK MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF

PS0052 PS0053 PS0054

CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER CHF/CNR MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM IS AN ILLEGAL COMMAND

PS0055 PS0069

Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting block. Modify the program. Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the program. The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01 (or vertical line). Modify the program. In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I, J, K and R are specified. A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner R was specified includes a taper command. Modify the program. In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program. In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73), a command for the chamfering or corner R in the last block is terminated in the middle.

- 1149 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Number Message Description

B-64303EN-1/02

PS0306

MISMATCH AXIS WITH CNR/CHF

The correspondence between the moving axis and the I, J, or K command is incorrect in a block in which chamfering is specified.

12.18
T

DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES)

Overview
Angles of straight lines, chamfering value, corner rounding values, and other dimensional values on machining drawings can be programmed by directly inputting these values. In addition, the chamfering and corner rounding can be inserted between straight lines having an optional angle. This programming is only valid in memory operation mode.

Parameter
#7 3405 #6 #5 DDP #4 CCR #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering 0: Address is I, J, or K. In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A". 1: Address is C. Addresses used for direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A" without comma.

NOTE If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the tool nose radius compensation mode cannot be used. If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis name, the chamfer function cannot be used.
#5 DDP Angle commands by direct drawing dimension programming 0: Normal specification 1: A supplementary angle is given.
#7 3453 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CRD

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path

- 1150 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

#0

CRD If the functions of chamfering or corner R and direct drawing dimension programming are both enabled (bit 2 (CCR) of parameter No. 8134 is 1), 0: Chamfering or corner R is enabled. 1: Direct drawing dimension programming is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 CCR #1 #0

8134

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 CCR Chamfering / corner R is: 0: Not Used. 1: Used.

Alarm and message


Number Message Description

PS0056

NO END POINT & ANGLE IN CHF/CNR NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END END POINT NOT FOUND ILLEGAL COMMAND IN DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING

PS0057 PS0058 PS0312

In direct dimension drawing programming, both an end point and an angle were specified in the block next to the block in which only an angle was specified (Aa). Modify the program. Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension drawing programming. Modify the program. Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing programming. Modify the program. Direct input of drawing dimensions was commanded in an invalid format. An attempt was made to specify an invalid G code during direct input of drawing dimensions. Two or more blocks not to be moved exist in consecutive commands that specify direct input of drawing dimensions. Although non-use of commas (,) (parameter No. 3405#4 = 1) was specified for direct input of drawing dimensions, a comma was specified.

Reference item
Manual name Item name

OPERATORS MANUAL (For Lathe System) (B-64304EN-1)

Direct drawing dimensions programming

- 1151 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

12.19
Overview

PATTERN DATA INPUT

In the program of the fixed form processing with the custom macro, the operator select the processing pattern on the menu screen and specified the size, number and so on to the variable on the custom macro screen. As above mentioned, this function enables users to perform programming simply without programming using an existing NC language. With the aid of this function, a machine tool builder can prepare the program of a hole machining cycle (such as a boring cycle or tapping cycle) using the custom macro function, and can store it into the program memory. This cycle is assigned pattern names, such as BOR1, TAP3, and DRL2. An operator can select a pattern from the menu of pattern names displayed on the screen. Data (pattern data) which is to be specified by the operator should be created in advance with variables in a drilling cycle. The operator can identify these variables using names such as DEPTH, RETURN RELIEF, FEED, MATERIAL or other pattern data names. The operator assigns values (pattern data) to these names. The operator selects the pattern on the menu screen, and the selected pattern number is assigned to the system variable. The custom macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a program then referring to the system variable in the program.

Explanation
This function is consist of Pattern menu screen and Custom macro screen. The process pattern is selected on the pattern screen. Then the process pattern is selected, the custom macro screen is displayed. On this custom macro screen, the variable with the name and comment is displayed according to the selected process pattern. The process data can be input by referring to the variable name with the numerical value on the drawing. The following is the example for the pattern menu and the custom macro. (1) Pattern menu screen

Fig. 12.19 (a) Pattern data menu screen (10.4-inch)

- 1152 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

(2) Custom macro screen The name of variable and comment can be displayed on the usual custom macro screen. The titles displayed on the pattern menu or the macro variable names displayed on the custom macro screen can be defined arbitrarily.

Fig. 12.19 (b) Custom macro screen (10.4-inch)

Explanation of operation
The following steps 1-3 explain how to display the pattern menu screen. 1 2 3 Press function key .

Press continuous menu key . Press soft key [PATTERN MENU]. (Press [MENU] for the 8.4-inch display unit.)

Pattern menu screen

The following pattern menu is displayed.

Fig. 12.19 (c) Pattern data menu screen (10.4-inch)

- 1153 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Select the pattern on this screen The following two methods are effective. Selection by cursor Move the cursor to the pattern name with the cursor move keys [SELECT] or key. ,

B-64303EN-1/02

and press the soft key

Selection by setting of pattern number Enter the number on the left of the pattern name, and press the soft key [SELECT] or key.

The selected pattern number is registered to system variable #5900. The custom macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a fixed program (external program No. search) with an external signal. This program refers to the system variable #5900 in the program. This system variable #5900 is kept after power-off.

Custom macro variable screen

The following custom macro screen is displayed.

Fig. 12.19 (d) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is input (10.4-inch)

When the screen is changed to the custom macro screen, the macro variable number that is selected first is specified with the parameters Nos.6101 to 6110. The macro variables that variable name is not defined can be input, too.

NOTE 1 The variable name that is displayed cannot be used as the common variable name of the NC program. 2 When the common variable name is defined by SETVN command, the variable name defined by pattern data input function is given priority.

- 1154 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Parameter
6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 1 is selected Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 2 is selected Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 3 is selected Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 4 is selected Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 5 is selected Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 6 is selected Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 7 is selected Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 8 is selected Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 9 is selected Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 10 is selected

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0,100 to 199,500 to 999 Set the macro variable number to be selected first when a pattern menu is selected on the custom macro screen. If 0 is specified, 500 is assumed. If a value beyond the above range is entered, 100 is assumed.

Definition of the screen


The definition of the screen is performed by NC program.

Program configuration

This function is consist of one program for the definition of pattern menu screen and maximum ten programs for the definition of custom macro screen. The program number is as follows
Table 12.19 (a) Numbers of subprograms employed in the pattern data input function Sub program No. Screen Specifies character strings displayed on the pattern data menu. O9500 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.1 O9501 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.2 O9502 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.3 O9503 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.4 O9504 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.5 O9505 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.6 O9506 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.7 O9507 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.8 O9508 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.9 O9509 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.10 O9510 Table 12.19 (b) Macro commands used in the pattern data input function H code Function

G code

G65

H90

Specifies the menu title.

- 1155 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
G code H code Function

B-64303EN-1/02

G65 G65 G65 G65

H91 H92 H93 H94

Specifies the pattern name. Specifies the pattern data title. Specifies the variable name. Specifies the comment.

Table 12.19 (c) System variables employed in the pattern data input function System variable Function #5900 Pattern No. selected by user.

Definition of the pattern menu screen


Menu title and pattern name are defined as follows.
Menu title Pattern name

Fig. 12.19 (e) Pattern menu screen

Definition of menu title


The character string displayed in the menu title of the pattern menu screen is defined. The menu title is specified up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size letter such as kanji character.

Format G65 H90 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;


H90 : Specifies the menu title P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of title Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of title R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of title I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of title J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of title K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of title As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Definition of pattern name


The character string displayed in the pattern name which becomes a menu item is defined. The pattern name is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size letter.
- 1156 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Format G65 H91 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;


H91 : Specifies the pattern name P_ : Specifies the menu number of the pattern name The menu number = 1 to 10 Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of pattern name R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of pattern name I_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of pattern name J_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of pattern name K_ : The code of 9thd and 10th characters of pattern name As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Example
The following is example for pattern menu screen.

Fig. 12.19 (f) Pattern menu screen O9500 N1 G65 H90 P072079 Q076069 R032080 I065084 J084069 K082078;... "HOLE PATTERN" N2 G65 H91 P1 Q066079 R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032; ............ "BOLT HOLE" N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071082 R073068; ........................................................ "GRID" N4 G65 H91 P3 Q076073 R078069 I032065 J078071 K076069; ............ "LINE ANGLE" N5 G65 H91 P4 Q084065 R080080 I073078 J071032; .......................... "TAPPING" N6 G65 H91 P5 Q068082 R073076 I076073 J078071;............................ "DORILLING" N7 G65 H91 P6 Q066079 R082073 I078071; .......................................... "BORING" N8 G65 H91 P7 Q080079 R067075 I069084; .......................................... "POCKET" N9 G65 H91 P8 Q080069 R067075; ........................................................ "PECK" N10 G65 H91 P9 Q084069 R083084; ...................................................... "TEST" N11 G65 H91 P10 Q066065 R067075; .................................................... "BACK" N12 M99;

- 1157 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

B-64303EN-1/02

Definition of the custom macro screen


The title, variable name and comment are defined as follows.
Macro variable name Title

Comment
Fig. 12.19 (g) Custom macro screen

Definition of title
The character string displayed in the title of the custom macro screen is defined. The title is specified up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size letter.

Format G65 H92 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;


H92 : Specifies the menu title P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the menu title Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of the menu title R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of the menu title I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of the menu title J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of the menu title K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of the menu title As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Definition of macro variable


The character string displayed in the macro variable name is defined. The macro variable is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size letter. The variable which can be used is as follows #100 to 199 (100 variables) #500 to 999 (500 variables), 600 variables in total

- 1158 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND

Format G65 H93 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;


H93 : Specifies the variable name P_ : Specifies the variable number Specifies 100 to 199 or 500 to 999 Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the variable name R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of the variable name I_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of the variable name J_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of the variable name K_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of the variable name As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Definition of a comment
The character string of the comment displayed on the custom macro screen is defined. The comment is specified by up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size letter per one block. Up to eight lines can be defined for the 8.4-inch display unit and up to 12 lines can be defined for the 10.4-inch unit with one block assumed to be one line. Blocks are displayed in the order in which they appear in a program, beginning with the first comment line.

Format G65 H94 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;


H94 : Specifies the comment P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of comment Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of comment R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of comment I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of comment J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of comment K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of comment As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Example
The following is example of the custom macro screen.

Fig. 12.19 (h) Custom macro screen

- 1159 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
O9501; N1 G65 H92 P066079 Q076084 R032072 I079076 J069032;...................."BOLT HOLE" N2 G65 H93 P500 Q084079 R079076; ......................................................"TOOL" N3 G65 H93 P501 Q079082 R071032 I08832; .........................................."ORG X" N4 G65 H93 P502 Q079082 R071032 I08932; .........................................."ORG Y" N5 G65 H93 P503 Q082065 R068073 I085803; ........................................"RADIUS" N6 G65 H93 P504 Q083046 R032065 I078071 J076032..........................."S. ANGL" N7 G65 H93 P505 Q072079 R076079 I083032 J078079 K046032............"HOLES NO." N8 G65 H94 P032042 Q066079 R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032;....." *BOLT HOLE" N9 G65 H94 P067073 Q082067 R076069 I042032; .................................."CIRCLE*" N10 G65 H94 P083069 Q084032 R080065 I084084 J069082 K078032;..."SET PATTERN" N11 G65 H94 P068065 Q084065 R032084 I079032 J086065 K082046;..."DATA NO VAR." N12 G65 H94 P078079 Q046053 R048048 I045053 J048053 K046032;..."NO500-505" N13 M99;

B-64303EN-1/02

Setting the character-codes


The character cannot be used to specify the NC program. Therefore, the code corresponding to the character is specified. One character is consist of three figures in a half size letter and six figures in a full size letter. The character code is specified for each address of the G65 instruction by six digits. Refer to the table for the character code for the character code. Example) When "ABCDEFGH" is specified, the description of the code is as follows. Encoded character string : 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 P065066 Q067068 R069070 I071072; AB CD EF GH

NOTE 1 Space (032) is added ahead of the character-code, when the character-code of three digits or less is specified. Example) P065066 Q067; " AB C " 032(space) is put at the end, when "ABC" is displayed. P065066 Q067032; " ABC " 2 It is assumed in that the space of two characters was defined in the address when there is an address not defined. Example) P065066 I067068; "AB CD"
Characters and codes to be used for the pattern data input function Comment Character Code Comment 6 054 7 055 8 056 9 057 032 Space ! 033 Exclamation mark 034 Quotation mark # 035 Hash sign $ 036 Dollar sign % 037 Percent & 038 Ampersand

Character A B C D E F G H I J K

Code 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075

- 1160 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Code 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 048 049 050 051 052 053 Comment Character * + , . / : ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ _ Code 039 042 043 044 045 046 047 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 091 092 093 094 095 Comment Apostrophe Asterisk Plus sign Comma Minus sign Period Slash Colon Semicolon Left angle bracket Equal sign Right angle bracket Question mark At mark Left square bracket Yen sign Right square bracket

Character L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5

Underscore

The characters and the codes of the katakana is as follows.


Character Code 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 Comment Character Code 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 166 221 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 222 223 161 162 163 164 165 Comment

Diacritical mark Diacritical mark Punctuation Left quotation mark Right quotation mark Comma Point

- 1161 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
Character Code 207 208 Comment Character Code 000

B-64303EN-1/02

Comment

Space

NOTE Diacritical mark is one character.


The characters and the codes of the hiragana and the kanji are as follows. The following hiraganas and kanjis use two characters of the alphanumeric character.
002 000 002 020 002 040 002 060 002 080 002 100 002 120 002 140 002 160 002 180 002 200 002 220 002 240 003 000 003 020 003 040 003 060 003 080 003 100 003 120 003 140 002 002 002 022 002 042 002 062 002 082 002 102 002 122 002 142 002 162 002 182 002 202 002 222 002 242 003 002 003 022 003 042 003 062 003 082 003 102 003 122 003 142 002 004 002 024 002 044 002 064 002 084 002 104 002 124 002 144 002 164 002 184 002 204 002 224 002 244 003 004 003 024 003 044 003 064 003 084 003 104 003 124 003 144 002 006 002 026 002 046 002 066 002 086 002 106 002 126 002 146 002 166 002 186 002 206 002 226 002 246 003 006 003 026 003 046 003 066 003 086 003 106 003 126 003 146 002 008 002 028 002 048 002 068 002 088 002 108 002 128 002 148 002 168 002 188 002 208 002 228 002 248 003 008 003 028 003 048 003 068 003 088 003 108 003 128 003 148 002 010 002 030 002 050 002 070 002 090 002 110 002 130 002 150 002 170 002 190 002 210 002 230 002 250 003 010 003 030 003 050 003 070 003 090 003 110 003 130 003 150 002 012 002 032 002 052 002 072 002 092 002 112 002 132 002 152 002 172 002 192 002 212 002 232 002 252 003 012 003 032 003 052 003 072 003 092 003 112 003 132 003 152 002 014 002 034 002 054 002 074 002 094 002 114 002 134 002 154 002 174 002 194 002 214 002 234 002 254 003 014 003 034 003 054 003 074 003 094 003 114 003 134 003 154 002 016 002 036 002 056 002 076 002 096 002 116 002 136 002 156 002 176 002 196 002 216 002 236 002 018 002 038 002 058 002 078 002 098 002 118 002 138 002 158 002 178 002 198 002 218 002 238

003 016 003 036 003 056 003 076 003 096 003 116 003 136 003 156

003 018 003 038 003 058 003 078 003 098 003 118 003 138 003 158

- 1162 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
003 162 003 182 003 202 003 222 003 242 004 002 004 022 004 042 004 062 004 082 004 102 004 122 004 142 004 162 004 182 004 202 004 222 004 242 005 002 005 022 005 042 005 062 005 082 005 102 005 122 005 142 003 164 003 184 003 204 003 224 003 244 004 004 004 024 004 044 004 064 004 084 004 104 004 124 004 144 004 164 004 184 004 204 004 224 004 244 005 004 005 024 005 044 005 064 005 084 005 104 005 124 005 144 003 166 003 186 003 206 003 226 003 246 004 006 004 026 004 046 004 066 004 086 004 106 004 126 004 146 004 166 004 186 004 206 004 226 004 246 005 006 005 026 005 046 005 066 005 086 005 106 005 126 005 146 003 168 003 188 003 208 003 228 003 248 004 008 004 028 004 048 004 068 004 088 004 108 004 128 004 148 004 168 004 188 004 208 004 228 004 248 005 008 005 028 005 048 005 068 005 088 005 108 005 128 005 148 003 170 003 190 003 210 003 230 003 250 004 010 004 030 004 050 004 070 004 090 004 110 004 130 004 150 004 170 004 190 004 210 004 230 004 250 005 010 005 030 005 050 005 070 005 090 005 110 005 130 005 150 003 172 003 192 003 212 003 232 003 252 004 012 004 032 004 052 004 072 004 092 004 112 004 132 004 152 004 172 004 192 004 212 004 232 004 252 005 012 005 032 005 052 005 072 005 092 005 112 005 132 005 152 003 174 003 194 003 214 003 234 003 254 004 014 004 034 004 054 004 074 004 094 004 114 004 134 004 154 004 174 004 194 004 214 004 234 004 254 005 014 005 034 005 054 005 074 005 094 005 114 005 134 005 154 003 176 003 196 003 216 003 236 003 178 003 198 003 218 003 238

003 160 003 180 003 200 003 220 003 240 004 000 004 020 004 040 004 060 004 080 004 100 004 120 004 140 004 160 004 180 004 200 004 220 004 240 005 000 005 020 005 040 005 060 005 080 005 100 005 120 005 140

004 016 004 036 004 056 004 076 004 096 004 116 004 136 004 156 004 176 004 196 004 216 004 236

004 018 004 038 004 058 004 078 004 098 004 118 004 138 004 158 004 178 004 198 004 218 004 238

005 016 005 036 005 056 005 076 005 096 005 116 005 136 005 156

005 018 005 038 005 058 005 078 005 098 005 118 005 138 005 158

- 1163 -

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
005 160 005 180 005 200 005 220 005 240 006 000 006 020 006 040 006 060 006 080 006 100 006 120 006 140 006 160 006 180 006 200 006 220 006 240 007 000 007 020 007 040 007 060 007 080 005 162 005 182 005 202 005 222 005 242 006 002 006 022 006 042 006 062 006 082 006 102 006 122 006 142 006 162 006 182 006 202 006 222 006 242 007 002 007 022 007 042 007 062 007 082 005 164 005 184 005 204 005 224 005 244 006 004 006 024 006 044 006 064 006 084 006 104 006 124 006 144 006 164 006 184 006 204 006 224 006 244 007 004 007 024 007 044 007 064 005 166 005 186 005 206 005 226 005 246 006 006 006 026 006 046 006 066 006 086 006 106 006 126 006 146 006 166 006 186 006 206 006 226 006 246 007 006 007 026 007 046 007 066 007 086 005 168 005 188 005 208 005 228 005 248 006 008 006 028 006 048 006 068 006 088 006 108 006 128 006 148 006 168 006 188 006 208 006 228 006 248 007 008 007 028 007 048 007 068 005 170 005 190 005 210 005 230 005 250 006 010 006 030 006 050 006 070 006 090 006 110 006 130 006 150 006 170 006 190 006 210 006 230 006 250 007 010 007 030 007 050 007 070 007 090 007 110 005 172 005 192 005 212 005 232 005 252 006 012 006 032 006 052 006 072 006 092 006 112 006 132 006 152 006 172 006 192 006 212 006 232 006 252 007 012 007 032 007 052 007 072 005 174 005 194 005 214 005 234 005 254 006 014 006 034 006 054 006 074 006 094 006 114 006 134 006 154 006 174 006 194 006 214 006 234 006 254 007 014 007 034 007 054 007 074

B-64303EN-1/02

005 176 005 196 005 216 005 236

005 178 005 198 005 218 005 238

006 016 006 036 006 056 006 076 006 096 006 116 006 136 006 156 006 176 006 196 006 216 006 236

006 018 006 038 006 058 006 078 006 098 006 118 006 138 006 158 006 178 006 198 006 218 006 238

007 016 007 036 007 056 007 076

007 018 007 038 007 058 007 078

007 092 007 112 007 132 007 152 007 094 007 114 007 134 007 154 007 096 007 116 007 136 007 156 007 098 007 118 007 138 007 158

007 084 007 104 007 124 007 144

007 100 007 120 007 140

007 102 007 122 007 142

007 106 007 126 007 146

007 088 007 108 007 128 007 148

007 130 007 150

- 1164 -

B-64303EN-1/02

12.PROGRAM COMMAND
007 162 007 182 007 202 007 222 007 164 007 184 007 204 007 224 007 166 007 186 007 206 007 226 007 168 007 188 007 208 007 228 ] 007 248 007 170 007 190 007 210 007 230 [ 007 250 007 172 007 192 007 212 007 232 007 174 007 194 007 214 007 234 007 254 007 176 007 196 007 216 007 236 007 178 007 198 007 218 007 238

007 160 007 180 007 200 007 220

007 240

007 242

007 244

007 246

007 252

- 1165 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

13
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5

DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Chapter 13, "DISPLAY/SET/EDIT", consists of the following sections: DISPLAY/SET................................................................................................................................1166 EDIT................................................................................................................................................1217 MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ...........................................................................................1222 MACHINE OPERATION MENU..................................................................................................1228 MACHINE OPERATION MENU MAKING TOOL.....................................................................1235

13.1
13.1.1
Overview

DISPLAY/SET
Run Hour and Parts Count Display

This function displays the integrated power-on time, the integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer (started by an input signal from PMC) on the screen. The integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer can be altered and preset, by the operator. In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total number of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number of completed parts on the screen. Each time M02, M30 or a parameter set M code is executed, the count of the total number of parts machined and the number of parts completed is incremented by 1. If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts machined can be counted automatically. If the count of the number of parts machined reaches the number of parts required, a signal is output to the PMC side. It is possible for the operator to change and preset the number of parts required and the number of parts completed. This is an option function. Items such as parts machined are displayed on the Setting (timer) screen even when the option is not provided, but operation such as counting up is not performed.

- 1166 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT TMRON<Gn053.0>

Signal
General-purpose integrating meter start signal
[Classification] Input signal [Function] The CNC has an meter which is started by an input signal from the PMC. Additionally, there are meters for counting the automatic operation time and counting cutting time. The count for these meter can be displayed on the screen. The count can be preset by the operator. [Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the meter starts counting.

Target part count reached signal PRTSF<Fn062.7>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been machined. [Output cond.] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when: The number of parts machined counts up and reaches the required number of parts when M02, M30, or the M code set in parameter No. 6710 is executed. When the required number of parts is zero, this signal is not set. The PRTSF signal is set to 0 when: Machining of the specified number of parts has not yet been completed. The system is reset. When PRT (bit 1 of No. 6700) = 1, however, the PRTSF signal is not set to 0 even if the system is reset.

Signal address
#7 Gn053 Fn062 PRTSF #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TMRON

Parameter
#7 6700 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 PRT #0 PCM

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts 0: M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6710 1: Only M code specified by parameter No.6710 PRT Upon reset, the required parts count arrival signal (PRTSF) is: 0: Set to "0". 1: Not set to "0".
M code that counts the number of machined parts

#1

6710

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed.

- 1167 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is performed with M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198 (external device subprogram calling), and M codes used for subprogram calling and macro calling cannot be set as M codes for count-up operation. (Even when such an M code is set, count-up operation is not performed, ignoring the M code.)
6711 Number of machined parts

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by parameter No.6710 is executed.

NOTE The number of parts is not counted for M02, M03, when bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6712 Total number of machined parts

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter sets the total number of machined parts. The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6710 is executed.

NOTE The number of parts is not counted for M02, M03, when bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6713 Number of required parts

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter sets the number of required machined parts. Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC when the number of machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of parts is regarded as infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output.
6750 Integrated value of power-on period

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word path min 0 to 999999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.

- 1168 -

B-64303EN-1/02 6751

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 1

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]


6752

Setting input 2-word path msec 0 to 59999


Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 2

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Setting input 2-word path min 0 to 999999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic operation (neither stop nor hold time included). The actual time accumulated during operation is the sum of this parameter No. 6751 and parameter No. 6752.
Integrated value of cutting time 1

6753

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]


6754

Setting input 2-word path msec 0 to 59999


Integrated value of cutting time 2

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Setting input 2-word path min 0 to 999999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is performed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 or G03). The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of this parameter No. 6753 and parameter No. 6754.
Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 1

6755

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]


6756

Setting input 2-word path msec 0 to 59999


Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 2

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Setting input 2-word path min 0 to 999999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input signal TMRON <G0053.0> from PMC is on. The actual integrated time is the sum of this parameter No. 6755 and parameter No. 6756.

- 1169 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 1

B-64303EN-1/02

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]


6758

Setting input 2-word path msec 0 to 59999


Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 2

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Setting input 2-word path min 0 to 999999999 This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time (neither stop nor hold state included). The actual time accumulated during operating is the sum of this parameter No. 6757 and parameter No. 6758. The operation time is automatically preset to 0 during the power-on sequence and the cycle start from the reset state.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 NCT

8134

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #7 NCT Run hour and parts count display is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Item name Displaying and setting run time, parts count, and time

13.1.2
Overview

Software Operator's Panel

The MDI panel can replace the switches on the machine operator's panel. That is, the MDI panel can select a mode or jog feed override, omitting the corresponding switches on the machine operator's panel. The operation switches of the function of groups 1 to 7 below can be replaced with soft switches (software operator's panel). It is possible to select either the operation switches on the machine operator's panel or the soft switches of the controller as the operation switches of groups 1 to 7, for each group by the parameters. In addition, it is possible to add 8 to 16 general-purpose soft switches used freely by the machine tool builder (software operator's panel general purpose switches). These 16 general-purpose soft switches can be freely named by the machine tool builder. Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4 : : : : Mode selection Selection of jog feed axis, manual rapid traverse Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of manual pulse magnification Jog feedrate override, feedrate override, rapid traverse override
- 1170 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run Protect key Feed hold General purpose

Group5 Group6 Group7 Group8

: : : :

The states of all soft switches are input to the PMC by output signals. Based on these output signals, the PMC should turn "1" or "0" input signals related to the soft switch functions. When the soft switch provided for single block operation is turned on, for instance, the control unit does not select the single block operation internally. The single block operation is selected just when the PMC sets the input signal for single block operation to 1. Bit 3 (NOP) and bit 4 (NOW) of parameter No. 8136 can be used to specify whether to use the software operator's panel and the software operator's panel general purpose switches, respectively.

Signal
Group 1 Function Mode selection Output signal MD1O MD2O MD4O ZRNO +J1O to +J4O -J1O to -J4O <Fn081> RTO HS1AO<Fn077.0> HS1BO<Fn077.1> HS1CO<Fn077.2> HS1DO<Fn077.3> MP1O<Fn076.0> MP2O<Fn076.1> *JV0O to *JV15O *FV0O to *FV7O ROV1O ROV2O BDTO SBKO MLKO DRNO KEYO*1 SPO OUT0 to OUT7 OUT8 to OUT15 <Fn073.0> <Fn073.1> <Fn073.2> <Fn073.4> Related input signal MD1 MD2 MD4 ZRN +J1 to +J4 -J1 to -J4 RT HS1A HS1B HS1C HS1D MP1 MP2 *JV0 to *JV15 *FV0 to *FV7 ROV1 ROV2 BDT SBK MLK DRN KEY1 to KEY4 *SP

Jog feed axis select

Manual rapid traverse Manual pulse generator feed axis select

<Fn077.6>

Manual pulse generator magnification rate select Jog feed rate override Feedrate override Rapid traverse override Optional block skip Single block Machine lock Dry run Protect key Feed hold General purpose switch 1 to 8 General purpose switch 9 to 16

6 7 8

<Fn079, Fn080> <Fn078> <Fn076.4> <Fn076.5> <Fn075.2> <Fn075.3> <Fn075.4> <Fn075.5> <F075.6> <Fn075.7> <Fn072> <Fn074>

*1 : For a 2-path system, the memory protect signal KEYO is KEYO<F0075.6>. This signal is common to all paths.

- 1171 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Signal address


#7 Fn072 Fn073 Fn074 Fn075 Fn076 Fn077 Fn078 Fn079 Fn080 Fn081 *FV7O *JV7O *JV15O -J4O RTO *FV6O *JV6O *JV14O +J4O *FV5O *JV5O *JV13O -J3O *FV4O *JV4O *JV12O +J3O OUT15 SPO OUT14 KEYO
*1

B-64303EN-1/02

#6 OUT6

#5 OUT5

#4 OUT4 ZRNO

#3 OUT3

#2 OUT2 MD4O

#1 OUT1 MD2O OUT9

#0 OUT0 MD1O OUT8

OUT7

OUT13 DRNO ROV2O

OUT12 MLKO ROV1O

OUT11 SBKO

OUT10 BDTO

MP2O HS1DO *FV3O *JV3O *JV11O -J2O HS1CO *FV2O *JV2O *JV10O +J2O HS1BO *FV1O *JV1O *JV9O -J1O

MP1O HS1AO *FV0O *JV0O *JV8O +J1O

*1 : For a 2-path system, the memory protect signal KEYO is KEYO<F0075.6>. This signal is common to all paths.

Parameter
#7 7200 #6 OP7 #5 OP6 #4 OP5 #3 OP4 #2 OP3 #1 OP2 #0 OP1

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0 OP1 Mode selection on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse override select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed

#1

#2

#3

- 1172 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

#4

OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry run select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed OP6 Protect key on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed OP7 Feed hold on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 GPS #0

#5

#6

7201

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 GPS The maximum number of switches of the general-purpose switch function on the software operator's panel is: 0: 8. 1: 16.
#7 3002 #6 #5 #4 IOV #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 IOV Override-related signal logic is: 0: Used without modification (A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive logic is used as a positive logic signal.) 1: Inverted (A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive logic is used as a negative logic signal.) The signals indicated below are affected. Signal of negative logic: Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<G0012> Second feedrate override signals*AFV0 to *AFV7<G0013> Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control) *EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<G0151/G0163/G0175/G0187> Software operators panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<F0078> Signals of positive logic: Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<G0014.0, 1> Software operators panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<F0076.4, 5> Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control) EROV1g,EROV2g <G0150.0, 1, G0162.0, 1, G0174.0, 1, G0186.0, 1>
Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel

7210 7211

- 1173 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
7212 7213 7214 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel

B-64303EN-1/02

Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel

7215

Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel

7216

Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel

7217

Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 8 On software operator's panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow key on the MDI panel when jog feed is performed.
Setting value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Feed axis and direction Not moved First axis, positive direction First axis, negative direction Second axis, positive direction Second axis, negative direction Third axis, positive direction Third axis, negative direction Fourth axis, positive direction Fourth axis, negative direction
Allow keys on the MDI panel

Example) Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. [8] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2] to the negative direction of the Z axis, [6] to the positive direction of the X axis [4] to the negative direction of the X axis, [1 ] to the positive direction of the Y axis, [9 ] to the negative direction of the Y axis Parameter No.7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7216 = 0 (Not used) Parameter No.7217 = 0 (Not used)
7220 to 7283 7284 to 7299 Name of general-purpose switch 1 on software operator's panel (first character) to Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's panel (eighth character) Name of general-purpose switch 9 on software operator's panel (first character) to Name of general-purpose switch 10 on software operator's panel (eighth character)

- 1174 -

B-64303EN-1/02 7352 to 7399

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Name of general-purpose switch 11 on software operator's panel (first character) to Name of general-purpose switch 16 on software operator's panel (eighth character)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] -128 to 127 Each of these parameters sets the name of a general-purpose switch on the software operator's panel with character codes indicated in the character-code correspondence table. A switch name consists of up to eight characters. Parameter Nos. 7220 to 7227 : Name of general-purpose switch 1 Parameter Nos. 7228 to 7235 : Name of general-purpose switch 2 Parameter Nos. 7236 to 7243 : Name of general-purpose switch 3 Parameter Nos. 7244 to 7251 : Name of general-purpose switch 4 Parameter Nos. 7252 to 7259 : Name of general-purpose switch 5 Parameter Nos. 7260 to 7267 : Name of general-purpose switch 6 Parameter Nos. 7268 to 7275 : Name of general-purpose switch 7 Parameter Nos. 7276 to 7283 : Name of general-purpose switch 8 Parameter Nos. 7284 to 7291 : Name of general-purpose switch 9 Parameter Nos. 7292 to 7299 : Name of general-purpose switch 10 Parameter Nos. 7352 to 7359 : Name of general-purpose switch 11 Parameter Nos. 7360 to 7367 : Name of general-purpose switch 12 Parameter Nos. 7368 to 7375 : Name of general-purpose switch 13 Parameter Nos. 7376 to 7383 : Name of general-purpose switch 14 Parameter Nos. 7384 to 7391 : Name of general-purpose switch 15 Parameter Nos. 7392 to 7399 : Name of general-purpose switch 16
#7 8136 #6 #5 #4 NOW #3 NOP #2 #1 #0

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #3 NOP Software operator's panel is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used. NOW Software operator's panel general purpose switch is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

#4

- 1175 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Character code list


Character A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Code 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Character Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 Code 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 48 49 50 51 52 53 Character 6 7 8 9 ! # $ % & ( ) * +

B-64303EN-1/02

Code 54 55 56 57 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Note
NOTE 1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft switches. When the mode for DNC operation is to be required, then, all control switches for mode selection should be on the machine operator's panel or a general-purpose soft switch should be used to select the mode for DNC operation. Soft switches available for mode selection - Manual data input - Automatic operation - Memory edit - Manual handle feed / incremental feed - Jog feed - Manual reference position return 2 Only one soft switch is available for the protection key. But, four input signals are available for protection key (KEY1, KEY2, KEY3 and KEY4). Generally, four input signals are simultaneously turned to "1" or "0" according to the state of the protection soft switch. For a 2-path system, the signals are as follows. These signals are common to all paths. - KEYO<F0075.6> - KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to 6> 3 When the soft switch for feed hold is turned on, output signal SPO is turned to "1", and the PMC turns feed hold signal *SP to "0". In contrast to the above, when the soft switch for feed hold is turned off, output signal SPO is turned "0" and the PMC turns signal *SP to "1". For soft switches other than feed hold and general soft switches, when an output signal corresponding to a soft switch is turned to "1", the corresponding input signal is turned to "1".

- 1176 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
*JV0O to *JV15O 8 7 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1110 1111 1110 1111 1101 1111 1100 1111 1011 1111 1001 1111 0111 1111 0011 1110 1111 1110 1000 1101 1111 1101 0010 1100 0001 1010 1000 1000 0010 0101 0111 0001 1000 1011 1010 0011 1101 1000 1110 1001 0100 0001 1101

The following table lists the jog feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches.
Override values (%) 0 0.1 0.14 0.2 0.27 0.37 0.52 0.72 1.0 1.4 2.0 2.7 3.7 5.2 7.2 10.0 14.0 20.0 27.0 37.0 52.0 72.0 100.0 140.0 200.0 15 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1110 1110 1101 1100 1011 0 1111 0101 0001 1011 0100 1010 1011 0111 1011 0011 0111 0001 1101 0111 1111 0111 0111 1111 0011 1011 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111

The following table lists the feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches.
Override values (%) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 *FV0O to *FV7O 7 1111 1111 1110 1110 1101 1100 1100 1011 1010 1010 1001 1001 1000 0111 0111 0110 0101 0101 0100 0100 0011 0 1111 0101 1011 0001 0111 1101 0011 1001 1111 0101 1011 0001 0111 1101 0011 1001 1111 0101 1011 0001 0111

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Item name Display and setting of the software operators panel

- 1177 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

13.1.3
Overview

8-Level Data Protection Function

Eight operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation and eight protection levels can be set for various types of CNC and PMC data. When various types of CNC and PMC data are changed or output externally, the system compares the operation level with the protection level to determine whether change or external output is allowed.

NOTE 8-level data protection function is optional function.

Explanation
Operation level
Eight operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation. Operation levels 0 to 3 are selected by the memory protection key signal. Operation levels 4 to 7 are selected by a password.
Operation level 7 (High) 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (low) Setting method Password Password Password Password Memory protection key signal Memory protection key signal Memory protection key signal Memory protection key signal Sample classification MTB Dealer, Integrator End user User level (Level 1) User level (Level 2) User level (Level 3) User level (Level 4)

NOTE 1 Once any of operation levels 4 to 7 is set, it is retained (even when the power is turned off) until clear operation is performed by the corresponding password. 2 The initial values of the passwords for operation levels 4 to 6 are shown below. - Operation level 4: "HC3V9ZEP" - Operation level 5: "J72WB8YA" - Operation level 6: "VLR6T92M" 3 Operation level 7 is reserved for the maintenance of the CNC and PMC. CAUTION When this function is provided, the conventional memory protection function is disabled. When this function is added, the programmer protection function of the PMC is disabled. However, the sequence program password function can be used in combination with this function. Data protection level
A data protection level can be set for each of the following types of data. There are two data protection levels as shown below. Change protection level Protection level used for changing data Output protection level Protection level used for externally outputting data (punching out). Protection levels 0 (low) to 7 (high) can be set.
- 1178 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
CNC data protection level setting items Data type Initial value of protection level Change Output 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Custom macro conversion data (including variable data specific to the macro executor) Periodical maintenance information data Tool offset data (for each type when classification is performed by figure and figure/wear) Clock data Workpiece origin shift data Workpiece origin offset data Ethernet setting data Parameter data Setting data Pitch error compensation data Power Mate CNC Manager function parameter data Each part program Part program editing Presetting an absolute coordinate PMC data protection level setting items Data type Configuration parameter Setting (online) Sequence parameter PMC parameter Timer Counter Keep relay Keep relay (system) Data table Data table control PMC memory

Initial value of protection level Change Output 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Changing or externally outputting of data

When various types of CNC and PMC data is changed or output externally, the change protection level or output protection level set for the target data is compared with its current operation level. If the operation level is equal to or higher than the protection level set for the target data (operation level protection level), it is assumed that the target data can be changed or output externally and the data is allowed to be changed or output externally. The operation level must be changed according to the purpose as needed. The protection level must be set according to the confidentiality and severity of data. [Example of application] <1> Set the change protection level as follows. - Parameter (Change protection level 4) - Tool offset data (Change protection level 0) <2> The changeable data can be restricted by changing the operation level during CNC and PMC operation. - Operation level 4 Parameters and tool offset data can be changed.

- 1179 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
- Operation level 0 Tool offset data can be changed. Parameters cannot be changed.
Data Operation level 4 0 Parameter Changeable Not changeable

B-64303EN-1/02

Tool offset data Changeable Changeable

Notes
Tool offset data NOTE 1 Valid types of tool offset data vary depending on the tool offset memory used. See the tables below when setting a data protection level. 2 When a type of data that is not permitted to be changed or externally output is found during tool offset data input/output, the following operation takes place. Input : Data of other than the data type that is not permitted to be changed is changed. Output : Data of other than the data type that is not permitted to be changed is output.

M
Data type/tool offset memory Tool offset data Tool offset data (geometry) Tool offset data (wear) Tool offset data (tool radius, geometry) Tool offset data (tool radius, wear) Tool offset data (tool length, geometry) Tool offset data (tool length, wear) Tool offset memory A Applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Tool offset memory C Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable

T
Data type/tool offset memory Tool offset data Tool offset data (geometry) Tool offset data (wear) Without tool geometry and wear compensation Applicable Not applicable Not applicable Tool radius compensation Y-axis offset (without tool geometry and wear compensation) Applicable Not applicable Not applicable With tool geometry and wear compensation Not applicable Applicable Applicable Tool radius compensation Y-axis offset (with tool geometry and wear compensation) Not applicable Applicable Applicable Virtual tool tip direction Applicable

Data type/tool offset memory Tool offset data Tool offset data (geometry) Tool offset data (wear)

Data type/tool offset memory Tool offset data

- 1180 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Part programs and part program editing NOTE 1 When changing the protection level of a part program, use the program list screen instead of the protection level setting screen. See the description of "Operation/setting screen". 2 Part program editing involves editing of programs for the MDI mode. Absolute coordinate preset operation NOTE When absolute coordinates are preset, workpiece coordinate system presetting is protected. Other notes NOTE 1 For some data, the output function is not provided. 2 When a higher protection level than the current operation level is set for data, that protection level cannot be changed. 3 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a protection level higher than the current operation level. 4 Part program editing involves editing of programs for the MDI mode. 5 For details of the protection level of PMC data, refer to "PMC Programming Manual (B-64393EN)". 6 In principle, the data change protection check is performed for changes made by MDI. Changes made by machine operations and so on are not checked. For example, a programmable parameter input by specifying G10L50 may be changed regardless of the operation level and parameter change protection level. To protect data from illegal programmed commands, take appropriate measures; for example, set an appropriate change protection level for program edit operations not to create illegal programs.

Signal
Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4<G046.3 to 6>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals select the operation level for the 8-level data protection function. The correspondence between signals and operation levels is shown below.
Operation level 3 2 1 0 KEY4 0 0 0 0 KEY3 1 0 0 0 KEY2 0 1 0 0 KEY1 0 0 1 0

NOTE When a combination other than the above is set, operation level 0 is assumed.
[Caution] When the 8-level data protection function is not used, these signals are used as memory protection keys.
- 1181 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

Note that what these signals indicate changes depending on whether the 8-level data protection function is used.

Signal address
#7 G046 #6 KEY4 #5 KEY3 #4 KEY2 #3 KEY1 #2 #1 #0

NOTE For a 2-path system, the signal address is common to all paths.

Operation/setting screen
Various settings or display about operation levels or protection levels can be performed on the following screens. Password change screen Operation level setting screen Protection level setting screen Program list screen

Password change screen

On the password change screen, the following display or operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the current operation level 2) Changing the passwords of operation levels 4 to 7

NOTE 1 A password consists of 3 to 8 characters including the following. - Uppercase letter - Numeric 2 When a password is entered, * is displayed instead of each of input characters. 3 The following shows whether passwords can be changed at the current operation level. - Password having a higher operation level than the current operation level Cannot be changed. - Password having the same operation level as the current operation level Can be changed. - Password having a lower operation level than the current operation level Can be changed (reverting to the initial password can only be performed). CAUTION The set password is not displayed. Be careful not to forget the password. Operation level setting screen
On the operation level setting screen, the following display or operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the current operation level 2) Entering the password and then selecting one of operation levels 4 to 7 3) Canceling the entered password and then selecting the operation level other than operation levels 4 to 7

NOTE When a password is entered, * is displayed instead of each character.


- 1182 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Protection level setting screen

On the protection level setting screen, the following display or operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the current operation level 2) Displaying the change protection level and output protection level of each data 3) Changing the change protection level and output protection level of each data

NOTE 1 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection level cannot be changed. 2 The protection level cannot be changed to a protection level that is higher than the current operation level. Program list screen
On the program list screen, the following display and operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the change protection level and output protection level of each part program 2) Changing the change protection level and output protection level of each part program

NOTE 1 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection level cannot be changed. 2 The protection level cannot be changed to a protection level that is higher than the current operation level.

13.1.4
Overview

Touch Panel Control

A display unit with a touch panel enables you to operate soft keys by touching the screen. Moreover, an application using a touch panel can be created with the C language executor.

NOTE 1 RS-232C serial port 2 (JD36B) is occupied. 2 Touch panel pressing information is read at intervals of 32 msec. 3 A positional precision of 2.5 mm is provided.

Explanation
C language executor
With the C language executor, touch panel functions can be used. For the specifications of the functions, refer to "C Language Executor Programming Manual".

Calibration

When replacing the touch panel or clearing all memory (SRAM) data, set data for calibrating the positional relation between the touch panel and LCD according to the procedure below. Calibration procedure 1 Enable the touch panel calibration screen.(Set bit 5 (DCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 1.) 2 3 4 Press function key . Press the continuous menu key several times. The [TOUCH PANEL] soft key is displayed. Press the [TOUCH PANEL] soft key then the [(OPRT)] soft key. The [TP CAL] soft key is displayed.
- 1183 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

Pressing the [TP CAL] soft key displays the touch panel calibration screen for all screens.

6 7

8 9

Press the calibration points (9 points) with a dedicated pen. When a point is pressed correctly, the "+" mark changes to the "" mark. If a "+" mark is not pressed accurately, the message "CALIBRATION POINT DOES NOT MATCH. PLEASE PUSH AGAIN." is displayed. After entering the calibration points (9 points), press the <INPUT> key to complete calibration. To cancel calibration or retry, press the <CAN> key. The screen display returns to the previous screen. If the <INPUT> key is pressed before entering the calibration points (9 points), calibration operation is cancelled. When calibration is terminated normally, the message "CALIBRATION WAS ENDED." is displayed. Upon completion of calibration, disable the touch panel calibration screen to protect against operation errors. (Set bit 5 (DCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 0.)

- 1184 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

NOTE 1 If the screen display is switched from the touch panel calibration screen to another screen such as the alarm screen by the automatic screen switching function, calibration is automatically cancelled. 2 Calibration operation can be performed in any mode. 3 After system startup, perform calibration operation swiftly before starting operation. Operation when two points are pressed at the same time
When the touch panel is pressed at two or more points at the same time, the position of the gravity center is obtained by considering how each of these points is pressed, and the touch panel is assumed to be pressed at this gravity center position. At this time the coordinates that can be obtained can be set by setting bit 1 (T2P) of parameter No. 3192. 1) Suppose that in Fig. 13.1 (a), as soon as point A is pressed, point B is pressed.
A
C

Fig. 13.1 (a) Pressed points on the touch panel

2)

The coordinates that can be obtained change as shown in Fig. 13.1 (b).
On A
Cont'd

...

Cont'd

Cont'd

Cont'd

...

Off

Fig. 13.1 (b)

Coordinates when parameter T2P = 0

3)

If bit T2P is set to 1, A is assumed to be held pressed even after the pressed point changes from point A to point C (Fig. 13.1 (c)).
On A
Cont'd

...

Cont'd

Cont'd

Cont'd

...

Off

Fig. 13.1 (c)

Coordinates when parameter T2P = 1

Operation when dragging is performed

When dragging (continuously pressing the touch panel while making a movement) is performed on the touch panel, the system response varies depending on the setting of bit 1 (T2P) of parameter No. 3192. When the drag function is used in C Language Executor applications, set T2P to 0. 1) Suppose that in Fig. 13.1 (d), point A is pressed first and then dragging is performed from point A to B to C.
A

Fig. 13.1 (d)

Dragging on the touch panel

- 1185 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
2) The coordinates that can be obtained change as shown in Fig. 13.1 (e).
On A
Cont'd Cont'd

B-64303EN-1/02

Fig. 13.1 (e)

Coordinates when parameter T2P = 0

3)

If bit T2P is set to 1, A is assumed to be kept pressed even after the pressed point moves from point A to point C (Fig. 13.1 (f)).
On A
Cont'd Cont'd

Fig. 13.1 (f)

Coordinates when parameter T2P = 1

Parameter
#7 3113 #6 #5 DCL #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 DCL The touch panel calibration screen is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. Usually, set this parameter to 0. Touch panel calibration becomes necessary only when the touch panel is replaced or all memory data is cleared. Set this parameter to 1 only when performing touch panel calibration. Upon completion of touch panel calibration, reset this parameter to 0.
#7 3119 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 DDS #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 DDS The touch panel is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. Set this parameter to 1 when disabling the touch panel temporarily as in the case of startup.
#7 3192 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 TRA #1 T2P #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 T2P When more than one point is pressed on the touch panel: 0: The position at the center of gravity is obtained. 1: The point pressed first is obtained.

- 1186 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE 1 Even when bit parameter T2P is set to 1, the position at the center of gravity is assumed to be pressed if two or more points are pressed within a scan period (32 ms) of the touch panel. 2 If a C executer application or the like has a touch panel drag (move in pressed state) function, set parameter T2P to 0.

#2

TRA If a point on the touch panel is kept pressed for a time specified in parameter No. 3197 or longer, 0: An alarm is not raised. 1: An alarm (SR5303) is raised.

NOTE 1 If an C executer application or the like has a touch panel repeat (continue pressing) function, set parameter TRA to 0. 2 In open CNC, the parameter is valid just for the CNC screen display function.
3197 Detection time of continuous pressing on touch panel

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word sec 0 to 255 Set a period of continuous pressing on the touch panel which causes alarm to be raised. When 0 is set, it is equivalent to 20.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (TRA) of parameter No. 3192 is set to 1.

Alarm and message


Number SR5303 Message TOUCH PANEL ERROR Description The touch panel is not connected correctly, or the touch panel cannot be initialized when the power is turned on. If bit 2 (TRA) of parameter No. 3192 is set to 1, this message is issued also when the touch panel is being kept pressed. Correct the cause then turn on the power again.

Caution
CAUTION When all memory (SRAM) data is cleared, the soft keys on the touch panel are not made usable yet. In this case, the MDI keys (such as the cursor keys and page keys) need to be used for setting.

- 1187 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

13.1.5
Outline

External Touch Panel Interface

External Touch Panel (called "ETP" below) of SNP-X protocol can be connected with Series 0i-D. ETP has functions that can read out/ write in from/to PMC such control signals as input signal(X), output signal(Y), internal relay(R), keep relay(K), data table(D), extra relay(E), timer(T), counter(C), and the function is almost the same as operating panel of machine. The remarkable function of ETP is drawing function. Assignment between drawing and address(signal) can be specified freely. For example, the data in data table can be set with the switch on the screen which is designed to assign the setting of data table.
ETP CNC

DATA Push the switch on the screen.

Data in data table is set.

- 1188 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Explanation
Connection
RS-232C serial port 2(JD36B) on main CPU board is used in CNC. Cable-A must be based on RS-232C standard, and are prepared by customer. (1) Cable-A (connection diagram between JD36B on CNC and SIO on ETP.)
ETP Cable-A CNC

SIO

JD36B

ETP SIO(25pin)

CNC JD36B(20pin)

Shield 03 RD 02 SD 04 RS 05 CS 07 SG 03 DR 07 CD 13 ER 08 SG 05 CS 15 RS 01 RD 11 SD

Cables must be shielded by cable clamp made of metal.

Power On sequence

Please turn on the power supply on ETP side first.

- 1189 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Data of CNC, read / write from ETP


Signal type Input signal to the PMC from the machine Note 1 X0 to X127 X200 to X327 X400 to X527 X600 to X727 X1000 to X1127 Y0 to Y127 Y200 to Y327 Y400 to Y527 Y600 to Y727 Y1000 to Y1127 R0 to R7999 K0 to K99 D0 to D8190 Note 2 E0 to E9999 T0 to T499 C0 to C399 C5000 to C5199 0i-D/0i Mate-D PMC

B-64303EN-1/02

The following CNC data can be read and written on the ETP side:

Output signal from the PMC to the machine

Internal relay - User area Keep relay - User area Data table Extra relay Timer - Variable timer Timer - Variable timer Counter

NOTE 1 These addresses are for read only. 2 Although the actual PMC addresses range from 0000 to 9999, only addresses up to 8190 can be used with ETP. Protocol

Only direct command on SNP-X protocol is available in CNC. ETP also must use the same protocol and the same command only. The process required for writing data more than 3 bytes is the same as that lass than 2bytes. Please refer the documents of SNP-X protocol for the detail of SNP-X protocol.

Limitation
1) 2) ETP cannot be used together with the touch panel on the LCD of the CNC (FS0i-D). ETP is Touch Panel made by DIGITAL Co. Ltd. ETPs which can be connected with CNC are as follows. - GP-450E - GP-550T - GP-550S - GP-2000 SERIES

Parameters
#7 3119 #6 #5 #4 #3 TPA #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input


- 1190 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

[Data type] Bit #3 TPA When the option for the external touch panel interface is selected, the external touch panel interface connection is: 0: Valid. 1: Invalid. For an external touch panel (called ETP hereinafter), the RS-232C serial port 2 ((JD36B) on the main board of the CNC is used. When using ETP, set bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119 to 0. By this setting, JD36B is used for ETP, regardless of the setting of I/O CHANNEL (I/O device selection) of the existing parameters Nos. 0020 through 0023. For other I/O devices, use JD36A and so forth. By the setting above, the settings of the existing parameters Nos. 0100 and 0121 through 0123 become invalid for channel 2 (JD36B), and the following settings are applied at all times: - Baud rate : 19200 bps - Stop bit : 1 bit - Parity check : Even parity
#7 13101 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 TPB #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#1 TPB Baud rate used with the external touch panel 0: 19200 bps is always used. 1: The baud rate with the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 is used. As mentioned in the description of bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119, when TPA is set to 0, the baud rate is always set to 19200 bps. To allow the baud rate to be changed, set bit 1 (TPB) of parameter No. 13101 to 1. This allows the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 to be used.

NOTE Baud rates that can be set may vary depending on the ETP used.

13.1.6
Overview

Parameter Check Sum Function

Standard check sum of CNC parameter can be calculated previously and be saved in CNC. In the other hand, a parameter check sum is calculated at CNC power-on. This value is compared with the standard check sum to check whether there is difference between two values. If there are changed parameters, an alarm will occur at next power-on. So the CNC can be averted from miss operation such as miss setting of parameter and forgetting to correct the parameters changed temporarily.
- 1191 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

Explanation
When parameter CKS(No.13730#0) is changed from 0 to 1, the standard check sum is calculated. In the other hand at CNC power-on, a parameter check sum is calculated and its value is compared with standard check sum. If two values are different, alarm (DS5340) occurs. This alarm is canceled by the operation pressing and , but if parameters are not corrected to original value, alarm (DS5340) will occur again at next check sum comparison at CNC power-on. By parameter setting, some parameters can be excluded from check sum. Moreover, there are many parameters that CNC system excludes from check sum.

NOTE If parameter CSR(No.13730#7) is 1, alarm(DS5340) can be canceled only by key.

Parameter check sum information screen


The parameter check sum information screen shows the value of the standard check sum, the time and date when the standard check sum was calculated, and the value of a check sum calculated at power-on.

Fig. 13.1.6 (g) Parameter check sum information screen

Parameter check sum setting screen


Setting parameters to be excluded
Setting the number of parameter excluded from check sum on this screen. A brief explanation about setting data is shown on the bottom of this frame.

- 1192 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Fig. 13.1.6 (h) Parameter check sum setting (No.) screen

Range of excluded parameters

The range of parameter numbers to be excluded from check sum can be specified. A brief explanation about setting data is shown on the bottom of this frame.

Fig. 13.1.6 (i) Parameter check sum setting (range) screen

Operation procedure
The following explains how to display the parameter check sum information screen and how to make settings on the parameter check sum setting screen.

1 2

Displaying parameter check sum information


Press function key . several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] appears.
- 1193 -

For the 10.4-inch display unit, follow the steps below. Press continuous menu key

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

3 4

Press horizontal soft key [PARAM CHKSUM]. Press horizontal soft key [CHKSUM INFO]. The following screen is then displayed:

Fig. 13.1.6 (j) Parameter check sum information screen (10.4 inches)

For the 8.4-inch display unit, follow the steps below. 1 2 Press function key . Press vertical continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [CHKSUM] is displayed.

3 4

Press soft key [CHKSUM]. Press soft key [CHKINF]. The following screen is displayed:

Fig. 13.1.6 (k) Parameter check sum information screen (8.4 inches)

- 1194 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

1 2 3 4

Setting parameters to be excluded


Press function key .

For the 10.4-inch display unit, follow the steps below. Press continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] is displayed. Press soft key [PARAM CHKSUM]. Press soft key [CHKSUM SETING]. The following screen is displayed:

Fig. 13.1.6 (l) Parameter check sum setting screen (10.4 inches)

By using page keys

and

, the parameter check sum setting screen changes as follows:

First page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET (NO.) 1/2

Second page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET(NO.) 2/2 Third page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET(RANGE) 1/2

- 1195 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

Fourth page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET(RANGE) 2/2 6 7 8 Move the cursor to a target item. Enter the number of a parameter to be excluded from the check sum, and press the key or soft key [INPUT]. When completing the setting of all parameters to be excluded, set bit 0 (CKS) of parameter No. 13730 to 1.

For the 8.4-inch display unit, follow the steps below. 1 2 3 4 Press function key . Press vertical continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [CHKSUM] is displayed. Press soft key [CHKSUM]. Press soft key [CHKSET]. The following screen is displayed:

Fig. 13.1.6 (m) Parameter check sum setting screen (8.4 inches)

The following steps are the same as those for the 10.4-inch display described above.

- 1196 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

NOTE 1 Items set on this screen correspond to parameter Nos. 13731 to 13770 as shown below. These items can be set also on the parameter screen. Exclusion Nos. 01 to 20 Parameter Nos. 13731 to 13750 Exclusion ranges 01 to 10 Parameter Nos. 13751 to 13770 2 When 0 is set as an exclusion number, it is ignored. 3 Numbers set as the start NO. and end NO. of each exclusion range are also excluded. 4 In a combination of the start No. and end No., if the start No. is greater than the end No. (start No. > end No.), the setting of check sum exclusion numbers becomes invalid. 5 If the start No. equals the end No. (start No. = end No.), only the set number is excluded.

Excluded parameters
A check sum is not the sum of all parameters but is calculated with particular parameters excluded. The parameters to be excluded satisfy one of the following conditions: <1> Parameters that can be input by setting input <2> Parameters of which values may be changed by the system <3> Parameters set on the parameter check sum setting screen For the parameters shown in <2> above, see the following table.
Table 13.1.6 (a) Parameters excluded from the check sum Parameter number 1320 to 1327 1330 to 1348 3226 4911 to 4914 5130 5132 to 5133 5134 5135 5136 5137 5139 5140 5141 5142 5143 6581 to 6595 6750 7220 to 7283 7310 8210 8900 11309 14717 Description Coordinates at the boundary of stored stroke check 1 Chuck and tail stock barrier Keyword of the key lock for parameters related to dual check safety Spindle speed fluctuation detection Amount of chamfering in thread cutting cycles G96 and G92 Depth of cut and escaping amount of multiple repetitive cycles G71 and G72 Clearance value of multiple repetitive cycles G71 and G72 Escaping amount along the X-axis in multiple repetitive cycle G73 Escaping amount along the Z-axis in multiple repetitive cycle G73 Divide number of multiple repetitive cycle G73 Return amount in multiple repetitive cycles G74 and G75 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive cycle G76 Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive cycle G76 Number of repetitions of final finishing in multiple repetitive cycle G76 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive cycle G76 VGA character color number Integrated value of power-on period Name of general-purpose switch on software operators panel Program restart Slant angle PWE Menu number selected on the pattern menu screen Axis number of the C-axis in simulation (for MGi only)

- 1197 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

When the machining condition selecting function is used, the parameters in the following table are also excluded from the check sum:
Parameter number 1432 1769 1772 1783 13634 Table 13.1.6 (b) Parameters excluded from the check sum (when the machining condition selecting function is used) Description Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control mode Time constant for each axis for linear and bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed Acceleration change time in bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Allowable speed differences in speed determination by corner speed differences Currently selected level in advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control

Table 13.1.6 (c) Parameters for setting the parameter numbers of parameters to be excluded from the check sum (when the machining condition selecting function is used) Parameter No. Parameter number set in parameter No.13628 (parameter number corresponding to item 1 when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control is used) Parameter number set in parameter No.13629 (parameter number corresponding to item 2 when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control is used)

NOTE 1 When the machining condition selecting function is not used, these parameters are included in the check sum. 2 The parameters of which numbers are set in parameter Nos. 13628 and 13629 are excluded, but parameter Nos. 13628 and 13629 are not excluded.

Parameter
#7 13730 CSR #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CKS

[Data type] Bit #0 CKS When the power is turned on, the parameter check sum is: 0: Not checked. 1: Checked. CSR Alarm No. 5340 (parameter check sum error) is cleared with: 0: 1:
13731 13732 13733 13734 13735

#7

The The

and key.

keys.

NC parameter check sum exclusion number 01 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 02 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 03 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 04 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 05

- 1198 -

B-64303EN-1/02 13736 13737 13738 13739 13740 13741 13742 13743 13744 13745 13746 13747 13748 13749 13750

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NC parameter check sum exclusion number 06 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 07 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 08 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 09 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 10 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 11 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 12 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 13 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 14 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 15 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 16 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 17 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 18 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 19 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 20

[Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 0 to maximum parameter number Set the parameter numbers of parameters to be excluded from check sum calculation performed by the parameter check sum function.
13751 13752 13753 13754 13755 13756 13757 13758 13759 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 01 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 01 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 02 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 02 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 03 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 03 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 04 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 04 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 05

- 1199 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
13760 13761 13762 13763 13764 13765 13766 13767 13768 13769 13770 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 05 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 06 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 06 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 07 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 07 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 08 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 08 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 09 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 09 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 10 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 10

B-64303EN-1/02

[Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 0 to maximum parameter number Specify a range of parameter numbers of which parameters are to be excluded from check sum calculation performed by the parameter check sum function. The parameters within the range from the starting number to the ending number are excluded from the check sum.

NOTE 1 The parameter numbers set as the starting number and ending number are also excluded. 2 In a combination of a starting number and an ending number, if the starting number is greater than the ending number (starting number > ending number), the setting of check sum exclusion numbers is ignored. 3 If the starting number equals the ending number (starting number = ending number), only that number is excluded.

Alarm and message


Number DS 5340 Message PARAMETER CHECK SUM ERROR Description Because parameters have been modified, the parameter check sum and the standard check sum do not match. Restore the original parameter state, or set a standard check sum again.

- 1200 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

13.1.7
Overview

Touch Panel Check Signal

This function outputs a signal to notify the PMC that a virtual MDI key has been pressed. The machine tool builder can use this function for applications in which, for example, a buzzer is sounded after a press of a virtual MDI key is detected.

Explanation
When a virtual MDI key is pressed, the signal TPPRS<F006.0> is output. (Fig. 13.1.7 (a) and (b) show the range of virtual MDI keys that cause signal output.) In related functions, this function operates as follows: CNC screen display function When the virtual MDI key function is used in the CNC screen display function, the signal is output. Macro executor When the macro executor is used on the virtual MDI screen, the signal is output. C language executor While the C language executor screen is being displayed, the signal is not output.

NOTE 1 This function is enabled when the virtual MDI function is used. 2 When a virtual MDI key is pressed for a short time or when a virtual MDI key is pressed several times successively, the CNC does not sometimes accept the key input even if the signal is output.

Range of virtual MDI keys that cause signal output

Fig. 13.1.7 (a) When the NC screen is displayed

- 1201 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

Fig. 13.1.7 (b) When the PMC high-precision screen is displayed

When a virtual MDI key within the range indicated by is pressed, the signal is output.

in Fig. 13.1.7 (a) and Fig. 13.1.7 (b)

Signal
Touch panel check signal TPPRS<F006.0>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that a virtual MDI key has been pressed. [Operation] The signal is set to 1 when: A virtual MDI key is pressed. The signal is set to 0 when: A virtual MDI key is released.

Signal address
#7 F006 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TPPRS

Timing chart
Virtual MDI key pressed

The following shows a timing chart of a press of a virtual MDI key and the touch panel check signal.

Touch panel check signal


32 msec or more

When a virtual MDI key is pressed, the signal is output for 32 msec or longer. Read the signal with a ladder program of which cycle period is shorter than 32 msec. When a virtual MDI key is held pressed continuously, the signal is kept output. There may be a delay from a press of a virtual MDI key until the touch panel check signal is output. A delay may be generated also when the virtual MDI key is released.
- 1202 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

If the time from when a virtual MDI key is pressed until it is released is within 50 msec, the touch panel check signal is not sometimes output.

13.1.8
Overview

CNC Screen Dual Display

The CNC screen display function can be used to display the CNC screen on both the PC connected via the Ethernet and the CNC. If the CNC screen display function is started on the PC side when the screen is displayed on the display unit of the CNC, the dual display mode is entered. When the CNC screen display function is ended on the PC, the CNC screen is displayed only on the display unit of the CNC. In case the PC hangs up for a cause in the dual display mode, it is also possible to forcibly turn off the CNC screen display function on the PC by using a DI signal to end the dual display mode. Key input operation can be performed on one of the PC and CNC sides, which can be selected.

NOTE When the dual display function is being used, the same screen is displayed on the PC and the CNC. The PC performance may have influence on the display speed on the CNC side and slow down the display on the CNC.

Explanation
Operation
When bit 7 (NS2) of parameter No. 3206 is set to 1, the CNC screen dual display function is enabled. Then, when the CNC screen display function on the PC side is started, the CNC screen is displayed on both the PC and the CNC .

Selection of key control

Either the keyboard of the PC or the MDI keys of the CNC become usable for key control. The DI signal CNCKY<G0295.7> is used to select key control. If CNCKY<G0295.7> is set to 1, the MDI keys of the CNC become usable; if the signal is set to 0, the keyboard of the PC becomes usable. The reset key, however, is always usable on both the PC and the CNC. When the CNC is equipped with a touch panel, if bit 5 (S2K) of parameter No. 3206 is set to 1, it becomes possible to select key control by pressing the upper left corner of the screen. In this case, the signal cannot be used to select key control. When the upper left part of the display screen on the CNC is pressed, the MDI keys become usable; when the upper left part of the CNC screen display on the PC is clicked, the keyboard of the PC becomes usable. With a DO signal CNCKYO<F0295.7>, key control selection status can be checked to see which key control, key control on the PC or key control on the CNC, is currently selected. Selection of key control is disabled when the dual display function is not used.

Data I/O

When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 0300 is set to 1, the data input/output destination is determined by the selection of key control. When the keyboard of the PC is selected, input and output operations on the PC side are enabled; when the MDI keys of the CNC are selected, input and output operations on the CNC side are enabled.

- 1203 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE If key control selection is changed and so the data input/output destination is changed when the All I/O screen is displayed, the file list displayed on the All I/O screen is not updated automatically. In this case, press soft key [REFRESH] to update the display. Forcible end by a DI signal
If the PC hangs up for a cause when the CNC screen dual display function is being performed, the CNC can issue a DI signal to forcibly end the CNC screen display function on the PC. When C2SEND<G0295.6> is set to 1, the CNC screen display function on the PC is forcibly ended. The status of the forcible end processing is indicated by a DO signal C2SENO<F0295.6>. Forcible end by the DI signal is invalid when the dual display function is not used.

Signal
Key control selection signal CNCKY <G295.7>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects which key control, key control on the PC or on the CNC, is to be enabled. [Operation] If the signal is set to 0, key control on the PC is enabled. If the signal is set to 1, key control from the MDI keys on the CNC is enabled.

Dual display forcible end request signal C2SEND <G295.6>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Requests forcible end of the CNC screen display function on the PC side. [Operation] If the signal is set to 0, no end request is issued. If the signal is set to 1, an end request is issued.

Key control selection status signal CNCKYO <F295.7>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates which key control, key control on the PC or on the CNC, is currently selected. [Operation] If this signal is set to 0, key control on the PC side is selected. If this signal is set to 1, MDI input on the CNC is selected.

Dual display forcible end status signal C2SENO <F295.6>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the status of end processing performed in response to the end request issued with the dual display forcible end request signal. [Operation] If this signal is set to 0, the end processing is not yet completed. If this signal is set to 1, the end processing is completed.

Signal address
#7 G295 CNCKY #7 F295 CNCKYO #6 C2SEND #6 C2SENO #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Parameter
#7 0300 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PCM

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit


- 1204 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

#0

PCM If the 0i-D/0i Mate-D is connected to a PC via Ethernet, when the CNC screen display function is started: 0: The memory card interface in the CNC is used. 1: The memory card interface or the hard disk on the PC side is used. When the CNC screen dual display function is being used, the data input/output destination conforms to the selection of key control. This parameter is valid only when the CNC screen display function is active.
#7 #6 #5 S2K #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3206

NS2

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 S2K In CNC screen dual display function, 0: Key control is selected by DI signal <G295.7>. 1: Key control is selected by pushing at left upper corner on the screen. (Touch panel only) NS2 CNC screen dual display function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

#7

13.1.9
Overview

Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor

Any servo motor axis can be selected to display its speed considering gear ratio.

Explanation
The screen display can be switched between the speed of the milling axis and the spindle speed by using an input signal.

Switching to the display of the speed of a milling tool with a servo motor

With the speed display change signal SDPC<Gn038.5>, the speed of a milling axis or the spindle speed can be selected and indicated in the part marked by (*1)(*2) in the below figure.

Displaying the speed of a milling tool with a servo motor

As the speed of a milling axis, the value obtained by multiplying the servo motor speed by the gear ratio is indicated.
Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis side (parameter No.1898) Gear ratio = Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side (parameter No.1899)

To select the target servo motor axis, set a controlled axis number as the number of a servo motor axis used as the axis of a milling tool (parameter No. 1895).

NOTE 1 If parameter Nos. 1898 and 1899 are not set, the gear ratio is assumed to be 1:13. 2 If an axis that uses a linear motor is selected, the speed cannot be displayed. 3 Even when the speed of a milling axis is displayed, the actual speed of feed per revolution follows the speed of the spindle.
- 1205 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Milling tool rotation speed display by a servo motor

B-64303EN-1/02

Figs. 13.1.9 (a) to (d) indicate examples of positions in which the rotation speed is displayed. The positions are indicated by (*1) and (*2) below. The mark (*2) indicates that bit 2 (DPS) of parameter No. 3105 needs to be set.

(*1)

(*2)

Fig. 13.1.9 (a) Example of the current position screen (10.4-inch display unit)

(*1)

(*2)

Fig. 13.1.9 (b) Example of the program screen (10.4-inch display unit)

- 1206 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

(*1)

(*2)

Fig. 13.1.9 (c) Example of the program check screen (8.4-inch display unit)

(*1)

(*2)

Fig. 13.1.9 (d)

Example of the graphic screen (tool path diagram) (8.4-inch display unit)

Signal
Speed display change signal SDPC<Gn038.5>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the speed to be displayed: the speed of the milling axis or the spindle speed. [Operation] If this signal is set to 1, the speed of the milling axis is displayed. If this signal is set to 0, the spindle speed is displayed.

Signal address
#7 Gn038 #6 #5 SDPC #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

- 1207 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

Parameter
#7 3105 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 DPS #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 DPS The actual spindle speed is: 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed
Servo motor axis number used for a milling tool

1895

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets the servo motor axis number used for displaying the speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.
1898 Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis side

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 This parameter sets the number of servo motor axis gear teeth used for displaying the speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.

NOTE This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 1895.
1899 Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 This parameter sets the number of milling axis gear teeth used for displaying the speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.

NOTE This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 1895.

13.1.10
Overview

Screen Switching by Mode


such as the program edit screen and the program

One of the screens displayed using function key

check screen can be selected according to the mode. When a mode switches to other mode, the screen selected last in that mode is displayed. There are five modes, and immediately after the power is turned on in each mode, a screen is selected as follows:
- 1208 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
: : : : : Program check screen (for MEM) Program edit screen (for EDIT) Program edit screen (for MDI) Program edit screen Program edit screen

MEM EDIT MDI TJOG/THND Other modes

Mode switching and screen examples


Mode switching after power-on
is pressed at power-on, the program check When the MEM mode is selected and function key

screen is displayed. When the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program edit screen is displayed.

Mode switching after screen operation

When soft key [FOLDER] is pressed in the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed. When the mode is changed to the MEM mode, the program check screen is displayed. Then, when the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed. MEM mode

EDIT mode

- 1209 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

- Mode switching after screen operation When soft key [FOLDER] is pressed in the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed. When the mode is changed to the MEM mode, the program check screen is displayed. Then, when the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed. EDIT mode

MEM mode

EDIT mode

- 1210 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Parameter
11302 CPG

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #7 CPG PROG function screen selection is: 0: Not changed according to the CNC mode. 1: Changed according to the CNC mode.

13.1.11
Overview

Screen Switching at Path Switching

When switching from one path to another has been made, the same screen and soft keys as displayed for the previous path can be displayed. Since the same screen is displayed even after path switching, the user no longer has to change the screen display. It is also possible to change the screen display to the screen that was selected most recently for each path.

Explanation
Even after switching between paths is made, the currently selected screen is displayed, and only information displayed on the screen is updated.

Parameter
#7 3208 #6 #5 PSC #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 PSC When the path is switched based on the path switch signal: 0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path. 1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed. If this parameter is set to 0, the screen selected for each path is stored. Therefore, when path switching to a path is made, the screen selected last for that path is displayed.

- 1211 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

13.1.12
Overview

Screen erasure function and automatic screen erasure function

Keeping the same characters displayed in the same positions on the screen for a long time will shorten the life of the LCD. To prevent this, the CNC screen can be erased. The screen erasure function allows the user to perform a key operation to erase the screen. The automatic screen erasure function erases the screen automatically when there has been no key operation for a parameter-set period of time.

Screen erasure function


When 0 is set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen can be erased by pressing the function key (such as pressing any function key. or key and any ) at the same time. The CNC screen can be displayed again by

Automatic screen erasure function


When there has been no key operation for a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen is erased automatically. The CNC screen is displayed again by pressing a key.

Screen erasure by the automatic screen erasure function

If the following conditions are all satisfied for the time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen is erased. Conditions for automatically erasing the CNC screen Parameter No. 3123 0 None of the following key operations is performed. MDI keys Soft keys External key input No alarm is issued.

Redisplay of the screen by the automatic screen erasure function

If one of the following conditions is satisfied when the CNC screen is off, the CNC screen is displayed again: Conditions for redisplaying the CNC screen One of the following key operations is performed. MDI keys Soft keys External key input An alarm is issued.

Screen erasure by using the

key + function key


key and a

When a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 3123, the screen is not erased with the function key.

Set time Alarm in another path


- 1212 -

Only the time set in parameter No. 3123 for path 1 is valid. When an alarm is issued in any of the paths, the screen is not erased.

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Signal
Screen erasure disable signal *CRTOF<G0062.1>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal enables or disables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure function. [Operation] 0: Enables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure function. 1: Disables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure function.

NOTE Be sure to set this signal "1" to display an external message in screen erasure. Automatic screen erasure status in-progress signal ERTVA<Fn006.2>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the CNC screen is being erased by the automatic screen erasure function. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 when: The CNC screen is erased by the automatic screen erasure function. This signal is set to 0 when: One of the following key operations is performed: MDI key Soft key External key input An alarm is issued. The operation mode is changed. The automatic screen erasure disable signal *CRTOF <G0062.1> is set to 1.

NOTE This signal is not output when the screen is erased by pressing the key and any function key. Signal address
#7 G0062 #7 Fn006 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 ERTVA #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 *CRTOF #1 #0 #0

Parameter
3123 Time required before a screen saver is activated

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Setting input Byte path min 0 to 127 Set a time in minutes until the automatic screen erasure function starts operating. When 0 is set, automatic screen erasure is disabled. In this parameter, only the value set for path 1 is valid.

NOTE 1 Setting 0 disables automatic screen erasure.


- 1213 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE 2 This function cannot be used together with manual screen erasure. If 1 or a larger value is set in this parameter, manual screen erasure is disabled.

13.1.13
Overview

Screen Hard Copy Function

This function converts screen information displayed on the CNC into bit map format data and output it to a memory card. Once output, bit map format data can be displayed and edited on a personal computer.

Explanation
When using this function, the following settings are necessary. - Set bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301 to 1. - Set parameter No.20 to 4. For a 2-path system, set bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301 of path 1.

Start/cancellation methods
for five seconds or by

The screen hard copy function is started by pressing and holding down key canceled by pressing key

changing the hard copy execution request signal HCREQ<G067.7> from "0" to "1". The function can be or by changing the hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT<G067.6> to "1". While the screen hard copy function is in progress, the hard copy execution status signal HCEXE<F061.3> is "1", and upon completion, it is set to "0". When a screen hard copy cancellation request is received, the hard copy cancellation request reception signal HCAB2<F061.2> is set to "1" and remains in the "1" state until the hard copy function is started again or a reset is made.

Acquisition and output of screen data

When started, the screen hard copy function starts acquiring screen data. As soon as it has acquired it, the function outputs bit map format data to the memory card inserted into the LCD unit. While screen data is being acquired, the screen remains stationary for a few seconds. Acquired screen data can be output from the memory card screen. Also, while screen data is being output, "OUTPUT" blinks in the status display.

Screen data file names

Bit map format screen data files created by this function are assigned the names below, starting with the one created after the power is turned on. "HDCPY000.BMP" (name of the first file output to the memory card after the power is turned on) "HDCPY001.BMP" (name of the second file output to the memory card after the power is turned on) : : "HDCPY999.BMP" (name of the 1000th file output to the memory card after the power is turned on) If, after a file with "HDCPY999.BMP" is output, the screen hard copy function is executed, the file name returns to "HDCPY000.BMP". If, however, a file with the same file name as the one to be output when the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, alarm SR1973 is issued. If the capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm SR1962 is issued. In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory card needs to be replaced with a new one.

Limitation
Screens whose hard copies cannot be made
- 1214 -

Hard copies of the BOOT screen, the IPL screen, and the system alarm screen cannot be made.

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Foreground I/O devices Canceling the hard copy function

During DNC operation, for example, screen data cannot be output while a foreground I/O device is in use. If the hard copy function is canceled before a hard copy is completed, an incomplete bit map file of data that has been output is created.

Signal
Hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT<G067.6>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal requests the cancellation of the screen hard copy function. [Operation] When the signal is set to "1", the control unit operates as follows: Cancels the screen hard copy function if it is being executed. Does nothing if the screen hard copy function is not being executed. Note that changing HCREQ<G067.7> from "0" to "1" when HCABT<G067.6> is "1" does not cause the screen hard copy function to be executed.

NOTE If changing this signal from "0" to "1", set it to "0" on the PMC after the signal is maintained in the "1" state for at least 64 msec. Hard copy execution request signal HCREQ<G067.7>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal requests the execution of the screen hard copy function. [Operation] When the signal is changed from "0" to "1", the control unit operates as follows: Starts creating a hard copy.

NOTE If changing this signal from "0" to "1", set it to "0" on the PMC after the signal is maintained in the "1" state for at least 64 msec. If making another hard copy execution request, wait until the signal is maintained in the "0" state for at least 64 msec. Hard copy cancellation request reception signal HCAB2<F061.2>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies that a screen hard copy cancellation request is made. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" in the following case: HCABT<G067.6> is set to "1" or key is pressed, so that the CNC receives this as a screen hard copy cancellation request. This signal is set to "0" in the following cases: A reset is made. The screen hard copy is started again.

Hard copy execution status signal HCEXE<F061.3>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies that the screen hard copy function is being executed. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" in the following case: The screen hard copy function is started by changing HCREQ<G067.7> from "0" to "1" or by pressing and holding down key
- 1215 -

for five seconds.

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
This signal is set to "0" in the following cases: The screen hard copy function is completed. The screen hard copy function is canceled.

B-64303EN-1/02

Timing charts for input/output signals are shown below Fig. 13.1.13 (a) shows a timing chart of the screen hard copy function when it terminates normally, and Fig. 13.1.13 (b) shows a timing chart of the screen hard copy function when it is canceled and restarted.
Least 64 msec Hard copy execution request signal (HCREQ)

Hard copy execution status signal (HCEXE)

Fig. 13.1.13 (a) When the screen hard copy function terminates normally
Least 64msec Hard copy execution request signal (HCREQ) Least 64msec Least 64msec

Hard copy execution status signal (HCEXE) Least 64msec Hard copy cancellation request signal (HCABT)

Hard copy cancellation request reception signal (HCAB2)

Fig. 13.1.13 (b) When the screen hard copy function is canceled and restarted

Signal address
#7 G067 F061 HCREQ #6 HCABT HCEXE HCAB2 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 35 Set the interface number for a foreground I/O device. If enabling the screen hard copy function (by setting bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301 to 1), set this parameter to 4 (memory card).
- 1216 -

B-64303EN-1/02 #7 3301 HDC #6 #5 #4 #3

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#2 #1 #0 H16

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 H16 Bit map data of screen hard copies uses: 0: 256 colors. 1: 16 colors. HDC A screen hard copy function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

#7

NOTE For a 2-path system, the settings of bit 7 (HDC) and bit 0 (H16) of parameter No. 3301 of path 1 are used.

13.2
13.2.1
Overview

EDIT
Memory Protection Keys

Memory protection keys can be provided so as not to inadvertently store, change, or delete programs, offset values, parameters, settings, and so forth. For a 2-path system, protection keys are common to all paths.

Signal
Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to 6>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals allow MDI panel operations that change the memory contents. There are the following four signals. The target memory contents depend on the setting of KEY (bit 7 of parameter No. 3290). When the KEY is 0 : KEY1 : Allows the input of tool offset values, workpiece origin offsets, and workpiece coordinate system shift values. KEY2 : Allows the setting of data input, macro variable input, and tool life management data input. KEY3 : Allows program input and editing. KEY4 : Allows PMC data (counter data table). When the KEY is 1 : KEY1 : Allows program input, program editing, PMC data input. KEY2 to KEY4 : Not used. [Operation] If a memory protection signal is set to 0, the corresponding operation is disabled. If a memory protection signal is 1, the corresponding operation is enabled.

- 1217 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Signal address


#7 G0046 #6 KEY4 #5 KEY3 #4 KEY2 #3 KEY1 #2 #1

B-64303EN-1/02

#0

NOTE For a 2-path system, signal addresses are common to all paths.

Parameter
#7 3290 KEY #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #7 KEY For memory protection keys: 0: The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used. 1: Only the KEY1 signal is used.

NOTE 1 The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0 or KEY=1. When KEY = 0: - KEY1: Enables a tool offset value, workpiece zero point offset value, and workpiece shift value to be input. - KEY2: Enables setting data, macro variables, and tool life management value to be input. - KEY3: Enables program registration and editing. - KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to be input. When KEY = 1: - KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and enables PMC parameter input. - KEY2 to KEY4: Not used 2 When a 2-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.

13.2.2
Overview

Memory Protection Signal For CNC Parameter

Writing to a parameter can be prohibited or allowed by a signal. To enable or disable this function, set bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299. To prohibit or allow input to a parameter, set KEYP<G046.0>. Writing to a parameter was set on the setting screen conventionally, but this function allows writing to a parameter to be set by external switches.

Signal
Memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables or disables operation on CNC parameters from the MDI panel. [Operation] When this signal is 0, input to CNC parameters is prohibited. When this signal is 1, input to CNC parameters is allowed. This signal is valid only when bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 is set to 1.

- 1218 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 KEYP

Signal address
G046

NOTE For a 2-path system, the signal address is common to all paths.

Parameter
#7 3299 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PKY

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #0 PKY "PARAMETER WRITE" is: 0: Set on the setting screen (bit 0 (PWE) of setting parameter No.8900). 1: Set by the memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0>.

NOTE Before setting this parameter, confirm that memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0> can be operated.
(Remark) If this parameter is set even through memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0> cannot be changed from 0, parameters cannot be changed.

Notes
When bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 is set to 1, PARAMETER WRITE on the setting screen cannot be set. When bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 has been set to 1 and bit 0 (PWE) of parameter No. 8900 has been set to 0 at power-on, setting the signal KEYP<G046.0> to 1 in the operation mode causes alarm SW0100 and stops operation.

13.2.3
Overview

MDI Key Setting

Because the type of the MDI keys of the CNC is determined automatically, no additional setting is required for the MDI keys. When the machine tool builder's own MDI keys are connected, valid key input is made possible by parameter setting.

Parameter
3160 Setting of MDI unit type

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 4 Set the type of an MDI unit when the type of an MDI unit is not automatically identified.

- 1219 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Setting value 0 1 2 3 4 Type Depends on the system type and indicator type. Standard MDI unit for the lathe system Standard MDI unit for the machining center system Small MDI unit for the lathe system Small MDI unit for the machining center system

B-64303EN-1/02

When 0 is set in this parameter, the type of a MDI unit is determined as follows:
Type of path control Lathe system Type of indicator Type of 12 horizontal soft keys Type of 7 horizontal soft keys Type of 12 horizontal soft keys Type of 7 horizontal soft keys
#5 #4 #3

Machining center system

Type Standard MDI unit for the lathe system Small MDI unit for the lathe system Standard MDI unit for the machining center system Small MDI unit for the machining center system
#2 #1 #0 PAR

#7 3204

#6

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 PAR When a small MDI unit is used, characters "[" and "]" are: 0: Used as "[" and "]". 1: Used as "(" and ")".

NOTE When a 2-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.

13.2.4

Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function

Use of this function allows the user to enter characters such as "@", "(", and ")" by using soft keys when the compact-type MDI unit is used.

Operation procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the EDIT mode. Press function key .

Press soft key [(OPRT)] then press continuous menu key several times to display soft key [CHA-EXT]. Press soft key [CHA-EXT]. As shown in Fig. 13.2.4 (a), characters such as "@" and "(" appear as soft keys.

- 1220 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Fig. 13.2.4 (a)

Compact-type MDI key input

6.

When a soft key indicating the character to be input is pressed, the character is input to the key-in buffer.

Usable characters
The following characters can be entered using soft keys:
Table 13.2.4 (a) Characters that can be entered using soft keys ( @ % " ) _ $ ? < ! * > ~ & : AB/ab(*)

This soft key causes the input mode of alphabetical characters to alternate between the uppercase input mode and the lowercase input mode. The character before the key-in buffer changes to "A" or "a" depending on the input mode.

Parameter
#7 13115 #6 #5 SI2 #4 SI1 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #4 SI1 Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and lowercase input modes by a soft key are: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. <>%$!~:"'
- 1221 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#5

B-64303EN-1/02

SI2 Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and lowercase input modes by a soft key are: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. ()?*&@_

13.3
13.3.1
Overview

TWO PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT


Two Path Display

In a multi path system, operations such as program creation and data input are performed with a display/operation target path selected by switching. For path selection, the path select signals are used. For a selected path, MDI key operation is performed. By parameter setting, a selection can be made to display only one path on the screen at a time or display both paths on the screen simultaneously. When both paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of path display can be specified according to the machine configuration and layout. Moreover, a selection can be made by a parameter to display the same screen at path switching or to store the last displayed screen of each path and display the last displayed screen of a selected path.

Explanation
Two path simultaneous display
Information about two paths can be displayed on one screen simultaneously. Two path information can be displayed simultaneously on the following screens: 10.4-inch LCD Absolute position screen Relative position screen Overall position display Handle display screen Program screen Program check screen Alarm display screen Tool path drawing screen 8.4-inch LCD Program screen Program check screen Alarm display screen Tool path drawing screen MDI key operation is performed for a screen selected with the path select signals.

Setting two path simultaneous display

When bit 2 (DOP) of parameter No. 3193 is 0 in a 2-path system, information of two paths can be displayed simultaneously on one screen. At this time, MDI key operation is valid for the path selected by the path selection signal.

- 1222 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Fig. 13.3.1 Two path simultaneous display (10.4-inch LCD, Program screen)

Display order number

On the screen on which multiple paths are displayed simultaneously in 2-path control, parameter No. 13130 is used to set the order in which the paths are displayed.
System 2-path Setting 0 1 Order First path, second path Second path, first path

Path selection signal

The path selection signal selects the path to be operated or displayed with LCD/MDI. The first path is selected when HEAD<G063.0> is 0 or the second path is selected when HEAD<G063.0> is 1.

Parameter
#7 3193 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 DOP #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 DOP In 2-path control, on the POSITION screen (absolute, relative, all, manual handle interruption), PROGRAM CHECK screen, and ALARM screen, two paths' information is: 0: Displayed at the same time. 1: Not displayed at the same time.
#7 3208 #6 #5 PSC #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit

- 1223 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#5 PSC When the path is switched based on the path switch signal: 0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path. 1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed.

B-64303EN-1/02

13130

The order of displaying path at the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 1 At the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of displaying path is set. The relation between the setting and the display order is as follows.
System 2 paths Setting 0 1 Display order 1st path, 2nd path 2nd path, 1st path

Signal
Path select signal HEAD<G063.0>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals select the target path for which MDI operation and display are to be performed.

Signal address
#7 G063 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 HEAD

13.3.2
Overview

Simultaneous Two Path Program Editing

Simultaneous two path program editing allows the user to edit programs for more than one path on a single screen according to the settings of the simultaneous two path display parameters (parameter No.13130). For details of parameter No. 13130, see Subsection 13.3.1, "Two Path Display". This function becomes effective when the following conditions are full. Two paths system Bit 2 (DOP) of parameter No.3193 is set to 0 Bit 0 (DHD) of parameter No.3106 is set to 1

Screen display
Fig. 13.3.2 (a) show sample screens on which simultaneous two path program editing is being performed. The status line located at the top of each program displays the program number and <FG-EDIT>, which indicates that foreground editing is in progress. The status line of the currently edited program is highlighted.

- 1224 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Program being edited

Fig. 13.3.2 (a) Simultaneous two path program edit screen (10.4-inch display unit)

Explanation
Mode
The programs of two paths are simultaneously displayed only when both paths are in the EDIT mode or MEM mode.

Changing the path to be edited Conditions under which simultaneous display and editing are enabled

The path selected by the path selection signals is to be edited. 2-path program simultaneous display/editing is enabled: When the program screen is selected as the entire screen When the mode in both paths is EDIT or MEM in foreground editing. When the virtual MDI key function is disabled.

Simultaneous editing with a 8.4-inch display unit

When simultaneous editing is performed with a 8.4-inch display unit, displayed characters become smaller. The number of characters displayed per path in the edit area is as follows: When simultaneous display is not performed, characters are displayed in 38 columns by 10 lines. For simultaneous display for two paths, characters are displayed in 35 columns by 14 lines.

- 1225 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

Program being edited

Fig. 13.3.2 (b) 2-path program simultaneous editing screen (8.4-inch display unit)

Concurrent editing the programs of two paths being edited at the background

If background editing is started when the concurrent editing of the programs of two paths is set to be enabled, background editing of the unselected path as well as the selected path is started and the programs of the two paths being edited in the background are displayed concurrently. (However, background editing of the unselected path is started with no program specified.) The editing mode specified at the start of background editing is valid for all paths being edited concurrently, so the editing mode and reference mode cannot be specified at the same time on the simultaneous editing screen. In addition, if background editing is terminated, background editing of the unselected path as well as the selected path is terminated.

Fig. 13.3.2 (c)

Concurrent editing of the programs of two paths being edited in the background

- 1226 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DHD

Parameter
3106

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #0 DHD On the program screen: 0: Only a selected path can be edited and displayed. 1: 2-path can be edited and displayed at the same time.
#7 3193 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 DOP #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 DOP In 2-path control, on the POSITION screen (absolute, relative, all, manual handle interruption), PROGRAM CHECK screen, and ALARM screen, two paths' information is: 0: Displayed at the same time. 1: Not displayed at the same time.
The order of displaying path at the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously

13130

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 1 At the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of displaying path is set. The relation between the setting and the display order is as follows.
System 2 paths Setting 0 1 Display order 1st path, 2nd path 2nd path, 1st path

- 1227 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

13.4
13.4.1

MACHINE OPERATION MENU


Overview

The soft keys displayed on the standard CNC screen can be used as menu keys for machine operation. The machine tool builder can customize the soft keys easily. A menu can have a hierarchy, and the indication of each soft key can be specified. Customization data is created as a machine operation menu definition file and is stored in the CNC.

13.4.2

Explanation

SOFT KEY CONTROL SWITCHING


For the 10.4-inch display unit

Screen/operation select menu

The machine operation menu display signal is used to select a menu.

Machine operation menu

When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 1, the soft key portion on the CNC screen is switched to a machine operation menu. While a machine operation menu is displayed, the CNC screen cannot be operated using the soft keys. When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 0, the display is switched from the machine operation menu to the CNC soft key menu. CNC screen operation using the soft keys is enabled.

- 1228 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

For the 8.4-inch display unit

Screen/operation select menu

The machine operation menu display signal is used to select a menu.

Machine operation menu

When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 1, the soft key portion on the CNC screen is switched to a machine operation menu. While a machine operation menu is displayed, the CNC screen cannot be operated using the soft keys. When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 0, the display is switched from the machine operation menu to the CNC soft key menu. CNC screen operation using the soft keys is enabled. In any case of the 10.4-inch display unit and the 8.4-inch display unit, when setting the machine operation menu screen select signal EXSFT<G0295.0> for 1, the main-menu (the layer which is the top of the machine operation menu) is displayed. After displaying the soft key menu of CNC from the condition to be displaying a sub menu (The layer which is not the top of the machine operation menu), once again, when displaying a machine operation menu, a main-menu is displayed.

- 1229 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

CUSTOMIZATION ITEMS
A machine operation menu definition file can be created using a special tool (Machine Operation Menu Tool). See 13.5 "Machine Operation Menu Tool" for details of the Machine Operation Menu Tool. The following items can be specified: Menu configuration Number of blocks : A number from 0 to 98 can be selected. Number of main menus 10.4-inch display unit 1 line (The menu-number is fixed on 10.) / Soft key 10 items 8.4-inch display unit 1 line (The menu-number is fixed on 10.) / Soft key 5 items Number of submenus that belong to each main menu 10.4-inch display unit 20 lines / Soft key 200 items 8.4-inch display unit 20 lines / Soft key 100 items Each menu key Menu number to be posted to the PMC side Menu key message (10.4-inch display unit 6 half-size characters * 2 line 8.4-inch display unit 7 half-size characters * 1 line These are specified using ASCII code or SJIS code.) R signal address for choosing whether to display or hide messages R signal address for choosing whether to display the key state (OFF/ON) Message and Background color (Two colors can be specified: one for keys set to ON and the other for keys set to OFF.) Machine operation menu definition data can be stored as multiple blocks, which can be selected using a parameter. By using multiple blocks, machine operation menus in different languages and configurations can be prepared for choice using a parameter.
Definition file Block 1 Main menu Sub menu

The definition data of the machine operation

Block n Main menu Sub menu

- 1230 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

MACHINE OPERATION MENU SOFT KEY TRANSITION


For the 10.4-inch display unit
Menu number 10 Menu number 11 12 13 Menu number 14 15 1 2 3 Key number 4 5 6 Key number 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 Key number 4 5 6 4 5 6 7 (Main menu) 8 9 10 (Sub menu) 8 9 10 8 9 10 8 9 10 (Sub menu) 9 10 9 10

1 1 1

2 2 2

3 3 3

7 7 7

1 1

2 2

3 3

7 7

8 8

As shown above, a main menu and submenus are created. Up to one main menu lines (for 10 soft keys) and up to 20 submenu lines (for 200 soft keys) can be created. For each main menu key, a submenu group consisting of multiple lines of soft keys is created. In this example, menu numbers 11, 12, and 13 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 1, and menu numbers 14 and 15 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 2. By pressing a main menu key, a transition is made to the corresponding submenu. If there is no corresponding submenu, the key can be used as an input key. When a submenu consists of multiple lines, a transition is made between the submenu lines by using the continuous menu key at the rightmost end of the soft keys. From a submenu, a transition to the main menu is made by pressing the return menu key at the leftmost end of the soft keys.

For the 8.4-inch display unit


Menu number 10 Menu number 11 12 13 Menu number 14 15 1 Key number 2 3 4 Key number 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 Key number 2 3 4 2 3 4 (Main menu) 5 (Sub menu) 5 5 5 (Sub menu) 5 5

1 1 1

1 1

- 1231 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

As shown above, a main menu and submenus are created. Up to one main menu lines (for 5 soft keys) and up to 20 submenu lines (for 100 soft keys) can be created. For each main menu key, a submenu group consisting of multiple lines of soft keys is created. In this example, menu numbers 11, 12, and 13 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 1, and menu numbers 14 and 15 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 2. By pressing a main menu key, a transition is made to the corresponding submenu. If there is no corresponding submenu, the key can be used as an input key. When a submenu consists of multiple lines, a transition is made between the submenu lines by using the continuous menu key at the rightmost end of the soft keys. From a submenu, a transition to the main menu is made by pressing the return menu key at the leftmost end of the soft keys.

MENU KEY SELECTION INTERFACE


MACHINE OPERATION MENU SELECT NUMBER NOTIFICATION SIGNAL ESFM1 to ESFM8 <F0317.0 to 7> The menu number (0 to 255) of the menu currently selected is posted as a binary code. If no menu operation menu is displayed, 0 is output. SOFT KEY NUMBER SELECT STATE NOTIFICATION SIGNAL ESF01 to ESF10 <F0318.0 to F0319.1> The ordinal number of a menu key pressed on the menu of each menu number is posted to the PMC. The bit corresponding to a pressed key is turned on (as indicated below). If a main menu key is pressed to display the submenu, all bits are turned off and no bit is turned on until the key is released.
Key
Output signal

1 F318.0

2 F318.1

3 F318.2

4 F318.3

5 F318.4

6 F318.5

7 F318.6

8 F318.7

9 F319.0

10 F319.1

In case of the 8.4-inch display unit, the bit of key 1 to 5 becomes on.
KEY DISPLAY/HIDE SELECT SIGNAL (Input signal : 42byte) The signal enables you to choose whether to display or hide the menu corresponding to a main menu key or sub-key. Switching between displaying and hiding is performed by turning on/off the bit corresponding to a key in the 42-byte area ranging from the start address of the PMC/R area set in the machine operation menu data. The menu corresponding to a key whose bit is turned on is displayed. KEY REVERSE/NON-REVERSE VIDEO SELECT SIGNAL (Input signal : 42byte) The signal enables you to choose whether to display each menu key in reverse video. Whether to display each menu key in reverse video can be set by turning on/off the corresponding bit in the 42-byte area ranging from the start address of the PMC/R area set in the machine operation menu data. A key whose bit is turned on is displayed in reverse video. Set these signal based on SOFT KEY NUMBER SELECT STATE NOTIFICATION SIGNAL ESF01 to ESF10<F0318.0-F0319.1>.

MACHINE OPERATION MENU DATA


Machine operation menu data is created on the personal computer by using a menu creation tool. See 13.5 "Machine Operation Menu Tool" for the environment required for Machine Operation Menu Tool.

- 1232 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

MACHINE OPERATION MENU DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


[Input method]
Create a machine operation menu definition file with the menu creation tool, then store the file on the memory card. Turn off the power. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot, and then turn on the power while holding down the 1st and 2nd soft key from the right at the same time.
[For the 10.4-inch display unit]

The SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU is displayed. Select 2.USER DATA LOADING. Select a file. The selected file is then stored in the FROM. Next, select END to end the processing. (Note that if the power is turned off during storing operation, the FROM can be destructed.) Select END on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU.

[Output method]
Turn off the power. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot, and then turn on the power while holding down the 1st and 2nd soft key from the right at the same time. The SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU is displayed. Select 6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE. Select the machine operation menu definition file (named EXSFTKEY). It is written to the memory card. Next, select END to end the processing. Select END on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU.

13.4.3
3207

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 EXS #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 EXS The machine menu function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.
Selection of a block number of machine operation menu data

3227

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 98 This parameter select a block number to use from the inside of the machine operation menu definition file which was stored in the FROM in the machine operation menu function. If "0", "the value except the data range" or either of "the block number not to be defining" is set, the machine operation menu function is disabled.

- 1233 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

13.4.4

Signal

Machine operation menu screen select signal EXSFT<G0295.0>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal is used to switch the display to the machine operation menu screen. [Operation] When setting this signal in "1", it displays the machine operation menu of the block number which was set to parameter (No.3227) from the inside of the machine operation menu definition file which was stored in FROM in the soft key part of the CNC screen. While displaying a machine operation menu, the CNC screen can not be operated by the soft key. When setting this signal "0", the soft key part of the CNC screen returns to the soft key menu of CNC from the machine operation menu. The operation of the CNC screen by the soft key becomes possible.

Machine operation menu select number notification signal ESFM1~ESFM8 <F0317.0~F0317.7>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is used to post the selected machine operation menu number. [Operation] When the input signal EXSFT<G0295.0> is set to 1, the selected machine operation menu number is posted in binary. When no machine operation menu is displayed, the value 0 is posted.

Soft key number select state notification signal ESF01~ESF10<F0318.0~F0319.1>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal posts the ordinal number of a pressed menu key on the menu of each menu number. [Operation] The bit to correspond to the key, which is pushed when a machine operation menu is displayed, is turned on. (See following table) When a main menu key is pushed and the sub menu is displayed, the all bits are turned off once. Unless stopping the push of the pushed main-menu key, neither bits are turned on. When a machine operation menu isn't displayed, these signals are "0".
Key
Output signal

1 F318.0

2 F318.1

3 F318.2

4 F318.3

5 F318.4

6 F318.5

7 F318.6

8 F318.7

9 F319.0

10 F319.1

In case of the 8.4-inch display unit, the bit of key 1 to 5 becomes on.

Signal address
#7 Gn295 #7 Fn317 ESFM8 #7 Fn318 Fn319 ESF08 #6 ESFM7 #6 ESF07 #5 ESFM6 #5 ESF06 #4 ESFM5 #4 ESF05 #3 ESFM4 #3 ESF04 #2 ESFM3 #2 ESF03 #1 ESFM2 #1 ESF02 ESF10 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 EXSFT #0 ESFM1 #0 ESF01 ESF09

13.4.5

Limitation

The data of the machine operation menu is a common data among the path. Therefore, even if switching the display path, the machine operation menu doesn't change. This function is disabled on the PMC screen, macro executor screen, and C language executor screen.
- 1234 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Two soft keys must not be pressed simultaneously. Even if two soft keys are pressed simultaneously, only one of the two soft keys is recognized. When allocating the key display/hide select signal and key reverse/non-reverse video select signal to the R area, do not make settings that exceed the size of the R area.

13.5
13.5.1

MACHINE OPERATION MENU TOOL


Overview

By using this tool (Machine Operation Menu Tool/A08B-9010-J701#ZZ11), it defines the machine operation menu and output the defined contents as MEM file. Load the MEM file to CNC and set up by following the function specifications to use the machine operation menu.

Loading MEM file

Creating MEM file

13.5.2

Explanation

ENVIRONMENT REQUIRED
This tool is created using the macro of Microsoft Excel. This tool is available on the following applications. Microsoft Excel 2000 Microsoft Excel XP Microsoft Excel 2003 Microsoft is registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States.

MACHINE OPERATION MENU


In this page describing a definition and structure of machine operation menu.

STRUCTURE OF MACHINE OPERATION MENU


As the Fig 13.5.2(a)), soft key menu is consisted by main menu and sub-menu group. More than one sub-menu is belonging to sub-menu group. Signal operation or sub-menu calls can be defined by main menu button. Only signal operation can be defined by sub-menu. Switch sub-menu in the same sub-menu group by pressing continuing button located far right of soft keys. Press the return button listed far left of soft keys to return to main menu.

- 1235 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
MainMenu SubMenuGroup01

B-64303EN-1/02

SubMenuGroup02

Menu Button Menu Button

SubMenu12 Operation1 continuing button Operation2

SubMenu13 Operation4 continuing button Operation5

SubMenu14 Operation7 continuing button Operation8

SubMenu15 Operation 10 Operation 11 Operation 12

Operation3

Operation6

Operation9

return button

return button

return button

return button

Fig.13.5.2 (a) Menu structure of horizontal soft key

BLOCK
Block is a collection of one main menu and sub-menus called out from the main menu. Maximum of 30 blocks are possible to save to one MEM file. Different languages and machine operation menus of machine structure can be saved or managed on one MEM file. On CNC, only one block in these blocks is used. This block number is specified by parameter No.3227.
BlockNumber MEM File Block 01 MainMenu SubMenu SubMenu Operation Menu

Block 02 MainMenu SubMenu SubMenu

Block xx

Fig.13.5.2 (b) Image of block

- 1236 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

The definition contents of the machine operation menu


Depending on the CNC display unit size, the contents which can be defined differ like the following table.
Table 13.5.2 (a) Table of corresponding machine operation menu Display unit size 10.4-inch 8.4-inch Number of main menus Number of submenus Number of soft key Number of characters which can be displayed on the soft key 1 line (Soft key 10 items) 20 line * (Soft key 200 items) 10 6 half-size characters * 2 line 1 line (Soft key 5 items) 20 line * (Soft key 100 items) 5 7 half-size characters * 1 line

The menu number of the main menu is fixed on 10.

RESTRICTIONS
Only one combination of soft key type and machine display size is possible for one MEM file. Blocks with different soft key type (vertical/horizontal) or display size cannot be included in one MEM file. Maximum size of MEM file is 128KB. Maximum size of 1 block is 32 KB. Without exceeding the maximum size of the MEM file, register a block.

OPERATION
Operation of this tool is explained below.

START UP METHOD
Because this tool is distributed as Excel file, start up Excel and open a file of this tool. By opening this tool, the following screen is displayed.

Fig.13.5.2 (c) Start up screen of machine operation menu tool

- 1237 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT DEFINING METHOD OF MACHINE OPERATION MENU

B-64303EN-1/02

With this tool, definition input is available by 2 methods as [Definition Input of Each Menu] and [List Definition Input]. These methods of input are describing as followings. Characteristic of definition input of each menu Definition is possible to be input by menu number unit. Definition is possible to be input by position corresponding to the menu type. Characteristic of list definition input All block data is possible to be input by one sheet. Menus and blocks are possible to be copied all together.

DEFINITION INPUT OF EACH MENU


In case of Definition input of each menu, 3 sheets which are shown in the Fig.13.5.2 (d) are used for the input. However, FS0i-D doesn't use the "Vertical Soft Key (10.4, 15 inch)" sheet. In case of 10.4-inch display unit, select "Horizontal Soft key (10.4,15inch)" sheet. In case of 8.4-inch display unit, select "Horizontal Soft key (8.2inch)" sheet.

Fig.13.5.2 (e) Definition input sheet of each menu

- 1238 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Vertical SoftKey(10.4,15inch)

Horizontal SoftKey(8.2inch)

Horizontal SoftKey(10.4,15inch)

Fig.13.5.2 (f) Definition sheet of each menu

Followings explain the definition items to be input. Block Number Select the block number of the machine operation menu to set. Block numbers should be consecutive. Blocks subsequent to the undefined block will not be output to the MEM file. Menu Number Select the menu number of the machine operation menu. Sub-menu Group Set the sub-menu group to which the current sub-menu belongs. If you want to set the sub-menus to the same menu group, it is necessary that the numbers of definition are consecutive. For example, if defined as the following list, 13 to 15 belong to the same menu group while 30 belongs to the different menu group.
Table 13.5.2 (b) Example of setting of sub-menu group Menu Number 13 14 15 20 21 30 Sub-menu Group 01 01 01 02 02 01 Actual Menu Group A B C

- 1239 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

B-64303EN-1/02

Menu Text Input the characters to be displayed on the each menu soft key. In case of "Horizontal Soft key (10.4,15inch)", 2 lines, with maximum 6 single byte characters each, can be input. In case of "Horizontal Soft key (8.2inch)", 1 line, with maximum 7 single byte characters each, can be input. To input to the second line, using ALT+ENTER as line feed. (Spec of Microsoft Excel ) Visible Signal Input the signal address and bit position to specify the visible/invisible of the button (Message display/be hidden). Only single byte alphanumeric character can be input. Ex.) R1250.0 State Signal Input the signal address and bit position to specify the ON/OFF state of the each button (soft key). Only single byte alphanumeric character can be input. Ex.) R1251.0 Char Color / Back Color Input the text color and the background color of each menu button (soft key). Input the number between 0 and 15. 0 means black. Number 1 to 15 has the same meaning as the number on the CNC color screen. For details of the number on the CNC color screen, refer to the following documents. - Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D Operators Manual (B-64304EN) Color Setting Screen - Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D Maintenance Manual (B-64305EN) Color Setting Screen Jump Menu No. Input to the menu button, which jump to sub menu in the main-menu. Input the menu number to be jumped when the button is pressed. If the each menu button of sub menu and the button, which is to be defined as, machine operation (signal operation) button, leave it as blank. This item is invalid at the sub menu. Therefore, at the sub menu of "Horizontal Soft key (10.4,15inch)" sheet, and "Horizontal Soft key (8.4inch)" sheet, the background with this item is gray. (It is possible to input to the item in the gray background but these aren't reflected in the MEM file to create.)

- 1240 -

B-64303EN-1/02

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

Fig.13.5.2 (g) Input the definition on the horizontal soft key sub-menu

LIST DEFINITION INPUT


Select the [Data] sheet to input the list definition.

Fig.13.5.2 (h) List definition sheet

Menus are listed horizontally and button definition items are listed vertically. Data of definition input of each menu is reflected on this sheet. Also, data edited on this sheet is used by the definition input of each menu.

Fig.13.5.2 (i) List definition input sheet

- 1241 -

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Cursor can be jumped to the block selected by the [Group Jump] combo box.

B-64303EN-1/02

CREATING MEM FILE


Click MEM File Save button to create the MEM file.

MEMFilename Input Box

Fig.13.5.2 (j) Menu definition sheet (Creating MEM file)

Input the file name of the MEM file to be created in the MEM file name input box. If the input name includes folder path, MEM file is output to the specified folder. If only file name is input, MEM file is output to the folder where this tool (Excel file) is located. If the specified folder does not exist, it is created automatically. If the file name is not specified, [EXSFTKEY.MEM] will be created at the folder where this tool is located. Please to be noted that the specified file, if already exists, will be overwritten. File with long name, which can be used in Windows system, cannot be used by CNC. Before loading the MEM file to CNC, please confirm that the file name is DOS format (file name no longer than 8 characters and extension no longer than 3 characters).

- 1242 -

B-64303EN-1/02

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

14
14.1
Overview

INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

Chapter 14, "INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA", consists of the following sections: 14.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ..............................................................................................1243 14.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL ..........................................................................................1254

READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE

The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher interface. 1. Program 2. Offset data 3. Parameter 4. Pitch error compensation data 5. Custom macro common variables. 6. Workpiece coordinate system setting data 7. Operation history data (output only) The above data can be output to a memory card via a memory card interface. In this case, when NC data such as programs or parameters is written to a memory card, if the name of the NC data is already used, it is possible to overwrite the existing file or cancel this operation. To enable this function, set bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308. The channel for data I/O is determined by setting parameter No. 0020. In this case, foreground or background data I/O is restricted to one channel. In addition, data I/O can be controlled separately by setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110. Concretely, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground input, foreground output, background input, and background output.

Explanation
The parameters described below must be set up to use an I/O unit interface (RS-232-C serial port) or memory card interface for inputting and outputting data (such as programs and parameters) between external input/output units and memory cards. The channel to which an I/O unit is connected needs be specified by setting I/O CHANNEL (parameter No. 0020). In addition, the specification number, baud rate, and number of stop bits of each I/O unit must be set in the parameter corresponding to each channel in advance. For setting of channel 1, two types of parameters for setting I/O units are provided. Channel setting can be made for each of foreground I/O and background I/O by setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110. At this time, channel setting is made with No.0020, No.0021, No.0022, and No.0023. The following shows correlation of interface parameters related to individual channels.

- 1243 -

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
0020
I/O CHANNEL or foreground input

B-64303EN-1/02

0101 I/O CHANNEL = 0 (Channel 1) 0102 0103 0111 I/O CHANNEL = 1 (Channel 1) 0112 0113 0121

Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate

Specify a channel for an data input/output device. I/O CHANNEL (0 to 9) =0 : Channel 1 =1 : Channel 1 =2 : Channel 2

:
In addition, input/output of memory card interface is enabled.

When set by IO4

0021 0022 0023

I/O CHANNEL = 2 (Channel 2)

0122 0123

Foreground output Background input Background output

:
I/O CHANNEL = 4 (Memory card interface) I/O CHANNEL = 5 (Data Server)

Channel settings are the same as with parameter No. 0020.

Fig. 14.1 (a) Correlation of interface parameters related to individual channels

Diagnosis
Foreground
030 CHARACTER NUMBER DATA

When the TH alarm occurred, the position in which it occurred is indicated by the number of characters counted from the beginning of the block.
031 TH DATA

Readout code of the number of characters in which a TH alarm occurred

Background
032 CHARACTER NUMBER DATA

When the TH alarm occurred, the position in which it occurred is indicated by the number of characters counted from the beginning of the block.
033 TH DATA

Readout code of the number of characters in which a TH alarm occurred

Parameter
0020 0021 0022 0023 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device Foreground output device setting Background input device setting Background output device setting

- 1244 -

B-64303EN-1/02

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 9 The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and from an external input/output device and the host computer: Input/output device interface (RS-232-C serial ports 1 and 2) Memory card interface Data server interface Embedded Ethernet interface By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can be controlled separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is performed using the channel set in parameter No. 0020. When IO4 is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground input, foreground output, background input, and background output. In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/output device to and from which data is to be transferred. See the table below for these settings.
Correspondence between settings and input/output devices Description RS-232-C serial port 1 RS-232-C serial port 2 Memory card interface Data server interface Embedded Ethernet interface

Setting 0,1 2 4 5 9

NOTE 1 Input device selection (parameter No. 0020) can also be set on the setting screen. 2 It is necessary to set the specifications (baud rate, stop bit, etc.) of input/output devices to be connected in the corresponding parameters for each interface, in advance. Both I/O CHANNEL = 0 and I/O CHANNEL = 1 indicate an input/output device connected to RS-232-C serial port 1, but the parameters for setting the baud rate, stop bit, and other specifications are provided separately. Parameters Common to all Channels
#7 0000 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ISO #0 TVC

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #0 TVC TV check 0: Not performed 1: Performed ISO Code used for data output 0: EIA code 1: ISO code

#1

NOTE 1 The I/O setting of a memory card is made by bit 0 (ISO) of parameter No. 0139.
- 1245 -

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE 2 The I/O setting of data server is made by bit 0 (ISO) of parameter No. 0908.
#7 0010 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 PEC #1 PRM #0 PZS

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #0 PZS When a part program is punched out, the O number is: 0: Not zero-suppressed. 1: Zero-suppressed. PRM Whether the parameter whose setting is 0 is output or not: 0: It is selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0]. 1: It is not selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0]. The parameter whose setting is 0 is not output. PEC When pitch error compensation data is output, data having a compensation value of 0 is: 0: Output 1: Not output.
Setting of communication with the ladder development tool (FANUC LADDER-III, ladder editing package)

#1

#2

0024

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter is used to enable or disable the PMC online connection function. By specifying this parameter, the PMC online connection function can be enabled or disabled without displaying the PMC online setting screen.
Setting 0 1 2 10 11 12 255 RS-232-C High-speed interface The setting on the PMC online setting screen is not altered. To be used (channel 1) Not to be used To be used (channel 2) Not to be used Not to be used To be used To be used (channel 1) To be used To be used (channel 2) To be used Communication is terminated forcibly (as with the [FORCED STOP] soft key).

NOTE 1 The setting of this parameter becomes valid when the power is turned on or this parameter is modified. After this parameter is set, the power need not be turned off then back on. 2 A setting modification made on the PMC online setting screen is not reflected in this parameter. 3 The communication settings of a baud rate and so forth for using RS-232-C made on the PMC online setting screen are valid. When no modification is ever made to the settings on the PMC online setting screen, the baud rate is 9600, parity is not used, and the number of stops bits is 2.
- 1246 -

B-64303EN-1/02 #7 0100 ENS #6 IOP #5 #4 #3 NCR

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
#2 CRF #1 CTV #0

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program. 0: Performed 1: Not performed CRF Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code 0: Depends on the setting of bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 100. 1: CR, LF are output. NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code 0: LF, CR, CR are output. 1: Only LF is output. IOP Stopping a program output or input operation by a reset is: 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (Stopping a program input/output operation with the [STOP] soft key is enabled at all times.) ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code 0: An alarm is generated. 1: The NULL code is ignored.
#7 0110 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 IO4

#2

#3

#6

#7

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0 IO4 Separate control of I/O channel numbers is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. If the I/O channels are not separately controlled, set the input/output device in parameter No. 20. If the I/O channels are separately controlled, set the input device and output device in the foreground and the input device and output device in the background in parameters No. 20 to No. 23 respectively. Separate control of I/O channels makes it possible to perform background editing, program input/output, and the like during the DNC operation.
#7 0138 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MDP

[Input type] Parameter input


- 1247 -

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
[Data type] Bit #0 MDP To the extensions of input/output files, a path number is: 0: Not added. 1: Added.

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE If a file name is specified by setting F, this parameter is ignored, and a path number is not added to the extension.
#7 0139 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ISO

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using 0: ASCII codes 1: ISO codes

WARNING 1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to input or output data using ISO codes. 2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity information is not included and a data error during the data input/output is not detected.
#7 0300 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PCM

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #0 PCM If the CNC screen display function is enabled, when a memory card interface is provided on the NC side, 0: The memory card interface on the NC side is used. 1: The memory card interface on the PC side is used. This parameter is valid when parameter No. 0020 is 4 (memory card interface). This parameter is valid only when the CNC screen display function is activated.
#7 0908 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ISO

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #0 ISO When the data server is selected as the input/output device, data input/output is: 0: Carried out with ASCII codes. 1: Carried out with ISO codes.
#7 11308 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 COW #0

[Input type] Parameter input


- 1248 -

B-64303EN-1/02

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

[Data type] Bit #1 COW When the file of specified name already exists on memory card, 0: It is not overwritten Alarm (SR1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST) is generated. 1: It is overwritten. Because the confirmation message is displayed before overwriting even if COW is 1, overwriting can be canceled.

NOTE When the overwritten file is read only attribute, it is not possible to overwrite even if bit 1 (COW) of parameter No.11308 = 1. Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)
#7 0101 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 SB2 The number of stop bits 0: 1 1: 2 ASI The codes used during data input/output is: 0: EIA or ISO codes (input: automatic detection, output: setting of bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000) 1: ASCII codes during input and output

#3

NOTE To use ASCII codes for data input/output (by setting ASI to 1), set bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to 1.
#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output 0: Output 1: Not output When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.
Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)

0102

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 6 Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=0. The following table shows the correspondence between the specification numbers and the input/output device specifications.

- 1249 -

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

B-64303EN-1/02

Table Correspondence between the specification numbers and the input/output device specifications Specification number Input/output device specification 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 RS-232-C (Control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.) FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1(FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2) FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3(FANUC CASSETTE F1) FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adapter, FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H RS-232-C (Control codes DC1 to DC4 are not used.) Portable tape reader FANUC PPR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 0)

0103

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 12 Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=0. See the following table when setting the baud rate.
Setting 1 3 4 6 7 Baud rate setting Baud rate (bps) Setting 50 110 150 300 600 8 9 10 11 12 Baud rate (bps) 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200

Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1)


#7 0111 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 SB2 The number of stop bits 0: 1 1: 2 ASI The codes used during data input/output is: 0: EIA or ISO codes (input: automatic detection, output: setting of bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000) 1: ASCII codes during input and output

#3

NOTE To use ASCII codes for data input/output (by setting ASI to 1), set bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to 1.
#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output 0: Output 1: Not output When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.
- 1250 -

B-64303EN-1/02 0112

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 6 Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=1.
0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 1)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 12 Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=1.

Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2)


#7 0121 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 SB2 The number of stop bits 0: 1 1: 2 ASI The codes used during data input/output is: 0: EIA or ISO codes (input: automatic detection, output: setting of bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000) 1: ASCII codes during input and output

#3

NOTE To use ASCII codes for data input/output (by setting ASI to 1), set bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to 1.
#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output 0: Output 1: Not output When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.
Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)

0122

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 6 Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=2.
0123 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 2)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 12 Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=2.
- 1251 -

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Parameters of DNC operation from the memory card


#7 0138 MNC #6 #5 SCH #4 #3 #2 #1

B-64303EN-1/02

#0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 SCH Schedule operation function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. MNC DNC operation from the memory card and external device subprogram call from the memory card are: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed.
#7 0139 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ISO

#7

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using 0: ASCII codes 1: ISO codes

WARNING 1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to input or output data using ISO codes. 2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity information is not included and a data error during the data input/output is not detected.

Alarm and message


Number SR0001 TH ERROR Message Description A TH error was detected during reading from an input device. The read code that caused the TH error and how many statements it is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics screen. An error was detected during the singleblock TV error. The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter No. 0000#0 to 0. An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during I/O processing on an I/O device. An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently selected in the setting was specified. This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed even though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette. An I/O interface option that has not yet been added on was specified. The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol selection settings are erroneous. An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed.

SR0002

TV ERROR

SR1805 SR1806

ILLEGAL COMMAND DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH

SR1807

PARAMETER SETTING ERROR

SR1808

DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED

- 1252 -

B-64303EN-1/02

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Message FILE ALREADY EXIST Description A file having the same name already exists on the memory card.

Number SR1973

Channel 1
Number SR0085 Message OVERRUN ERROR Description During a read by reader/punch interface 1, an overrun, parity, or framing error occurred. The number of bits for entered data was not matched, or baud rate setting or I/O device specification number was incorrect. During I/O process by reader/punch interface 1, the data set ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a defective printed circuit board. During a read by reader/punch interface 1, although a read stop command was issued, more than 10 characters were input. The I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.

SR0086

DR OFF

SR0087

BUFFER OVERFLOW

Channel 2
Number SR1830 DR OFF(2) Message Description During I/O process by reader/punch interface 2, the data set ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a defective printed circuit board. During a read by reader/punch interface 2, an overrun, parity, or framing error occurred. The number of bits for entered data was not matched, or baud rate setting or I/O device specification number was incorrect. During a read by reader/punch interface 2, although a read stop command was issued, more than 10 characters were input. The I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.

SR1832

OVERRUN ERROR(2)

SR1834

BUFFER OVERFLOW(2)

DNC operation
Number PS0123 PS1081 Message ILLEGAL MODE FOR GOTO/WHILE/DO EXT DEVICE SUB PROGRAM CALL MODE ERROR Description A GOTO statement or WHILEDO statement was found in the main program in the MDI or DNC mode. 1. M198 was executed during DNC operation. Modify the program. 2. An interruption macro was specified and M99 was executed during pocketing of multiple repetitive canned cycles.

- 1253 -

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

B-64303EN-1/02

14.2
Overview

EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL

The registration or punch of a program can be specified externally. Registration External read start signal EXRD can be used to register a program in the part program memory from an external input device with the background edit function. Punch External punch start signal EXWT can be used to output all programs registered in part program memory to an external output device with the background edit function.

Signal
External read start signal EXRD<Gn058.1>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Programs are registered in the part program memory through the reader/puncher interface. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC operates as follows: The background edit function reads programs from an external input device and register them in the part program memory. Bit 1 (RAL) of parameter No. 3201 can be used to specify either a single program or all programs in the file are registered at a time. Bit 0 (RDL) of parameter No. 3201 can be used to delete all programs before being registered. However, it is impossible to delete programs protected by bit 0 (NE8) and bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202 or by their attributes. During registration, read/punch signal RPBSY is 1. When external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is set to 1 during registration, the registration stops. If the reader/puncher interface is already used in the foreground processing (for example, reading or punching of a program in the edit mode), external read start signal EXRD waits until the foreground processing is completed. There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can be registered. For example, a program with the same program number or file name as the program to be registered is not allowed to be executed in the foreground.

NOTE In the 2-path system, do not input these signals for two or more paths at the same time. External punch start signal EXWT<Gn058.3>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Programs stored in the part program memory are output to an external unit via the reader/puncher interface. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC operates as follows: The background edit function outputs all programs stored in the part program memory to an external output device. When programs are being output, read/punch busy signal RPBSY is set to 1. When external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is set to 1 during output, the output stops. If the reader/puncher interface is already used in the foreground processing (for example, reading or punching of a program in the edit mode), external punch start signal EXWT waits until the foreground processing is completed.

- 1254 -

B-64303EN-1/02

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
There are some other conditions to determine whether all programs can be output. For example, the program protected by bit 0 and bit 4 of parameter No. 3202 cannot be output.

NOTE In the 2-path system, do not input these signals for two or more paths at the same time. External read/punch stop signal EXSTP<Gn058.2>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Program registration or output via the reader/puncher interface is forcibly stopped. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC operates as follows: Program registration or output by the external read start signal or external punch start signal is stopped immediately.

Read/punch busy signal RPBSY<Fn053.2>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that program registration or output triggered by the external read start signal or external punch start signal is under way. [Output cond.] This signal becomes 1, when: The external read start signal or external punch start signal triggers program registration or output. This signal becomes 0, when: Program registration or output triggered by the external read or punch start signal ends. This signal also becomes 1 when the program registration or output ends normally or is forcibly ended by external read/ punch stop signal EXSTP.

Read/punch alarm signal RPALM<Fn053.3>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program registration or output triggered by the external read start signal or external punch start signal. [Output cond.] This signal becomes 1, when: An alarm occurs during program registration or output triggered by the external read or punch start signal. This signal becomes 0, when: A reset or external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is input.

Signal address
#7 Gn058 #7 Fn053 #6 #5 #4 #6 #5 #4 #3 EXWT #3 RPALM #2 EXSTP #2 RPBSY #1 EXRD #1 #0 #0

- 1255 -

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

B-64303EN-1/02

Parameter
0020
I/O CHANNEL or foreground input

0101 I/O CHANNEL = 0 (Channel 1) 0102 0103 0111 I/O CHANNEL = 1 (Channel 1) 0112 0113

Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate

Specify a channel for an data input/output device. I/O CHANNEL (0 to 2) =0 : Channel 1 =1 : Channel 1 =2 : Channel 2

When IO4(No.0110#0) is set

0021 0022 0023

Foreground output

0121
Background input Background output

I/O CHANNEL = 2 (Channel 2)

0122 0123

Channel settings are the same as with parameter No. 0020.

#7 3201

#6 NPE

#5 N99

#4

#3

#2 REP

#1 RAL

#0 RDL

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control 0: The new program is registered following the programs already registered. 1: All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that programs which are protected from being edited are not deleted.

NOTE Registered programs are placed in the background default folder set in the program list screen. Before manipulating this signal, set the default folder in the background correctly.
#1 RAL When programs are registered by external I/O device control: 0: All programs are registered. 1: Only one program is registered.

NOTE Registered programs are placed in the background default folder set in the program list screen. Before manipulating this signal, set the default folder in the background correctly.
#2 REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number is the same as that of an existing program 0: An alarm is generated. 1: The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that if the existing program is protected from being edited, it is not deleted, and an alarm is generated.
- 1256 -

B-64303EN-1/02

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, program registration is assumed to be: 0: Completed 1: Not completed

#5

#6

NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be: 0: Completed 1: Not completed
#7 #6 #5 #4 NE9 #3 #2 #1 #0 NE8

3202

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999 0: Not inhibited 1: Inhibited When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled: (1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.) (2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.) (3) Program number search (4) Program editing of registered programs (5) Program registration (6) Program collation (7) Displaying programs

NOTE This parameter setting does not affect the following programs: (1) Programs on the Data Server (2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a memory card
#4 NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999 0: Not inhibited 1: Inhibited When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled: (1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.) (2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.) (3) Program number search (4) Program editing of registered programs (5) Program registration (6) Program collation (7) Displaying programs

- 1257 -

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE This parameter setting does not affect the following programs: (1) Programs on the Data Server (2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a memory card

Alarm and message


Number BG0070 BG0072 Message NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY TOO MANY PROGRAMS Description The memory area is insufficient. Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry. The number of programs to be stored exceeded 400. Delete unnecessary programs and execute program registration again. The commanded program number has already been used. Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and execute program registration again. An attempt was made to register a program whose number was protected. In program matching, the password for the encoded program was not correct. The NC received more than 10 characters even though the NC sent a stop code (DC3) to the I/O device connected to reader/punch interface 1 during data reception. In the background, an attempt was made to select or delete the program being selected in the foreground. Perform the correct operation for the background edition. When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were using it. The registration of the program is prohibited. The format is illegal. - Confirm the format of the program number or file name set for the program. An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed. The next character was received from the I/O device connected to reader/punch interface 1 before it could read a previously received character. The next character was received from the I/O device connected to reader/punch interface 2 before it could read a previously received character. During I/O process by reader/punch interface 1, the data set ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. During I/O process by reader/punch interface 2, the data set ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. The NC received more than 10 characters of data even though the NC sent a stop code (DC3) to the I/O device connected to reader/punch interface 2 during data reception.

BG0073

PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE PROTECT

BG0075

BG0087

BUFFER OVERFLOW

BG0140

PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE DEVICE BUSY

BG0233

BG0434 BG0435

WRITE PROTECT ILLEGAL FORMAT

BG1808 BG0085

DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED OVERRUN ERROR

BG1832

OVERRUN ERROR(2)

BG0086 BG1830 BG1834

DR OFF DR OFF(2) BUFFER OVERFLOW(2)

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Program management Inputting/Outputting a Program Item name

- 1258 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT

15

MEASUREMENT

Chapter 15, "MEASUREMENT", consists of the following sections: 15.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT..............................................................................................1259 15.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .................................................................................1260 15.3 SKIP FUNCTION...........................................................................................................................1267 15.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT ..............................................................................................1292

15.1
M

TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)

Overview
The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory as an offset value by a soft key. Switch to the offset value display screen on the screen. Relative positions are also displayed on this screen. Then select the reference tool and set it at the fixed point on the machine by manual operation. Reset the displayed relative position to zero. Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed point on the machine by manual operation. The relative position display at this point shows difference between the reference tool and the tool measured and the relative position display value is then set as offset amounts.

Reference tool This difference is set as offset amount Fixed point

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center) (B-64304EN-2) Item name Tool length compensation

- 1259 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

15.2
Overview

AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)

When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a command given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures the difference between the current coordinate value and the coordinate value of the command measurement position and uses it as the offset value for the tool. When the tool has been already offset, it is moved to the measurement position with that offset value. The difference between the coordinate value of a measuring position and a specified coordinate value is added to current compensation.
Z

A (start position) Rapid traverse G37 for specifying measuring position B (deceleration position) Measurement speed C (measuring position) Tool stops when measuring position reached signal goes on. X

Compensation = (Current compensation) + [(Coordinate at tool stop) - (Coordinate at specification of measuring position)]

NOTE When using automatic tool length measurement (M series)/automatic tool offset (T series), set bit 7 (IGA) of parameter No. 6240 to 0.

Signal
Measuring position reached signals XAE1#1<X004.0>, XAE2#1<X004.1> (M series/T series), XAE3#1<X004.2> (M series only) XAE1#2<X013.0>, XAE2#2<X013.1> (T series (2-path control)) GAE1#P<Gn517.0>, GAE2#P<Gn517.1> (M series / T series), GAE3#P<Gn517.2> (M series only)
[Classification] Input signal [Function] If the measuring position specified by a program command differs from the measuring position which a tool has reached in practice, that is, the position at the moment the measuring position reached signal has just been turned "1", the difference in the coordinate value is added to the current tool compensation value to update the compensation value. The tool is first fed to the specified measuring position by rapid traverse in a block where one of the following commands has been specified: G37 (Mseries) G36,G37 (Tseries) The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance before the measuring position.

- 1260 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT
The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a parameters (No.6241 to No.6243). If the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned "1" after the tool has approached within distance of the measuring position and before the tool overshoots the measuring position by distance , the control unit updates the compensation value and terminates the move command for the block. If the measuring position reached signal is not turned "1" even after the tool has overshot the measuring position by distance , the control unit enters an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block without updating the compensation value.
Presumed measuring position FR X, Z A S (xs, zs) Start point |xa-xs|. |za-zs| FR FP : : : : T Measuring position reached signal U (xa, za) Rapid traverse Parameters No.6241 to No.6243feedrate Parameters No.6251 to No.6253 Parameters No.6254 to No.6256 B C FP U D V

Command code G36

Axis specification T series M series Basic 1st axis Basic 3rd axis Basic1st to 3rd axes

Signal input T series M series XAE1 (GAE1) XAE2 (GAE2) XAE1 to XAE3 (GAE1 to GAE3)

Valid parameters T series M series 6241, 6251, 6254 6242, 6252, 6255 6241 to 6243, 6251 to 6253, 6254 to 6256

G37

NOTE In an M-series machine, if parameters No.6242 and No.6243 are set to 0, the setting of parameter No.6241 becomes valid. If parameters No.6252 and No.6253 are set to 0, the setting of parameter No.6251 becomes valid. If parameters No.6255 and No.6256 are set to 0, the setting of parameter No.6254 becomes valid.
[Operation] When the signal is turned "1", the control unit works as follows: Reads the position of the tool along the axis currently specified and updates the current compensation value based on the difference between the specified measuring position and the read measuring position in the following case: When the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned on in a block where G36 (T series) or G37 is specified after the tool is within distance of the measuring position specified by a program and before the tool overshoots the measuring position by distance . The control unit then stops the tool, and terminates the move command for the block.

- 1261 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

Enters an alarm (PS0080) state and terminates the move command for the block without updating the compensation value in the following case: When the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the command is turned "1" in a block where G36 (T series), G37 is specified after the tool is within distance of the measuring position but before the tool is within distance of the measuring position. The measuring position reached signal is not monitored on the rising edge, but the state of the signal is simply monitored. So, if the measuring position reached signal remains to be set to 1, and automatic tool length measurement (M series) (automatic tool offset (T series) (G36, G37) is then specified, the CNC issues the PS0080 alarm when a movement has been made to distance before the measurement position.

NOTE 1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10 msec. 2 A delay or variation in detecting a measuring position reached signal is 0 to 2 ms just on the CNC side, excluding the PMC side. Accordingly, the measurement error is the sum of 2 ms and a delay or variation in transferring a measuring position reached signal on the PMC side (including receiver delay or variation), multiplied by the feedrate specified in parameter No.6241. 3 A delay or variation after the detection of a measuring position reached signal until feed stop is 0 to 8 ms. When an overshoot is calculated, an acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, PMC delay must also be considered. 4 Measuring position reached signals XAE1 to XAE3 need not be processed on the PMC side because the CNC reads the signals directly from the machine. 5 If the tool length measurement function is not used, the PMC can use the pins corresponding to the measuring position reached signals for general-purpose input signals. 6 When the parameter XSG (bit 2 of parameter No.3008) is set to 1, address X004 including measuring position reached signals can be assigned to an X address specified in parameter No.3019. Signal address
#7 X004 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 XAE3
#1

#1 XAE2 XAE2
#1 #1

#0 XAE1 XAE1
#1 #1

(T series) (M series) (T series) (T series) (M series)

X013

XAE2

#2

XAE1

#2

Gn517

GAE2 GAE3
#P

#P #P

GAE1 GAE1

#P #P

GAE2

Parameter
#7 3008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 XSG #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

- 1262 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.

#2

XSG A signal assigned to an X address is: 0: Fixed at the address. 1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.

NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3013, No. 3014, No. 3012, and No. 3019. If parameter No. 3013 and No. 3014 are not set, the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned to bit 0 of X0000. If parameter No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not set, the skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the measurement position arrival signal, the interlock signal for each axis direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are assigned to X0000.
3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signals, and tool offset value write signals are assigned

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 327 Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, the measurement position arrival signals (XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (M series) or XAE1 and XAE2 (T series)), and tool offset value write signals (MIT1, MIT2 (T series)) are to be assigned.
#7 6201 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 SEB #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 SEB When a skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on while the skip function, or the automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are: 0: Ignored. 1: Considered and compensated. The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration when the skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is input.
#7 6210 #6 MDC #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path


- 1263 -

15.MEASUREMENT
#6 MDC The measurement result of automatic tool length is: 0: Added to the current offset. 1: Subtracted from the current offset.
#7 6240 IGA #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1

B-64303EN-1/02

#0 AE0

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 AE0 Measurement position arrival is assumed when the automatic tool compensation signals XAE1 and XAE2 <X004.0,1> (T series) or the automatic tool length measurement signals XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 <X004.0,1,2> (M series) are: 0: 1. 1: 0. IGA Automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is: 0: Used. 1: Not used.
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE1 signal) Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 signal) Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE2 signal) Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE2 signal)

#7

6241

6242

6243

Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE3 signal)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) These parameters set the relevant feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) or automatic tool length measurement (M series).

NOTE When the setting of parameter No. 6242 or 6243 is 0, the setting of parameter No. 6241 is used.
6251 value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 signal) value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE2 signal)

6252

- 1264 -

B-64303EN-1/02 6253

15.MEASUREMENT
value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE3 signal)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word path mm, inch, deg (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) These parameters set the relevant value during automatic tool compensation (T series) or automatic tool length measurement (M series).

NOTE 1 For the M series, when the setting of parameter No. 6252 or 6253 is 0, the setting of parameter No. 6251 is used. 2 Set a radius value regardless of whether diameter or radius programming is specified.
6254 value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 signal) value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE2 signal)

6255

6256

value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE3 signal)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word path mm, inch, deg (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) These parameters set the relevant value during automatic tool compensation (T series) or automatic tool length measurement (M series).

NOTE 1 For the M series, when the setting of parameter No. 6255 or 6256 is 0, the setting of parameter No. 6254 is used. 2 Set a radius value regardless of whether diameter or radius programming is specified.

Alarm and message


Number PS0080 Message G37 MEASURING POSITION REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT PROPERLY INPUT (M series) G37 MEASURING POSITION REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT PROPERLY INPUT (T series) Description When the tool length measurement function (G37) is performed, a measuring position reached signal goes 1 in front of the area determined by the value specified in parameter No.6254. Alternatively, the signal does not go 1. When the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is used, a measuring position reached signals (XAE1, XAE2) does not go 1 within the range determined by the value specified in parameters No.6254 and No.6255.

- 1265 -

15.MEASUREMENT
Number PS0081 Message G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED (M series) G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED (T series) PS0082 G37 SPECIFIED WITH H CODE (M series) G37 SPECIFIED WITH T CODE (T series) PS0083 G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND (M series) Description

B-64303EN-1/02

G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND (T series)

The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified without specifying an H code. Correct the program. The automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is specified without specifying an T code. Correct the program. The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified together with an H code in the same block. Correct the program. The automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is specified together with an T code in the same block. Correct the program. An error has been found in axis specification of the tool length measurement function (G37). Alternatively, a move command is specified as an incremental command. Correct the program. An error has been found in axis specification of the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37). Alternatively, a command is specified as an incremental command. Correct the program.

NOTE
NOTE 1 If an H code and G37 are specified in the same block, an alarm will be raised. Specify an H code before a block including G37. 2 A measurement speed (FP), , and are specified as parameters (FP: No.6241, : No.6251, : No.6254) by the machine tool builder. As , specify a positive value satisfying the condition of > . 3 The compensation value is updated by the following formula: New compensation value =(Current compensation value)+[(Current position of the tool along the specified axis when the measuring position reached signal is "1") - (specified measuring position)] The following compensation values are updated: (1) In a M series, the compensation value corresponding to the tool compensation number selected by an H code. When offset memory A is used, the offset value is changed. When offset memory C is used, the tool wear compensation value for the H code is changed. (2) In a T series, the compensation value corresponding to the tool compensation number selected by a T code and to the specified axis (X, Z) in G36, G37. 4 A delay or variation in detecting a measuring position reached signal is 0 to 2 ms just on the CNC side, excluding the PMC side. Accordingly, the measurement error is the sum of 2 ms and a delay or variation in transferring a measuring position reached signal on the PMC side (including receiver delay or variation), multiplied by the feedrate specified in parameter No.6241. 5 A delay or variation after the detection of a measuring position reached signal until feed stop is 0 to 8 ms. When an overshoot is calculated, an acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, PMC delay must also be considered.
- 1266 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT

NOTE 6 A measuring position reached signal is monitored just as a state not by the rising edge. Accordingly, if a measuring position reached signal is held to 1 and if the corresponding tool length measurement function (G37) is specified, the CNC will raise alarm PS0080 when a movement is made to a position at a distance of , in front of the measuring position. 7 When using this function, set the parameter EVO (bit 6 of parameter No.5001) to zero. (If the tool compensation value of tool length compensation A or B is changed in the offset mode (G43 or G44), the new value becomes effective from a subsequent block including G43, G44, or an H code.)

Reference item
Manual name DESCRIPTIONS (B-64302EN) OPERATORS MANUAL (Lathe system) (B-64304EN-1) OPERATORS MANUAL (Machining center system) (B-64304EN-2) Item name Automatic tool length measurement Automatic tool offset Automatic tool offset (G36,G37) Automatic tool length measurement (G37)

15.3
15.3.1
Overview

SKIP FUNCTION
Skip Function

Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is interrupted and the next block is executed. The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed but specified with a signal from the machine, for example, in grinding. It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece. The coordinates when the skip signal turned on are stored in the system variables (#5061 to #5065) for custom macros, so they can be used by custom macros. #5061 : First axis coordinate value #5062 : Second axis coordinate value : #5065 : Fifth axis coordinate value

Acc./Dec. after interpolation of the skip function

To enable the Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation of the skip function, set bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No. 6200 to 1. When SKF is 0, the Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation of the skip function is disabled. If the Acc./Dec. type is set by bit 3 (ASL) of parameter No. 6210 and the time constant is set by bit 4 (ASB) of parameter No. 6210 when SKF is 1, it is possible to set a separate Acc./Dec. type and time constant that are different from those of the normal Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation. When ASB is 0 and ASL is 0, the normal Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation is assumed. In this case, the Acc./Dec. type set by bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610 and bit 1 (CTBx) of parameter No. 1610 and the time constant set by parameter No. 1622 are enabled.

- 1267 -

15.MEASUREMENT Compensation of acceleration/deceleration and servo delay

B-64303EN-1/02

The skip function records the current position inside the NC using the skip signal. However, the current position inside the NC includes servo delay, so the recorded position deviates from the position in which the skip signal was actually input by the servo delay. The deviation amount can be calculated from the positional deviation owned on the servo side and the accumulated amount by feedrate acceleration/deceleration performed inside the NC. If the deviation amount is considered, the servo delay does not need to be included in measurement error. If bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No. 6201 is set, compensation can be carried out by obtaining the deviation amount the positional deviation and the accumulated amount by acceleration/deceleration when the skip signal is turned on.
Tool movement direction

High-speed skip signal Pnc

Actual tool stop position

Position at which the skip signal was input

Coordinate origin

Pnc P Q

: Position at which the tool is actually stopped after the skip signal was input [mm/inch] : Distance to be measured [mm/inch] : Servo delay [mm/inch]

As shown above, the following expression is calculated inside the NC by setting bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No. 6201. P = Pnc - Q

Signal
SKIP<X004.7> SKIPP<Gn006.6> (T series/M series) SKIP#2<X013.7> (T series (2-path control)) Skip Signals SKIP<X004.7> SKIPP<Gn006.6>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal terminates skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip signal turns to "1" in a block containing G31 is stored in a custom macro variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at the same time. [Operation] When a skip signal turns to "1", the control unit works as described below. When a block contains a skip cutting command G31, the control unit reads and stores the current position of the specified axis at that time. The control unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be moved.

NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec.


- 1268 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT NOTE 2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation (including the delay or variation of the receiver) of the skip signal on the PMC side, multiplied by the feedrate. 3 The delay or variation until feed stops after detection of the skip signal is 0 to 8 msec. To calculate the overshoot, further consider delay in acceleration/deceleration, delay in servo, delay on the PMC side. 4 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP<X004.7> from the machine tool; the PMC is no longer requires to process the signal. 5 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the signal terminal SKIP<X004.7> corresponding to the skip signal as a general purpose input signal. 6 When the skip signal is monitored, the state rather than the rising edge is sampled. Therefore, when the level remains "1", the skip condition is assumed to be met immediately after skip cutting is specified next. 7 Address X004 including skip signal SKIP<X004.7> can be assigned to the X addresses that were set for parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 when XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1.

Signal address
#7 X004 X013 Gn006 SKIP SKIP
#2

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

SKIPP

Parameter
#7 3008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 XSG #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is: 0: Fixed at the address. 1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.

NOTE When this parameter was set to 1, parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 must be set. If parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not set, the skip to X0 signal, PMC axis control skip signal, and measurement position arrival signal are assigned to X0000.
- 1269 -

15.MEASUREMENT
3012 Skip signal assignment address

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 327 Set an X address to which the skip signal (SKIPn) is to be assigned.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327
3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are assigned

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 727 Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP and the measurement position arrival signals (XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (M series) or XAE1 and XAE2 (T series)) are to be assigned.

Example 1.

When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 6


When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and measurement position arrival signal are allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 SKIP6 #6 SKIP6 #6 ESKIP #7 #6 ESKIP #5 #4 #3 #2 XAE3 #5 SKIP5 #5 SKIP5 #5 #4 SKIP4 #4 SKIP4 #4 #3 SKIP3 #3 SKIP3 #3 #2 SKIP2 #2 SKIP2 #2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP8 #1 XAE2 #1 XAE2 #0 SKIP7 #0 SKIP7 #0 XAE1 #0 XAE1 (M series) (T series) (M series) (T series)

X005

SKIP #7 SKIP #7

X006

- 1270 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 5


When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signal, and skip signal are allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 ESKIP SKIP6 #6 ESKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 #5 SKIP5 SKIP4 #4 SKIP4 SKIP3 #3 SKIP3 SKIP2 #2 XAE3 SKIP2 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 XAE2 SKIP8 #1 XAE2 SKIP8 #0 XAE1 SKIP7 #0 XAE1 SKIP7 (M series) (T series)

Example 2.

X005

SKIP #7 SKIP

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327
#7 5160 #6 #5 #4 TSG #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 TSG A dependence of the overload torque detection signal in a peck drilling cycle (M series) on the parameter setting of the skip function: 0: Exists. 1: Does not exist.

NOTE When this parameter is 1, even if the setting of the skip signal is disabled, the X address can be used as the overload torque detection signal. At this time, parameter No. 3012 and bit 1 (SK0) of parameter No. 6200 is valid.
#7 6200 SKF #6 #5 #4 HSS #3 #2 #1 SK0 #0 GSK

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8. 0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1. 1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0. HSS 0: 1: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.) The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
- 1271 -

#1

#4

15.MEASUREMENT
#7

B-64303EN-1/02

SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 IGX #3 #2 #1 SEB #0 SPE

6201

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 SEB When a skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on while the skip function, or the automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are: 0: Ignored. 1: Considered and compensated. The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration when the skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is input. IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are: 0: Enabled as skip signals. 1: Disabled as skip signals. SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled.
Enabling and disabling the skip signals Skip SPE GSK IGX Skip signal signal (No.6201 (No.6200 (No.6201 SKIP SKIPP #7) #0) #4) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

#4

#7

Parameter

Multi-step skip signal SKIP2-SKIP8 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Setting

IGX (bit 4 of parameter No. 6201) is valid for the skip function (when HSS (bit 4 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal or the multiphase skip function (when SLS (bit 5 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal. To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.
#7 6207 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 SFN #1 SFP #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

- 1272 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT
SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.

#1

NOTE For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the description of bit 2 (SFN ) of parameter No. 6207.
#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

NOTE For not the multistage skip function, but the skip function using no high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 0), see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
#7 6210 #6 #5 #4 ASB #3 ASL #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #3 #4 ASL ASB The ASB and ASL bits set the type and time constant of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the skip function as follows:
ASB 0 1 0 ASL 1 0 Type of acceleration/ deceleration Parameter No. for time constant Linear type Parameter No. 6280 Bell-shaped (NOTE) This function is disabled .

When bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is specified, T1=T/2 and T2=T/2 are obtained as with normal acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation, where T is the time constant. Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration type includes no linear part.

NOTE In this case, the acceleration/deceleration type is set in bits 0 and 1 of parameter No. 1610, and the time constant is set in parameter No. 1622.
6280 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the skip function for each axis

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis msec 0 to 512 This parameter sets a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the skip function for each axis. This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ASB) of parameter No. 6210 or bit 4 (ASL) of parameter No. 6210 is set to 1.
- 1273 -

15.MEASUREMENT
6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31)

B-64303EN-1/02

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.

NOTE For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

Alarm and message


Number PS0035 Message CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Description - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled. - A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit override by address Q.

Note
NOTE This function is enabled for axes not related to composite control.

15.3.2
Overview

High-speed Skip Signal

The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HDI0 to HDI3 : connected directly to the CNC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. In this case, up to eight signals can be input. (Either can be enabled/disabled, using parameters HSS and IGX (bit 4 of parameter No. 6201 and bit 4 of parameter No. 6200).) If a high-speed skip signal is used, up to four signals can be input. Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 to 2 msec at the CNC side (not considering those at the PMC side). This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec or less, thus allowing high precision measurement.

Signal
High-Speed Skip Status Signals HDO0 to HDO3 <Fn122.0 to Fn122.3>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip signal. The signal-to-bit correspondence is as follows: High-speed skip signal ..... Bit name HDI0......................... HDO0 HDI1......................... HDO1 HDI2......................... HDO2 HDI3......................... HDO3
- 1274 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT

[Output cond.] Each bit is set to 1 when: The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical 1. Each bit is set to 0 when: The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical 0.

Signal address
#7 Fn122 #6 #5 #4 #3 HDO3 #2 HDO2 #1 HDO1 #0 HDO0

Parameter
#7 6207 #6 #5 RHB #4 #3 #2 SFN #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 1 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

NOTE For not the multi-stage skip function but the skip function not using high-speed skip signals, see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
#5 RHB The high-Speed skip status signals HDO is: 0: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is closed. 1: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open.

NOTE The high-speed skip signal HDI does not change by setting RHB (bit 5 of parameter No.6207). When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open, the signal HDI is set to "0" and the signal is not assumed to be input regardless of the setting of parameter RHB. To assume that the high-speed skip signal is input when the contact of the signal is open, set SRE (bit 6 of parameter No.6200) to 1.
6282 6283 6284 6285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1) Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2) Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3) Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
- 1275 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. parameters are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
#7 6200 #6 SRE #5 #4 HSS #3 #2 #1

These
#0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 HSS 0: 1: #6 The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.) The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.

SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used: 0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open close). 1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close open).
#7 #6 #5 #4 IGX #3 #2 TSE #1 SEB #0 SPE

6201

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 SEB When a skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on while the skip function, or the automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are: 0: Ignored. 1: Considered and compensated. The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration when the skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is input. TSE In a skip by the torque limit skip command (G31P98/P99): 0: A servo delay amount (positional deviation) is considered (system variables #5061 to #5065 store positions corrected in consideration of the servo system delay amount). 1: A servo delay amount (positional deviation) is not considered (system variables #5061 to #5065 store positions corrected without consideration of the servo system delay amount).

#2

- 1276 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT
Position during skip operation Current position of CNC

Machine position

Error amount

Origin of the coordinate system Position in consideration of delay Position without consideration of delay

Stop point

#4

IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are: 0: Enabled as skip signals. 1: Disabled as skip signals. SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled.
Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled Skip Skip SPE GSK IGX signal signal (No.6201 (No.6200 (No.6201 SKIP SKIPP #7) #0) #4) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

#7

Paramet er

Multistage skip signals SKIP2-SKIP8 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Setting

Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 is valid for the skip function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1) or for the multistage skip function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1). To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.
#7 6202 #6 #5 #4 #3 1S4 #2 1S3 #1 1S2 #0 1S1

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path 1S1 to 1S4 Specify which high-speed skip signal is enabled when the G31 skip command is issued. The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and commands. The setting of the bits have the following meaning : 0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid. 1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
- 1277 -

15.MEASUREMENT
Parameter 1S1 1S2 1S3 1S4 High-speed skip signals HDI0 HDI1 HDI2 HDI3

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the description of bit 2 (SFN ) of parameter No. 6207.

Alarm and message


Number PS0373 Message ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL SELECTED Description In the skip commands (G31, G31P1 to G31P4) and dwell commands (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed signal is selected in different paths.

Note
NOTE This function is enabled for axes not related to composite control.

Notes on using high speed skip


Overview
Note that the contact state during a skip is different from that of Series 0i in the high speed skip signal of Series 0i-D. Series 0i-D : The skip signal is assumed to be input when an open contact is closed. Series 0i-C : The skip signal is assumed to be input when an closed contact is opened.

Detail

The difference in the specification of the high speed skip signal between Series 0i-D and Series 0i-C is as follows. For Series 0i-D The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when the input voltage is at a low level and assumed to be 0 at a high level. That is, the skip signal is assumed to be 1 when a contact is closed. Therefore the skip signal is input when an open contact is closed. For Series 0i-C The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be 0 when the input voltage is at a low level and assumed to be 1 at a high level. That is, the skip signal is assumed to be 1 when a contact is opened. Therefore the skip signal is input when a closed contact is opened. When the wiring designed for 0i-C is applied to 0i-D, the modification of wiring is not necessary by setting the following parameter. Depending on the detector to be used, the settings on the detector are used instead of parameter settings to switch between contact A and contact B of for output signals. For details, see the manual of the detector.

- 1278 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT
#7 #6 SRE #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Parameter
6200

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal or high-speed measurement position arrival signal is used: 0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open close). 1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close open).

- Signal High-speed skip status signal HDO0 to HDO3 <Fn122.0 to Fn122.3>


#7 Fn122 #6 #5 #4 #3 HDO3 #2 HDO2 #1 HDO1 #0 HDO0

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip signal. [Output cond.] 1: When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is closed. (The input voltage is at a low level.) 0: When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open. (The input voltage is at a high level.)

15.3.3
Overview

Multi-step Skip

The multi-step skip function stores the coordinate values when skip signals (four signals) are input in the block where G31P1 to G31P4 are specified, and skips the remaining movement. In the block where Q1 to Q4 are specified after G04, dwell can be skipped when skip signals (four signals) are input. A skip signal from equipment such as a fixed-dimension size measuring instrument can be used to skip programs being executed. In plunge grinding, for example, a series of operations from rough machining to spark-out can be performed automatically by applying a skip signal each time rough machining, semi-fine machining, finemachining, or spark-out operation is completed.

NOTE Multi-step skip function is optional function.

Signal
Skip signals SKIPP<Gn006.6> SKIP<X004.7> SKIP2<X004.2> SKIP3<X004.3> SKIP4<X004.4> SKIP5<X004.5> SKIP6<X004.6> SKIP7<X004.0> SKIP8<X004.1>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip signal turns to "1" in a command program block containing G31P1 (or G31), G31P2, or G31P3, G31P4 is stored in a custom macro variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at the same time. Furthermore, in a block containing G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3 or G04Q4, the dwell command of the block is terminated. In either case, until all other commands (such as miscellaneous functions) of the block are completed, machining never proceeds to the next block. Parameters Nos. 6202 to 6205 can be used to select which skip signals are enabled. Since a one-to-one relationship is not required, one skip signal can be enabled for multiple commands or multiple skip signals can be enabled for one command.
- 1279 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

[Operation] When a skip signal turns to "1", the control unit functions as described below. When a block contains a G code from (G31, G31P1 to P4) for skip cutting, and the skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the control unit reads and stores the current position of the specified axis at that time. The control unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that the axis was supposed to be moved in that block. When a block contains a G04, or G04Q1 to Q4 code for dwell, and the skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the control unit stops dwell operation, and cancels any remaining dwell time.

NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec. 2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation (including the delay or variation of the receiver) of the skip signal on the PMC side, multiplied by the feedrate. 3 The delay or variation until feed stops after detection of the skip signal is 0 to 8 msec. To calculate the overshoot, further consider delay in acceleration/deceleration, delay in servo, delay on the PMC side. 4 The G codes for skip cutting (G31P1, G31P2, G31P3, and G31P4) are the same except for their correspondence with skip signals. G31 and G31P1 are equivalent. 5 The skip signal is not monitored for a rising edge, but for its state. So, if a skip signal continues to be "1", a skip condition is assumed to be satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell operation is specified. 6 Address X004 can be allocated optionally to the X addresses set in parameter No.3012 and parameter No.3019 when XSG (bit 2 of parameter No.3008) is 1. Signal address
#7 Gn006 #7 X004 SKIP #7 SKIP #6 SKIPP #6 ESKIP SKIP6 #6 ESKIP SKIP6 #6
#2

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

#5 -MIT2 SKIP5 #5 SKIP5

#4 +MIT2 SKIP4 #4 SKIP4

#3 -MIT1 SKIP3 #3 SKIP3

#2 +MIT1 SKIP2 #2 XAE3 SKIP2 #2


#2

#1 XAE2 SKIP8 #1 XAE2 SKIP8 #1 XAE2


#2 #2

#0 XAE1 SKIP7 #0 XAE1 SKIP7 #0 XAE1


#2

(T series)

(M series)

#7 X013 SKIP

#5
#2

#4 SKIP4
#2

#3 SKIP3

ESKIP

(T series)

SKIP6

SKIP5

SKIP2

SKIP8

SKIP7

- 1280 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT

WARNING 1 SKIP2 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as axis-direction-specific manual feed interlock signals +MIT1, -MIT1, +MIT2, and -MIT2 (tool compensation measurement value direct input B), skip signal ESKIP (PMC axis control), and measurement position arrival signals XAE1 and XAE2 (automatic tool compensation). Be careful when using both. (T series) 2 SKIP2 and SKIP6 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as skip signal ESKIP (axis control by PMC) and measurement position arrival signal XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (tool length automatic measurement). Be careful when using both. (M series)

Parameter
#7 3008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 XSG #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is: 0: Fixed at the address. 1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.

NOTE When this parameter was set to 1, parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 must be set. If parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not set, the skip to X0 signal, PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signal, axis-direction-specific manual feed interlock signal, and tool compensation write signal are assigned to X0000.
3012 Skip signal assignment address

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 327 Set an X address to which the skip signal (SKIPn) is to be assigned.

- 1281 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327
3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are assigned

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 327 Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP and the measurement position arrival signals (XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (M series) or XAE1 and XAE2 (T series)) are to be assigned.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327
#7 6200 SKF #6 #5 SLS #4 #3 #2 #1 SK0 #0 GSK

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8. 0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1. 1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0. SLS 0: 1: The multi-step skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.) The multi-step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.

#1

#5

- 1282 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT NOTE Skip signals (SKIP, SKIP to SKIP4) are enabled regardless of this parameter. These signals can be disabled by setting the parameter IGX (No. 6201#4).

#7

SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 IGX #3 #2 #1 SEB #0 SPE

6201

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 SEB If the skip function is used, the positional deviation and the number of accumulated pulses due to acceleration/deceleration at the time when the skip signal is turned on are: 0: Not considered. 1: Considered for compensation. The position where the skip signal is input is found by considering the positional deviation and the number of accumulated pulses due to actual acceleration/deceleration at the time when the skip signal is turned on. IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are: 0: Enabled as skip signals. 1: Disabled as skip signals. SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.
Enabling and disabling the skip signals Skip SPE GSK IGX signal Parameter (No.6201 (No.6200 (No.6201 SKIPP #7) #0) #4) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

#4

#7

Skip signal SKIP Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Multi-step skip signal SKIP2-SKIP8 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Setting

IGX (bit 4 of parameter No. 6201) is valid for the skip function (when HSS (bit 4 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal or the multiphase skip function (when SLS (bit 5 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal. To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.

- 1283 -

15.MEASUREMENT
#7 6202 6203 6204 6205 6206 1S8 #7 2S8 #7 3S8 #7 4S8 #7 DS8 #6 1S7 #6 2S7 #6 3S7 #6 4S7 #6 DS7 #5 1S6 #5 2S6 #5 3S6 #5 4S6 #5 DS6 #4 1S5 #4 2S5 #4 3S5 #4 4S5 #4 DS5 #3 1S4 #3 2S4 #3 3S4 #3 4S4 #3 DS4 #2 1S3 #2 2S3 #2 3S3 #2 4S3 #2 DS3 #1 1S2 #1 2S2 #1 3S2 #1 4S2 #1 DS2

B-64303EN-1/02 #0 1S1 #0 2S1 #0 3S1 #0 4S1 #0 DS1

[Input type]Parameter input [Data type] Bit path 1S1to1S8, 2S1to2S8, 3S1to3S8, 4S1to4S8, DS1toDS8 Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or G31P1 to G31P4) and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi-step skip function. The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and commands. The setting of the bits have the following meaning : 0: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid. 1: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
Multi-step skip function Command Input signal SKIP/HDI0 SKIP2/HDI1 SKIP3/HDI2 SKIP4/HDI3 SKIP5 SKIP6 SKIP7 SKIP8 G31 G31P1 G04Q1 1S1 1S2 1S3 1S4 1S5 1S6 1S7 1S8 G31P2 G04Q2 2S1 2S2 2S3 2S4 2S5 2S6 2S7 2S8 G31P3 G04Q3 3S1 3S2 3S3 3S4 3S5 3S6 3S7 3S8 G31P4 G04Q4 4S1 4S2 4S3 4S4 4S5 4S6 4S7 4S8 G04 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS8

NOTE HDI0 to HDI3 are high-speed skip signals. The same signal must not be specified in different paths at the same time.
When bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No. 6200 is 1, the command to be skipped by the SKIPP signal can be selected by setting the following parameters.
Commands skipped by SKIPP signal <G006#6> Parameter Command skipped When bit 0 (1S1) of parameter No. 6202 is set to 1 When bit 0 (2S1) of parameter No. 6203 is set to 1 When bit 0 (3S1) of parameter No. 6204 is set to 1 When bit 0 (4S1) of parameter No. 6205 is set to 1 When bit 6 (DS1) of parameter No. 6206 is set to 1 G31P1, G04Q1 G31P2, G04Q2 G31P3, G04Q3 G31P4, G04Q4 G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3, G04Q4

- 1284 -

B-64303EN-1/02 #7 6207 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 SFN

15.MEASUREMENT
#1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 1 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

NOTE For not the multi-stage skip function but the skip function not using high-speed skip signals, see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
6282 6283 6284 6285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1) Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2) Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3) Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. parameters are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.

These

Alarm and message


Number PS0035 Message CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Description - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled. - A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit override by address Q. The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function. The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function. Or, P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a multistage skip function option. In the skip commands (G31, G31P1 to G31P4) and dwell commands (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed signal is selected in different paths.

PS0370

G31P/G04Q ERROR

PS0373

ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL SELECTED

- 1285 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

Note
NOTE This function is enabled for axes not related to composite control.

15.3.4
Overview

Torque Limit Skip Function

When the movement command following G31 P99 (or G31 P98) is executed with the servo motor torque limit*1 overridden, cutting feed similar to linear interpolation (G01) can be performed. When the servo motor torque reaches the torque limit (overridden servo motor torque limit) by pushing or the skip signal (including the high-speed skip signal) is input during the movement, the remaining movement commands are canceled and then the next block is executed. (The operation that executes the next block by canceling the remaining movement command is called skip operation later.) The servo motor torque limit can be overridden by: (1) Executing the torque limit override command for the PMC window. *1 : The servo motor torque limit is automatically set according to the settings of the motor model.

Signal
Torque limit reached signals TRQL1 to TRQL5 <Fn114.0 to Fn114.4>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Indicates that the torque limit has been reached. [Output cond.] Set to "1" when: The torque limit has been reached. Set to "0" when: The torque limit has not been reached. Indicates the signal for each axis. The value at the end of a signal name indicates the number of each control axis.

Signal address
#7 Fn114 #6 #5 #4 TRQL5 #3 TRQL4 #2 TRQL3 #1 TRQL2 #0 TRQL1

Parameter
#7 1803 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 TQA #0 TQI

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 TQI Within a torque limit, an in-position check is: 0: Made. 1: Not made. TQA Within a torque limit, an excessive stop-time/move-time error is: 0: Checked. 1: Not checked.
#7 3008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 XSG #1 #0

#1

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path


- 1286 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.

#2

XSG A signal assigned to an X address is: 0: Fixed at the address. 1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.

NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, set parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019. If parameter No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not set, the skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, and the measurement position arrival signal are assigned to X0000.
3012 Skip signal assignment address

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 327 Set an X address to which the skip signal (SKIPn) is to be assigned.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327
3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are assigned

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 327 Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP and the measurement position arrival signals (XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (M series) or XAE1 and XAE2 (T series)) are to be assigned.

- 1287 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327
#7 6200 SKF #6 #5 #4 HSS #3 #2 #1 SK0 #0 GSK

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8. 0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1. 1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0. HSS 0: 1: #7 The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.) The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.

#1

#4

SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 IGX #3 #2 TSE #1 #0 SPE

6201

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 TSE When the torque limit skip function (G31 P99/98) is used, the skip position held in a system variable (#5061 to #5068) is: 0: Position that is offset considering the delay (positional deviation) incurred by the servo system. 1: Position that does not reflect the delay incurred by the servo system.

- 1288 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT
Position during skip operation Current position of CNC

Machine position

Error amount

Origin of the coordinate system Position in consideration of delay Position without consideration of delay

Stop point

#4

IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are: 0: Enabled as skip signals. 1: Disabled as skip signals. SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.
Enabling and disabling the skip signals Skip SPE GSK IGX signal (No.6201 (No.6200 (No.6201 SKIPP #7) #0) #4) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

#7

Parameter

Skip signal SKIP Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Multi-step skip signal SKIP2-SKIP8 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Setting

IGX (bit 4 of parameter No. 6201) is valid for the skip function (when HSS (bit 4 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal or the multiphase skip function (when SLS (bit 5 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal. To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.
#7 6207 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 SFN #1 SFP #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.

NOTE For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the description of bit 2 (SFN ) of parameter No. 6207.
- 1289 -

15.MEASUREMENT
#2

B-64303EN-1/02

SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 1 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

NOTE For not the multi-stage skip function but the skip function not using high-speed skip signals, see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.

NOTE For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.
6282 6283 6284 6285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1) Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2) Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3) Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4)

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the reference axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. parameters are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip command

These

6221

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word axis msec 0 to 65535 The torque limit skip arrival signal is ignored for a set period of time. If G31P98 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1. If G31P99 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.
- 1290 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT
However, if a skip signal is input, skip operation is performed, regardless of the period of time set in this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TQO

6286

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #0 TQO The torque limit override function is: 0: Disabled. (Override of 100%) 1: Enabled.

NOTE Before the torque limit skip function can be used, this parameter must be set to 1.
6287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word axis Detection unit 0 to 327670 This parameter sets a positional deviation limit for each axis imposed when torque limit skip is specified. When the actual positional deviation exceeds the positional deviation limit, the alarm (SV0004) is issued and an immediate stop takes place.

Alarm and message


Number PS0035 Message CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Description - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled. - A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip command (G31P98 or P99). Specify a torque limit override in the PMC window. No axis is specified or tow or more axes are specified in the torque limit switch instruction (G31P98/P99). The amount of positional deviation during torque limit skip command operation exceeded the limit value of the parameter No.6287.

PS0369 SV0004

G31 FORMAT ERROR EXCESS ERROR (G31)

Note
NOTE This function is enabled for axes not related to composite control.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Torque limit skip Item name

- 1291 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

15.4
T

COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT

15.4.1
Overview

Input of tool offset value measured (T Series)

This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard. First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or cross direction manually. When the position record signal is turned 1 (prepare a button on the machine operators panel) on completion of the cutting, the workpiece coordinate value of X axis(X axis of the basic three axes) and Z axis(Z axis of the basic three axes) at that time is recorded in the CNC. Then, withdraw the tool, stop the spindle, and measure the diameter if the cutting was on the longitudinal direction or measure the distance from the standard face if the cutting was on the facing. (The reference face is made as Z = 0.) When the measured value is entered on the offset value display screen, NC inputs the difference between the input measured value and the coordinate value recorded in NC, as the offset value of the offset number. If you release the tool without moving the tool in the axis along which an offset value is entered but moves the tool along the other axis, an offset value can be set without using the position record signal. The workpiece coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of directly inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is used when the coordinate system planned in the program does not match with the coordinate system actually set. The procedures are the same as those for direct input for offset, except a difference of using the standard tool on the work shift screen.

Signal
Position record signal PRC <G040.6>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal is prepared for the function of input of offset value measured. It is used to store in the control unit the data on the positions of the tool for tentative cutting. After measuring a dimension of the workpiece, input the measured value by the specified manual operation. The difference is then stored as the specified tool compensation value. [Operation] The control unit stores the current position along X and Z axes when the signal turns to 1.

CAUTION To use this signal, set parameter PRC (No.5005#2) to 1. Signal address
#7 Gn040 #6 PRC #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Parameter
#7 5005 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 PRC #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

- 1292 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT

#2

PRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift value. 0: Not use a PRC signal 1: Uses a PRC signal

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Setting and displaying data Item name

15.4.2
Overview

Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T Series)

When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value can be automatically settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool to make contact with the touch sensor during manual operation. The workpiece coordinate system shift amount can also be automatically set.

Explanation
Touch sensor
Either of the following two cases may be selected depending on parameter setting. 1) If TS1 (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 0 The touch sensor has two directionspecific contact faces for each axis, thus outputting four signals (+MIT1, +MIT2, MIT1, and MIT2) when contact is detected. 2) If TS1 (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 1 A touch sensor based on one contact input outputs one signal (+MIT1) when the onecontact input detects contact. So, which of directions of each axis is involved is automatically determined, and feeding in the corresponding axis direction is disabled.
X axis contact face (-MIT1)

Z axiscontact face (+MIT2)

Z axis contact face (-MIT2)

+X +Z X axis contact face (+MIT1)

Touch Sensor

Setting tool offset value

Determine a specific point on the machine tool as the measuring reference position. In advance, set the distance from this point to the measuring position (contact face of the touch sensor) as a reference value, using parameter No. 5015 to 5018. Select the tool whose offset value is to be measured, and bring it to touch the sensor, receiving a contact detection signal (tool compensation value write signal). The mechanical coordinate value is the distance from the tool nose position of the measuring tool at the mechanical reference (home) position to the measuring position; set the difference between this value and the reference value (parameter setting) into the tool offset value memory as the tool geometry offset value. The corresponding tool wear offset value becomes 0. (Tool offset value to be set) = (Mechanical coordinate value when tool compensation value write signal has become 1) (Reference value (parameter value) corresponding to the tool compensation value write signal) The tool offset value to be set differs according to the method of determining the measuring reference position.
- 1293 -

15.MEASUREMENT If touch sensor contact detection is based on a one-contact input

B-64303EN-1/02

If touch sensor contact detection is based on a onecontact input (the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 1), when a contact detected signal (tool compensation amount write signal +MIT1) is received from the touch sensor, which of the two directions of each axis is involved is automatically determined according to several pulses stored as a result of the axis movement that was made before the signal reception. So the number of interpolation cycles related to the stored pulses must previously be set in parameter No. 5021.Once which of the two directions of each axis is involved is automatically determined, the corresponding axis direction is subjected to axis interlock to stop feeding, and the obtained tool compensation amount is stored in tool compensation memory. If the directions of stored pulses are not unified, or no pulse has been stored, for example, because the servo power has been shut off (servo off) or no axis movement occurred, an alarm (PS5195) is issued. A PS alarm is issued also if the tool moves along two axes (Xaxis and Zaxis) simultaneously; move the tool along one axis at a time. If a PS alarm is issued, no tool compensation amount will be set up, resulting in the four directions (two axes) being subjected to interlock.

NOTE 1 Pulse storage for automatic decision is carried out in the manual mode while the GOSQM <G039.7> (tool compensation amount write mode select) signal is 1. Stored pulses are lost if: a. The manual mode is exited, b. The GOSQM <G039.7> (tool compensation amount write mode select) signal becomes 0, c. A contact detected signal is received from the touch sensor, resulting in a tool compensation amount being set or an alarm (PS5195) being issued, d. The servo power becomes off (resulting in the stored pulses for the related axis being lost), or e. Axis movement occurs (resulting in the stored pulses for the other axis being lost). 2 Axis interlock that has occurred for the axis direction identified by parameterbased automatic decision and twoaxis, fourdirection interlock that has occurred because of a PS alarm being issued are canceled when the manual mode is exited or the GOSQM <G039.7> (tool compensation mount write mode select) signal becomes 0. A reset does not cancel interlock. Determination of the axis movement direction in four-contact input
Set bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 to 0 and bit 4 (TSD) of parameter No. 5009 to 1 to enable the input signals from the touch sensor and the movement direction of an axis to be monitored during measurement in the tool compensation write mode. When the measurement is determined to be invalid, the moving axis is interlocked and an alarm (PS5195) occurs. Conditions under which measurement is determined to be invalid The movement direction of an axis and the tool compensation write signals (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1, -MIT2) are monitored in the tool compensation write mode (GOQSM<G039.7>=1). In the following case, the operation is determined to be invalid, the axis is interlocked, and an alarm (PS5195) occurs.

(1) A tool compensation write signal whose direction did not match the axis was input during measurement. (2) Any of the tool compensation write signals was input while the X- and Z-axes moved together.
- 1294 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT

(3) Any of the tool compensation write signals was input without the axis being moved. (4) The movement direction of the axis was not constant when the movement direction of the axis was determined (*1). (*1) When the axis moves in one direction of one axis by the compensation cycle count set in parameter No. 5021, the axis is assumed to move in the direction.
X axis - contact face ( -MIT1 )

Z axis + contact face ( +MIT2 )

Z axis - contact face ( -MIT2 )

+x +z

X axis + contact face ( +MIT1 )

Valid operation

Invalid operation (1)

Invalid operation (2)

Examples of operations determined to be invalid

Interlock applied when measurement is invalid When measurement is determined to be invalid, movement only in the direction opposite to the previous movement direction is allowed. That is, the directions other than the direction opposite to the previous movement direction are interlocked. Examples of interlock (1) When a tool compensation write signal other than Z-axis/contact surface (-MIT2) is input during movement in the minus direction of the Z-axis, the minus direction of the Z-axis and the plus and minus directions of the X-axis are interlocked. (2) When any of tool compensation write signals is input during movement in the plus direction of the X-axis and the minus direction of the Z-axis, the plus directions of the X-axis and the minus direction of the Z-axis are interlocked. (3) When any of tool compensation write signals is input without axis movement, the four directions of the two axes are interlocked.
+X

-Z

+Z

Z axis - contact face ( -MIT2 ) +x +z -X : Movable : Interlock (Unmovable)

Interlock direction in example (1)

- 1295 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

The release interlock applied because measurement is determined to be invalid, keep the tool away from the touch sensor (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1, -MIT2 = 0) and reset the CNC. If the tool is not kept away from the touch sensor, resetting the CNC does not release interlock. In conditions (3) and (4) in which measurement is determined to be invalid, no axis can be moved because the four directions of the two axes are interlocked. In such a case, cancel the tool compensation write mode and reset the CNC to release the interlock. To cancel the tool compensation write mode, set the tool compensation write mode signal is to 0 or select the MDI mode, MEM mode, or EDIT mode. A reset releases interlock and an alarm. Even if another tool compensation write signal (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1, or -MIT2) is input before the interlock or alarm is released, the signal is ignored.

Example 1
The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and the measuring tool nose tip position can be set as the tool offset value. Define the reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position (machine zero position) as the measuring reference position, then set the distances Xp, Zp, Xm, Zm, from the measuring reference position to the contact faces of the sensor in parameters.
(0,0) OFSx Xm Xt Xp X axis contact face (0,0)

Measuring reference position (reference tool nose position at the mechanical reference position)

Z axis contact face OFSz Zt +X +Z Zp Zm

Measuring tool nose position at the mechanical reference position

Xp: Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (+) contact face (parameter No.5015) Xm: Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis () contact face (parameter No.5016) Zp: Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (+) contact face (parameter No.5017) Zm: Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis () contact face (parameter No.5018) Xt: X-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor (X-axis machine coordinate value) Zt: Z-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor (Z-axis machine coordinate value) (when Xt and Zt touch the X-axis () contact face and Z-axis () contact face in the above figure) OFSx: Tool offset value to be set (X-axis): OFSx = Xt - Xm OFSz: Tool offset value to be set (Z-axis): OFSz = Zt - Zm
When the reference tool nose tip position is set as the measuring reference position

Example 2
The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginary zero point), as shown in the figure below. The difference between the imaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference point can be set as the tool offset value of the measuring tool, by setting the distances from the imaginary zero point to the respective contact faces in parameters.

- 1296 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT
Zt OFSZ Xt Machine zero point

(0,0) Measuring tool nose position at the mechanical reference position

+X

+Z Zm Zp Xm OFSx

Xp

Measuring reference position (Imaginary zero point)

When the imaginary zero position is set as the measuring reference position

Setting the workpiece coordinate system shift amount

The workpiece coordinate system shift amount for the Z-axis can be set as follows: Bring the tool to touch the workpiece end face. Subtract the tool geometry offset value of the tool (the value shifted in the coordinate system by the tool geometry offset) from the machine coordinate value (the distance from the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position (machine zero point) to the workpiece end face).The result is set as the workpiece coordinate system shift value. (Z axis workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set(EXOFSz) )= (Z axis tool geometry offset value of the corresponding tool (OFSz)) (Z axis machine coordinate value(Zt)) Using the above methods, the workpiece coordinate system is set with the workpiece end face (the contact point of the sensor) specified as the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system of the Z-axis.
+X Zt Machine zero point

+Z -EXOFSz Workpiece coordinate System zero point (programmed zero point)

OFSz (0,0) OFSx Measuring tool nose position at the mechanical machine position

EXOFSz OFSz Zt

: Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set : Tool geometry offset value : Mechanical coordinate value (Distance to the workpiece end face)

Setting of workpiece coordinate system shift amount

To deviate the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system from the workpiece end face, such as by adding a cutting allowance, use the incremental input of the workpiece coordinate system shift amount in MDI operation. By setting the distance from the programmed zero point to the workpiece end face with a sign, the numeric value input is added to the preset amount.
- 1297 -

15.MEASUREMENT
+X EXOFSz(NEW) Cutting allowance W EXOFSz(OLD) Workpiece coordinate system zero point (programmed zero point) +Z Imaginary zero point EXOFSz(OLD) W EXOFSz(NEW) : : :

B-64303EN-1/02

Workpiece coordinate system shift amount being set by the function of input of tool offset value measured B Cutting allowance (incremental input value) Workpiece coordinate system shift amount after adding the cutting allowance

Setting of cutting allowance

Basic procedure to set tool offset value

(1) Execute manual reference position return. By executing manual reference position return, a machine coordinate system is established. The tool offset value is computed on the machine coordinate system. (2) Select manual handle mode or manual continuous feed mode and set the tool compensation value write mode select signal GOQSM to 1. The display is automatically changed to the tool offset screen (geometry), and the OFST indicator starts blinking in the status indication area at the bottom of the screen, which indicates that the tool compensation value writing mode is ready.

NOTE After this, it is impossible to switch the S2TLS (spindle measurement selection) signal until the GOQSM (offset write mode) signal becomes 0.
(3) Select a tool to be measured. (4) When the cursor does not coincide with the tool offset number desired to be set, move the cursor to the desired offset number using the page key and cursor key. The cursor can also be coincided with the tool offset number desired to be set automatically by the tool offset number input signals (when parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1). In this case, the position of the cursor cannot be changed on the tool compensation screen using page keys or cursor keys. (5) Near the tool to the sensor by manual operation. (6) Place the tool edge to a contacting surface of the sensor by manual handle feed. Bring the tool edge in contact with the sensor. This causes the tool compensation value writing signals to input to be CNC. The following tool compensation amount write signals are set up according to the setting of the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of No. 5004). When the parameter is 0: +MIT1, MIT1, +MIT2, MIT2 When the parameter is 1: +MIT1 only The tool compensation value writing signal is set to 1, and the : i) The axis is interlocked in this direction and its feed is stopped. ii) The tool offset value extracted by the tool offset memory (tool geometry offset value) which corresponds to the offset number shown by the cursor is set up. (7) For both X-axis and Z-axis, their offset values are set by operations (5) and (6). (8) Repeat operations (3) to (7) for all necessary tools. (9) Set the tool compensation value writing mode signal GOQSM to 0. The writing mode is canceled and the blinking OFST indicator light goes off.

- 1298 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT

Basic procedure to set workpiece coordinate shift value

(1) Set the tool geometry offset values of each tool in advance. (2) Execute manual reference position return. By executing manual reference position return, the machine coordinate system is established. The workpiece coordinate system shift amount is computed based on the machine coordinate system of the tool. (3) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount writing mode select signal WOQSM to 1. The display automatically switches to the workpiece shifting screen, the WFST indicator starts blinking at the status indicator area in the bottom of the screen, which indicates that the workpiece coordinate system shift amount writing mode is ready.

NOTE After this, it is impossible to switch the S2TLS (spindle measurement selection) signal until the WOQSM (offset write mode) signal becomes 0.
(4) Select a tool to be measured. (5) Check tool offset numbers. The tool offset number corresponding to the tool required for measurement, shall be set in the parameter (No.5020) in advance. The tool offset number can also be set automatically by setting the tool offset number input signal (with parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1). (6) Manually approach the tool to an end face of the workpiece. (7) Place the tool edge to the end face (sensor) of the workpiece using manual handle feed. When the tool edge contacts the end face of the workpiece, input the workpiece coordinate system shift amount signal WOSET. The workpiece coordinate system shift amount on the Zaxis is automatically set. (8) Release the tool. (9) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode select signal WOQSM to 0. The writing mode is canceled and the blinking WSFT indicator light goes off.

Limitation
This function cannot be used with the following functions. Composite control (T series (2-path control)) Mirror image for double turret (T series)

Signal
Tool offset write mode select signal GOQSM<Gn039.7>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Select the mode for writing tool compensation [Operation] When this signal is turned 1 in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing tool compensation is selected. The control unit then automatically switches the screen on the display to the tool geometry compensation screen and blinks the OFST status display at the bottom of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for writing tool compensation.

Tool offset write signal (Path 1) +MIT1#1, +MIT2#1<X004.2, 4> -MIT1#1, -MIT2#1<X004.3, 5> (Path 2) +MIT1#2, +MIT2#2<X013.2, 4>-MIT1#2, -MIT2#2<X013.3, 5>
[Classification] Input signal

- 1299 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

[Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is set to 1, the manual feed is inhibited and also the tool geometry compensation along the axis is automatically calculated and the result is set in tool compensation memory. [Operation] When these signals are turned 1 during tool offset write mode, the control unit operates as follows: Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation. If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.5004 is set to 0 +MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along the X-axis. MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along the X-axis. +MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along the Z-axis. MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along the Z-axis. If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.5004 is set to 1 +MIT1 : Automatic decision causes the related two directions of each axis to be subjected to interlock. MIT1 : Not used +MIT2 : Not used MIT2 : Not used When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned 1, the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry compensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets the result in tool compensation memory.

NOTE 1 This signal is used as the manual feed interlock signal in each axis direction. 2 This signal is valid only when the bit 0 (GSC) of parameter No. 5009 is 0. 3 In case of bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No.3008=1, the address assigned by parameter No.3019 is used Tool offset write signal +MIT1 to +MIT2 <Gn132.0 to 1>, -MIT1 to -MIT2 <Gn134.0 to 1>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is set to 1, the manual feed is inhibited and also the tool geometry compensation along the axis is automatically calculated and the result is set in tool compensation memory. [Operation] When these signals are turned 1, the control unit operates as follows: Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation. When bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is 0 and the X-axis is assumed to be the first axis and the Z-axis to be the second axis +MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along the X-axis. MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along the X-axis. +MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along the Z-axis.
- 1300 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT
MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along the Z-axis. If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.5004 is set to 1 +MIT1 : Automatic decision causes the related two directions of each axis to be subjected to interlock. MIT1 : Not used +MIT2 : Not used MIT2 : Not used When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned 1, the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry compensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets the result in tool compensation memory.

NOTE This signal is valid only when the bit 0 (GSC) of parameter No. 5009 is 1. Tool offset number select signals OFN0 to OFN5 <Gn039.0 to 5>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Select the tool offset number. [Operation] When the mode for writing tool compensation is selected, the cursor is automatically positioned on the tool geometry compensation number selected by these signals. A tool offset number is specified by a 6bit binary number. Numbers 0 to 63 correspond to the compensation number 1 to 64.

NOTE This signal is available only when parameter QNI (No.5005#5) =1. Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal WOQSM<Gn039.6>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Select the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. [Operation] When this signal is turned to 1 in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system is selected. The control unit then automatically switches the screen displayed to the WORK SHIFT screen and blinks the OFST status display at the bottom of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. However, this is not performed when the mode for writing tool compensation values is selected.

Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal WOSET<Gn040.7>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Automatically calculates and sets the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. [Operation] When this signal turns to 1 in the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system, it triggers the automatic calculation and setting of the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.

- 1301 -

15.MEASUREMENT Signal address (Path 1)


#7 X004 #6 #5 -MIT2
#1 #1

B-64303EN-1/02

#4 +MIT2
#1 #1

#3 -MIT1
#1 #1

#2 +MIT1
#1 #1

#1

#0

SKIP5

SKIP4 #4

SKIP3 #3

SKIP2 #2

(Path 2)
#7 X013 #6 #5 -MIT2
#2 #2

#1
#2 #2

#0

+MIT2

#2 #2

-MIT1

#2 #2

+MIT1

SKIP5

SKIP4

SKIP3

SKIP2

WARNING Since the same addresses are used for both +MIT1, MIT1,+MIT2, MIT2 and skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP5 (multistep skip), be careful when using these two signal types.
#7 Gn039 GOQSM #7 Gn040 WOSET #7 Gn132 #7 Gn134 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 +MIT2 #1 -MIT2 #0 +MIT1 #0 -MIT1 #6 WOQSM #6 #5 OFN5 #5 #4 OFN4 #4 #3 OFN3 #3 #2 OFN2 #2 #1 OFN1 #1 #0 OFN0 #0

Parameter
#7 3003 #6 #5 #4 #3 DIT #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path #3 DIT Interlock for each axis direction 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
#7 3008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 XSG #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is 0: Fixed at the address 1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address

- 1302 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT NOTE If this parameter is set to 1, parameters No.3012 and No.3019 must be set. if No.3012,No.3019 is set to 0,skip signal, skip signal for PMC axis control, and measurement position arrival signal are assigned to X0000.

3019

Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are assigned

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 327 Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP and the measurement position arrival signals (XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (M series) or XAE1 and XAE2 (T series)) are to be assigned.

Example 1.

In case of No.3012=5, No.3019=6


If parameter XSG(No.3008#2) is set to 1, skip signal for PMC axis control , measurement position arrival signal, tool offset write signal are assigned to X0006. skip signal is assigned to X0005.
#7 #6 SKIP6 #6 ESKIP #5 SKIP5 #5 -MIT2 #4 SKIP4 #4 +MIT2 #3 SKIP3 #3 -MIT1 #2 SKIP2 #2 +MIT1 #1 SKIP8 #1 XAE2 #0 SKIP7 #0 XAE1 (T series) (T series)

X005 X006

SKIP #7

Example 2.

In case of No.3012=5, No.3019=5


If parameter XSG(No.3008#2) is set to 1, skip signal for PMC axis control , measurement position arrival signal, tool offset write signal, skip signal is assigned to X0005.
#7 #6 ESKIP SKIP6 #6 ESKIP SKIP6 #5 -MIT2 SKIP5 #5 SKIP5 #4 +MIT2 SKIP4 #4 SKIP4 #3 -MIT1 SKIP3 #3 SKIP3 #2 +MIT1 SKIP2 #2 XAE3 SKIP2 #1 XAE2 SKIP8 #1 XAE2 SKIP8 #0 XAE1 SKIP7 #0 XAE1 SKIP7 (M series) (T series)

X005

SKIP #7 SKIP

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327
#7 5004 #6 #5 #4 #3 TS1 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

- 1303 -

15.MEASUREMENT
#3

B-64303EN-1/02

TS1 For touch sensor contact detection with the function for direct input of offset value measured B: 0: Four-contact input is used. 1: One-contact input is used.
#7 #6 #5 QNI #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5005

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #5 QNI With the tool length measurement function, a tool compensation number is selected by: 0: Operation through the MDI panel by the operator (selection based on cursor operation). 1: Signal input from the PMG.
#7 5009 #6 #5 #4 TSD #3 #2 #1 #0 GSC

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0 GSC When the function for direct input of offset value measured B is used, an offset write input signal is input from: 0: Machine side 1: PMC side When the interlock function for each axis direction is enabled (when bit 3 (DIT) of parameter No. 3003 is set to 0), switching can also be made between input from the machine side and input from PMC side for the interlock function for each axis direction. TSD In the function for direct input of offset value measured B, the movement direction determination specifications: 0: Do not apply. 1: Apply. This parameter is valid when four-contact input is used (bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 0).
Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1P) Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1M) Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1P) Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1M)

#4

5015 5016 5017 5018

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real path mm, inch (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
- 1304 -

B-64303EN-1/02

15.MEASUREMENT
This parameter is related to the function for direct input of offset value measured B. Set the distance (signed) from a measurement reference position to each contact surface of a sensor. For a diameter specification axis, set a diameter value. When arbitrary angular axis control is performed, set the distance in the Cartesian coordinate system.
Measurement reference position

X1m

X-axis - contact surface

X1p Z-axis + contact surface Z-axis - contact surface

+X X-axis + contact surface

Z1m

Z1p +Z

5020

Tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values Set a tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B (when a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is set). (Set the tool offset number corresponding to a tool under measurement beforehand.) This parameter is valid when automatic tool offset number selection is not performed (when bit 5 (QNI) of parameter No. 5005 is set to 0).
5021 Number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the tool is about to touch the touch sensor

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Byte path None 0 to 8 When a touch sensor of one-point input or the axis movement direction in four-contact input is used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B, set the number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the manually operated tool is about to touch the touch sensor. When 0 is set, the specification of the maximum value 8 is assumed.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 or bit4(TSD) of parameter No.5009 is set to 1.

- 1305 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

Alarm and message


Number PS5195 Message Description DIRECTION CAN NOT BE Measurement is invalid in the tool compensation measurement value direct JUDGED input B function. [For 1-contact input] 1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant. - The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode. - The servo power is off. - Pulse directions are diverse. 2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Z-axis). [For the movement direction discrimination specification] 1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant. - The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode. - The servo power is off. - Pulse directions are diverse. 2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Z-axis). 3. The direction indicated by the tool compensation write signal does not match the movement direction of the axis.

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Setting and displaying data Item name

15.4.3
Overview

Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input

Enter the offset value by which the actual measurement value is assumed to be the specified value as the workpiece origin offset value where the cursor is located by directly inputting the measured deviation, considered during programming, between the workpiece coordinate system and the actual coordinate system.

Parameter
#7 1015 #6 WIC #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 WIC Workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input is: 0: (M series) Performed without considering the external workpiece origin offset value. (T series) Valid only in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system. 1: (M series) Performed considering the external workpiece origin offset value. (T series) Valid in all coordinate systems.

NOTE In the T series, if this parameter bit is set to 0, workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input is enabled only in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system or an external workpiece coordinate system. If an attempt is made to perform workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input in a workpiece coordinate system other than these workpiece coordinate systems, warning "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed.
- 1306 -

B-64303EN-1/02 #7 1207 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2

15.MEASUREMENT
#1 #0 WOL

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 WOL The calculation method for workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input is as follows: 0: In a machine that requires that the difference from the reference tool be set as the tool length compensation amount, the workpiece origin offset is measured and set with the reference tool mounted on the machine. (The tool length of the reference tool is assumed to be 0.) 1: In a machine that requires that the tool length itself be set as the tool length compensation amount, the workpiece origin offset is measured and set considering the tool length when the tool length compensation for the mounted tool is enabled.

NOTE The setting of this parameter is valid only when the system used is the M series and bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No. 3104 is set to 1. If this parameter is set to 1 in other than the above conditions, the system operates as if this parameter bit were set to 0.
#7 3104 #6 DAL #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 DAL Absolute position 0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset. 1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.

NOTE In T series, whether to exclude a tool offset when displaying the absolute position is determined by the setting of bit 1 (DAP) of parameter No. 3129.
#7 3129 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 DAP #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 DAP For absolute position display: 0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. 1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.

- 1307 -

15.MEASUREMENT

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE In M series, whether to exclude the tool length offset when displaying the absolute position is determined according to the setting of bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No. 3104.
#7 11278 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 WMC

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 WMC In the "direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured", the workpiece origin offset value is 0: calculated based on the absolute coordinate value. Workpiece origin offset value = Absolute coordinate value before measurement - Measured value + Selected workpiece origin offset value + External workpiece origin offset value 1: calculated based on the machine coordinate value. (FS0i-C compatible specification) Workpiece origin offset value = Machine coordinate value - Measured value

Reference item
Manual name OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64304EN) Item name Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input

- 1308 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

16
16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6

PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

Chapter 16, "PMC CONTROL FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: PMC AXIS CONTROL ..................................................................................................................1309 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT...........................................................................................................1377 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT......................................................1390 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH.........................................................................1393 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT..............................................................................................................1395 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL.......................................................................................................1400

16.1
16.1.1
Overview

PMC AXIS CONTROL


PMC Axis Control

The PMC can directly control any given axis, independent of the CNC. An axis can be controlled by signals alone without using an NC program. For example, by specifying an amount of travel, feedrate, and so forth from the PMC, a movement can be made along an axis independently of other axes operated under CNC control. This enables the control of turrets, pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices using any given axes of the CNC. Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input signal provided for that particular axis.
Table 16.1.1 (a) Commands that can be executed by PMC axis control Rapid traverse Cutting feed - feed per minute Cutting feed - feed per revolution Skip -- feed per minute Dwell Reference position return Continuous feed 1st to 4th reference position return External pulse synchronization - Position code External pulse synchronization - 1st to 3rd manual handle Feedrate control Torque control Auxiliary function, Auxiliary function 2, Auxiliary function 3 Selection of the machine coordinate system Cutting feed - sec/block

Explanation
Under PMC axis control, various types of control are exercised using signals. To specify operation with the commands (see Table 16.1.1 (a)) that can be executed by PMC axis control, on the PMC side, four groups of input/output signals are provided for each path: group A, group B, group C, and group D. Each of these groups of input/output signals used with PMC axis control serves as the unit of PMC axis control. Which axis is to be controlled by each group must be set in parameter No. 8010 beforehand. One group may be able to be assigned to multiple axes so that the same operation can be performed on the multiple axes. (Supplement 2)
- 1309 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

By specifying multiple groups at the same time, multiple axes can be controlled independently. (Supplement 3)
PMC DI / DO
Group A command Group B command Group C command Group D command

CNC axis control axis control axis control axis control axis control

Group A Group B Group C Group D

(Supplement 1) The relationships between groups and axes are set in parameter No. 8010. (Supplement 2) Multiple axes can be specified as with group C. (Supplement 3) Group A and group B can be specified independently. Fig.16.1.1 (a) Concept of PMC axis control

The addresses of the signals are shown in Table 16.1.1 (b) "Allocation of group-by-group signals" below.
Table 16.1.1 (b) Allocation of group-by-group signals Input signal address Output signal address G142 to G149, G150.5, G150.0,1,6,7 G154 to G161, G162.5, G150.0,1,6,7 G166 to G173, G174.5, G150.0,1,6,7 G178 to G185, G186.5, G150.0,1,6,7 F130 to F132, F142, F129.5.7 F133 to F135, F145, F129.5.7 F136 to F138, F148, F129.5.7 F139 to F141, F151, F129.5.7

Group-by-group signal Group A Group B Group C Group D

The names of input/output signals related to PMC axis control include lowercase letter "g". An example is "g" of axis control read signal EBUFg (described later). Signal EBUFg is not present, but signals EBUFA, EBUFB, EBUFC, and EBUFD, in which "g" is replaced with A, B, C, and D, are present actually. These signals belong to group A, group B, group C, and group D. That is, EBUFg is the collective name of EBUFA, EBUFB, EBUFC, and EBUFD.

Basic procedure
(1) Set parameter No. 8010 for each axis to specify which group (A, B, C, or D) to select. To synchronize multiple axes through axis movement in one group, set the same conditions for the parameter settings (such as the rapid traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time constant, diameter/radius, straight line axis/rotation axis) related to the feedrate. (2) To enable direct PMC axis control, set each control axis selection signal (EAX1 to EAX5), that corresponds to an axis to be controlled, to 1. (3) Determine the operation. The axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g) specify the type of operation. The axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g) specify the feedrate. The axis control data signals (EID0g to EID31g) specify the moving distance and other data. These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg (described later), determine one complete operation, which is tantamount to one block executed during CNC-controlled automatic operation. These signals may be collectively called the axis control block data signals. (Refer to Table 16.1.1 (c), List of signals determining data, tantamount to one block for PMC axis control.)

- 1310 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

Table 16.1.1 (c) List of signals determining data, tantamount to one block for PMC axis control Generic name Signal name Symbol Data type Axis control block data signals Block stop prohibition signal Axis control command signal Axis control feedrate signal Axis control data signal EMSBKg EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID31g Bit Byte Word 2-word

(4) When the data governing a complete operation (one block) is determined, reverse the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg (i.e., from "0" to "1" or vice versa). Note that, for this to occur, axis control command read completion signal EBSYg must be in the same logical state as EBUFg. (5) The CNC is capable of storing axis control functions from the PMC in its buffer so that multiple operations can be performed in series, under the control of the PMC. This allows the CNC to accept a new command block from the PMC during the execution of another block if the buffer has free space. The Fig. 16.1.1 (b), "Buffering under PMC axis control" illustrates an example in which command [1] is being executed, commands [2] and [3] are stored in the buffers, and command [4] has been issued (the axis control block data signal is set).
PMC Commands Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5
: :

Setting of the axis control block data signal Command [1] Command [2] Command [3] Command [4] Command [5] [1] [2] [4] [3]

CNC's buffers Input buffer

Waiting buffer

Executing buffer

Block n

Fig. 16.1.1 (b)

Buffering under PMC axis control

When the execution of command [1] is completed: Command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing buffer; Command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer; and Command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the command block (axis control block data signal). After the reception of command [4] by the input buffer, the PMC can issue command [5] to the CNC (the axis control block data signal is set). The timing chart for the command operation is shown below. (Table 16.1.1 (d), "Timing chart of command operation")

- 1311 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Command block (Input) EBUFg (Input) (1) Not specifiable EBSYg (Output) Input buffer [3] [4] (2) (3) (4) [1] [2] [3] [4]

B-64303EN-1/02

[5]

(5)

Waiting buffer

[2]

[3]

Executing buffer

[1] Beginning of execution

End of execution

[2] Beginning of execution

Table 16.1.1 (d)

Timing chart of command operation

(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) : A new block cannot be issued during these intervals (while EBUFg and EBSYg are in different logical states). In interval (4), the buffer is in the "full" state. The status of the CNC buffer can be determined by the exclusive OR of the axis control command read signal EBUFg, input from the PMC, and axis control command read completion signal EBSYg, output from the CNC. (Table 16.1.1 (e), "Buffering status in PMC axis control")
Table 16.1.1 (e) Buffering status in PMC axis control Exclusive OR CNC buffer status (XOR) 0 The previous block has already been read into the CNC buffer. The PMC can issue the next block. The previous block has not yet been read completely. It is just being read or waiting for the CNC buffer to become available. Do not issue the next block, nor reverse the logical state of EBUFg. Reversing the EBUFg state invalidates any block that has been already issued.

EBUFg 0 1 0 1

EBSYg 0 1 1 0

(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued. When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 to "0". Before setting these signals to "0", however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC's input, waiting, and executing buffers have all been executed. Setting the signals to "0" while a block is being executed, or while a block remains in any of these buffers, results in the issue of a P/S alarm. This alarm PS0139 suspends the current block execution and invalidates the blocks stored in the input and waiting buffers. To ensure no block is being executed, or that there are no blocks remaining in the input or waiting buffer, check that control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to "0". For those axes that are always subject to PMC control, such as those controlling turrets, pallets, and ATCs, ensure that the EAX1 to EAX5 signals are always set to "1". There is no need to set these signals to "0" after issuing commands from the PMC to the CNC. When all command blocks have been executed (there are no blocks remaining to be executed), the CNC automatically stops execution.
- 1312 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

(6) When control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 are set from "1" to "0", control is returned to the CNC.

Command
Overview of commands
As described in step (3) in the basic procedure, one PMC axis control command block is represented by the axis control block data signals. PMC axis control enables the commands indicated in Table 16.1.1 (f), Command list to be specified. In Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list": "Command" represents the axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g). "Data 1" represents the axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g). "Data 2" represents the axis control data signals (EID0g to EID31g).
Table 16.1.1 (f) No. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Command

Command list Data 2 Total moving distance Total moving distance Total moving distance Total moving distance Dwell time Description The same operation as G00 of the CNC is performed. The same operation as G94 G01 of the CNC is performed. The same operation as G95 G01 of the CNC is performed. The same operation as G31 G01 of the CNC is performed. The same operation as G04 of the CNC is performed. After a rapid traverse movement is made in the reference position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006, the same operation as manual reference position return of the CNC is performed. A continuous feed operation is performed along a controlled axis in a certain direction. The same operation as continuous feed in the JOG mode of the CNC is performed. The same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with G28 of the CNC is performed. The same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with G30 P2 of the CNC is performed. The same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with G30 P3 of the CNC is performed. The same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with G30 P4 the CNC is performed. Synchronous operation with the position coder is performed.

Operation Rapid traverse Cutting feed - feed per minute Cutting feed - feed per revolution Skip - feed per minute Dwell

Data 1 Rapid traverse rate (NOTE) Cutting feedrate Feedrate per revolution Cutting feedrate ---

00h 01h 02h 03h 04h

(6)

05h

Reference position return

---

---

(7)

06h

Continuous feed

Continuous feedrate Rapid traverse rate (NOTE) Rapid traverse rate (NOTE) Rapid traverse rate (NOTE) Rapid traverse rate (NOTE) Pulse weight

Feed direction (EID31g only)

(8)

07h

First reference position return Second reference position return Third reference position return Fourth reference position return External pulse synchronization position coder

---

(9)

08h

---

(10)

09h

---

(11)

0Ah

---

(12)

0Bh

---

- 1313 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


No. (13)
Command

B-64303EN-1/02

Operation External pulse synchronization - first manual handle External pulse synchronization second manual handle External pulse synchronization - third manual handle Speed command

Data 1 Pulse weight

Data 2 ---

Description Synchronous operation with the first manual handle is performed. Synchronous operation with the second manual handle is performed. Synchronous operation with the third manual handle is performed. Continuous feed operation based on a speed command is performed. Continuous feed operation based on torque control is performed. The same operation as an auxiliary function of the CNC is performed. The same operation as an auxiliary function of the CNC is performed. The same operation as an auxiliary function of the CNC is performed. The same operation as G53 of the CNC is performed. Cutting feed is performed according to a specified period of time.

0Dh

(14)

0Eh

Pulse weight

---

(15)

0Fh

Pulse weight Speed specified by speed command Maximum feedrate ------Rapid traverse rate (NOTE) Cutting feed time

---

(16)

10h

---

(17) (18) (19) (20) (21)

11h 12h 14h 15h 20h

Torque control Auxiliary function 1 Auxiliary function 2 Auxiliary function 3 Machine coordinate system selection Cutting feed sec/block specification

Torque data Auxiliary function code Auxiliary function code Auxiliary function code Machine coordinate Total moving distance

(22)

21h

NOTE The rapid traverse rate is valid only when bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1. Details of commands
A detailed description of each command is provided below. The parenthesized number following each command title represents the value of the axis control command signals EC0g to EC6g.

(1) Rapid traverse ( 00h )


This command performs the same operation as "G00" of the CNC. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID31g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 G146 to 149 Data Rapid traverse command (00h) Rapid traverse rate Total moving distance

Rapid traverse rate With bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002, whether the same rapid traverse rate as set in the parameter (No. 1420) of the CNC is used or the feedrate of the PMC axis interface set by EIF0g to EIF15g is used independently of the CNC can be chosen. When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1, set a rapid traverse rate with a binary code.

- 1314 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Unit of data IS-A to IS-C

[Unit of data]
Unit mm/min inch/min deg/min

Linear axis

Metric machine Inch machine Rotation axis

1 0.1 1

NOTE When bit 0 (CMI) of parameter No. 11850 is 0, the rapid traverse rate set by EIF0g to EIF15g is always represented in millimeters.
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 Total moving distance Set an incremental travel amount in the input system unit of the axis with a binary code. [Unit of data] Least input increment of the applied axis (Refer to the standard parameter setting table (A)) [Valid data range]
IS-A -99999999 to 99999999 (8-digit) IS-B to IS-C -999999999 to 999999999 (9-digit)

For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005. When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1 (to use the PMC axis interface for rapid traverse rate selection), the rapid traverse rate unit is 1 mm/min if bit 2 (R10) of parameter No. 8005 is set to 0; the rapid traverse rate unit is 10 mm/min if bit 2 (R10) of parameter No. 8005 is set to 1. With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection signal to be used. The table below indicates the relationships between the bit and signals.
Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) 0 1 Dry run signal DRN<G046.7> EDRN<G150.7> Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT<G019.7> ERT<G150.6>

When the dry run signal DRN/EDRN is set to 1, the feedrate is as indicated below.
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (RTorERT) 0 1 When rapid traverse is specified RDE(No.8001#3)=0 RDE(No.8001#3)=1 Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Dry run feedrate *JV (NOTE) Rapid traverse

NOTE When bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1, the manual feedrate override signal *JV is not applied, but the dry run feedrate is just applied.
Related parameters Parameter DIAx (No.1006#3) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter (No.1420) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3)
- 1315 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Parameter RPD (No.8002#0) Parameter CDI (No.8005#1) Parameter R10 (No.8005#2) Related signals Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7> Dry run signal DRN<G046.7> Manual rapid traverse selection signal (for PMC axis control) ERT <G150.6> Dry run signal (for PMC axis control) EDRN <G150.7>

B-64303EN-1/02

(2) Cutting feed - feed per minute ( 01h )


This command performs the same operation as G94 G01 of the CNC. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID31g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 G146 to 149 Data Cutting feed - feed minute (01h) Cutting feedrate Total moving distance

Cutting feed rate Set a feedrate along the axis with a binary code. A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 with bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002. When bit 4 (EFD) of parameter No. 8006 is set to 1, the unit of feedrate data increases by a factor of 100. Moreover, the feedrate unit can be changed using a combination of bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 and bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002. [Unit of data] When the parameter F10 (No.8002#3) is set to 0.
IS-A Linear axis Metric input Inch input Rotation axis 10 0.1 10 Unit of data IS-B 1 0.01 1 IS-C 0.1 0.001 0.1 Unit mm/min inch/min deg/min

When the parameter F10 (No.8002#3) is set to 1.


IS-A Linear axis Metric input Inch input Rotation axis 100 1 100 Unit of data IS-B 10 0.1 10 IS-C 1 0.01 1 Unit mm/min inch/min deg/min

[Valid data range] 1 to 65535

CAUTION 1 When 0 is specified, the buffering state remains unchanged and no axis movement takes place. In such a case, perform a reset operation with the reset signal ECLRg. 2 Clamping to the cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1430) is disabled.
Total moving distance The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.

- 1316 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection signal to be used. The table below indicates the relationships between the bit and signals.
Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) 0 1 Dry run signal DRN<G046.7> EDRN<G150.7> Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT<G019.7> ERT<G150.6>

When the dry run signal DRN/EDRN is set to 1, the feedrate is as indicated below. Unlike rapid traverse, the feedrate does not depend on the value of bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001.
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (RT / ERT) 0 1 When cutting feed is specified Dry run speed *JV (Note) Cutting feed

NOTE When bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1, the manual feedrate override signal *JV is not applied, but the dry run feedrate is just applied.
Related parameters Parameter DIAx (No.1006#3) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter F10 (No.8002#3) Parameter PF1 (No.8002#4) Parameter PF2 (No.8002#5) Parameter CDI (No.8005#1) Parameter EFD (No.8006#4) Related signals Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7> Dry run signal DRN<G046.7> Manual rapid traverse selection signal (for PMC axis control) ERT <G150.6> Dry run signal (for PMC axis control) EDRN <G150.7>

(3) Cutting feed - feed per revolution ( 02h )


This command performs the same operation as "G95 G01" of the CNC. Set the amount of feed along the axis per spindle revolution. The feedrate per spindle revolution depends on whether the M series or T series is used. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID31g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 G146 to 149 Data Cutting feed - feed per revolution command (02h) Feedrate per revolution Total moving distance

Feedrate per revolution <For the T series> [Unit of data] The table indicates the unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002.

- 1317 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Parameter FR2 FR1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 Metric input (mm/rev) 0.0001 0.001 0.01 Inch input (inch/rev) 0.000001 0.00001 0.0001

B-64303EN-1/02

Rotation axis (deg/rev) 0.0001 0.001 0.01

[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (However, data within the ranges indicated below must be specified.)
Valid data range IS-A to IS-C Linear axis Metric input Inch input Rotation axis 0.0001 to 500.0000 0.000001 to 9.999999 0.0001 to 500.0000 Unit mm/rev inch/rev deg/rev

<For M series> [Unit of data] The table indicates the unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002.
Parameter FR2 FR1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 Metric input (mm/rev) 0.01 0.1 1 Inch input (inch/rev) 0.0001 0.001 0.01 Rotation axis (deg/rev) 0.01 0.1 1

[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (However, data within the ranges indicated below must be specified.)
Valid data range IS-A to IS-C Linear axis Metric input Inch input Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00 0.0001 to 9.9999 0.01 to 500.00 Unit mm/rev inch/rev deg/rev

1 2 3 4

CAUTION A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 or 100 by setting bit 6 (FR1) and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002. The feedrate is clamped to a value not exceeding the setting of parameter No. 8022. Override is enabled. Dry run depends on the value of bit 3 (DRR) of parameter No. 8005. In the case of using analog spindle, if the thread cutting is executed in NC program while the PMC axis is moving by this command, the motion of PMC axis once stops for detecting one-rotation-signal.

Total moving distance The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Dry run operation follows the specifications of cutting feed - feed per minute. Related parameters Parameter DRR(No.8005#3) Parameter (No.8022) Others follow the specifications of the cutting feed - feed per minute.
- 1318 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

Related signals Same as for cutting feed - feed per minute

(4) Skip - feed per minute ( 03h )

Skip
This command performs the same operation as "G31 G01" of the CNC. High-speed skip is disabled. This skip signal is valid for an axis assigned to a path from path 1 to path 2. For an axis assigned to path 1, ESKIP (X004.6) is valid. For an axis assigned to path 2, ESKIP#2(X013.6) is valid. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID31g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 G146 to 149 Data Skip command (03h) Cutting feedrate Total moving distance

Cutting feedrate The specifications of the cutting feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) are applicable.

CAUTION Feedrate override and dry run are disabled.


Total moving distance The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.

(5) Dwell ( 04h )


This command performs the same operation as "G04" of the CNC. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EID0g to EID31g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G146 to 149 Data Dwell command (04h) Dwell time

Dwell time Set a dwell time with a binary code.


Valid data range 1 to 9999999 Unit ms

When diameter specification is selected with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a radius value or diameter value for dwell operation can be specified using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005. When the increment system is IS-C, the dwell time can be set to a least input increment of 0.1 msec with bit 1 (DWE) of parameter No. 8002. Related parameters Parameter DIAx (No.1006#3) Parameter DWE (No.8002#1) Parameter CDI (No.8005#1)
- 1319 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (6) Reference position return ( 05h )

B-64303EN-1/02

This command performs the same operation as manual reference position return of the CNC after rapid traverse in the reference position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006.

Reference position setting without DOG


If bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005 for the function for setting the reference position without dogs is set for each axis, and reference position return operation is not performed even once after the power is turned on, a reference position return operation (positioning at a grid closest to the current position) can be performed without using the reference position return deceleration signal when a movement (positioning at a location near the reference position) is made in the direction set for each axis with the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) is specified. At the time of positioning at a location near the reference position, the machine needs to be moved in the reference position return direction at such a feedrate that the servo position deviation exceeds the value set in parameter No. 1836. The direction from a neighborhood point to a grid is set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006. If the reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) is issued after reference position establishment, a high-speed reference position return operation is performed, regardless of the reference position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006. Specify this command after canceling tool radius compensation and tool length compensation. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 Data Reference position return command (05h)

Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter ZMIx (No.1006#5) Parameter (No.1836)

(7) Continuous feed ( 06h )


This command performs a continuous feed operation along a controlled axis in a certain direction. This command performs the same operation as continuous feed in the JOG mode of the CNC. Continuous feed is performed until a reset. At this time, the remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times. By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, the command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is also set to 0. Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0. Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set to 1. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID31g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 G149.7 Data Continuous feed command (06h) Continuous feedrate Feed direction (specified with EID31g only)

Continuous feedrate A feedrate along an axis is set in the same way as for cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h). A feedrate change can be made during continuous feed.
- 1320 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

If a feedrate (EIF0g to EIF15g) is set, and the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed, a new continuous feedrate is set. This command is not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be checked when this command is specified usually. A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 with bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002. Moreover, a set feedrate can be increased by a factor of up to 200 with bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004.

CAUTION A maximum feedrate applicable when override is applied differs from a maximum feedrate applicable when override is canceled. Maximum feedrate data in the two cases is indicated below.
Maximum feedrate (when an override of 254% is applied)
IS-B Metric input (mm/min) 1 times 10 times 200 times (NOTE 1) 166458 1664589 19660500 Inch input (inch/min) 1664.58 16645.89 196605.00 Metric input (mm/min) 16645 166458 1966050 IS-C Inch input (inch/min) 166.45 1664.58 19660.50

Maximum feedrate (when override is canceled)


IS-B Metric input (mm/min) 1 times 10 times 200 times (NOTE 1) 65535 655350 13107000 Inch input (inch/min) 655.35 6553.5 131070 Metric input (mm/min) 6553 65535 1310700 IS-C Inch input (inch/min) 65.53 655.35 13107

NOTE 1 A feedrate increased by a factor of 200 is valid only when the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) is used. 2 The actual feedrate may not be displayed correctly, depending on the feedrate.
Feed direction Specify the direction of continuous feed with the signal EID31g. 0: Positive direction 1: Negative direction The signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined. If the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed during axis movement, the feedrate (EIF0g to EIF15g) is changed to a newly set value. Dry run operation follows the specifications of cutting feed - feed per minute. Related parameters Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter F10 (No.8002#3) Parameter JFM (No.8004#2) Related signals Same as for cutting feed - feed per minute

- 1321 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (8) First reference position return ( 07h )

B-64303EN-1/02

This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28" of the CNC. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 Data First reference position return command (07h) Rapid traverse rate

Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. When the first reference position return command is specified, the manual rapid traverse rate set by parameter No. 1424 is used if manual reference position return operation is not performed even once after the power is turned on.

NOTE If bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. 1005 is set to enable the function for setting the reference position without dogs for each axis, and reference position return operation is not performed even once after the power is turned on, the alarm (PS0090) is issued when the first reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 07h) is specified.
Dry run operation follows the specifications of rapid traverse. Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter (No.1240) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter (No.1420) Parameter (No.1424) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3) Parameter RPD (No.8002#0) Related signals Same as for rapid traverse

(9) Second reference position return ( 08h )


This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28 P2" of the CNC. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 Data Second reference position return command (08h) Rapid traverse rate

Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter (No.1241) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1)
- 1322 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

Parameter (No.1420) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3) Parameter RPD (No.8002#0) Related signals Same as for rapid traverse

(10) Third reference position return ( 09h )


This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28 P3" of the CNC. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 Data Third reference position return command (09h) Rapid traverse rate

Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter (No.1242) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter (No.1420) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3) Parameter RPD (No.8002#0) Related signals Same as for rapid traverse

(11) Fourth reference position return ( 0Ah )


This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28 P4" of the CNC. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 Data Fourth reference position return command (0Ah) Rapid traverse rate

Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter (No.1243) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter (No.1420) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3) Parameter RPD (No.8002#0)

- 1323 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Related signals Same as for rapid traverse

B-64303EN-1/02

(12) External pulse synchronization position coder ( 0Bh )


This command performs a synchronous operation with the position coder. Using position coder of the serial spindle is also available. When a negative external pulse value is specified, a movement is made in the opposite direction. The remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times. If a manual handle interrupt operation is performed for the same axis, an amount of travel based on external pulses added to manual handle interrupt pulses results. By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, the command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is also set to 0. Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0. Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set to 1. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID7g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 G146 Data External pulse synchronization - position coder command (0Bh) Pulse weight Spindle number of the serial spindle to be synchronized (common to the system) (*1)

*1: This data is set only during synchronization with the position coder of the serial spindle. The position coder to be synchronized depends on the parameter setting, as shown below.
ESY (No.8007#3) 0 1 1 EOS (No.8019#0) 0/1 0 1 Command of G146 Not required Not required Required Valid position coder Position coder (not a serial spindle) Position coder of the first spindle belonging to path 1 (*2) Position coder of an arbitrary spindle (specified by G146)

*2: This can be specified for the servo axis belonging to path 1. Pulse weight Set an external pulse weight. When setting a weight value, use the higher bits (EIF8g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF7g) to specify the fractional part. The valid range is 1/256 to 127. With EIF0g to EIF7g for the fractional part, specify a weight in steps of 1/256. Example) For 0.5: EIF0g to EIF7g = 80h (=80h/100h=128 / 256 = 0.5) 0.2) For 0.2: EIF0g to EIF7g=33h (=33h/100h= 51 / 256 By setting the manual pulse magnification select signal HNDMP<G088.3> to 1, the valid range can be set the range form 1/32 to 1023. When the manual pulse magnification select signal HNDMP is set to "1", use the higher bits (EIF5g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF4g) to specify the fractional part. With EIF0g to EIF4g for the fractional part, specify a weight in steps of 1/32. Example)
- 1324 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

For 0.5: EIF0g to EIF4g = 10h (=10h/20h=16 / 32 = 0.5) For 0.2: EIF0g to EIF4g=06h (=06h/20h= 6 / 32 0.2) When a negative weight value is set, a movement is made along the axis in the opposite direction. If a new pulse weight is set and the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed during axis movement based on external pulse synchronization, a movement is made along the axis according to the new pulse weight. This command is not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be checked when this command is specified usually. Spindle number of a serial spindle to be synchronized (for synchronization with the position coder of a serial spindle) The serial spindle to be synchronized is set with a spindle number common to the system. The valid range extends from 1 to the maximum number of control axes. If the spindle number falls outside the range, external pulse synchronization is disabled. Example) When the spindle (serial spindle) of each path is assigned as shown below
Spindle number common to the system First spindle (S1) Second spindle (S2) Third spindle (S3) Path number + Spindle number in the path First spindle in path 1 (S11) Second spindle in path 1 (S12) Third spindle in path 1 (S13)

Path 1

Path 2

Spindle S1 (S11)

Spindle S2 (S12)

Spindle S3 (S21)

NOTE 1 The spindle number to be set does not depend on the path and is common to the system. 2 If the set serial spindle is not present, external pulse synchronization is disabled. 3 Be sure to set EID8g to EID31g (G147 to G149 for group A) to 0.
Related parameters Parameter DIAx(No.1006#3) Parameter (No.1424) Parameter CDI(No.8005#1) Parameter ESY(No.8007#3) Parameter EOS(No.8019#0)

CAUTION 1 The feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate for each axis (parameter No. 1424). 2 In the case of using analog spindle, if the thread cutting is executed in NC program while the PMC axis is moving by this command, the motion of PMC axis once stops for detecting one-rotation-signal.

- 1325 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005. At this time, set the same value with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 for all axes that belong to the same group. (13) External pulse synchronization - first manual handle ( 0Dh ) (14) External pulse synchronization - second manual handle ( 0Eh ) (15) External pulse synchronization - third manual handle ( 0Fh )
Each of these commands performs a synchronous operation with a manual handle. When a negative external pulse value is specified, a movement is made in the opposite direction. The remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times. If a manual handle interrupt operation is performed for the same axis, an amount of travel based on external pulses added to manual handle interrupt pulses results. A parameter-set magnification is invalid. By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, each of these commands can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is also set to 0. Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0. Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set to 1. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 Data External pulse synchronization - manual handle command (0Dh for the first manual handle) (0Eh for the second manual handle) (0Fh for the third manual handle) Pulse weight

EIF0g to EIF15g

G144,145

Pulse weight The specifications of the external pulse synchronization - position coder command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh) are applicable. Related parameters Same as for external pulse synchronization - position coder

CAUTION The feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate for each axis (parameter No. 1424). NOTE For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005. At this time, set the same value with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 for all axes that belong to the same group.

- 1326 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

(16) Speed command ( 10h )


This command performs a continuous feed operation based on a speed command. By using bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006, set a rotation axis as a controlled axis for which this command is executed. The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) exercises position control. However, the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can exercise speed control on the servo motor to dynamically change the speed during continuous feed. So, this command is suited, for example, to an application where a servo motor drives a rotary tool. With parameter No. 8028, a time constant for linear acceleration/ deceleration can be set for each axis. When bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 0, the coordinates are updated during a feed by the speed command. (The speed command of PMC axis control conforms to the FS10/11 specification.) When bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1, the speed command of PMC axis control conforms to the FS0i-C specification. In this case, the speed command is determined by bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005. When the FS0i-C specification is selected (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and speed control is selected (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 0), the coordinates are not updated. When the FS0i-C specification is selected (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and position control is selected (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), the coordinates are updated. By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, this command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, and the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0. Before specifying the next command, check that the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0. Until the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set to 1. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 Data Speed command (10h) Continuous feedrate

Continuous feedrate Set the speed of the servo motor with a binary code. Set a positive value when the servo motor rotates in the forward direction. Set a negative value (two's complement) when the servo motor rotates in the reverse direction. If a new servo motor speed is set as a feedrate, and the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed, the servo motor is accelerated or decelerated to the new speed.
Valid data range -32768 to +32767 Unit min-1

Related parameters Parameter (No.8028)

- 1327 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE 1 The following feedrate error can occur:
Speed command Gear Amplifier Motor Axis Detector

B-64303EN-1/02

(b) (a)

(a) With the speed command based on PMC axis control, a servo motor speed is specified as a feedrate. So, in order to specify a feedrate for an axis when a gear is used between the axis and servo motor, the desired feedrate for the axis needs to be converted to a servo motor speed. A feedrate must be specified using an integer, so that when it is converted to a servo motor speed, a rounding error can occur. (b) The minimum unit of feedrate is given by the expression below. An integer must be specified. No finer value may be specified. Fmin = P 1000 (mm/min) A calculation is made according to IS-B. Fmin: Minimum feedrate unit P : Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback A speed is specified according to the expression below. F = N P 1000 (mm/min) A calculation is made according to IS-B. F : Speed command (integer) N : Servo motor speed (min-1) P : Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback 2 In the speed command mode, a speed after acceleration/deceleration is specified for the servo control section. At this time, a position control loop gain is invalid. 3 Machine lock is disabled for the speed command. Speed command and position control
The PMC axis can be moved at a constant speed by performing the speed specification of PMC axis control through position loop control, that is, outputting the command pulses corresponding to a rotation speed to servo position control instead of outputting rotation speed data to the amplifier. Set the FS0i-C specification (set bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 to 1) and specify either speed loop control or position loop control is used for speed specification of PMC axis control using bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005. In speed specification, even for position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), only the speed specification parameter (No. 8028) and the linear acceleration/deceleration expanded parameters for PMC axis control speed command continuous feed (bit 0 (PTC) of parameter 12730 set to 1 and parameters No. 12731 to 12738) are used for acceleration/deceleration and normal acceleration/ deceleration is not performed. For position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), override is enabled. Set parameter No. 8040 for each axis to the amount of travel per revolution of the motor in terms of the minimum travel unit and convert speed commands to position commands using this value. As shown in the following block diagram, rotation speed data is not output to the amplifier and the command pulses corresponding to a rotation speed are output to servo position control.

- 1328 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Command pulse CMR Position control Servo amplifier Motor Detector

Block diagram

Related parameters Parameter EVP(No.8005#4) Parameter VCP(No.8007#2) Parameter (No.8040) Parameter PTC(No.12730) Parameter (No.12731) Parameter (No.12732) Parameter (No.12733) Parameter (No.12734) Parameter (No.12735) Parameter (No.12736) Parameter (No.12737) Parameter (No.12738)

NOTE 1 The control axis to be controlled needs to be set as a rotation axis in bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006. 2 When the FS0i-C specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and speed control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 0) are specified, coordinates are not updated. After execution, the following signal is set to 0 and the position is lost. - Reference position establishment signal ZRFx<F120> After execution, establish the reference position. 3 When the FS0i-C specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 1) are specified, coordinates are updated. 4 Only when the FS0i-C specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 1) are specified, feedrate override is enabled. (17) Torque control ( 11h )
This command performs a continuous feed operation based on torque control. With this command, position control on a PMC control axis can be switched to torque-based control. The servo motor outputs torque exactly as specified by the NC. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID31g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 G146 to 149 Data Torque control command (11h) Maximum feedrate Torque data

- 1329 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

Maximum feedrate Specify a maximum feedrate during torque control by using the unit min-1. When there is no torque generation target or the feedrate exceeds the specified value during torque control, the alarm (SV0422) is issued. When updating the maximum feedrate during torque control set in the torque control mode, set new data on the signals and reverse the logical state of the axis control command completion signal EBUFg.
Valid data range 1 to +32767 Unit min-1

NOTE When a linear motor is used, the unit of data is cm/min.


Torque data Specify torque data. Specify a positive value when the torque direction is positive. Specify a negative value when the torque direction is negative. When updating the torque data set in the torque control mode, set new data on the signals and reverse the logical state of the axis control command completion signal EBUFg.
Valid data range -999999999 to +999999999 (9-digit) Unit 0.00001 Nm

NOTE When a linear motor is used, the unit of data is 0.001N.


(1) Switching from position control to torque control a. Torque control axis setting Using bit 7 (TRQMx) of parameter No. 2007, set whether an axis is to be placed under torque control. Moreover, for an axis to be placed under torque control, set the torque constant parameter (No. 2105). The standard value of the motor is automatically set in this parameter when the power is turned on after setting bit 1 (DGPR) of parameter No. 2000 to 0. b. Position management in the torque control mode Whether to perform follow-up operation in the torque control mode can be chosen using bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803. If follow-up operation is performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), position control is exercised, regardless of whether the torque control mode is set. If follow-up operation is not performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 0), the operation depends on whether to update the error counter (bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805). If the error counter is updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 0), the alarm (SV0423) is issued when the value of the error counter exceeds the value set in parameter No. 1885. At the time of switching back to position control, follow-up operation is performed. If the error counter is not updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 1), no errors are accumulated, so that no servo alarm is issued. However, when the maximum allowable speed is exceeded, the alarm (SV0422) is issued. When this setting is selected, a reference position return operation is required to switch back to position control. Except when bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 is set to 0, and bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 is se to 1, the CNC always exercises position control even in the torque control mode. So, no reference position return operation needs to be performed even at the time of switching from torque control to position control.
- 1330 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Movement direction and speed in the torque control mode In the torque control mode, the output of torque specified by the axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g is attempted. However, when there is no torque generation target or the output has not reached the specified torque data yet, a movement is made in the same direction as in the case of position control according to the +/- sign of torque data. When the move speed exceeds the specified value, the alarm (SV0422) is issued. Timing of switching to torque control Switching to the torque control mode from another mode occurs when the position deviation is decreased to within the in-position width. In the torque control mode, the torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 1. (For details of this signal, see "Signal detail".)

c.

d.

e.

(2) Switching from torque control to position control (Torque control mode cancellation) When any of the following conditions occurs, the torque control mode ends: 1) When the reset signal ECLRg is set to 1 2) When a servo alarm is issued 3) When an OT alarm is issued with an axis placed under torque control 4) At the time of emergency stop 5) When servo-off occurs due to the servo-off signal ESOFg a. Timing of torque control cancellation The cancellation of torque control based on PMC axis control depends on whether to perform follow-up operation as determined by bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803. If follow-up operation is performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), the torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 0 to return to position control immediately when a cancellation condition occurs. The execution then stops when the position deviation is decreased to within the in-position width. If follow-up operation is not performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), the torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 0 when a cancellation condition occurs. If the error counter is updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 0), the control mode is switched back to position control when the position deviation is decreased to below the value of the cancellation limit parameter (No. 1886) after the start of follow-up operation. The execution then ends when the position deviation is decreased to within the in-position width. If the error counter is not updated (bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 is set to 1), a reference position return operation must be once performed to return to position control. b. Command after cancellation After the torque control mode is canceled, the control mode is switched to normal position control. In the torque control mode, position is controlled, so that machine coordinates are not shifted. However, a shift occurs between the workpiece coordinates and machine coordinates, so that the shift amount needs to be canceled, for example, by setting a workpiece coordinate system. The table below indicates the operations dependent on the settings of bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 and bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805.
TQF (No.1803#4) 1 0 TRE (No.1805#1) 0/1 0 Position control O O Operation in TRQ mode Position control is exercised. The alarm (SV0423) is issued when the error counter exceeds the value of parameter No. 1885. No SV alarm is issued. When the maximum allowable speed is exceeded, however, the alarm (SV0422) is issued. Reference position return(*) Not required Not required

Required

(*) Whether reference position return operation is required or not when the control mode has been switched from torque control back to position control
- 1331 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

1 2

3 4 5 6 7

CAUTION If a movement is made along a torque control axis in the torque control mode, set bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 for follow-up operation to 1. If a movement has been made along a torque control axis when torque control is canceled, a mechanical shock occurs at the time of return to position control. As a greater speed is used, a larger shock occurs. So, decelerate to a maximum allowable extent or stop before canceling torque control. When specifying torque control after completion of manual reference position return, set the feed direction selection signal to 0 or switch to a mode other than the manual reference position return mode beforehand. When the control axis selection signal EAXx is switched in the torque control mode, the alarm (SV0139) is issued. Before switching the control axis selection signal EAXx, cancel the torque control mode. In the torque control mode, do not detach a controlled axis with the control axis detach signal DTCHx or a setting parameter. When servo-off occurs, the torque control mode is canceled. However, the torque control state remains to be set. So, be sure to set the reset signal ECLRg to 1. Machine lock is disabled for the torque control command.

Related parameters Parameter TQF (No.1803#4) Parameter TRE (No.1805#1) Parameter (No.1885) Parameter (No.1886) Related signals Control axis detach signal DTCHx <G124>

(18) Auxiliary function 1 ( 12h ) (19) Auxiliary function 2 ( 14h ) (20) Auxiliary function 3 ( 15h )
Each of these commands performs the same operation as an auxiliary function (M code Function) of the CNC. Each auxiliary function of the PMC axis control cannot be commanded at the same time by two or more groups. For instance, it is not possible to command auxiliary function 1 from other groups while auxiliary function 1 is performed with group A. (It is possible to command auxiliary function 2 and 3 from other groups at that time.) Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 Data Auxiliary function command (12h for the auxiliary function 1 command) (14h for the auxiliary function 2 command) (15h for the auxiliary function 3 command) Auxiliary function code

EID0g to EID15g

G146 to 147

- 1332 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

Auxiliary function code Specify an auxiliary function code to be sent to the PMC with a binary code. With bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001, specify a 1-byte or 2-byte code on the signals EID0g to EID15g. Related parameters Parameter AUX(No.8001#6) Related signals Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg <G142.0> Auxiliary function strobe signal EMFg <F131.0> (for auxiliary function 1) Auxiliary function strobe signal EMF2g <F131.2> (for auxiliary function 2) Auxiliary function strobe signal EMF3g <F131.3> (for auxiliary function 3) Auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g <F132, F142>

(21) Machine coordinate system selection ( 20h )


This command performs the same operation as G53 of the CNC. This command performs rapid traverse in the absolute mode to a specified position in the machine coordinate system. So, this command can be used to move the tool to a specified machine-specific position such as a tool change position.

NOTE 1 When using this command with the T series, cancel tool offset and tool-nose radius compensation beforehand. 2 When using this command with the M series, cancel tool radius compensation, tool length compensation, and tool offset beforehand. 3 Before this command can be specified, a machine coordinate system must be set. So, a manual reference position return operation or reference position return operation based on G28 needs to be performed at least once after the power is turned on. When an absolute-position detector is attached, machine position data is stored, so that a reference position return operation is unnecessary after the power is turned on. 4 This command can be specified regardless of the setting (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136) of the workpiece coordinate system. 5 This command can be specified even if the workpiece coordinate system is not set (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1).
When the machine coordinate system selection (20h) is commanded with the PMC axis control for the rotary axis to which the roll-over function is valid (bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008 is set to 1), the direction of the rotation for an absolute command is as follows.
Bit 4 (R20x) of parameter No.8013 0 Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008 0 1 Direction of the shortest path Direction of sign of the amount of the movement to be made 1 Direction of the shortest path Direction of sign of the command value

NOTE When "1" is set to R20x, the direction of the rotation is the same as FS0i-C.
- 1333 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID31g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 G146 to 149 Data

B-64303EN-1/02

Machine coordinate system selection (20h) Rapid traverse rate Machine coordinate

Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Machine coordinate For a linear axis, specify a machine coordinate in the input unit for the axis as an absolute value with a binary code. Example: For absolute "10000"
Input unit Output unit inch mm 1.0000 25.400 mm inch 10.000 0.3937

For a rotation axis, a move direction can be selected with a parameter. Set bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1 to enable the rollover function. Then, select the sign of a specified value or the shortcut direction with bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008. Additionally, the amount of travel per revolution needs to be set in parameter No. 1260. Related parameters Parameter ROTx (No.1006#0) Parameter ROAx (No.1008#0) Parameter RABx (No.1008#1) Parameter (No.1260)

(22) Cutting feed-sec/block ( 21h )


This command performs cutting feed according to a specified period of time. Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID31g Signal address (group 1) G143.0 to 6 G144,145 G146 to 149 Data Cutting feed - sec/block command (21h) Cutting feed time Total moving distance

Cutting feed time Specify a period of time required for ending a block. [Unit of data] 0.1sec [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 Total moving distance The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.

NOTE Dry run and override are disabled, but the tool stops with an override of 0%.
Related parameters and related signals Basically same as for cutting feed -feed per minute

- 1334 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

Notes on the commands - Display of the remaining amount of travel


When the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external pulse synchronization commands (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) are specified, the remaining amount of travel indicates 0 at all times.

Command buffering

The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external pulse synchronization commands (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) are not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be checked at usual command specification time. When the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) is specified, the feedrate is changed to a specified value by specifying a value with EIFg and reversing EBUFg. (However, the direction remains unchanged.)

Acceleration/deceleration

The valid acceleration/deceleration type varies from one command to another. See Table 16.1.1 (g), "Valid acceleration/deceleration types (for each command)".
Table 16.1.1 (g) Valid acceleration/deceleration types (for each command) Acceleration/ Operation deceleration type Rapid traverse Reference position return 1st reference position return 2nd reference position return 3rd reference position return 4th reference position return Machine coordinate system selection Cutting feed - feed per minute Cutting feed - feed per revolution Skip Continuous feed External pulse -Position coder -1st manual handle -2nd manual handle -3rd manual handle Cutting feed - sec / block Speed command The settings of rapid traverse parameters of exponential type, linear type after interpolation, and bell-shaped type after interpolation used with the NC are valid. The settings of cutting parameters of exponential type, linear type after interpolation, and bell-shaped type after interpolation used with the NC are valid. However, when a value is set in parameter No. 8030 and No. 8031, these settings are valid instead of parameter No. No. 1622 and No.1623. Set linear-type parameters (No.8028 and No.8032).

Command

00h 05h 07h 08h 09h 0Ah 20h 01h 02h 03h 06h 0Bh 0Dh 0Eh 0Fh 21h 10h

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Immediate commands
Continuous feed(EC0g to EC6g : 06h) External pulse synchronization - Position coder (EC0g to EC6g : 0Bh) External pulse synchronization - 1st manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Dh) External pulse synchronization - 2nd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Eh) External pulse synchronization - 3rd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Fh) Speed command(EC0g to EC6g : 10h) Torque control (EC0g to EC6g : 11h)

The commands listed below are not buffered. The commands are referred to as immediate commands.

When an immediate command is prepared and the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed during execution of the same type of command, the command being executed is terminated, and the next command is executed immediately.
- 1335 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

Suppose, for example, that when continuous feed is being executed at 100 mm/min, another continuous feed command with only the feedrate changed to 300 mm/min is specified and the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed. The feedrate changes to 300 mm/min. To end an immediate command, input the reset signal ECLRg. When specifying a command other than the immediate commands, set the reset signal ECLRg to 1 and check that the command is terminated, then reverse EBUFg. (If both of the block being executed and a block being prepared are immediate commands, but the types of commands differ from each other, set the reset signal ECLRg to 1 once.)

Signal
Signal list (PMC axis control)
Number (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37) (38) Symbol EAX1 to EAX5 EC0g to EC6g EIF0g to EIF15g EID0g to EID31g EBUFg EBSYg ECLRg ESTPg ESBKg EMSBKg EM11g to EM48g EMFg EMF2g EMF3g EFINg ESOFg EMBUFg *EAXSL EINPg ECKZg EIALg EGENg EDENg EOTNg EOTPg *EFOV0 to *EFOV7 EOVC EROV1, EROV2 EDRN ERT EOV0 ESKIP EADEN1 to EADEN5 EABUFg EACNT1 to EACNT5 ELCKZg TRQM1 to TRQM5 HNDMP Signal name Controlled axis selection signals Axis control command signals Axis control feedrate signals Axis control data signals Axis control command read signal Axis control command read completion signal Reset signal Axis control temporary stop signal Block stop signal Block stop disable signal Auxiliary function code signals Auxiliary function strobe signal Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal Auxiliary function completion signal Servo-off signal Buffering disable signal Control axis selection status signal In-position signal Following zero checking signal Alarm signal Axis moving signal Auxiliary function executing signal Negative-direction overtravel signal Positive-direction overtravel signal Feedrate override signals Override cancellation signal Rapid traverse override signals Dry run signal Manual rapid traverse selection signal Override 0% signal Skip signal Distribution completion signals Buffer full signal Controlling signals Accumulated zero check signal Torque control mode signal Manual pulse magnification select signal

- 1336 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Symbol *+ED1 to *+ED5 *- ED1 to *- ED5 *+ED21 to *+ED25 *- ED21 to *- ED25 *+ED31 to *+ED35 *- ED31 to *- ED35 *HROV HROV0 to 6 *FHROV FHRO0 to 9 ROV1, 2 ZP1 ZP2 ZP3 ZP4 NDCAL1 to NDCAL5 Signal name External deceleration signal 1 External deceleration signal 2 External deceleration signal 3 1% rapid traverse override select signal 1% rapid traverse override signals 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal 0.1% rapid traverse override signals Rapid traverse override signals First reference position return completion signal Second reference position return completion signal Third reference position return completion signal Fourth reference position return completion signal A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal

Signal list (Related signals)


Number (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)

Signal Detail
Each signal is detailed below. "<>" in the title of each signal indicates a signal address.

Signal Detail (PMC axis control) (1) Controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 <G0136.0 to G136.4>
[Classification] Input signal, axis-by-axis signal [Function] Exercises PMC axis control. [Function] When the signal is set to "1", PMC axis control becomes valid. When the signal is set to "0", PMC axis control becomes invalid. Changing the setting of the control axis selection signal is possible only when control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to "0". Changing the setting when *EAXSL is set to "1" results in the issue of an alarm PS0139. Alarm signal EIALg is set to "1". When the parameter NCC (No. 8001#5), is set to "0", a command issued from the CNC is executed while the control axis selection signal is set to "1" and signal *EAXSL is set to "0". When the parameter is set to "1", the same attempt results in the issue of an alarm PS0139. If the control axis selection signal is set to "1" while the CNC is currently executing a command, an alarm is generated. While *EAXSL is set to "0", the status of alarm signal EIALg does not change to 1 when the control axis selection signal is set to 1 and an alarm PS0139 is generated. In this case, the axis can be controlled from the PMC, even when the CNC is in the alarm status.

NOTE After setting control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 to 1, it takes at least 8 msec before the PMC can issue commands to the CNC. (2) Axis control command signals EC0g to EC6g<G143.0 to 6, G155.0 to 6, G167.0 to 6, G179.0 to 6>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] One of the axis control block data signals [Operation] Specifies a type of command with 7 bits. For the meaning of each command, see Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list".
- 1337 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

(3) Axis control feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF15g <G144 to 145, G156 to 157, G168 to 169, G180 to 181>
[Classification] Input signal, Group-by-group signal [Function] One of the axis control block data signals [Operation] Two-byte command interface area Each command has a different function. For details, see Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list".

(4) Axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g <G146 to 149, G158 to 161, G170 to 173, G182 to 185>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] One of the axis control block data signals [Operation] Four-byte command interface area Each command has a different function. For details, see Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list".

(5) Axis control command read signal EBUFg <G142.7, G154.7, G166.7, G178.7>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Directs the CNC to read a block of command data for PMC axis control. [Operation] For the operation and procedure applicable when the level of this signal is changed from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0, see Table 16.1.1 (d), "Timing chart of command operation" and Table 16.1.1 (e), "Buffering status in PMC axis control".

(6) Axis control command read completion signal EBSYg <F130.7, F133.7, F136.7, F139.7>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data for PMC axis control and has stored the block in the input buffer. [Operation] For the operation and procedure applicable when the level of this signal is changed from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0, see Table 16.1.1 (d), "Timing chart of command operation" and Table 16.1.1 (e), "Buffering status in PMC axis control".

(7) Reset signal ECLRg <G142.6, G154.6, G166.6, G178.6>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Resets a PMC axis control command. [Operation] Resets the corresponding PMC-controlled axis. When this signal is set to "1", the following is performed: (1) When the tool is moving along the axis: decelerates and stops the tool. (2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation. (3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation. Simultaneously, all buffered commands are canceled. Any control command is ignored while this signal is set to "1". The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and external pulse synchronization command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) can be terminated by setting reset signal ECLRg to "1". When these commands are terminated, the servo motor decelerates and stops, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to "0", and the controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to "0". Confirm that the controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL has been set to "0" before issuing the next command. Do not set reset signal ECLRg to "0" until the controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL has been set to "0".

- 1338 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


The speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can also be terminated by setting the reset signal ECLRg to "1". When this command is terminated, the servo motor decelerates and stops, and the axis moving signal EGENg is set to "0". Confirm that the axis moving signal EGENg has been set to "0" before issuing the next command. Do not attempt to set the reset signal ECLRg to "0" until the axis moving signal EGENg has been set to "0".

(8) Axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg <G142.5, G154.5, G166.5, G178.5>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Temporarily stops a movement before the execution of a block is completed. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1", the following is performed: (1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the tool. (2) When the tool is in dwell: Stops the operation. (3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation when auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is input. The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to "0".

(9) Block stop signal ESBKg <G142.3, G154.3, G166.3, G178.3> (10)Block stop disable signal EMSBKg <G143.7,G155.7, G167.7, G179.7>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables a stop for each command block, or disables a stop for each block. [Operation] When block stop signal ESBKg is set to "1" during the execution of a command issued from the PMC, axis control is stopped after the block being executed is completed. When this signal is set to "0", the buffered command is executed. Block stop signal ESBKg is disabled when block stop disable signal EMSBKg is set to "1" for the block. Table 16.1.1 (h), "Timing chart of block stop related signals" shows the timing chart of command operation.
ESBKg (input) Command block (input) EBUFg (input) EBSYg (output) [1] [2] [3] More than 8 msec

Input buffer

[2]

Waiting buffer Executing buffer

[1] [1]

[2]

Table 16.1.1 (h)

Timing chart of block stop related signals

(11) Auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g <F132 to F142, F135 to F145, F138 to F148, F141 to F151>
[Classification] Output signal
- 1339 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


[Classification] Output signal

B-64303EN-1/02

(12) Auxiliary function strobe signal EMFg <F131.0, F134.0, F137.0, F140.0> (13) Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal EMF2g <F131.2, F134.2, F137.2, F140.2>
[Classification] Output signal

(14) Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal EMF3g <F131.3, F134.3, F137.3, F140.3>
[Classification] Output signal

(15) Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg <G142.0, G154.0, G166.0, G178.0>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Completes an auxiliary function [Operation] When an auxiliary function command (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is issued by the PMC, the auxiliary function code is specified in a byte (using signals EID0g to EID7g) or two bytes (using signals EID0g to EID15g), depending on the setting of bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001. The CNC sends the auxiliary function code specified in signals EID0g to EID7g and EID8g to EID15g to auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM28g and EM31g to EM48g and awaits the auxiliary function completion signal EFINg. When the auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is returned, the CNC starts executing the next block. The timings for sending the auxiliary function code signals and auxiliary function strobe signal, as well as for receiving the auxiliary function completion signal, are the same as those for the auxiliary functions (M functions) under the control of the CNC. See "Auxiliary function executing signal" for details.

(16) Servo-off signal ESOFg <G142.4, G154.4, G166.4, G178.4>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Changes the servo-off state. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1", the servo motor for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis is turned off (servo-off state). When this signal is set to "0", the servo motor is turned on. When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified, entering the servo-off state cancels torque control mode, but the torque control state remains set. In such a case, set reset signal ECLRg to "1".

(17) Buffering disable signal EMBUFg <G142.2, G154.2, G166.2, G178.2>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Changes the buffering disabled state. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1", commands from the PMC are not read while the executing, waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is set to "1" when any of these buffers contain a block, that block is executed but subsequent commands are read only when the buffers are all empty. To discriminate the buffering disabled condition, the CNC outputs the axis control command read completion signal (EBSYg) only when a command is read when all buffers are empty. Table 16.1.1 (i), "Timing chart of buffering related signals" shows the timing chart of command operation.

- 1340 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

EMBUFg (input) Command block (input) EBUFg (input) Command disabled EBSYg (output) Input buffer

[1]

[2]

Waiting buffer

Executing buffer

[1] Beginning of execution

End

[2] Beginning of execution

Table 16.1.1 (i)

Timing chart of buffering related signals

Buffering is disabled, regardless of the buffering disable signal EMBUFg, for the following commands: (1) Skip-feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 03h) (2) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 05h) (3) 1st reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 07h) (4) 2nd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 08h) (5) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 09h) (6) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 0Ah) (7) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g : 20h)

(18) Controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL <F129.7>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates whether PMC axis control is being exercised. [Operation] When this signal is set to "0", controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 can be changed. This signal is set to "1" in the following cases: (1) When the tool is moving along a PMC-controlled axis (2) When a block is being read into a buffer (3) When the servo-off signal ESOFg is set to "1" When this signal is set to "1", controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 cannot be changed. Any attempt to change these signals results in the output of an alarm PS0139. If an attempt to change signals EAX1 to EAX5 is made when servo-off signal ESOFg is "1", an alarm PS0139 occurs and cannot be released simply by setting reset signal ECLRg to "1". In such a case, restore signals EAX1 to EAX5 or set servo-off signal ESOFg to "0" before setting reset signal ECLRg to "1". When a command is issued for any of the groups A to D with PMC axis control, signal *EAXSL is set to "1" to disable axis selection. Thus, changing signals EAX1 to EAX5 results in the output of an alarm PS0139. For groups for which commands are not issued, however, axis selection is enabled if parameter DSL (No. 8004#5) is set accordingly.

(19) In-position signal EINPg <F130.0, F133.0, F136.0, F139.0>


[Classification] Output signal
- 1341 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

[Function] Indicates the in-position state. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the corresponding PMC-controlled axis is in the in-position state. When the tool is decelerated, in-position check is performed to disable the next command until the tool enters the in-position area. The in-position check, however, can be skipped using bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004 to reduce the cycle time.

NOTE When the axis is fed at a very low speed, the in -position signal might turn to "1". (20) Following zero checking signal ECKZg <F130.1, F133.1, F136.1, F139.1>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the following zero state. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when following zero check or in-position check is being performed for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis. The following zero state means that the acceleration/deceleration delay amount is zero.

(21) Alarm signal EIALg <F130.2, F133.2, F136.2, F139.2>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the alarm state related to PMC axis control. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when a servo alarm, overtravel alarm, or alarm PS0130 or PS0139 occurs for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis. This signal is set to "0" when the reset signal ECLRg is set to "1" after the alarm is released, as described below. Servo alarm Eliminate the cause of the alarm, then reset the CNC. Overtravel alarm Move the tool into the area within the stored stroke limit, then reset the CNC. The following commands can be used to move the tool into the area within the stored stroke limit during an overtravel alarm: (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g : 00h) (2) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 01h) (3) Cutting feed - feed per rotation(EC0g to EC6g : 02h) (4) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g : 06h) (5) External pulse synchronization - first manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Dh) (6) External pulse synchronization - second manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Eh) (7) External pulse synchronization - third manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Fh) Alarm (PS0130, PS0139) Reset the CNC. See "Alarms and messages" for details. Reset signal ECLRg cannot be used to reset the CNC in the above cases. Use the reset button on the setting panel, external reset signal ERS, or emergency stop signal *ESP. Even if an alarm occurs on an axis not related to the group, alarm signal EIALx does not generally change from 0 to 1.

(22) Axis moving signal EGENg <F130.4, F133.4, F136.4, F139.4>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the state of movement on an axis. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the tool is moving along the corresponding PMC-controlled axis according to commands such as rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) and cutting feed (EC0g to EC6g: 01h).
- 1342 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


When the dwell command (EC0g to EC6g: 04h) is specified, this signal remains to be set to 0.

NOTE This signal is set to "0" when distribution for the axis is completed (the signal is set to "0" during deceleration). (23) Auxiliary function executing signal EDENg <F130.3, F133.3, F136.3, F139.3>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the state of auxiliary function execution. [Operation] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is specified by the PMC, this signal is set to "1" during the period from when auxiliary function codes EID0g to EID15g are sent to auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g until the auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is returned. Table 16.1.1 (j), "Timing chart of auxiliary function related signals" shows the timing chart of command operation. TMF and TFIN in the table are set in parameter No. 3010 and No.3011.

Command block (input) EM11g to EM48g (output)

Auxiliary function command

Next command

TMF EMFg, EMF2g, EMF3g (output)

EFINg (input) EDENg (output)

TFIN

Table 16.1.1 (j)

Timing chart of auxiliary function related signals

(24) Negative-direction overtravel signal EOTNg <F130.6, F133.6, F136.6, F139.6> (25) Positive-direction overtravel signal EOTPg <F130.5, F133.5, F136.5, F139.5>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the overtravel state. [Operation] These signals are set to "1" when an overtravel alarm is detected. When the stroke limit in the negative direction is exceeded, signal EOTNg is set to "1". When the stroke limit in the positive direction is exceeded, signal EOTPg is set to "1". Simultaneously, alarm signal EIALg is set to "1". These signals are set to "0" when the overtravel alarm is released and reset signal ECLRg is set to "1". See "Alarm signal EIALg" for details of how to release an overtravel alarm.

- 1343 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

(26) Feedrate override signals *EFOV0g to *EFOV7g <G151 (, G163, G175, G187)>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Applies cutting override. [Operation] Like the CNC's feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV4, these signals can be used to select the override for the cutting feedrate, in steps of 1% from 0 to 254%, independently of the CNC using the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2). These signals form an eight-bit binary code and correspond to the override value as follows:
Override value =

2 Vi %
i i =0

Vi = 0 when signal *EFOVi is 1 Vi = 1 when signal *EFOVi is 0 That is, each signal has the following significance: *EFOV7 = 128%, *EFOV3 = 8% , *EFOV6 = 64%, *EFOV2 = 4% , *EFOV5 = 32%, *EFOV1 = 2% , *EFOV4 = 16%, *EFOV0 = 1% When all signals are set to "0", the override is regarded as being 0%, as well as when all signals are "1".

(27) Override cancellation signal EOVCg <G150.5 (G162.5, G174.5, G186.5)>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Disables override. [Operation] When override is enabled, independently of the CNC, by setting the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2), setting this signal to "1" fixes the cutting feed override to 100%. This signal does not affect the rapid traverse override. Bit 5 (IFV) of parameter No. 8005 is used to determine whether these signals are path-by-path signals or group-by-group signals. When the IFV parameter is set to 0, these signals are path-by-path signals. When the IFV parameter is set to 1, these signals are group-by-group signals.

(28) Rapid traverse override signals EROV1, EROV2 <Gn150.0,1>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Applies rapid traverse override. [Operation] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate, independently of the CNC, by setting of the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2).
Rapid traverse override signals EROV2 EROV1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 Override value 100% 50% 25% F0

F0 is the minimum feedrate specified with parameter No. 1421.

(29) Dry run signal EDRN <G150.7> (30) Manual rapid traverse selection signal ERT <G150.6>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Applies dry run, or chooses whether to apply dry run.

- 1344 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

[Operation] These signals can be used to perform dry run or manual rapid traverse, independently of the CNC, by setting the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2). When the dry run signal EDRN is set to "1", the specified rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate are ignored and the tool moves at the dry run speed (set in parameter No. 1410) multiplied by the specified override. Parameter RDE (No. 8001#3) can be used to specify whether to enable or disable dry run for rapid traverse. When the manual rapid traverse selection signal ERT is set to "1" during dry run, the tool moves at the rapid traverse rate for rapid traverse and at the maximum jog feedrate for cutting feed. When the signal is set to "0", the tool moves at the jog feedrate. When the dry run signal EDRN is set to "0", the specified rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate is restored.
Manual rapid traverse select signal 1 0 Command from PMC At rapid traverse At Cutting feed Rapid traverse rate Dry run feed JV * Cutting feedrate Dry run feed rate JV

Can also be set to the rapid traverse rate with the parameter RDE (No. 8001#3).

(31) Override 0% signal EOV0 <F129.5>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates whether the override value is 0%. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the feedrate override is 0%.

(32) Skip signal ESKIP<X004.6>, ESKIP#2<X013.6>


[Classification] Direct input signal [Function] Applies skip. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1" during execution of the skip cutting command, the block being executed is immediately stopped and the next block is executed. This signal is unique during PMC axis control. Parameter SKE (No. 8001#7) can be used to select whether to use signal SKIP, which is the common skip signal for the PMC and CNC, or PMC-specific skip signal ESKIP. This skip signal is valid for those axes that are assigned to path 1 to path 2. For those axes that are assigned to path 1, ESKIP (X004.6) is valid. For those axes that are assigned to path 2, ESKIP#2 (X013.6) is valid.

(33) Distribution completion signals EADEN1 to EADEN5<F112.0 to 4>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the state of distribution based on PMC axis control. [Operation] These signals are set to "0" when the tool is moving with a command from the PMC. The signals are set to "1" when the tool is not moving, except when it is stopped by an axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg during the execution of a move command.

(34) Buffer full signal EABUFg <F131.1, F134.1, F137.1, F140.1>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the PMC axis control command buffering state. [Operation] When the group input buffer holds a command block, this signal is set to 1. When no command is buffered, this signal is set to 0.

(35) Controlling signals EACNT1 to EACNT5<F182.0 to 4>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates that PMC axis control is being exercised. [Operation] When the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 1, the bit signal corresponding to an axis being controlled is set to 1.
- 1345 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


A bit signal is set to 1 also when the servo-off signal ESOFg is set to 1.

B-64303EN-1/02

(36) Accumulated zero check signal ELCKZg <G142.1, G154.1, G166.1, G178.1>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Makes an accumulated zero check. [Operation] Setting this signal to 1 causes an accumulated zero check between blocks to be made at a subsequent cutting feed command. The accumulated zero state means that the acceleration/deceleration delay amount is zero. (1) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) (2) Cutting feed -feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h) (3) Cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g : 21h) This signal can be used, for example, with the chopping function.

(37) Torque control mode signal TRQM1 to TRQM5 <F190>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates an axis in the torque control mode.

(38) Manual pulse magnification select signal HNDMP<G088.3>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] In external pulse synchronization of PMC axis control, the valid range of an external pulse set to the axis control feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF15g is changed. [Operation] When this signal is set to 0, use the higher bits (EIF8g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF7g) to specify the fractional part. The valid range of an external pulse is 1/256 to 127. When this signal is set to 1, use the higher bits (EIF5g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF4g) to specify the fractional part. The valid range of an external pulse is 1/32 to 1023.

Signal detail (Related signals)


The signals related to PMC axis control are detailed below. The [Function] field and [Operation] field provide descriptions related to PMC axis control. For the general functions of the signals, see the description of each signal.
(1) External deceleration signals 1 *+ED1 to *+ED5<G118.0 to 4>, *-ED1 to *-ED5<G120.0 to 4> (2) External deceleration signals 2 *+ED21 to *+ED25<G101.0 to 4>, *-ED21 to *-ED25<G103.0 to 4> (3) External deceleration signals 3 *+ED31 to *+ED35<G107.0 to 4>, *-ED31 to *-ED35<G109.0 to 4>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Decelerates the movement along a specified axis to a parameter-set feedrate. [Operation] While a signal is set to 0 for an axis, the feedrate along the axis in the specified direction can be forcibly decelerated to a certain feedrate (external deceleration feedrate) set by a parameter (dependent on the type of command). If the feedrate is lower than the external deceleration feedrate, however, the specified feedrate continues to be used. The feedrate for other axes with these signals not set to 0 is not affected. For details, refer to the Subsection 7.1.9, External Deceleration. A signal is available for each controlled axis and for each direction. Each signal name includes the sign + or - for direction indication, and the number at the end of each signal name indicates a controlled axis number. These signals are shared by the CNC.

- 1346 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


* x ED y z z 1: 2: 5:

Feed along the first axis is decelerated. Feed along the second axis is decelerated. : Feed along the fifth axis is decelerated.

y None: Follows external deceleration setting 1. 2: Follows external deceleration setting 2. 3: Follows external deceleration setting 3. x + : Feed in the positive direction is decelerated. - : Feed in the negative direction is decelerated. When any of the following axis control command is specified while the parameter EDC (No. 8005#0) is held at 1, the external deceleration function becomes effective: (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g : 00h) (2) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 01h) (3) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 05h) (4) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g : 06h) (5) First reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 07h) (6) Second reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 08h) (7) Third reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 09h) (8) Fourth reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 0Ah) (9) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g : 20h) (10) Cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g : 21h) For each command above, the external deceleration feedrate settings for axis-by-axis rapid traverse (parameter No. 1427, No. 1441, and No. 1444) are valid. To cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) and cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g: 21h) as well, the settings for rapid traverse are applied instead of the external deceleration feedrate settings for cutting feed (parameter No. 1426, No. 1440, and No. 1443).

(4) 1% rapid traverse override select signal *HROV <G96.7>


[Classification] Input signal

(5) 1% rapid traverse override signal HROV0 to 6 <G96.0 to 6>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables override to be applied in steps of 1%. Shared by the CNC. [Operation] If the 1% rapid traverse override select signal *HROV <G96.7> is set to 1 when bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 0, rapid traverse override can be specified in steps of 1% by using the 1% rapid traverse override signals HROV0 to HROV6 <G96.0 to 6>.

(6) 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal


[Classification] Input signal

*FHROV <G353.7>

(7) 0.1% rapid traverse override signal FHRO0 to 9 <G352.0 to 7, G353.0 to 1>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] An override can be applied in steps of 0.1%. This signal is used with the CNC as well.
- 1347 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

[Operation] If bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 0, the 0.1% rapid traverse override signals FHRO0 to FHRO9 <G352.0 to 7, G353.0 to 1> enable a rapid traverse override to be specified in steps of 0.1% when the 1% rapid traverse override select signal *HROV <G96.7> and the 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal *FHROV <G353.7> are set to 1.

(8) Rapid traverse override signal ROV1 <G14.0>, ROV2 <G14.1>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] Overrides the rapid traverse rate. Shared by the CNC. [Operation] This signal is a two-bit code signal, and sets an override value as indicated below.
Rapid traverse ROV2 0 0 1 1

override signal
ROV1 0 1 0 1

Override value 100% 50% 25% F0 (parameter (No.1421))

(9) First reference position return completion signals ZP1 to ZP5 <F94.0 - 4> (10) Second reference position return completion signals ZP21 to ZP25 <F96.0 - 4> (11) Third reference position return completion signals ZP31 to ZP35 <F98.0 - 4> (12) Fourth reference position return completion signals ZP41 to ZP45 <F100.0 - 4>
[Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts that the tool is at the reference position on a controlled axis. Shared by the CNC. [Operation] The number at the end of a signal name indicates the number of a controlled axis. Each of these signals is set to 1 when reference position return is completed, and the tool enters the in-position area. Each of these signals is set to 0 when a movement is made from the reference position, an emergence stop occurs, or a servo alarm is issued.

(13) A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal NDCAL1 to NDCAL5 <G202.0 to 4>>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] Does not output the A/B phase detector hard disconnection alarm. [Operation] While this signal is set to 1, the A/B phase detector hard disconnection alarm is not output during speed specification based on PMC axis control. Table 16.1.1 (k), "Timing chart of A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal" shows a timing chart.
A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore parameter HNG (No.2017#4) NDCALx (input) Even if hard disconnection alarm is issued, servo soft does not notify NC.

Hard disconnection Occurs at high speed Reset by ALR

Table 16.1.1 (k)

Timing chart of A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal

- 1348 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE 1 Change the level of this signal from 1 to 0 before switching from a speed command to a position command. 2 After switching from a speed command to a position command, be sure to perform a manual reference position return operation before making a movement on the axis. 3 This function cannot be used when an absolute-position detector is attached. 4 To enable this signal, set bit 4 of parameter No. 2017 to 1.

Signal address - Signals for PMC axis control DI CNC


The signals below are direct signals for PMC axis control.
#7 X004 #7 X013 #6 ESKIP #6 ESKIP
#2

#5 #5

#4 #4

#3 #3

#2 #2

#1 #1

#0 #0

PMC CNC
The signals are listed below.
#7 G088 #7 G136 #7 G1136 #7 G202 #7 G1202 #7 G150 G151 EDRN#1 #7 *EFOV7#1 #7 G1150 G1151 EDRN#2 #7 *EFOV7#2 #6 ERT#1 #6 *EFOV6#1 #6 ERT#2 #6 *EFOV6#2 #5 EOVC#1 #5 *EFOV5#1 #5 EOVC#2 #5 *EFOV5#2 #4 *EFOV4#2 #3 *EFOV3#2 #2 *EFOV2#2 #4 *EFOV4#1 #4 #3 *EFOV3#1 #3 #2 *EFOV2#1 #2 #6 #5 #6 #5 #6 #5 #6 #5 #4 EAX5#1 #4 EAX5#2 #4 NDCAL5 #4 NDCAL13 #4 #6 #5 #4 #3 HNDMP #3 EAX4#1 #3 EAX4#2 #3 NDCAL4 #3 NDCAL12 #3 #2 EAX3#1 #2 EAX3#2 #2 NDCAL3 #2 NDCAL11 #2 #1 EAX2#1 #1 EAX2#2 #1 NDCAL2 #1 NDCAL10 #1 EROV2#1 #1 *EFOV1#1 #1 EROV2#2 #1 *EFOV1#2 #0 EAX1#1 #0 EAX1#2 #0 NDCAL1 #0 NDCAL9 #0 EROV1#1 #0 *EFOV0#1 #0 EROV1#2 #0 *EFOV0#2 #2 #1 #0

- 1349 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


The signals in groups A to D of the first path are shown below.
#7 G142 G143 G144 G145 G146 G147 G148 G149 G150 #7 G151 #6 EBUFA#1 #7 EMSBKA#1 #7 EIF7A#1 #7 EIF15A#1 #7 EID7A#1 #7 EID15A#1 #7 EID23A#1 #7 EID31A#1 #7 #6 ECLRA#1 #6 EC6A#1 #6 EIF6A#1 #6 EIF14A#1 #6 EID6A#1 #6 EID14A#1 #6 EID22A#1 #6 EID30A#1 #6 #5 ESTPA#1 #5 EC5A#1 #5 EIF5A#1 #5 EIF13A#1 #5 EID5A#1 #5 EID13A#1 #5 EID21A#1 #5 EID29A#1 #5 EOVCA#1 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #4 ESOFA#1 #4 EC4A#1 #4 EIF4A#1 #4 EIF12A#1 #4 EID4A#1 #4 EID12A#1 #4 EID20A#1 #4 EID28A#1 #4 #3 ESBKA#1 #3 EC3A#1 #3 EIF3A#1 #3 EIF11A#1 #3 EID3A#1 #3 EID11A#1 #3 EID19A#1 #3 EID27A#1 #3 #2 EMBUFA#1 #2 EC2A#1 #2 EIF2A#1 #2 EIF10A#1 #2 EID2A#1 #2 EID10A#1 #2 EID18A#1 #2 EID26A#1 #2 #1

B-64303EN-1/02

#0 EFINA#1 #0 EC0A#1 #0 EIF0A#1 #0 EIF8A#1 #0 EID7A#1 #0 EID8A#1 #0 EID16A#1 #0 EID24A#1 #0 #0

ELCKZA#1 #1 EC1A#1 #1 EIF1A#1 #1 EIF9A#1 #1 EID1A#1 #1 EID9A#1 #1 EID17A#1 #1 EID25A#1 #1

For group A For group B

*EFOV7A#1 *EFOV6A#1 *EFOV5A#1 *EFOV4A#1 *EFOV3A#1 *EFOV2A#1 *EFOV1A#1 *EFOV0A#1 #7 #6 ECLRB#1 #6 EC6B#1 #6 EIF6B#1 #6 EIF14B#1 #6 EID6B#1 #6 EID14B#1 #6 EID22B#1 #6 EID30B#1 #6 #6 #5 ESTPB#1 #5 EC5B#1 #5 EIF5B#1 #5 EIF13B#1 #5 EID5B#1 #5 EID13B#1 #5 EID21B#1 #5 EID29B#1 #5 EOVCB#1 #7 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 *EFOV7B#1 *EFOV6B#1 *EFOV5B#1 *EFOV4B#1 *EFOV3B#1 *EFOV2B#1 *EFOV1B#1 *EFOV0B#1 #4 ESOFB#1 #4 EC4B#1 #4 EIF4B#1 #4 EIF12B#1 #4 EID4B#1 #4 EID12B#1 #4 EID20B#1 #4 EID28B#1 #4 #3 ESBKB#1 #3 EC3B#1 #3 EIF3B#1 #3 EIF11B#1 #3 EID3B#1 #3 EID11B#1 #3 EID19B#1 #3 EID27B#1 #3 #2 EMBUFB#1 #2 EC2B#1 #2 EIF2B#1 #2 EIF10B#1 #2 EID2B#1 #2 EID10B#1 #2 EID18B#1 #2 EID26B#1 #2 #1 ELCKZB#1 #1 EC1B#1 #1 EIF1B#1 #1 EIF9B#1 #1 EID1B#1 #1 EID9B#1 #1 EID17B#1 #1 EID25B#1 #1 #0 EFINB#1 #0 EC0B#1 #0 EIF0B#1 #0 EIF8B#1 #0 EID7B#1 #0 EID8B#1 #0 EID16B#1 #0 EID24B#1 #0

G154 G155 G156 G157 G158 G159 G160 G161 G162 G163

EBUFB#1 #7 EMSBKB#1 #7 EIF7B#1 #7 EIF15B#1 #7 EID7B#1 #7 EID15B#1 #7 EID23B#1 #7 EID31B#1 #7

- 1350 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


#7 #6 ECLRC#1 #6 EC6C#1 #6 EIF6C#1 #6 EIF14C#1 #6 EID6C#1 #6 EID14C#1 #6 EID22C#1 #6 EID30C#1 #6 #6 #5 ESTPC#1 #5 EC5C#1 #5 EIF5C#1 #5 EIF13C#1 #5 EID5C#1 #5 EID13C#1 #5 EID21C#1 #5 EID29C#1 #5 EOVCC#1 #7 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 *EFOV7C#1 *EFOV6C#1 *EFOV5C#1 *EFOV4C#1 *EFOV3C#1 *EFOV2C#1 *EFOV1C#1 *EFOV0C#1 #4 ESOFC#1 #4 EC4C#1 #4 EIF4C#1 #4 EIF12C#1 #4 EID4C#1 #4 EID12C#1 #4 EID20C#1 #4 EID28C#1 #4 #3 ESBKC#1 #3 EC3C#1 #3 EIF3C#1 #3 EIF11C#1 #3 EID3C#1 #3 EID11C#1 #3 EID19C#1 #3 EID27C#1 #3 #2 EMBUFC#1 #2 EC2C#1 #2 EIF2C#1 #2 EIF10C#1 #2 EID2C#1 #2 EID10C#1 #2 EID18C#1 #2 EID26C#1 #2 #1 ELCKZC#1 #1 EC1C#1 #1 EIF1C#1 #1 EIF9C#1 #1 EID1C#1 #1 EID9C#1 #1 EID17C#1 #1 EID25C#1 #1 #0 EFINC#1 #0 EC0C#1 #0 EIF0C#1 #0 EIF8C#1 #0 EID7C#1 #0 EID8C#1 #0 EID16C#1 #0 EID24C#1 #0

G166 G167 G168 G169 G170 G171 G172 G173 G174 G175

EBUFC#1 #7 EMSBKC#1 #7 EIF7C#1 #7 EIF15C#1 #7 EID7C#1 #7 EID15C#1 #7 EID23C#1 #7 EID31C#1 #7

For group C For group D

#7 G178 G179 G180 G181 G182 G183 G184 G185 G186 #7 G187 EBUFD#1 #7 EMSBKD#1 #7 EIF7D#1 #7 EIF15D#1 #7 EID7D#1 #7 EID15D#1 #7 EID23D#1 #7 EID31D#1 #7

#6 ECLRD#1 #6 EC6D#1 #6 EIF6D#1 #6 EIF14D#1 #6 EID6D#1 #6 EID14D#1 #6 EID22D#1 #6 EID30D#1 #6 #6

#5 ESTPD#1 #5 EC5D#1 #5 EIF5D#1 #5 EIF13D#1 #5 EID5D#1 #5 EID13D#1 #5 EID21D#1 #5 EID29D#1 #5 EOVCD#1 #5

#4 ESOFD#1 #4 EC4D#1 #4 EIF4D#1 #4 EIF12D#1 #4 EID4D#1 #4 EID12D#1 #4 EID20D#1 #4 EID28D#1 #4 #4

#3 ESBKD#1 #3 EC3D#1 #3 EIF3D#1 #3 EIF11D#1 #3 EID3D#1 #3 EID11D#1 #3 EID19D#1 #3 EID27D#1 #3 #3

#2 EMBUFD#1 #2 EC2D#1 #2 EIF2D#1 #2 EIF10D#1 #2 EID2D#1 #2 EID10D#1 #2 EID18D#1 #2 EID26D#1 #2 #2

#1 ELCKZD#1 #1 EC1D#1 #1 EIF1D#1 #1 EIF9D#1 #1 EID1D#1 #1 EID9D#1 #1 EID17D#1 #1 EID25D#1 #1 #1

#0 EFIND#1 #0 EC0D#1 #0 EIF0D#1 #0 EIF8D#1 #0 EID7D#1 #0 EID8D#1 #0 EID16D#1 #0 EID24D#1 #0 #0

*EFOV7D#1 *EFOV6D#1 *EFOV5D#1 *EFOV4D#1 *EFOV3D#1 *EFOV2D#1 *EFOV1D#1 *EFOV0D#1

- 1351 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


The signals in groups A to D of the second path (T series (2-path control)) are shown below.
#7 G1142 G1143 G1144 G1145 EBUFA#2 #7 EMSBKA#2 #7 EIF7A#2 #7 EIF15A#2 #7 G1146 G1147 G1148 G1149 G1150 #7 G1151 #6 EID7A#2 #7 EID15A#2 #7 EID23A#2 #7 EID31A#2 #7 #6 ECLRA#2 #6 EC6A#2 #6 EIF6A#2 #6 EIF14A#2 #6 EID6A#2 #6 EID14A#2 #6 EID22A#2 #6 EID30A#2 #6 #5 ESTPA#2 #5 EC5A#2 #5 EIF5A#2 #5 EIF13A#2 #5 EID5A#2 #5 EID13A#2 #5 EID21A#2 #5 EID29A#2 #5 EOVCA#2 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #4 ESOFA#2 #4 EC4A#2 #4 EIF4A#2 #4 EIF12A#2 #4 EID4A#2 #4 EID12A#2 #4 EID20A#2 #4 EID28A#2 #4 #3 ESBKA#2 #3 EC3A#2 #3 EIF3A#2 #3 EIF11A#2 #3 EID3A#2 #3 EID11A#2 #3 EID19A#2 #3 EID27A#2 #3 #2 EMBUFA#2 #2 EC2A#2 #2 EIF2A#2 #2 EIF10A#2 #2 EID2A#2 #2 EID10A#2 #2 EID18A#2 #2 EID26A#2 #2 #1

B-64303EN-1/02

#0 EFINA#2 #0 EC0A#2 #0 EIF0A#2 #0 EIF8A#2 #0 EID7A#2 #0 EID8A#2 #0 EID16A#2 #0 EID24A#2 #0 #0

ELCKZA#2 #1 EC1A#2 #1 EIF1A#2 #1 EIF9A#2 #1 EID1A#2 #1 EID9A#2 #1 EID17A#2 #1 EID25A#2 #1

For group A For group B

*EFOV7A#2 *EFOV6A#2 *EFOV5A#2 *EFOV4A#2 *EFOV3A#2 *EFOV2A#2 *EFOV1A#2 *EFOV0A#2

#7 G1154 G1155 G1156 G1157 G1158 G1159 G1160 G1161 G1162 #7 G1163 EBUFB#2 #7 EMSBKB#2 #7 EIF7B#2 #7 EIF15B#2 #7 EID7B#2 #7 EID15B#2 #7 EID23B#2 #7 EID31B#2 #7

#6 ECLRB#2 #6 EC6B#2 #6 EIF6B#2 #6 EIF14B#2 #6 EID6B#2 #6 EID14B#2 #6 EID22B#2 #6 EID30B#2 #6 #6

#5 ESTPB#2 #5 EC5B#2 #5 EIF5B#2 #5 EIF13B#2 #5 EID5B#2 #5 EID13B#2 #5 EID21B#2 #5 EID29B#2 #5 EOVCB#2 #5

#4 ESOFB#2 #4 EC4B#2 #4 EIF4B#2 #4 EIF12B#2 #4 EID4B#2 #4 EID12B#2 #4 EID20B#2 #4 EID28B#2 #4 #4

#3 ESBKB#2 #3 EC3B#2 #3 EIF3B#2 #3 EIF11B#2 #3 EID3B#2 #3 EID11B#2 #3 EID19B#2 #3 EID27B#2 #3 #3

#2 EMBUFB#2 #2 EC2B#2 #2 EIF2B#2 #2 EIF10B#2 #2 EID2B#2 #2 EID10B#2 #2 EID18B#2 #2 EID26B#2 #2 #2

#1 ELCKZB#2 #1 EC1B#2 #1 EIF1B#2 #1 EIF9B#2 #1 EID1B#2 #1 EID9B#2 #1 EID17B#2 #1 EID25B#2 #1 #1

#0 EFINB#2 #0 EC0B#2 #0 EIF0B#2 #0 EIF8B#2 #0 EID7B#2 #0 EID8B#2 #0 EID16B#2 #0 EID24B#2 #0 #0

*EFOV7B#2 *EFOV6B#2 *EFOV5B#2 *EFOV4B#2 *EFOV3B#2 *EFOV2B#2 *EFOV1B#2 *EFOV0B#2

- 1352 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


#7 #6 ECLRC#2 #6 EC6C#2 #6 EIF6C#2 #6 EIF14C#2 #6 EID6C#2 #6 EID14C#2 #6 EID22C#2 #6 EID30C#2 #6 #6 #5 ESTPC#2 #5 EC5C#2 #5 EIF5C#2 #5 EIF13C#2 #5 EID5C#2 #5 EID13C#2 #5 EID21C#2 #5 EID29C#2 #5 EOVCC#2 #7 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 *EFOV7C#2 *EFOV6C#2 *EFOV5C#2 *EFOV4C#2 *EFOV3C#2 *EFOV2C#2 *EFOV1C#2 *EFOV0C#2 #4 ESOFC#2 #4 EC4C#2 #4 EIF4C#2 #4 EIF12C#2 #4 EID4C#2 #4 EID12C#2 #4 EID20C#2 #4 EID28C#2 #4 #3 ESBKC#2 #3 EC3C#2 #3 EIF3C#2 #3 EIF11C#2 #3 EID3C#2 #3 EID11C#2 #3 EID19C#2 #3 EID27C#2 #3 #2 EMBUFC#2 #2 EC2C#2 #2 EIF2C#2 #2 EIF10C#2 #2 EID2C#2 #2 EID10C#2 #2 EID18C#2 #2 EID26C#2 #2 #1 ELCKZC#2 #1 EC1C#2 #1 EIF1C#2 #1 EIF9C#2 #1 EID1C#2 #1 EID9C#2 #1 EID17C#2 #1 EID25C#2 #1 #0 EFINC#2 #0 EC0C#2 #0 EIF0C#2 #0 EIF8C#2 #0 EID7C#2 #0 EID8C#2 #0 EID16C#2 #0 EID24C#2 #0

G1166 G1167 G1168 G1169 G1170 G1171 G1172 G1173 G1174 G1175

EBUFC#2 #7 EMSBKC#2 #7 EIF7C#2 #7 EIF15C#2 #7 EID7C#2 #7 EID15C#2 #7 EID23C#2 #7 EID31C#2 #7

For group C For group D

#7 G1178 G1179 G1180 G1181 G1182 G1183 G1184 G1185 G1186 #7 G1187 EBUFD#2 #7 EMSBKD#2 #7 EIF7D#2 #7 EIF15D#2 #7 EID7D#2 #7 EID15D#2 #7 EID23D#2 #7 EID31D#2 #7

#6 ECLRD#2 #6 EC6D#2 #6 EIF6D#2 #6 EIF14D#2 #6 EID6D#2 #6 EID14D#2 #6 EID22D#2 #6 EID30D#2 #6 #6

#5 ESTPD#2 #5 EC5D#2 #5 EIF5D#2 #5 EIF13D#2 #5 EID5D#2 #5 EID13D#2 #5 EID21D#2 #5 EID29D#2 #5 EOVCD#2 #5

#4 ESOFD#2 #4 EC4D#2 #4 EIF4D#2 #4 EIF12D#2 #4 EID4D#2 #4 EID12D#2 #4 EID20D#2 #4 EID28D#2 #4 #4

#3 ESBKD#2 #3 EC3D#2 #3 EIF3D#2 #3 EIF11D#2 #3 EID3D#2 #3 EID11D#2 #3 EID19D#2 #3 EID27D#2 #3 #3

#2 EMBUFD#2 #2 EC2D#2 #2 EIF2D#2 #2 EIF10D#2 #2 EID2D#2 #2 EID10D#2 #2 EID18D#2 #2 EID26D#2 #2 #2

#1 ELCKZD#2 #1 EC1D#2 #1 EIF1D#2 #1 EIF9D#2 #1 EID1D#2 #1 EID9D#2 #1 EID17D#2 #1 EID25D#2 #1 #1

#0 EFIND#2 #0 EC0D#2 #0 EIF0D#2 #0 EIF8D#2 #0 EID7D#2 #0 EID8D#2 #0 EID16D#2 #0 EID24D#2 #0 #0

*EFOV7D#2 *EFOV6D#2 *EFOV5D#2 *EFOV4D#2 *EFOV3D#2 *EFOV2D#2 *EFOV1D#2 *EFOV0D#2

- 1353 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Related signals DI CNC


The signals below are direct signals related to PMC axis control.
#7 X004 X011 X013 SKIP #7 SKIP #7 SKIP
#2 #3

B-64303EN-1/02

#6 #6 #6

#5 #5 #5

#4 #4 #4

#3 #3 #3

#2 #2 #2

#1 #1 #1

#0 #0 #0

PMCCNC
The signals below are Input signals related to PMC axis control.
#7 G014 G096 G101 #7 G103 #7 G106 #7 G107 #7 G109 #7 G118 #7 G120 #7 G202 G352 G353 #7 FHROV #7 *FHROV #6 FHRO6 #6 #5 FHRO5 #5 #6 #5 #6 #5 #6 #5 #6 #5 #6 #5 #6 #5 #6 #5 #7 *HROV #7 #6 HROV6 #6 #5 HROV5 #5 #4 HROV4 #4 *+ED25 #4 *-ED25 #4 MI5 #4 *+ED35 #4 *-ED35 #4 *+ED5 #4 *-ED5 #4 NDCAL5 #4 FHRO4 #4 #3 HROV3 #3 *+ED24 #3 *-ED24 #3 MI4 #3 *+ED34 #3 *-ED34 #3 *+ED4 #3 *-ED4 #3 NDCAL4 #3 FHRO3 #3 #2 HROV2 #2 *+ED23 #2 *-ED23 #2 MI3 #2 *+ED33 #2 *-ED33 #2 *+ED3 #2 *-ED3 #2 NDCAL3 #2 FHRO2 #2 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ROV2 #1 HROV1 #1 *+ED22 #1 *-ED22 #1 MI2 #1 *+ED32 #1 *-ED32 #1 *+ED2 #1 *-ED2 #1 NDCAL2 #1 FHRO1 #1 FHRO9 #0 ROV1 #0 HROV0 #0 *+ED21 #0 *-ED21 #0 MI1 #0 *+ED31 #0 *-ED31 #0 *+ED1 #0 *-ED1 #0 NDCAL1 #0 FHRO0 #0 FHRO8

CNCPMC
The signals below are output signals related to PMC axis control.
#7 F094 F096 F098 F100 ZP8 #7 ZP28 #7 ZP38 #7 ZP48 #6 ZP7 #6 ZP27 #6 ZP37 #6 ZP47 #5 ZP6 #5 ZP26 #5 ZP36 #5 ZP46 #4 ZP5 #4 ZP25 #4 ZP35 #4 ZP45 #3 ZP4 #3 ZP24 #3 ZP34 #3 ZP44 #2 ZP3 #2 ZP23 #2 ZP33 #2 ZP43 #1 ZP2 #1 ZP22 #1 ZP32 #1 ZP42 #0 ZP1 #0 ZP21 #0 ZP31 #0 ZP41

- 1354 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 INI #1 #0

Parameter
0000

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #2 INI Unit of input 0: In metrics 1: In inches
#7 0012 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MIRx

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit axis #0 MIRx Mirror image for each axis 0: Mirror image is off. (Normal) 1: Mirror image is on. (Mirror)
#7 1001 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 INM

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis 0: In mm (metric system machine) 1: In inches (inch system machine)
#7 1005 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 DLZx #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
#7 1006 #6 #5 ZMIx #4 #3 DIAx #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
- 1355 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


#3 DIAx The move command for each axis is based on: 0: Radius specification 1: Diameter specification

B-64303EN-1/02

NOTE For the FS0i-C, one of the following changes is required besides setting bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 so that the axis based on diameter specification achieves the specified amount of movement. Halve the command multiplication (the detection unit is not changed). Halve the detection unit and double the flexible feed gear (DMR). For the FS0i-D, only if bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 is set, the CNC halves the specified pulse. Accordingly, the above changes are not required (when the detection unit is not changed). To halve the detection unit, double both CMR and DMR.
#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is: 0: + direction 1: - direction
#7 1008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 RABx #0 ROAx

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0 ROAx The roll-over function of a rotation axis is 0: Invalid 1: Valid

NOTE ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for which ROTx, #0 of parameter No.1006, is set to 1)
#1 RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction 0: In which the distance to the target is shorter. 1: Specified by the sign of command value.

NOTE RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.


#7 1201 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ZPR

[Input type] Parameter input


- 1356 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

[Data type] Bit path #0 ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed 0: Not set automatically 1: Set automatically

NOTE ZPR is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is not used (when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1). When the workpiece coordinate system is used, the workpiece coordinate system is established based on the workpiece origin offset (parameters No. 1220 to 1226) during a manual reference position return, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
1241 1242 1243 Coordinate value of the second reference position in the machine coordinate system Coordinate value of the third reference position in the machine coordinate system Coordinate value of the fourth reference position in the machine coordinate system

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real axis mm, inch, degree (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) Set the coordinate values of the second to fourth reference positions in the machine coordinate system.
Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed

1250

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real axis mm, inch, degree (input unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) Set the coordinate system of the reference position on each axis to be used for setting a coordinate system automatically.
The shift amount per one rotation of a rotation axis

1260

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] Parameter input Real axis Degree Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

- 1357 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) Set the shift amount per one rotation of a rotation axis. For the rotation axis used for cylindrical interpolation, set the standard value.
#7 1402 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 JOV #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 JOV Jog override is: 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (tied to 100%)
F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

1421

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real axis mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 TQF #3 #2 #1 #0

1803

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 TQF When torque control is performed by the PMC axis control, follow-up operation is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed.
#7 1805 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 TRE #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 TRE When bit 4 of parameter No. 1803 is set to 0 (not to perform follow-up operation with a torque control command in PMC axis control), the servo error counter is: 0: Updated. When the error count exceeds the maximum allowable cumulative travel value (parameter No. 1885), the alarm (SV0423) is issued. 1: Not updated. No errors are accumulated, so that the alarm (SV0423) is not issued. When the maximum allowable feedrate is exceeded, however, the alarm (SV0422) is issued. To return to position control when this parameter bit is set to 1, a reference position return operation needs to be performed.

- 1358 -

B-64303EN-1/02 1826

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


In-position width for each axis

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word axis Detection unit 0 to 99999999 The in-position width is set for each axis. When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position (the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the in-position width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specified position. (The machine is in the in-position state.)
In-position width in cutting feed for each axis

1827

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word axis Detection unit 0 to 99999999 Set an in-position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is used when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No.1801=1.
Servo error amount where reference position return is possible

1836

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis Detection unit 0 to 32767 This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return. In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the default.) If, during reference position return, such a feedrate as exceeding a set value is not reached even once before the limit switch for deceleration is released (the deceleration signal (*DEC) is set to 1 again), the alarm (PS0090) "REFERENCE POSITION RETURN FAILURE" is issued. If, during reference position return, such a feedrate as exceeding a set servo error amount is not reached even once before the limit switch for deceleration is released (the deceleration signal is set to 1 again), the alarm (PS0090) "REFERENCE POSITION RETURN FAILURE" is issued.
Maximum allowable value for total travel during torque control

1885

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis Detection unit 0 to 32767 Set a maximum allowable cumulative travel value (error counter value) during torque control. If the cumulative travel value exceeds the set value, the servo alarm (SV0423) is issued.

NOTE This parameter is enabled when the parameter TQF (bit 4 of No.1803) is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).
1886 Positional deviation when torque control is canceled

[Input type] Parameter input


- 1359 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

[Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 Set a positional deviation value when torque control is canceled to return to positional deviation. After the positional deviation has fallen to the parameter-set value, switching to position control is performed.

NOTE This parameter is enabled when the parameter TQF (bit 4 of No.1803) is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).
#7 2000 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 DGP #0

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #1 DGP Upon power-up, the digital servo parameter specific to a motor is: 0: Set. 1: Not set. When this parameter is set to 0 after the motor type is set, the digital servo parameter is automatically set to the standard value appropriate for the motor type and this parameter is set to 1 at the same time.
#7 2007 TRQ #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #7 TRQ Torque control is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.
#7 2017 #6 #5 #4 HTN #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #4 HTN In the speed command mode, the hardware broken wire alarm for the separate detector is: 0: Detected. 1: Ignored.
Torque constant

2105

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Bit axis 0.00001Nm/ (torque command) 1 to 32767


- 1360 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


This parameter is set for each torque characteristic.

NOTE When a linear motor is used, the data unit is 0.001 N/(1 torque command).
#7 3002 #6 #5 #4 IOV #3 #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #4 IOV Override-related signal logic is: 0: Used without modification (A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive logic is used as a positive logic signal.) 1: Inverted (A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive logic is used as a negative logic signal.) The signals indicated below are affected. Signal of negative logic: Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<G0012> Second feedrate override signals*AFV0 to *AFV7<G0013> Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control) *EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<G0151/G0163/G0175/G0187> Software operators panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<F0078> Signals of positive logic: Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<G0014.0,1> Software operators panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<F0076.4,5> Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control) EROV1g,EROV2g<G0150.0, 1, G0162.0, 1, G0174.0, 1, G0186.0, 1>
Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF

3010

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word path msec 0 to 32767 The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S, T, and B codes are sent, respectively.
M, S, T, B code MF, SF, TF, signal BF, Delay time

NOTE The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of eight. Example When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed. When 0 is set, 8 ms is assumed.
- 1361 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN)

B-64303EN-1/02

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word path msec 0 to 32767 Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN).
M, S, T, B code MF, SF, TF, BF signal FIN sigal

Ignored because shorter than min. signal width

Valid because longer than min. signal width

NOTE The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of eight. Example When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed. When 0 is set, 8 ms is assumed.
#7 3104 #6 #5 #4 #3 PPD #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set 0: Not preset 1: Preset

NOTE If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, the relative position display is preset to the same value as the absolute position display: (1) Manual reference position return (2) Coordinate system setting based on G92 (G50 for G code system A on the T series) (3) Workpiece coordinate system presetting based on G92.1 (G50.3 for G code system A on the T series) (4) When a T code for the T series is specified.
#7 3105 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 PCF #0

[Input type] Parameter input


- 1362 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

[Data type] Bit path #1 PCF Addition of the movement of the PMC-controlled axes to the actual speed display 0: Added 1: Not added
#7 3115 #6 #5 #4 #3 NDFx #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #3 NDFx In calculation for actual cutting feedrate display, the feedrate of a selected axis is: 0: Considered. 1: Not considered.

NOTE When using the electronic gear box function (EGB) (M series), set 1 for the EGB dummy axis to suppress position display.
#7 8001 SKE #6 AUX #5 NCC #4 #3 RDE #2 OVE #1 #0 MLE

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC-controlled axes 0: Valid 1: Invalid The axis-by-axis machine lock signal MLKx depends on the setting of bit 1 of parameter No. 8006. OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control 0: Same signals as those used for the CNC 1: Signals specific to the PMC The signals used depend on the settings of these parameter bits as indicated below.
Signals No.8001#2=0 (same signals as those used for the CNC) No.8001#2=1 (signals specific to the PMC)

#2

Feedrate override signals Override cancellation signal Rapid traverse override signals Dry run signal Rapid traverse selection signal

*FV0to*FV7 OVC ROV1,2 DRN RT

G012 G006.4 G014.0,1 G046.7 G019.7

*EFOV0to*EFOV7 EOVC EROV1,2 EDRN ERT

G151 G150.5 G150.0,1 G150.7 G150.6

(The signal addresses at PMC selection time are for the first group.) #3 RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control 0: Invalid 1: Valid NCC When the program specifies a move command for a PMC-controlled axis (with the controlled axis selection signal *EAX set to 1) not placed under PMC axis control: 0: CNC command is valid. 1: The alarm (PS0130) is issued.
- 1363 -

#5

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


#6 AUX In PMC axis control, the auxiliary function command (12H) output size is: 0: 1 byte (0 to 255) 1: 2 bytes (0 to 65535)

B-64303EN-1/02

#7

SKE Skip signal during axis control by the PMC 0: Uses the same signal SKIP <X004.7 or X013.7> as CNC. 1: Uses dedicated axis control signal ESKIP <X004.6 or X013.6> used by the PMC.
#7 #6 FR1 #5 PF2 #4 PF1 #3 F10 #2 #1 DWE #0 RPD FR2

8002

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC-controlled axes 0: Feedrate specified with parameter No.1420 1: Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command by PMC DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PMC axis control when the increment system is IS-C 0: 1ms 1: 0.1ms F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis control The following settings are applied when bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0 and bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0.
F10 IS-A IS-B IS-C

#1

#3

Millimeter input (mm/min) Inch input (inch/min)

0 1 0 1

10 100 0.1 1

1 10 0.01 0.1

0.1 1 0.001 0.01

#4 #5

PF1 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the PMC.
Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 0 0 1 1 Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 0 1 0 1 Feedrate unit 1/1 1 / 10 1 / 100 1 / 1000

#6 #7

FR1 FR2 Set the feedrate unit for cutting feedrate (feed per rotation) for an axis controlled by the PMC.
Bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002 0 1 0 1 Bit 6 (FR1) of parameter No. 8002 0 1 1 0 Millimeter input (mm/rev) Inch input (inch/rev)

0.0001 0.001 0.01

0.000001 0.00001 0.0001

- 1364 -

B-64303EN-1/02 #7 8003 #6 #5 #4

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


#3 FEX #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis

NOTE When this parameter bit is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#3 FEX The maximum feedrate that can be achieved by the machine during cutting feed or continuous feed in PMC axis control is: 0: Not extended. 1: Extended. Restrictions Parameters for setting the time constants for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation and bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation When as the acceleration/deceleration type, linear acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation or bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation is used for each of rapid traverse, cutting feed, and manual feed, the maximum allowable time constant is a half of the maximum value that can be set conventionally. The time constant parameters used are as follows:
Parameter No. Meaning

1620

1621 1622 1624 1626 1769 5271 to 5274 5365 to 5368

Time constant (T) used for linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis, or time constant (T1) used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis Time constant (T2) used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the mode of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (first to fourth gears) Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping (first to fourth gears)

VCMD waveform display function As the feedrate increases, more data is acquired for VCMD waveform display, which can prevent waveforms from being displayed correctly.

CAUTION 1 When this function is enabled, the feedrate is extended to the maximum value that can be specified for cutting feed or continuous feed in PMC axis control if CMR is 1. If CMR is greater than 1, the feedrate is limited to a value smaller than the maximum value that can be specified. 2 Note that the maximum motor speed may be exceeded depending on the feedrate specified.

- 1365 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


#7 8004 #6 NCI #5 DSL #4 #3 #2 JFM #1

B-64303EN-1/02 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 JFM This parameter sets the units used to specify feedrate data when continuous feed is specified in axis control by the PMC.
Increment system IS-B IS-C Bit 2 (JFM) of No. 8004 Millimeter input (mm/min) Inch input (inch/min) 0.01 2.00 0.001 0.200 Rotation axis -1 (min ) 0.00023 0.046 0.000023 0.0046

0 1 0 1

1 200 0.1 20

#5

DSL If the selection of an axis is changed when PMC axis selection is disabled: 0: An alarm PS0139 is issued. 1: The change is valid, and no alarm is issued for an unspecified group. NCI In axis control by the PMC, a position check at the time of deceleration is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 EVP #3 DRR #2 R10 #1 CDI #0 EDC

#6

8005

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #0 EDC In axis control by the PMC, an external deceleration function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. CDI In axis control by the PMC, when diameter programming is specified for a PMC-controlled axis: 0: The amount of travel and feedrate are each specified with a radius. 1: The amount of travel is specified with a diameter while the feedrate is specified with a radius. This parameter is valid when bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No.1006 is set to 1 (A move command for each axis is based on diameter specification.) R10 When the parameter RPD (bit 0 of parameter No.8002) is set to 1, the unit for specifying a rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis is: 0: 1 mm/min. 1: 10mm/min. DRR For cutting feed per rotation in PMC axis control, the dry run function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. EVP Speed command in PMC axis control is executed by: 0: Velocity control. 1: Position control.
- 1366 -

#1

#2

#3

#4

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1).
#7 #6 EZR #5 #4 EFD #3 #2 #1 MLS #0

8006

EAL

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 MLS When bit 0(MLE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 (to disable the all axis machine lock signal) in PMC axis control, axis-by-axis machine lock is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. EFD When cutting feed (feed per minute) is used in PMC axis control, the specification unit of feedrate data is: 0: Unchanged (1 times). 1: 100 times greater.

#4

NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, bit 3(F10) of parameter No. 8002 is invalid.
#6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is: 0: Invalid. With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm (PS0224) is not issued. 1: Valid. A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an NC axis according to the setting of bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005. EAL In PMC axis control, resetting the CNC: 0: Does not release an alarm on the PMC controlled axis 1: Releases an alarm on the PMC controlled axis If an alarm on the PMC controlled axis is released, the PCM controlled axis alarm signal (EIALg) is set to 0.

#7

NOTE The CNC enters the reset state when: <1> The emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0. <2> The external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1. <3> The reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1. <4> The [RESET] MDI key is pressed. In the case of <1>, all PMC-controlled axes are reset conventionally and the PMC-controlled axis alarm is released. This parameter can be used to reset the PMC-controlled axes on which the PMC-controlled axis alarm is issued and release the PMC-controlled axis alarm in the cases of <2> to <4>.
#7 8007 #6 #5 #4 #3 ESY #2 VCP #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path


- 1367 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


#2 VCP Speed command in PMC axis control is: 0: FS10/11 type. 1: FS0i-C type.

B-64303EN-1/02

#3

ESY In PMC axis control, external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 EMRx

8008

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #0 EMRx When a PMC axis control command is issued in mirror image state, the mirror image is: 0: Not considered. 1: Considered. This parameter is valid in the mirror image mode set with the mirror image signals MI1 to MI5 <G106.0 to 4> set to 1 or bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter No. 12 set to 1. If a movement is made along the same axis by doubly specifying a command with the CNC and PMC axis control when this parameter is set to 0, and the mirror image mode is set, a coordinate shift can occur afterwards. So, do not attempt to make such a movement.
Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC

8010

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] T series: 1 to 4 (for 1-path), 1 to 8 (for 2-path) M series: 1 to 4 Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC-controlled axis.
P8010 Description

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DI/DO group A (G142 to G153) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO) DI/DO group B (G154 to G165) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO) DI/DO group C (G166 to G177) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO) DI/DO group D (G178 to G189) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO) DI/DO group A (G1142 to G1153) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO) DI/DO group B (G1154 to G1165) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO) DI/DO group C (G1166 to G1177) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO) DI/DO group D (G1178 to G1189) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO)

NOTE 1 When a value other than the above is set, the axis is not controlled by the PMC. 2 For the axes to be controlled in the 2-path, use the 2-path DI/DO (5 to 8).
#7 8013 #6 #5 #4 #3 ROP #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis


- 1368 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

#3

ROP When rotation axis rollover is enabled for an axis controlled in PMC axis control, the direction in which a movement (rotation) is performed to reach an end point by a reference position return command 07H to 0AH (equivalent to G28, G30P2/P3/P4) is: 0: Determined by the sign of the specified value. 1: The direction in the shortest path.

NOTE ROPx is valid only when bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 1 and bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0.
#7 8019 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 EOS

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 EOS In external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) in PMC axis control, the serial spindle to be synchronized is: 0: The first spindle of path 1. 1: Any spindle.

NOTE If EOS is set to 0, only the servo axis of path 1 can be specified.
8020 FL feedrate for reference position return along each axis in PMC axis control

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real axis mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) For each axis, this parameter sets a feedrate (FL feedrate) after deceleration for reference position return in PMC axis control.

NOTE If 0 is specified, the value of parameter No. 1425 is used.


8022 Upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real axis mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets the upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control.
Time for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control

8028

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec
- 1369 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

[Valid data range] 0 to 32767 When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set for parameter No. 8032 or this parameter. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8032, the specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in this parameter, the acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.
8030 Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word axis msec 0 to 4000 For each axis, this parameter sets a time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.

NOTE When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No. 1622 is used. The value set in parameter No. 1622 is used also for linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting interpolation.
8031 FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Min. unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Real axis mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) Depend on the increment system of the applied axis Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) For each axis, this parameters sets a lower feedrate limit (FL feedrate) for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.

NOTE When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No. 1623 is used. However, be sure to set 0 in this parameter and parameter No.1623 for all axes at all times except for special purposes. If a value other than 0 is specified, incorrect feed is carried out.
8032 Feedrate for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis min-1 0 to 32767 When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set for this parameter or parameter No. 8028. When 0 is set in this parameter, the specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8028, the acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.

- 1370 -

B-64303EN-1/02 8040

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment when speed command in PMC axis control is executed by position control

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input 2-word axis mm, inch, degree (machine unit) 1 to 99999999 Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment when speed command in PMC axis control is executed by position control. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and is executed by position control (parameter EVP (No.8005#4) is 1).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CMI

11850

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 CMI When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1 and the rapid traverse rate is specified by axis control block data signal in PMC axis control, the rapid traverse rate is represented: 0: In millimeters. 1: In the unit set by bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001.
#7 12730 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PTC

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 PTC Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is: 0: Normal. 1: Extended. This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1).
2nd time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control

12731

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis msec/1000min-1 0 to 32767 When this parameter is set 0, 2nd time constant data is not available, and then acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 1st feedrate to 2nd feedrate. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

- 1371 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


12732

B-64303EN-1/02

3rd time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis msec/1000min-1 0 to 32767 When this parameter is set 0, 3rd time constant data is not available, and then acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 2nd feedrate to 3rd feedrate. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).
4th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control

12733

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis msec/1000min-1 0 to 32767 When this parameter is set 0, 4th time constant data is not available, and then acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 3rd feedrate to 4th feedrate. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).
5th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control

12734

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis msec/1000min-1 0 to 32767 When this parameter is set 0, 5th time constant data is not available, and then acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 4th feedrate to 5th feedrate. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).
1st feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control

12735

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis min-1 0 to 32767 Set feedrate parameters as following. No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).
- 1372 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


2nd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control

12736

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis min-1 0 to 32767 Set feedrate parameters as following. No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).
3rd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control

12737

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis min-1 0 to 32767 Set feedrate parameters as following. No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).
4th feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control

12738

[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]

Parameter input Word axis min-1 0 to 32767 Set feedrate parameters as following. No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

- 1373 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

Alarm and message


Servo and overtravel alarms for PMC axis control are detected in the same way as for CNC controlled axes. When an alarm is issued, the alarm signal EIALg is set to 1 for notification to the PMC in addition to normal alarm processing. (When an overtravel alarm is issued, the negative-direction overtravel signal EOTNg or the positive-direction overtravel signal EOTPg is also set to 1.) The alarm signal EIALg is reset using the reset signal ECLRg.

CAUTION If an alarm is issued by a PMC axis control command or in connection with PMC axis control, be sure to set the reset signal ECLRg to 1 in addition to a reset operation on the NC. Alarms related to contention with the NC

Alarm (PS0130) In general, if the CNC and PMC attempt to simultaneously control an axis not subject to superimposition, the alarm (PS0130) is issued. This alarm is issued in the following cases: When cutting feed with an override of 0% is performed along the axis, or the tool is temporarily stopped along the axis (with the axis control temporary stop signal ESTP set to 1), this alarm is issued. (During feed hold or single block stop, a PMC axis control command is valid, not resulting in an alarm.) When a command is issued from the CNC for an axis controlled by the PMC When a move command is issued from the PMC for an axis on the polar coordinate interpolation plane in the polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1 command) Alarm (PS5131) If a command related to polar coordinate interpolation is specified during PMC axis control, the alarm (PS5131) is issued.

Alarms due to setting modifications made during PMC axis control

Alarm (PS0139) If parameter No. 8010 is modified during PMC axis control, or the level of the control axis selection signal EAXx for an axis under PMC axis control is changed, the alarm (PS0139) is issued.

Other alarms

Alarm (PS0224) If a PMC axis control command is specified without performing a reference position return operation even once after the power is turned off when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 0, the alarm (PS0224) is issued. Alarm (PS5065) If a PMC axis control command is executed by assigning axes with different increment systems to the same group, the alarm (PS5065) is issued.
Number Message Description

PS0130 PS0139

NC AND PMC AXIS ARE CONFLICTED CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS

The NC command and the PMC axis control command were conflicted. Modify the program or ladder. The PMC axis was selected for the axis for which the PMC axis is being controlled.

- 1374 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Message Description

Number

PS0224

ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED

1) A reference position return has not been performed before the start of automatic operation. (Only when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is 0) Perform a reference position return.
T

PS5065

DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT(PMC AXIS) NC AND PMC AXIS CONFLICT NC COMMAND IS NOT COMPATIBLE ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHR-MODE ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE

PS5130 PS5131 PS0220

SV0417 SV0422 SV0423

2) The spindle positioning axis is commanded when the mode is not spindle positioning. Perform the spindle orientation. Axes having different increment systems have been specified in the same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the setting of parameter No. 8010. The NC command and the PMC axis control command were conflicted. Modify the program or the ladder. The PMC axis control and a polar coordinate interpolation were specified simultaneously. In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC program or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis. Modify the program or check the PMC ladder. A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect. In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was exceeded. In torque control, the total permissible move value specified as a parameter was exceeded.

Caution
CAUTION 1 The mode selection, CNC reset, and other CNC statuses have no effect. 2 CNC-controlled feed hold *SP, single block stop SBK, reset signal ERS, and interlock of all axes or each axis are invalid for PMC axis control, but similar control is enabled by operating the PMC signals (ESTP, ESBK, and ECLR). 3 Emergency stop is enabled. 4 If cutting feed blocks are specified in succession, deceleration is not performed between blocks (acceleration/deceleration is applied, however, when the specification of a feedrate changes), and cutting proceeds to the next block without waiting for the tool to enter the in-position area. At the end of a block other than for cutting feed, the tool is temporarily decelerated. The next block is then executed after waiting for the tool to enter the in-position area. When bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004 is set to 1, cutting can proceed to the next block without making an in-position check for each block. 5 Under PMC axis control, manual absolute mode is always set. If the PMC starts control of an axis after manual intervention (manual continuous feed, manual handle feed, etc.) is performed during automatic operation while manual absolute mode is not set (*ABSM is set to 1), manual absolute mode is set. 6 Under PMC axis control, all commands are handled as axis commands. Even for the auxiliary functions, the position check is effective. 7 When the CNC executes the command to set the workpiece coordinate system setting (G54 to G59) during an axial movement by PMC axis control command, a valid coordinate system cannot be set. 8 If the alarm (PS0139) is issued due to a modification to parameter No. 8010, the alarm is issued with all paths. After resetting the alarm, input the reset signal ECLR for all groups before a start.
- 1375 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

CAUTION 9 When PMC controls an axis and then NC controls this one by the absolute or incremental command in a series of NC program(s), this PMC command needs to control in the non-buffering M code block. You can proceed to next NC block only after you confirm the end of the PMC axis command. Until then, it needs to wait in the non-buffering M code block. Following sample program shows that Y axis moves by the NC command (N40) with the move of the axis after it moves by the PMC command. PMC axis command needs to control during the non-buffering M code block (N20). O0001 N10 G94 G90 G01 X20. Y30. F3000 ; N20 M55 ; Y axis moves by PMC axis command. N30 X70. ; N40 Y50. ; N50 M02 ; Please control under the following setting. - M55 is non-buffering M code. Please set parameter No.3411 to 55. - During M55 block, start PMC axis command. - Until this PMC command finishes, NC program needs to wait in M55 block. When the NC program is the incremental command, to perform the feed hold or single block stop of automatic operation after PMC axis operation and then restart automatic operation, reflect the amount of movement by PMC axis control to the program coordinate system. 10 Both feed-forward and advanced preview feed-forward function are unavailable for PMC axis.

Note
NOTE 1 The actual speed excluding the effect of movement along a PMC-controlled axis can be displayed if the ZDF bit (bit 3 of parameter No. 3115) is set to "1". 2 If an absolute pulse coder is used, a specified reference position is retained in memory, even after the power is turned off. 3 For an index table indexing axis, no PMC axis control command can be specified. 4 The individual output of the auxiliary function is provided by adding a signal for individual output. The timing diagram of controlling and specifying the auxiliary function is not changed. The normal specifications of the auxiliary functions for PMC axis control function are applied.

- 1376 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

16.2
Overview

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

In the external data input function, the CNC can be operated by the external data which use the signal of PMC. This function is an optional function. There are following functions in the external data input. External tool offset External program number search External work coordinate system shift External machine zero point shift External alarm message External operator message Substitution of the number of machined parts and number of required parts

Explanation
The basic external data input procedure
Signal name Input signal Output signal

The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC.

Address signal for external data input Data signal for external data input Read signal for external data input Read completion signal for external data input Search completion signal for external data input

EA0 to EA6 ED0 to ED31 ESTB EREND ESEND

The basic external data input procedure is described below: (1) The PMC sets the address signals, EA0 to EA6 that indicate the data type and data signals ED0 to ED31. (2) The PMC sets the read signal ESTB to 1. (3) When the ESTB signal is set to 1, the control unit reads the address. (4) After reading the address, the control unit sets the read completion signal EREND to 1. (5) When the EREND signal is set to 1, the PMC sets the ESTB signal, to 0. (6) When the ESTB signal is set to 0, the control unit sets the EREND signal to 0. This completes the data input procedure. New data can now be entered. The timing diagram is shown below:

- 1377 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

EA0-EA6

ED0-ED15

ESTB

EREND
Only for external program number search End of search
Fig. 16.2(a) Timing diagram of External data input E E E E E E E E S A A A A A A A T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B

ESEND

No.

Item

ED31 to ED16

ED15 to ED0

1 2 3 4

External program number search External tool offset External workpiece coordinate system shift External machine zero point shift Alarm set Alarm clear Operator message set Operator message clear Message Substitute No. of parts required Substitute No. of parts machined

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1

X X X X X X X X axis code axis code

1 0 1 0 1 0

Program number (BCD 4 digits with unsign) Offset value (BCD 8 digits with sign) *Note 1 Shift value (BCD 8 digits with sign) *Note 1 Machine zero point shift value(binary) 0 to 9999 *Note 2 Alarm No. (binary) 0 to 999 (0 to 4095) Alarm No. (binary) 0 to 999 (0 to 4095) Message No. (binary) 0 to 999 (0 to 4095) Message No. (binary) 0 to 999 (0 to 4095) Character (Character code) No. of parts required (BDC4 digits with unsign) No. of parts machined (BDC4 digits with unsign)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 -

X 1 0 0 0 0

BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) Method of representing one digit of a decimal number using a 4-digit binary number

NOTE 1 When bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 is set to 0, BCD 4 digits are used. By setting bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 to 1, an offset value/shift value of 0 to 79999999 can be specified using ED0 to ED31.
- 1378 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

NOTE 2 By setting bit 7 (EEX) of parameter No. 6300 to 1, a shift value of 0 to 999999999 can be specified using ED0 to ED31. NOTE For axis code, refer to the following table.
Axis Axis code EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

External Program Number Search

A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from an extended source and is selected in the CNC memory. For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can automatically select the program to be executed corresponding to a specific workpiece. Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of CNC mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state in MEM mode. The ESEND signal switches from 0 to 1 on completion of external program number search. This signal does not turn to 0 unless the cycle start or reset signal is input, or another search is made. Use ESEND to initiate a cycle start signal after the search. Because a search operation is deferred until a reset occurs in the MEM mode, an external program number search attempted during a CNC operation (OP = 1) results in the program being started immediately after the end of an automatic operation in a sequence in which the automatic operation is started by checking only the ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input). For this reason, using the ESC parameter (bit 3 of parameter No. 6300) enables an external program number search to be canceled at a CNC reset. Concretely, if a reset signal is input between the time the ESTB signal (read signal for external data input) is input and the time a search would be executed, setting the ESC parameter (bit 3 of parameter No. 6300) to 1 keeps the search from being executed. At the same time, the controller uses the ESCAN (search cancel signal for external data input) signal to inform the PMC that the search has been canceled. The ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input) will not become 1, because the search is canceled. The controller checks the state of the RST (NC reset) signal for a reset input between the rising edge of the ESTB signal (read signal for external data input) and the start of the search. Concretely, the controller cancels the external program number search if the RST (NC reset) signal becomes 1 even momentarily in this period. The ESCAN signal (search cancel signal for external data input) becomes high at the beginning of the search. However, it becomes low when the next search is executed (for example, when a cycle start or reset signal is input), similarly to the ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input).

- 1379 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Read signal for external data input
(ESTB)

B-64303EN-1/02

Read completion signal for external data input (EREND)


Reset signal (RST) Search completion signal for external data input (ESEND) Search cancel signal for external data input (ESCAN)

If RST becomes 1 even momentarily in this period

ESEND does not become high.

ESCAN becomes high at the beginning of a search

ESTB positive-going edge

Beginning of search

Fig. 16.2(b) Timing diagram of External data input

NOTE 1 The external program number search is available when parameter ESR(No.6300#4) is set to 1. 2 In reset state the automatic operation lamp is off. If the start button is pushed in the cycle operation stop or hold state, search execution starts from the actual position indicated by the pointer. 3 When there is no program stored in memory corresponding to the set program number, the alarm DS1128 occurs. 4 When the program number search is set to 0, the alarm DS0059 occurs. 5 Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of the mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state. Therefore, in case that the PMC sequence, which the cycle start is executed by checking search completion signal for external data input only, is used, if the external program number search is commanded twice, the program is executed twice. ( When CNC accepts a command of the program number search, the command is not cancelled even if CNC becomes reset state by external reset signal and so on.) (See Fig. 16.2(c)) If the program execution after reset becomes a problem, please make the PMC sequence not to execute the cycle start after reset.

- 1380 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

Read signal for external data input (ESTB) Read completion signal for external data input (EREND) Search completion signal for external data input (ESEND) Cycle start signal (ST) Cycle start lamp signal (STL) Automatic operation signal (OP) External reset signal (ERS) Reset signal (RST)

2nd command

Search command is kept.

2nd program search

2nd program execution NC reset

Fig. 16.2(c) External program search and program execution after NC reset

External Tool offset

These signals provide for changing the tool compensation value via the PMC. When the offset number is specified by a part program, data input from the PMC is added to the offset value. The offset value can also be used as input data itself by specifying the input signal. When the machine tool is equipped with automatic tools or workpiece measuring functions, the offset value can be corrected using this function, by inputting the error from the correct value into the CNC via PMC. If the tool compensation value is externally input when offset number 0 is specified in a part program (an offset cancel) in the lathe turning machine, the workpiece coordinate system shifts by the entered quantity. The external tool offset range is +/ - 79999999. (* Note 3) However, the unit and set range depend on the settings of the set unit and set range of the tool offset amount.

NOTE 1 When data is out of range, the alarm DS1128 occurs. 2 Writing to a function not enabled by the parameter setting issues the alarm DS1121. 3 If Parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to 1, the Data area can be specified by 32bit data specification. A value in the range from 0 to 79999999 can be specified in this case.

- 1381 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Data specification for external tool offset (For milling machine)
Address E A 6 0 E A 5 0 E A 4 1 E A 3 a/i E A 2 g/w E A 1 0 E A 0 r/l E D 31
Sign

B-64303EN-1/02

Data *1 E D 30 ... E D 1 E D 0

Offset value

0: + 1: 0 a/i

Specified by BCD 8-digit code (0 to +/- 79999999) *1

Incremental specification (Input value is added to present compensation value) Absolute specification (Input value is replaced with present compensation value) Specification of tool wear offset value Specification of tool geometry offset value Specification of tool length compensation value Specification of cutter compensation value

g/w r/l

0 1 0 1

Notice 1: If the parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to 0, the offset value is specified by using signals ED0 to ED14, the sign is decided by the signal ED15. The range of data is available to specify the data from 0 to +/- 7999.

- 1382 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

Data specification for external tool offset (For the lathe turning machine)
Address E A 6 0 E A 5 0 E A 4 1 E A 3 a/i E A 2 g/w E A 1 E A 0 E D 31
Sign

Data *1 E D 30 ... E D 1 E D 0

X/Z/R

Offset value

0: + 1: 0 a/i 1 0 1 EA1=0, EA0=0 X/Z/R EA1=0, EA0=1 EA1=1, EA0=0

Specified by BCD 8-digit code (0 to +/- 79999999) *1 Incremental specification (Input value is added to present compensation value) Absolute specification (Input value is replaced with present compensation value) Specification of tool wear offset value Specification of tool geometry offset value Specification of X axis offset Specification of Z axis offset

g/w

Specification of tool nose radius compensation value

Notice 1: If the parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to 0, the offset value is specified by using signals ED0 to ED14, the sign is decided by the signal ED15. The range of data is available to specify the data from 0 to +/- 7999.

- 1383 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION External workpiece coordinate system shift

B-64303EN-1/02

In the external workpiece coordinate system shift, the shift value can be externally modified by the signal of PMC. Each axis has this shift value (parameter No. 1220), and this shift value is added to all the workpiece coordinate systems in common. The shift value is not lost by cutting off the power supply. The shift value can not only be added to the current work coordinate system shift but also be substituted for the current value. The value range is 0 to + / - 79999999. The unit and setting range are the same as the Tool offset.

NOTE If Parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to 1, the data area can be specified by 32bit data specification. Under the setting, the external tool compensation range is up to +/ - 79999999. External machine zero point shift

The machine coordinate system can be externally shifted by inputting a shift value. When the shift value is input, compensation is immediately applied to the corresponding axis and the axis moves. The position accuracy can be improved by combining this function with sensors. The specification to shift the axis is the same as the external workpiece coordinate system shift. The compensation value is specified in signals ED0 to ED15 using a binary code ranging from 0 to 9999. This compensation value must be specified in absolute value. The value which the machine actually moves at input is the difference from the previously stored value. After the Reference point is established, this function becomes effective. The shift amount is memorized though the machine is not moved when the shift amount is input before the Reference point is established. When the Reference point is established afterwards, the machine is moved for the memorized shift amount.

NOTE If Parameter EEX (No.6300#7) is set to 1, the Data area can be specified by 32bit data specification. Under the setting, the external machine zero point shift range is up to +/ 999999999. CAUTION When a large value of compensation is applied at one time, an alarm such as "excessive error on stop" may occur. In this case, input the compensation in several smaller increments. External message (a) External alarm message

By sending alarm number from PMC, the CNC is brought to an alarm status; an alarm message is sent to the CNC, and the message is displayed on the screen of the CNC. Reset of alarm status is also done with external data. Up to 4 alarm numbers (16 alarm numbers when bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931 is set to 1) and messages can be sent at a same time. Up to 32 characters can be sent in an alarm message. In case of using a 2-path system, the alarm will be set separately for each path. Also the alarm is set separately for one. It is available to select the range of alarm number and the display form by setting the parameter EXA (No.6301#0).
- 1384 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

EXA (No.6301#0) = 0 Alarm number 0 to 999 can be sent. To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC displays them by adding 1000 to an alarm number. EXA (No.6301#0) = 1 Alarm number 0 to 4095 can be sent. The CNC displays them with prefix characters EX to an alarm number for display.

(b) External operator message


Message to the operator is given by the signal of PMC, and the message is displayed. The operator messages can be cleared by external data. Up to 4 message numbers (bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931) can be sent at a same time. Up to 256 characters can be sent in an operator message. In case of using a multi-path system, the operator message is common resource for plural path of machine group. It is set each machine group. It is available to display the operator message by using the primary path signal of machine group. It is available to select the range of message number and the display form by setting the parameter EXM (No.6301#1). EXM (No.6301#1) = 0 The message numbers 0 to 999 can be sent. The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message. To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC displays them by adding 2000 to an alarm number. When a message from 100 to 999 is displayed, the message number is not displayed; only its text is displayed. EXM (No.6301#1) = 1 The message numbers 0 to 4095 can be sent. The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message. The CNC displays them with prefix characters "EX" to an alarm for display. When a message number from 100 to 4095 is displayed, the message number is not displayed; only its text is displayed. Data specification method in external message
Item EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 ED15 to ED0(binary)

Alarm set Alarm clear Operator message list Operator message clear Message

1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 1 X

0 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 1

Alarm No. Alarm No. Message No. Message No. Character(Note)

NOTE Two characters are sent at a time (See ISO code given in the table below.) ED15 to ED8 . . . . . . . Character code in 1st character ED7 to ED0 . . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character When sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code smaller than 20 and it will be ignored.

- 1385 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

Substitution of the number of required parts and number of machined parts

Substitution is possible for the number of parts required and the number of parts machined. Data specification for No. of parts required and No. of parts

machined.
E A 6 1 E A 5 1 Address E E E A A A 4 3 2 0 0 0 Data E A 1 0 E A 0 0/1 E D 15 ........... E D 0

MSB LSB Value of parts no. (3)

(1) (2) (1) Set to 110000 (2) 0: No. of parts required 1: No. of parts machined (3) BCD 4-digit code (0000 to 9999)

Signals
Address signals for external data input EA0 to EA6 <Gn002.6 Gn002.0>
[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals indicate the type of the entered data.

Data signals for external data input ED0 to ED31 <Gn211, Gn210,Gn000, Gn001>
[Classification] Input signal
- 1386 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

[Function] These signals indicate the entered data. The use of the 32 code signals (16 code signals) varies with the data type.

Read signal for external data input ESTB <Gn002.7>


[Classification] Input signal [Function] The signal reports that the address and data are set in external data input. When the signal is set to 1, the control unit reads the address and data for external data input.

Read completion signal for external data input EREND <Fn060.0>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entered data.

Search completion signal for external data input ESEND <Fn060.1>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal report that program number search, specified by external data input, has been completed. [Output cond.] This signal is set to 1 when: The program number search specified by external data input is completed. The signal is set to 0 when: An automatic operation is started. A reset occurs.

Search cancel signal for external data input ESCAN<Fn060.2>


[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies PMC of the cancellation of a program number search. [Output cond.] When a reset is input between the time read signal for external data input ESTB is input and the time a search is executed in the external program number search function, if bit 3 (ESC) of parameter No. 6300 is 1, the search is not executed. At this time, the control unit sets search cancel signal for external data input ESCAN to 1 instead of setting search completion signal for external data input ESEND to 1.

NOTE This signal is enabled when bit 3 (ESC) of parameter No. 6300 is 1.

Signal address
#7 Gn000 Gn001 Gn002 Gn210 Gn211 Fn060 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

ED7 ED15 ESTB ED23 ED31

ED6 ED14 EA6 ED22 ED30

ED5 ED13 EA5 ED21 ED29

ED4 ED12 EA4 ED20 ED28

ED3 ED11 EA3 ED19 ED27

ED2 ED10 EA2 ED18 ED26 ESCAN

ED1 ED9 EA1 ED17 ED25 ESEND

ED0 ED8 EA0 ED16 ED24 EREND

- 1387 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

B-64303EN-1/02

Parameter
#7 6300 EEX #6 #5 #4 ESR #3 ESC #2 #1 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path


# 3 ESC When a reset is input between input of the external data input read signal ESTB and execution of a search, the external program number search function: 0 : Performs a search. 1 : Does not perform a search. # 4 ESR External program number search 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled # 7 EEX PMC EXIN function 0 : Conventional specifications 1 : Extended specifications

If you want to handle unavailable data with the PMC/EXIN command according to the conventional specifications, such as an shift value is up to +/- 10000 in the external machine zero point shift, set this bit to 1. To use this function for 2-path control, the setting for the first path (main) is used. The EXIN specifications cannot be changed for each path. For details of EXIN and how to change ladder software, refer to the PMC specifications and other manuals.
#7 6301 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 NNO #1 EXM #0 EXA

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit machine group


#0 EXA This bit selects an external alarm message specification. 0 : A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. The CNC adds 1000 to an alarm number for distinction from general alarms. 1 : A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to an alarm number for display. EXM This bit selects an external operator message specification. 0 : A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. The message of a message number from 0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC adds 2000 to a number for distinction. A message number from 100 to 999 is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on the screen. 1 : A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The message of a message number from 0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to a message number for display. A message number from 100 to 4095 is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on the screen.

#1

- 1388 -

B-64303EN-1/02

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

#2

MNO When operator messages are set by external data input, a new line operation between one message set with a number and another message set with a different number is: 0 : Performed. 1 : Not performed.
Setting for number addition to external operator messages

6310

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word machine group [Unit of data] [Valid data range] 0 to 4095

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
This parameter sets the number of messages to which message numbers are to be prefixed in external operator message display. When 0 is set, the same operation as when 100 is set is performed. Example) When 500 is set in this parameter, the messages of message numbers 0 to 499 are displayed together with their numbers on the screen. A message number of 500 and up is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on the screen.
#7 11931 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 M16 #0

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
#1 M16 The maximum number of external alarm messages or external operator messages that can be displayed in connection with external data input or external messages is: 0: 4 1: 16

Alarm and message


Number Message Description

DS0059

SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND

DS0131

TOO MANY MESSAGE

DS0132

MESSAGE NUMBER NOT FOUND

The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No. search could not be found. There was an I/O request issued for a pot No. or offset (tool data), but either no tool numbers have been input since power ON or there is no data for the entered tool No. An attempt was made to display an external operator message or external alarm message, but five or more displays were required simultaneously. An attempt to cancel an external operator message or external alarm message failed because the specified message number was not found.

- 1389 -

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION


Number Message Description

B-64303EN-1/02

DS0133 DS1120

TOO LARGE NUMBER UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (HIGH) UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (LOW) DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE SEARCH REQUEST NOT ACCEPTED EXT-DATA ERROR (OTHER)

DS1121 DS1128 DS1130

DS1131

A value other than 0 to 4095 was specified as the external operator message or the external alarm message number. The upper 4 bits (EIA4 to EIA7) of an external data I/O interface address signal are set to an undefined address (high bits). The lower 4 bits (EIA0 to EIA3) of an external data I/O interface address signal are set to an undefined address (low bits). The numerical value input by external data input signals ED0 to ED31 has exceeded the permissible range. No requests can be accepted for a program No. or a sequence No. search as the system is not in the memory mode or the reset state. [External Data I/O] An attempt was made to input tool data for tool offset by a tool No. during loading by the G10 code.

16.3
Overview

EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT

The conventional external machine zero point shift value function cannot make shifts on multiple axes simultaneously. With this extended function, external machine zero point shifts can be performed on all controlled axes. An external machine zero point shift value is to be set in a parameter-set R area. A shift value must be specified using a binary code, and the absolute value of a number from -32767 to 32767 must be specified.

Explanation
Setting
This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (EMS) of parameter No. 1203 to 1. Enter a desired external machine zero point shift value at the location starting at the address (R area of the PMC) set in parameter No. 1280. If 100 is set in parameter No. 1280, enter shift values at the location starting at R100 of the PMC. Set